OWNER'S MANUAL
VÄLKOMMEN!
We trust that you will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an
automobile designed with your safety and comfort in mind. To help get
the most from your Volvo, we urge you to familiarize yourself with the
instructions and maintenance information in this owner’s manual. The
owner’s manual can also be found in a mobile app (Volvo manual) and
on Volvo Car’s support site at support.volvocars.com.
We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times in
this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate a vehi-
cle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any impairment that
could hinder your ability to drive.
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and emis-
sion standards. If you have any questions regarding your vehicle, please
contact your Volvo retailer or see the article "Contacting Volvo" for infor-
mation on getting in touch with Volvo in the United States and Canada.
2
INTRODUCTION
Finding owner's information
14
On-board digital owner's manual
15
Navigating in the digital owner's manual
16
Owner's manual in mobile devices
18
Additional information about your vehicle
19
Using the owner's manual
20
Crash event data
22
Options, accessories and the On-
board Diagnostic (OBDII) socket
23
Volvo ID
25
Volvo and the environment
26
IntelliSafe—driver support
27
Sensus
28
Owner's manual and the environment
31
Glass
31
Center display overview
32
Using the center display
34
Navigating in the center display's views
38
Symbols in the center display status bar
43
Changing center display settings
43
Function view buttons
45
Using the center display keyboard
47
Changing settings in different types
of apps
52
General information about Twin
Engine Plug-in Hybrid vehicles
53
Volvo Structural Parts Statement
57
Driver distraction
57
Technician certification
59
Contacting Volvo
59
Volvo Roadside Assistance
59
SAFETY
General safety information
62
Safety during pregnancy
62
Whiplash protection system
63
Occupant safety
64
Reporting safety defects
65
Recall information
66
Seat belts
66
Seat belt pretensioners
67
Buckling and unbuckling seat belts
68
Door and seat belt reminders
70
Airbag system
71
Driver/passenger side airbags
71
Occupant weight sensor
74
Side impact airbags
78
Inflatable curtains
79
Safety mode
79
Starting or moving a vehicle in safety
mode
80
Child safety
81
Child restraints
83
Infant seats
85
Convertible seats
87
Booster cushions
89
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors
90
Lower child seat attachment points
91
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3
Top tether anchors
92
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Instruments and controls
96
Instrument panel
97
Instrument panel settings
99
Hybrid-related information in the
instrument panel
100
Indicator symbols in the instrument panel
102
Warning symbols in the instrument panel
104
Ambient temperature sensor
105
Clock
106
Fuel gauge
107
Instrument panel licenses
107
Instrument panel App menu
112
Using the instrument panel App menu
113
Messages in the instrument panel
and center display
114
Handling messages in the instru-
ment panel and center display
115
Handling messages stored from the
instrument panel and center display
117
Head-up display (HUD)*
118
Voice control
121
Using voice commands
122
Voice control settings
123
Voice control for cell phones
123
Voice control for radio and media
124
Climate system voice commands
125
Navigation system voice commands
126
Seats
126
Manually operated front seats
127
Power front seats*
127
Adjusting power front seats*
128
Using the power seat memory function*
128
Multifunctional front seats*
129
Adjusting function settings in the
multifunctional front seats*
130
Adjusting the passenger's seat from
the driver's seat*
133
Rear seats
134
Adjusting the second row head restraints
134
Folding down the rear seat backrests
135
Steering wheel
138
Adjusting the steering wheel
139
Lighting panel and controls
139
Parking lights
141
Low beam headlights
142
High and low beam headlights
142
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
144
Active Bending Lights*
145
Rear fog light
145
Brake lights
146
Hazard warning flashers
146
4
Using turn signals
147
Passenger compartment lighting
147
Home safe lighting
150
Approach lighting
150
Using the windshield wipers
150
Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
151
Windshield and headlight washers
152
Tailgate window wiper and washer
153
Power windows
154
Operating the power windows
154
Using sun curtains*
155
Adjusting the power door mirrors
156
Rearview mirror
157
Compass
158
Calibrating the compass
159
Laminated panoramic roof*
160
Operating the laminated panoramic roof*
161
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System*
163
Programming the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System*
164
Trip computer
167
Displaying trip computer information
168
Displaying trip statistics
170
Settings view
170
Categories in Settings view
171
Changing system settings in Set-
tings view
173
Resetting the settings view
174
Driver profiles
174
Selecting a driver profile
175
Editing a driver profile
176
Linking a remote key to a driver profile
176
Importing/exporting a driver profile
from/to a USB flash drive
177
Changing settings in apps
178
Resetting user data when the vehicle
changes owners
179
CLIMATE
Climate control system
182
Climate system sensors
182
Perceived temperature
183
Air quality
183
Passenger compartment air filter
184
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*
185
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)*
185
Climate system controls
186
Climate system controls in the center
display
186
Automatic climate control
187
Air conditioning
188
Setting the temperature
189
Setting the blower speed
190
Defrosting windows and mirrors
191
Turning recirculation on and off
193
Air distribution
194
Adjusting air distribution
194
Opening/closing/directing air vents
195
Air distribution table
197
Turning seat heating* on and off
199
Turning front seat ventilation* on and off
200
Turning steering wheel heating* on
and off
201
Parking climate (preconditioning)
201
5
Starting and stopping preconditioning
203
Preconditioning timer
204
Setting the parking climate (precon-
ditioning) timer
204
Activating/deactivating the parking
climate timer
205
Activating/deactivating the climate
comfort retaining function*
206
Preconditioning symbols and messages
207
LOADING AND STORAGE
Passenger compartment storage spaces
210
Tunnel console
211
Electrical sockets
212
Using the glove compartment
215
Sun visors
216
Loading
216
Load anchoring eyelets
218
Grocery bag holder
219
Ski hatch
219
Cargo compartment cover*
220
Cargo net
221
Steel cargo grid*
223
LOCKS AND ALARM
Locks and remote keys
226
Remote key
226
Remote key's range
228
Red Key*
229
Antenna locations for the start and
lock system
230
Locking/unlocking from outside the
vehicle
230
Locking and unlocking confirmation
232
Locking/unlocking from inside the
vehicle
234
Locking/unlocking the tailgate
235
Private (valet) locking
236
Detachable key blade
237
Locking/unlocking with the detacha-
ble key blade
238
Power tailgate*
239
Foot movement tailgate operation*
242
Changing the remote key's battery
243
Immobilizer
246
Child safety locks
247
Alarm
248
Automatically arming/disarming the
alarm
249
Deactivating the alarm without a
functioning remote key
250
6
Foreign Component Detection
250
Start and lock system type designations
250
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driver support systems
254
Adjustable steering force*
254
Roll stability control (RSC)
255
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
255
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
sport mode
256
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
symbols and messages
257
Speed limiter (SL)*
259
Starting and activating the Speed
Limiter (SL)*
260
Changing a Speed Limiter (SL)*
maximum speed
260
Deactivating/reactivating the Speed
Limiter*
261
Turning the Speed Limiter* off
262
Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)*
262
Activating/deactivating the
Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)*
264
Changing tolerance for the
Automatic Speed Limiter
264
Cruise Control (CC)
265
Starting and activating Cruise Control
266
Changing Cruise Control (CC) speed
267
Deactivating/resuming Cruise
Control (CC)
268
Turning Cruise Control off
269
Distance Alert*
270
Using Distance Alert*
271
Distance Alert* limitations
272
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
272
Starting and activating Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)*
275
Changing Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) speed
276
Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) time interval
277
Deactivating/resuming Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)
278
Passing Assistance with Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)* or Pilot Assist*
280
Changing target vehicles and auto-
matic braking with Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
281
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) - limi-
tations
282
Switching between Cruise Control
(CC) and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
283
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) sym-
bols and messages
284
Pilot Assist*
286
Starting and activating Pilot Assist
289
Changing Pilot Assist speed
291
Setting a Pilot Assist time interval
292
Deactivating/resuming Pilot Assist
294
7
Changing target vehicles and auto-
matic braking with Pilot Assist
296
Pilot Assist limitations
297
Pilot Assist symbols and messages
299
Driver support system radar sensor
300
Radar sensor limitations
302
Radar sensor - type approval
305
Driver support system camera
305
Camera limitations
306
City Safety™
309
City Safety warning level settings
311
Detecting obstructions with City Safety
313
City Safety in crossing traffic
315
City Safety during evasive action*
316
City Safety when evasive action is
not possible
317
City Safety limitations
317
City Safety symbols and messages
320
Rear Collision Warning (RCW)
321
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*
322
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* On/Off
323
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* limitations
324
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)*
324
Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic
Alert (CTA)*
325
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* limitations
326
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* with
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* symbols
and messages
328
Road Sign Information (RSI)*
329
Road Sign Information (RSI)* operation
330
Road Sign Information (RSI)* limitations
331
Driver Alert Control (DAC)
332
Using Driver Alert Control (DAC)
333
Driver Alert Control limitations
333
Driving lane assistance
333
Activating/deactivating Lane
Keeping Aid (LKA)
335
Driving lane assistance symbols and
messages
337
Steering assistance when there is a
risk of a collision
339
Steering assistance symbols and
messages
340
Steering assist with run-off mitigation
341
Steering assistance in oncoming traffic
342
Steering assistance during collision
risks from behind
344
Park Assist*
345
Activating/deactivating Park Assist
347
Park Assist limitations
347
Park Assist symbols and messages
349
Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
350
Park Assist Camera (PAC)* trajectory
lines and fields
352
Starting the Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
354
Park Assist Camera (PAC)* limitations
355
Park Assist Camera (PAC)* - sym-
bols and messages
357
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)*
359
Using Park Assist Pilot (PAP)*
360
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations
363
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* symbols and
messages
365
8
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting and driving
368
Ignition modes
368
Starting the engine
369
Turning the engine off
372
Jump starting
372
Automatic transmission
374
Gear selector positions
375
Gear shift indicator
377
Shiftlock
378
Steering wheel paddles*
378
Driving systems
379
Drive modes
380
Maintaining/increasing the hybrid
battery's charge while driving
384
Leveling control* and suspension
385
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
387
Brake functions
387
Brakes
387
Emergency brake lights
390
Brake assist system
390
Braking effect after a collision
390
Parking brake
391
Using the parking brake
391
Parking brake malfunctions
393
Hill Start Assist
394
Auto-hold brake function
394
Low Speed Control (LSC)
395
Hill Descent Control (HDC)
396
Driving through standing water
397
Overheating the engine and transmission
398
Battery drain
398
Before a long distance trip
399
Winter driving
399
Opening/closing the fuel filler door
400
Fuel
401
Octane rating
402
Emission controls
403
Driving economically
404
When the gasoline engine starts and
stops in hybrid vehicles
406
Using the electric motor in city driving
406
Detachable trailer hitch*
408
Driving with a trailer
409
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)
411
Towing eyelet
412
Towing recommendations
413
Charging the hybrid battery
414
Hybrid battery charging current
416
Hybrid battery charging cable
416
Hybrid charging cable circuit breaker
418
Preparations for charging the hybrid
battery
419
Initiating hybrid battery charging
420
Hybrid battery charge status
422
Stopping hybrid battery charging
424
Long-term storage of a vehicle with
a hybrid battery
425
Hybrid-related symbols and messages
426
Charger status indicators
428
9
INFOTAINMENT
The infotainment system
430
Apps (applications)
430
Sound settings
431
Radio
432
Changing and searching for radio
stations
432
RBDS radio
434
HD Radio™reception
434
Switching HD Radio on and off
435
HD Radio sub-channels
436
HD Radio limitations
437
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio*
437
Using SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio*
438
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* settings
440
SiriusXM Travel Link*
441
SiriusXM Travel Link - Weather
442
SiriusXM Travel Link - Alerts
443
SiriusXM Travel Link - Fuel
444
SiriusXM Travel Link - Sports
445
Radio settings
446
Media player
446
Playing media
447
Gracenote
449
Media searches
450
CD (media) player*
451
Streaming media through a Blue-
tooth connection
451
Connecting a Bluetooth
®
device
451
Playing media through the USB socket
452
Connecting a device via the USB socket
452
Video
452
Media sound settings
453
Apple CarPlay
453
Apple CarPlay settings
455
Android auto*
456
Android Auto* settings
457
Media player technical data
458
Phone
459
Pairing a cell phone
460
Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone
461
Handling phone calls
462
Handling text messages
463
Managing the phone book
464
Phone settings
465
Text message settings
465
Bluetooth settings
466
Internet connected vehicle
466
Connecting to the Internet
467
Tethering (Wi-Fi sharing)
468
Internet connection troubleshooting
469
Deleting Wi-Fi networks
470
Wi-Fi technology and security
470
Vehicle modem settings
470
Downloading, updating and uninstal-
ling apps
471
Infotainment system license information
472
Terms, conditions and confidentiality
476
10
WHEELS AND TIRES
Tires
478
Tire direction of rotation
480
Tread wear indicator
480
Checking tire inflation pressure
481
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
482
Checking tire inflation pressure
484
Reinflating tires equipped with the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
485
Calibrating the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
486
Tire sealing system
487
Using the tire sealing system
489
Inflating a tire with the tire sealing
system compressor
493
Changing tires
494
Removing a wheel
495
Installing a wheel
496
Wheel bolts
497
Snow tires and chains
497
Tools
498
Jack
498
Wheel (rim) designations
499
Tire sidewall designations
499
Tire terminology
501
Loading specifications
502
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
503
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
Volvo's service program
506
Vehicle status
508
Booking service and repairs
508
Remote updates
511
System updates
511
Hoisting the vehicle
513
Opening and closing the hood
515
Engine compartment overview
516
Engine oil
517
Checking and refilling engine oil
518
Refilling coolant
519
Climate system service
520
Replacing bulbs
520
Bulb specifications
521
Windshield wipers in the service position
521
Replacing wiper blades
523
Refilling the windshield washer fluid
reservoir
524
Start battery
524
Battery symbols
527
Hybrid battery
527
Fuses
528
Replacing fuses
529
Fuses in the engine compartment
530
Fuses in the passenger compartment
535
11
Fuses in the cargo compartment
539
Cleaning the exterior
542
Polishing and waxing
544
Corrosion protection
545
Cleaning the interior
545
Cleaning the center display
547
Paint damage
548
Touching up paint damage
549
SPECIFICATIONS
Label information
552
Dimensions
555
Weights
557
Engine specifications
559
Engine oil specifications and volume
560
Coolant specifications
560
Transmission fluid specification and
volume
561
Brake fluid specification and volume
561
Fuel tank volume
561
Air conditioning refrigerant
562
Tire inflation pressure table
563
Hybrid battery specifications
564
INDEX
Index 565
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
14
Finding owner's information
Owner's information is available in several differ-
ent formats in both digital and printed form. The
owner's manual is available on the vehicle's cen-
ter display, as a mobile app and on Volvo's sup-
port website.
There is also a Quick Guide in the glove com-
partment as well as a printed supplement to the
owner's manual containing information about
e.g., fuses, specifications, etc. A complete prin-
ted owner's manual can also be ordered.
The vehicle's center display
In the center display, pull down
Top view and tap
Owner's
manual. This gives you access
to visual navigation with exterior
and interior images of the vehi-
cle. The information is searcha-
ble and is divided into catego-
ries.
Mobile app
In App Store or Google Play,
search for "Volvo Manual."
Download the app to a smart-
phone or tablet and select a
vehicle model. The app con-
tains instructive videos and
offers visual navigation, includ-
ing interior and exterior images of the vehicle.
Navigation between the various articles in the
owner's manual is designed to provide easy
access to the information and the information is
searchable.
Volvo Cars' support site
Go to support.volvocars.com
and select your country.
Owner's manuals are available
here online and in PDF format.
Volvo Cars' support site also
contains instructional videos
and additional information
about your vehicle and owning a Volvo.
Printed owner's information
The glove compartment con-
tains a printed supplement to
the owner’s manual containing
information about fuses and
specifications as well as a sum-
mary of other important and
practical information.
A printed Quick Guide can also be found in the
glove compartment containing useful information
about the most commonly used features and
functions in your vehicle.
Other printed owner's information may also be
found in the vehicle, depending on options
and/or accessories that the vehicle is equipped
with.
A complete printed version of the owner's infor-
mation (or a new owner's manual supplement)
can be ordered through a Volvo retailer.
NOTE
If the content of the digital information in the
center display and the printed information dif-
fer, the printed information always has prece-
dence.
INTRODUCTION
}}
15
WARNING
The driver is always responsible for operating
the vehicle in a safe manner and adhering to
current laws and traffic regulations.
It is also important that the vehicle be oper-
ated, maintained and serviced according to
Volvo's recommendations/instructions in the
owner's manual.
Changing the language used in the
vehicle's center display
Changing languages in the center display could
mean that some of the owner's information provi-
ded may not comply with national or local stat-
utes and regulations. Changing to a language
that you do not understand may also make it diffi-
cult to change back to the original language.
Related information
•
Owner's manual in mobile devices (p. 18)
•
Navigating in the digital owner's manual
(p. 16)
•
On-board digital owner's manual (p. 15)
•
Navigating in the digital owner's manual
(p. 16)
•
Using the owner's manual (p. 20)
•
Additional information about your vehicle
(p. 19)
On-board digital owner's manual
When printed owner's information refers to digi-
tal owner's information, this is the on-board infor-
mation available in the vehicle's center display.
The digital on-board owner's manual is accessed from
the center display's Top view
There are a number of ways to find information in
the digital owner's manual, which can be
accessed from the manual's top menu by tapping
.
NOTE
The on-board owner's information cannot be
accessed while the vehicle is moving.
Symbols and their descriptions
Takes you to the owner's
information start page.
All articles sorted by cate-
gory. An article may be lis-
ted in several categories.
A selection of useful arti-
cles about the most com-
monly used functions in the
vehicle.
||
INTRODUCTION
16
Symbols and their descriptions
Exterior/interior views of
the vehicle in which certain
areas/components are
highlighted as hotspots.
Tap a hotspot to come to a
relevant article.
This offers access to a list
of articles that have been
saved as favorites. Tap an
article to read it in its
entirety.
Symbols and their descriptions
Leads to short instructional
videos for various vehicle
functions.
This offers information
about the current version of
the owner's information in
your vehicle and other use-
ful information.
Related information
•
Navigating in the digital owner's manual
(p. 16)
Navigating in the digital owner's
manual
The digital on-board owner's manual is
accessed from the center display. The contents
are searchable and it is easy to navigate among
the various sections.
The digital on-board owner's manual is accessed from
the center display's Top view
Opening the digital owner's information
–
To open the digital owner's information, pull
down the center display's Top view and tap
Owner's manual.
There are several ways of finding information.
To access the owner's manual's menu, tap
in the upper bar.
INTRODUCTION
}}
17
Searching using categories
The articles in the owner's
manual are structured in main
and sub-categories. The same
article may appear in several
pertinent categories in order to
make them easier to find.
1.
Tap
followed by Categories.
> The main categories will be listed.
2.
Tap a main category (
).
>
A list of sub-categories and (
) and arti-
cles (
) will be displayed.
3. Tap an article to open it. Tap the left arrow to
go back.
Interior and exterior hotspots
Exterior and interior views of
the vehicle where certain com-
ponents are pointed out are
called hotspots.
1.
Tap
followed by Exterior/Interior.
> Exterior/interior views will be displayed
with hotspots, which lead to relevant arti-
cles. Swipe the screen horizontally to
scroll among the views.
2. Tap a hotspot.
> The title of a relevant article will be dis-
played.
3. Tap the title to open the article. Tap the left
arrow to go back or to begin a new
search.
Quick Guide
The heading Quick Guide in
the owner's manual's menu
leads to a selection of articles
that may be helpful in familiariz-
ing you with your vehicle's most
common features and func-
tions. These articles can also
be found through categories but have been gath-
ered here for quick access. Tap an article to read
it in its entirety.
Favorites
This is a list of articles that
have been saved as favorites.
Tap an article to read it in its
entirety.
Saving/deleting favorites
Save an article as a favorite by tapping the star
(
) at the upper right when an article is open.
The star symbol will be filled in (
) when its arti-
cle has been saved as a favorite.
To delete a favorite, tap its star again.
Video
Tap for short instructional vid-
eos for various vehicle func-
tions.
Information
Tap the symbol for information
about the current version of the
owner's information in your
vehicle and other useful infor-
mation.
Start page
Tap the symbol to come to the
owner's information start page.
||
INTRODUCTION
18
Using the search function
1.
Tap the magnifying glass icon (
) in the
owner's manual's upper menu. A keyboard
will appear at the bottom of the screen.
2. Enter a word, e.g., "seat belt."
> Suggested articles will be displayed as
more characters are entered.
3. Confirm by tapping the article. To leave
search mode tap the up-arrow next to the
search box.
Related information
•
On-board digital owner's manual (p. 15)
•
Using the center display keyboard (p. 47)
Owner's manual in mobile devices
Owner's information mobile app
1
can be down-
loaded from the App Store and Google Play and
is adapted for both cell phones and tablets.
These apps also contain videos and interior/
exterior hotspot views of the vehicle that you can
click on for additional information.
This QR code will take you
directly to the app or you can
search for "Volvo manual" in
the App Store or Google Play.
The app contains videos and exterior/interior
views of the vehicle with certain components/
functions highlighted in hotspots, which lead
directly to related information. It is easy to navi-
gate between the various categories and articles
and the contents are searchable.
The mobile app is available at the App Store and Google
Play
1
Certain models and mobile devices
INTRODUCTION
19
Related information
•
Using the owner's manual (p. 20)
•
Additional information about your vehicle
(p. 19)
Additional information about your
vehicle
Volvo Cars' website and support site provide
additional information about your vehicle.
Support on the Internet
Go to support.volvocars.com to visit the site,
which is available in most markets.
The information on the support site is searchable
and is grouped into different categories. It
includes support for e.g., Internet-based services
and functions, Volvo On Call, the navigation sys-
tem and apps. Video and step-by-step instruc-
tions explain various procedures such as how to
connect the vehicle to the Internet via a cell
phone.
Downloadable information
Maps
Sensus Navigation system maps can be down-
loaded from the support site.
Mobile apps
Beginning with model year 2014, the owner's
manual is available in the form of an app for cer-
tain Volvo models. The Volvo On Call app can
also be found here.
Owner's manuals for earlier model Volvos
Owner's manuals for earlier model Volvos are
available in PDF format. Quick Guides and sup-
plements can also be found on the support site.
Select a model and a model year and download
the desired information.
Contact
Contact information for customer support and the
nearest Volvo retailer are available on the site.
Related information
•
Using the owner's manual (p. 20)
•
On-board digital owner's manual (p. 15)
•
Volvo ID (p. 25)
INTRODUCTION
20
Using the owner's manual
Reading your owner's manual is a good way of
familiarizing yourself with the features and sys-
tems in your vehicle.
On-board owner's manual
Reading the owner's manual is a good way to
become familiar with your vehicle and to learn to
utilize the features and functions that it offers.
Pay particular attention to the warnings provided.
Volvo reserves the right to make model changes
at any time, or to change specifications or design
without notice and without incurring obligation.
© Volvo Car Corporation
Printed owner's information
We advise keeping printed owner's information in
the vehicle for quick access to necessary infor-
mation and how to contact Volvo if help is
required.
Illustrations
Some of the illustrations and images used in your
owner's information may be generic and are
intended to provide a general view or an example
of a certain feature or function. The features or
functions in the illustrations may differ slightly
from the equipment in your vehicle depending on
the level of instrumentation or market.
Options and accessories
Optional or accessory equipment described in
this manual is indicated by an asterisk.
Optional or accessory equipment may not be
available in all countries or markets. Please note
that some vehicles may be equipped differently,
depending on special legal requirements.
Contact your Volvo retailer for additional informa-
tion.
Footnotes
Certain pages of this manual contain information
in the form of footnotes at the bottom of the
page. This information supplements the text that
the footnote number refers to (a letter is used if
the footnote refers to text in a table).
Messages
There are several displays in the vehicle that
show messages generated by various systems
and functions in the vehicle. The appearance of
these texts differs slightly from normal texts (for
example:
Phone, Accept).
Decals
There are various types of decals in the vehicle
whose purpose is to provide important informa-
tion in a clear and concise way. The importance
of these decals is explained as follows, in
descending order of importance.
Risk of injury
Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning back-
ground, white text/image on a black background.
Decals of this type are used to indicate potential
danger. Ignoring a warning of this type could
result in serious injury or death.
INTRODUCTION
}}
21
Risk of damage to the vehicle
White ISO symbols and white text/image on a
black or blue warning background and space for
a message. If the information on decals of this
type is ignored, damage to the vehicle could
result.
Information
White ISO symbols and white text/image on a
black background. These decals provide general
information.
NOTE
The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual are
examples only and are not intended to be
reproductions of the decals actually used in
the vehicle. The purpose is to give an indica-
tion of how they look and their approximate
location in the vehicle. The applicable infor-
mation for your particular vehicle can be
found on the respective decals in the vehicle.
Types of lists
Procedures
Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or actions
that must be carried out in a certain order, are
arranged in numbered lists in this manual.
If there is a series of illustrations associated
with step-by-step instructions, each step in
the procedure is numbered in the same way
as the corresponding illustration.
Lists in which letters are used can be found
with series of illustrations in cases where the
order in which the instructions are carried out
is not important.
Arrows with or without numbers are used to
indicate the direction of a movement.
Arrows containing letters are used to indi-
cate movement.
If there are no illustrations associated with a
step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure are
indicated by ordinary numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used in
general overview illustrations in which certain
components are pointed out. The corres-
ponding number is also used in the position
list's description of the various components.
Bullet lists
Bullets are used to differentiate a number of
components/functions/points of information that
can be listed in random order.
For example:
•
Coolant
•
Engine oil
Related information
Related information offers references to articles
containing information associated with the infor-
mation that you are currently reading.
Continues on next page
} }This symbol can be found at the lower right
corner to indicate that the current topic continues
on the following page.
||
INTRODUCTION
22
Continuation from previous page
|| This symbol can be found at the upper left
corner to indicate that the current topic is a con-
tinuation from the previous page.
Related information
•
On-board digital owner's manual (p. 15)
•
Owner's manual in mobile devices (p. 18)
•
Additional information about your vehicle
(p. 19)
Crash event data
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit-
uations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under-
standing how a vehicle's systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such
data as:
•
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
•
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
•
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understand-
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and the EDR never registers who is driving
the vehicle or the location of a crash or a near
crash-like situation. However, other parties, such
as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data
with the type of personally identifying data rou-
tinely acquired during a crash investigation. To
read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed.
Furthermore, your vehicle is equipped with a
number of computers whose task is to continu-
ously control and monitor the vehicle’s operation.
They can also register some of this information
during normal driving conditions, most importantly
if they detect a fault relating to the vehicle’s oper-
ation and functionality or upon activation of the
vehicle’s active safety systems (e.g. City Safety
and the auto-brake function). Some of the regis-
tered information is required by technicians when
carrying out service and maintenance to enable
them to diagnose and rectify any faults that have
occurred in the vehicle and to enable Volvo to ful-
fill legal and other regulatory requirements. Infor-
mation thus registered in the vehicle is registered
in the vehicle’s computers until the vehicle is
serviced or repaired. In addition to the above, the
registered information may – on an aggregated
basis – be used for research and product devel-
opment purposes in order to continuously
improve the safety and quality of Volvo vehicles.
For additional information, contact:
In the United States
Volvo Car USA, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive, P.O. box 914
INTRODUCTION
}}
23
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552
www.volvocars.com/us
In Canada
Volvo Car Canada Ltd.
Customer Care Centre
9130 Leslie Street
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
1-800-663-8255
www.volvocars.com/ca
Options, accessories and the On-
board Diagnostic (OBDII) socket
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners
install only genuine, Volvo-approved accesso-
ries, and that accessory installations be per-
formed only by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
Optional or accessory equipment described in
this manual is indicated by an asterisk.
Optional or accessory equipment may not be
available in all countries or markets. Please note
that some vehicles may be equipped differently,
depending on special legal requirements.
Contact your Volvo retailer for additional informa-
tion.
NOTE
•
Do not export your Volvo to another
country before investigating that coun-
try's applicable safety and exhaust emis-
sion requirements. In some cases it may
be difficult or impossible to comply with
these requirements. Modifications to the
emission control system(s) may render
your Volvo not certifiable for legal opera-
tion in the U.S., Canada and other coun-
tries.
•
All information, illustrations and specifica-
tions contained in this manual are based
on the latest product information availa-
ble at the time of publication. Please note
that some vehicles may be equipped dif-
ferently, depending on market-specific
adaptations or special legal requirements.
Optional equipment described in this
manual may not be available in all mar-
kets.
•
Some of the illustrations shown are
generic and are intended as examples
only, and may not depict the exact model
for which this owner's information is
intended.
•
Volvo reserves the right to make model
and product changes at any time, or to
change specifications or design without
notice and without incurring obligation.
||
INTRODUCTION
24
WARNING
If your vehicle is involved in an accident,
unseen damage may affect its drivability and
safety.
WARNING
CALIFORNIA proposition 65
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit
chemicals known to the state of California to
cause cancer, and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause can-
cer, and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
WARNING
Certain components of this vehicle such as air
bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, adap-
tive steering columns, and button cell batter-
ies may contain Perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle end
of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
•
Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to
ensure compatibility with the performance,
safety, and emission systems in your vehicle.
Additionally, a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician knows where accessories
may and may not be safely installed in your
Volvo. In all cases, please consult a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician before
installing any accessory in or on your vehicle.
•
Accessories that have not been approved by
Volvo may or may not be specifically tested
for compatibility with your vehicle. Addition-
ally, an inexperienced installer may not be
familiar with some of your car's systems.
•
Any of your car's performance and safety
systems could be adversely affected if you
install accessories that Volvo has not tested,
or if you allow accessories to be installed by
someone unfamiliar with your vehicle.
•
Damage caused by unapproved or improperly
installed accessories may not be covered by
your new vehicle warranty. See your Warranty
and Service Records Information booklet for
more warranty information. Volvo assumes no
responsibility for death, injury, or expenses
that may result from the installation of non-
genuine accessories.
Connecting equipment to the On-board
Diagnostic (OBDII) socket
WARNING
Volvo Cars takes no responsibility for the con-
sequences of connecting non-authorized
equipment to the On-board Diagnostic
(OBDII) socket. This socket should only be
used by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
The diagnostic socket OBDII under the dashboard on
the driver's side
INTRODUCTION
25
Type approval
USA
FCC ID: 2AGKKACUII-06
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Canada
IC: 20839-ACUII06
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Volvo ID
A Volvo ID can be used to access a number of
online services
2
Creating a Volvo ID
A Volvo ID can be created in two ways:
Using the Volvo ID app
1. If you have not already done so, download
the Volvo ID app from the
Download
Center.
2. Start the app and register a personal email
address.
3. Follow the instructions that will be sent auto-
matically to this email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created and has
been automatically registered to the vehi-
cle. The Volvo ID services available can
now be used.
Using the Volvo On Call app
1. Download the latest version of the Volvo On
Call app to your cell phone from e.g., the App
Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.
2. Start the app and create a Volvo ID on the
start page.
3. Register a personal email address and then
follow the instructions that will be sent auto-
matically to this address.
Registering your Volvo ID to the vehicle
If your Volvo ID was created using the Volvo On
Call mobile app, the ID has to be registered to
the vehicle:
1. With the vehicle connected to the Internet,
download the Volvo ID app from the
Download Center in the center display's
App view. See also the article "Downloading,
updating and uninstalling apps."
2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID.
3. Follow the instructions that will be sent auto-
matically to the email address linked to your
Volvo ID.
> Your Volvo ID is now registered to the
vehicle and the Volvo ID services available
can be used.
Advantages of having a Volvo ID
•
Only one user name and password are
required to access online services.
•
If you change a user name or password for
one of the online service (e.g., Volvo On Call),
it/they will also be automatically changed for
the other services.
Related information
•
Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 471)
•
Connecting to the Internet (p. 467)
2
These services vary and may be subject to change. Consult your Volvo retailer.
INTRODUCTION
26
Volvo and the environment
Volvo is committed to the well-being of its cus-
tomers. As a natural part of this commitment, we
care about the environment in which we all live.
Concern for the environment means an everyday
involvement in reducing our environmental
impact.
Volvo's environmental activities are based on a
holistic view, which means we consider the over-
all environmental impact of a product throughout
its complete life cycle. In this context, design, pro-
duction, product use, and recycling are all impor-
tant considerations. In production, Volvo has
partly or completely phased out several chemicals
including CFCs, lead chromates, asbestos, and
cadmium; and reduced the number of chemicals
used in our plants 50% since 1991.
Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into
production a three-way catalytic converter with a
Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen sen-
sor, in 1976. The current version of this highly
efficient system reduces emissions of harmful
substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the exhaust pipe
by approximately 95 – 99% and the search to
eliminate the remaining emissions continues.
Volvo is the only automobile manufacturer to
offer CFC-free retrofit kits for the air conditioning
system of all models as far back as the 1975
model 240. Advanced electronic engine controls
and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer to our
goal. In addition to continuous environmental
refinement of conventional gasoline-powered
internal combustion engines, Volvo is actively
looking at advanced technology alternative-fuel
vehicles.
When you drive a Volvo, you become our partner
in the work to lessen the car's impact on the
environment. To reduce your vehicle's environ-
mental impact, you can:
•
Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.
Tests have shown decreased fuel economy
with improperly inflated tires.
•
Follow the recommended maintenance
schedule in your Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet.
•
Drive at a constant speed whenever possible.
•
See a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician as soon as possible for inspection
if the check engine (malfunction indicator)
light illuminates, or stays on after the vehicle
has started.
•
Properly dispose of any vehicle-related waste
such as used motor oil, used batteries, brake
pads, etc.
•
When cleaning your vehicle, please use gen-
uine Volvo car care products. All Volvo car
care products are formulated to be environ-
mentally friendly.
Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid vehicles
•
If possible, precondition the vehicle with the
charging cable before driving.
•
If preconditioning is not possible in cold
weather, use the seat and steering wheel
heating primarily. Avoid heating the entire
passenger compartment, which reduces the
hybrid battery's charge level.
•
Choose the
Pure drive mode to help mini-
mize electric power consumption.
•
In hilly terrain, put the gear selector in mode
B to utilize the electric motor's braking func-
tion when the accelerator pedal is released.
This helps charge the hybrid battery.
Related information
•
Driving economically (p. 404)
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
27
IntelliSafe—driver support
IntelliSafe is Volvo's philosophy regarding vehi-
cle safety. It encompasses a number of systems,
both standard and optional, that are designed to
help make driving and traveling in a Volvo safer.
Support
Systems that help make driving safer are an inte-
gral part of IntelliSafe. These include optional
features such as Adaptive Cruise Control* that
helps maintain a set distance to a vehicle ahead,
Park Assist Pilot*, which assists in parking the
vehicle, Cross Traffic Alert*, Blind Spot
Information*, etc.
Accident prevention
Systems such as City Safety are designed to
automatically apply the brakes in situations in
which the driver does not have time to react.
Lane Keeping Aid* alerts the driver if the vehicle
inadvertently crosses a lane's/road's side marker
line.
Protection
The vehicle is equipped with e.g., seat belt pre-
tensioners that pull the seat belts taut in critical
situations when there is a collision risk and
numerous airbags designed to help provide cush-
ioning if certain types of collisions should occur.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 272)
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 359)
•
High and low beam headlights (p. 142)
•
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 324)
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 322)
•
City Safety™ (p. 309)
•
Driving lane assistance (p. 333)
•
Airbag system (p. 71)
•
Roll stability control (RSC) (p. 255)
•
Seat belts (p. 66)
•
General safety information (p. 62)
INTRODUCTION
28
Sensus
Sensus is the core of your personal Volvo experi-
ence and provides information, entertainment
and features that make owning your vehicle eas-
ier.
This is Sensus
Sensus provides an intelligent interface and
Internet-connected service with an intuitive navi-
gation structure that offers access to relevant
information when it is needed, with minimal dis-
tractions.
Sensus also includes all of your vehicle's solu-
tions relating to entertainment, connecting to the
Internet, navigation and the user interface
between the driver and the vehicle. Sensus
makes communication between you, the vehicle
and the digital world around you possible.
INTRODUCTION
}}
* Option/accessory.
29
Information when it's needed, where it's needed
Information is presented in different displays depending on how it should be prioritized (generic illustration)
Head-up-display*
The head up-display presents types of informa-
tion that the driver should be aware of immedi-
ately, such as traffic warnings, speed information
and navigation. Road sign information and incom-
ing phone calls are also displayed here. The
head-up display is controlled from the right-side
steering wheel keypad and the center display.
Instrument panel
The instrument panel displays information such
as speed, an incoming phone call or the track
||
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
30
that is currently playing. It is controlled using both
steering wheel keypads.
Center display
Many of the vehicle's main functions are con-
trolled from the center display, a touchscreen that
reacts to taps or other gestures. The number of
physical buttons is thereby minimized. The screen
can be operated with or without gloves.
The center display is used to control e.g., the cli-
mate and infotainment systems and to adjust the
power seats*. The information shown here can be
dealt with by the driver or the front seat passen-
ger.
Voice control system
The voice control system ena-
bles the driver to operate cer-
tain vehicle functions without
removing his/her hands from
the steering wheel and it
understands natural speech.
Use voice commands to e.g.,
play a track on the infotainment system, make a
phone call, raise the passenger compartment
temperature or to read a text message.
For additional information about all of the func-
tions/system, see the respective articles in the
on-board owner's manual or the printed supple-
ment.
Related information
•
Using the center display (p. 34)
•
Center display overview (p. 32)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 38)
•
Head-up display (HUD)* (p. 118)
•
Instrument panel (p. 97)
•
Voice control (p. 121)
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
31
Owner's manual and the
environment
The wood pulp in Volvo's printed owner's infor-
mation comes from FSC
®
(Forest Stewardship
Council
®
) certified forests and other responsible
sources.
FSC
®
The symbol above indicates that the wood pulp is
FSC
®
certified.
Related information
•
Volvo and the environment (p. 26)
Glass
Laminated glass
The windshield and panoramic roof* are made of
laminated glass, which is reinforced to help pre-
vent break-ins and to provide additional sound-
proofing. Laminated glass is optional for the
other side windows.
Laminated glass symbol
3
Related information
•
Laminated panoramic roof* (p. 160)
•
Power windows (p. 154)
•
Defrosting windows and mirrors (p. 191)
•
Using sun curtains* (p. 155)
•
Rearview mirror (p. 157)
•
Power windows (p. 154)
•
Head-up display (HUD)* (p. 118)
•
Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
(p. 151)
•
Windshield and headlight washers (p. 152)
•
Tailgate window wiper and washer (p. 153)
3
This symbol is not shown on the windshield or panoramic roof.
INTRODUCTION
32
Center display overview
Many of the vehicle's functions are controlled
from the center display.
Three of the center display's basic views. Swipe to the right/left to access the Function/App view (generic illustration)
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
33
Function view: vehicle functions can be acti-
vated/deactivated by tapping. Certain func-
tions are called "trigger functions", which
open settings windows, e.g.,
Camera and
parking functions. Settings for the head-up
display* are also started from Function view
but the actual interaction is controlled from
the steering wheel keypad buttons and the
instrument panel.
Home view: the initial view shown when the
center display is started.
App (Application) view: shows apps that have
been downloaded (third-party apps) as well
as ones for integrated functions such as
FM
radio
. Tap an icon to open the app.
Status bar: vehicle activities are shown at the
top of the screen. Network/connection infor-
mation is shown on the left side of the bar.
Media-related information, the clock and
information about background activities are
shown to the right.
Top view: pull down the tab to open Top view.
From here, you can access
Settings,
Owner's manual and stored messages.
Navigation: leads to map navigation. Tap the
sub-view to expand it.
Media: the most recently used media-related
apps. Tap the sub-view to expand it.
Phone: used to access phone-related func-
tions. Tap the sub-view to expand it.
The extra sub-view: the most recently used
apps/vehicle functions that do not belong in
any of the other sub-views are listed here.
Tap the sub-view to expand it.
Climate bar: information and direct access to
settings such as temperature, seat heating*
and blower speed. Tap the symbol at the
center of the Climate bar to open Climate
view for additional settings.
Related information
•
Using the center display (p. 34)
•
Function view buttons (p. 45)
•
Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 43)
•
Settings view (p. 170)
•
Media player (p. 446)
•
Phone (p. 459)
•
Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 186)
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 547)
INTRODUCTION
34
Using the center display
Many of the vehicle's functions can be con-
trolled and settings can be made from the
screen in the center console, referred to in this
owner's information as the center display, which
is a touchscreen.
Using the center display's touchscreen
functionality
Two people can interact with the screen at the
same time, e.g., to adjust the temperature for the
driver and passenger sides.
The screen reacts differently depending on
whether the user taps, drags or swipes on the
screen. This makes it possible to move between
views, mark objects, scroll in lists and move apps
by touching the screen in various ways. The fol-
lowing table lists the gestures that can be used
on the screen:
An infrared film on the screen enables it to react
if a finger is directly in front of the screen (but
not actually touching it). This makes it possible to
use the screen while wearing gloves.
CAUTION
Do not touch the screen with sharp objects
because this could cause scratches.
Procedure Gesture Result
Tap once. Marks an object, confirms a selection or activates a function.
Double-tap. Zooms in on an object such as a map.
Press and hold. "Grabs" an object so that it can be dragged. Press and hold on the screen and drag the object to the desired
position.
Tap with two fingers. Zooms out from an object such as a map.
INTRODUCTION
}}
35
Procedure Gesture Result
Drag Moves between screen views, scrolls in a list, text or a view. Press and hold to drag apps or objects in a list.
Swipe Moves between screen views, scrolls in a list, text or a view
Stretch Zooms in.
Pinch Zooms out.
||
INTRODUCTION
36
Turning off and reactivating the center
display
Home button for the center display
When the center display is turned off, the screen
goes dark to avoid disturbing the driver. However,
the climate bar remains visible and apps or other
functions connected to the display remain active.
1. Press and hold the Home button below the
screen.
> The screen will go dark. However, the cli-
mate bar remains visible and apps or
other functions connected to the display
remain active. The screen can also be
cleaned while it is turned off.
2. Reactivate by pressing the Home button
briefly.
> The view that was displayed when the
screen was turned off will be displayed
again.
NOTE
•
The display cannot be turned off while a
message requiring action is on the
screen.
•
The display turns off automatically when
the ignition is switched off and the driv-
er's door is opened.
Returning to Home view
1. Press the Home button briefly.
> The most recent Home view mode will be
displayed.
2. Press again briefly.
> All of the Home view's sub-views will
return to standard mode.
NOTE
From Home view's standard mode, press the
Home button to start animated on-screen
instructions describing how to display the var-
ious views.
Moving apps and vehicle function
buttons
Apps and function buttons can be moved and
organized in their respective views.
1. Press and hold an app/button.
> The app/button will change size and
become transparent. It can then be
moved.
2. Drag the app/button to an available position
in the view.
A maximum of 48 lines can be utilized for placing
apps/buttons. To move an app/button outside of
the visible view, drag it to the bottom of the view.
A new line will then be added where the app/
button can be placed (this line may not be visi-
ble). Swipe the screen to scroll up or down in the
view to display information that may be outside of
the view.
Scrolling in lists, articles or views
A scroll indicator on the screen shows that it is
possible to scroll up or down in the view. Press
the indicator and move it up or down or swipe up
or down anywhere in the view.
INTRODUCTION
37
The scroll indicator on the right side of the center dis-
play
Using center display controls
Temperature control
4
Digital controls are available for many of the vehi-
cle's functions. For example, to set the tempera-
ture:
•
Drag the control to the desired temperature
•
Tap
+/− to raise or lower the temperature
incrementally, or
•
Tap the desired temperature on the control
Related information
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 38)
•
Settings view (p. 170)
•
Sensus (p. 28)
•
Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 471)
•
Using the center display keyboard (p. 47)
4
Generic illustration. The temperature in your vehicle may be set to degrees Fahrenheit.
INTRODUCTION
38
Navigating in the center display's
views
There are 5 different basic views in the center
display: Home view, Top view, Climate view, App
view and Function view. The display is activated
automatically when the driver's door is opened.
Home view
Home view is displayed when the screen is acti-
vated. It consists of four sub-views:
Navigation,
Media, Phone and an extra sub-view. The extra
sub-view contains the most recently used app/
vehicle function that is not related to the other
three sub-views. For example, if the most recently
used app/vehicle function is a music app, the
Media sub-view will be displayed.
The sub-views display brief information about the
respective apps.
The first time the vehicle is started, some of the
Home view's sub-views will not contain any infor-
mation.
NOTE
In Home view's standard mode (reached by
pressing the Home button briefly), an anima-
tion explaining how to access the different
views will be shown on the screen.
NOTE
When the vehicle is moving:
•
Some functions (using the center display
keyboard, etc.) may be disabled.
•
Certain texts (e.g., those generated by
apps) will be truncated to three lines. Tap
the
Read out button to have the entire
text read aloud.
•
Text messages will be truncated to one
line. Tap the
Read out button to have
the entire text read aloud.
INTRODUCTION
}}
39
Expanding a sub-view from the standard view
Standard view and an expanded sub-view in the center display
||
INTRODUCTION
40
Expanding a sub-view:
–
To expand sub-view one, two or three: tap
the screen anywhere in the sub-view. When a
sub-view is expanded, the Home view's
fourth sub-view will temporarily not be dis-
played. The other two views will be minimized
and will only show limited information. Tap-
ping the fourth sub-view will minimize the
other three sub-views and they will only show
limited information.
Expanding a sub-view provides access the
respective apps' basic functions.
Closing an expanded sub-view:
–
A sub-view can be closed in three different
ways:
•
Tap the upper section of the expanded
sub-view.
•
Tap one of the other sub-views (which will
then open in expanded view).
•
Press the Home button below the center
display briefly.
Opening/closing a sub-view in full-screen
mode
The extra sub-view and the Navigation sub-view
can be opened in full-screen mode to show addi-
tional information and possible settings.
In expanded mode, open the
app in full-screen mode by tap-
ping the symbol.
Tap on the symbol or the Home
button below the screen to
return to the expanded view.
It is always possible to return to Home view by
pressing the Home button. Press the Home but-
ton twice to return to Home view's standard view
from full-screen.
Home button for the center display
Status bar
Current vehicle activities are shown in the status
bar at the top of the screen. Network and con-
nection information is shown to the left. Brief
information about currently running apps and the
clock are shown to the right.
Top view
The top view has a tab at the center of the status
bar. Pull down (expand) the Top view by swiping
the tab downward.
Top view when expanded
Top view provides access to:
•
Settings
•
Owner's manual
•
Profile
•
The vehicle's stored messages
INTRODUCTION
}}
41
To leave (minimize) Top view, tap the screen out-
side of this view or tap at the bottom of Top view
and swipe upward. The views behind will become
visible again. Top view is not available when the
ignition is being started/switched off or when a
message is displayed on the screen.
Going to Top view from an app
To pull down Top view when an app is running
(e.g., FM radio):
•
Tap
FM Radio Settings to display these
settings.
•
Tap
Owner's manual to open an article
related to the specific app.
This applies only to your vehicle's factory-
installed apps. This is not possible for third-
party apps that have been downloaded.
Climate view
The climate bar, where the most common climate
system settings can be made, is located at the
bottom of the screen and is always visible.
Tap the symbol at the center of the cli-
mate bar to open Climate view for
access to additional climate system
settings.
Tap the symbol to close Climate view
and return to a previous view.
App view
App view (generic illustration)
Swipe the screen from right to left to access App
view from Home view. This displays factory-instal-
led apps such as
FM as well as any apps that
have been downloaded. Brief information will be
displayed for certain apps, for example missed
phone calls, etc.
Tap an app to open it.
When applicable, swipe downward to scroll in the
list of apps (depending on the number of apps
currently running).
To move an app, press and hold it. It will become
slightly bigger and transparent and can then be
dragged to the desired position and released.
Return to Home view by swiping the screen from
left to right or by pressing the Home button.
Function view
Function view (generic illustration)
||
INTRODUCTION
42
Swipe the screen from left to right to access
Function view from Home view. From Function
view, you can activate/deactivate various vehicle
functions such as
Drive Modes, Speed Sign
Assist and Park Assist.
When applicable, swipe upward to scroll in the list
of functions (depending on the number of func-
tions).
Activate/deactivate a function by tapping its but-
ton. Certain functions will open in their own win-
dows.
To move a function button, press and hold it. It
will become slightly smaller and transparent and
can then be dragged to the desired position and
released.
Related information
•
Using the center display (p. 34)
•
Center display overview (p. 32)
•
Function view buttons (p. 45)
•
Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 43)
•
Changing settings in different types of apps
(p. 52)
•
Climate system controls (p. 186)
INTRODUCTION
}}
43
Symbols in the center display status
bar
The following table provides an overview of the
symbols used in the center display's status bar.
The status bar shows current vehicle activities
and in certain cases, also their status. Due to lim-
ited space in the status bar, not all symbols will
be displayed at all times.
Symbol Meaning
Roaming activated.
Cell phone network signal strength.
Bluetooth device connected.
Bluetooth activated but no device
connected.
Connected to a Wi-Fi network.
Tethering activated. (Wi-Fi hotspot).
Vehicle modem activated.
Action in progress.
Preconditioning timer active (hybrid
models only)
Symbol Meaning
Audio source being played.
Audio source paused.
Phone call in progress.
Audio source muted.
News broadcasts from current radio
station
A
.
Traffic information being received
A
.
Clock.
A
Not available in all markets.
Related information
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 38)
•
Indicator symbols in the instrument panel
(p. 102)
•
Warning symbols in the instrument panel
(p. 104)
•
Messages in the instrument panel and center
display (p. 114)
Changing center display settings
The center display activates automatically when
the driver's door is opened. Settings can be
made for e.g., sounds, background and themes.
Turning off or changing the volume of
center display sounds
System sounds in the center display can be
turned off or their volume can be changed:
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
Sound System Volumes.
3.
Pull the control under
Screen Touch to the
desired level to change volume or turn off
the sound for tapping the screen or Keypad
Touch.
Changing the screen's appearance
(theme)
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
My Car Displays Display
Themes
.
3.
Select a theme, e.g.,
Minimalistic or
Chrome Rings.
In addition, the settings:
Normal and Bright can
also be selected. For Normal, the screen's back-
ground is dark and the text is light. This is the
default setting. If Bright is selected, the back-
||
INTRODUCTION
44
ground will be light and the text will be dark,
which can increase readability in strong ambient
lighting.
These alternatives are always available and do
not shift automatically according to changes in
ambient lighting.
Related information
•
Using the center display (p. 34)
•
Sensus (p. 28)
•
Settings view (p. 170)
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 547)
INTRODUCTION
}}
45
Function view buttons
The Function view, which is one of the center
display's basic views, contains all of the vehicle's
on-screen function buttons. From the Home
view, swipe from left to right on the screen to
come to the Function view.
Different types of buttons
There are three different types of vehicle function
buttons as listed in the following table.
Type of button Functions Vehicle function affected
Function buttons Have On/Off modes.
An LED indicator light to the left of the button's icon will illuminate when a function is
active. Press the button to turn the function on or off.
Most of the buttons in the function view are
function buttons.
Start buttons Do not have On/Off modes.
Pressing a start button opens a function's window, e.g., a window for adjusting the
driver's seat.
•
Camera.
•
Headrest fold.
•
Functions for folding down a seat.
•
Head-up display adjustments.
Parking buttons Have On/Off and scanning modes.
Similar to function buttons but have an additional parking scanning mode.
•
Park In.
•
Park Out.
Button modes
A function is activated (on) when the LED indicator is
green
A function is deactivated (off) when the LED indicator is
off
When a function or parking button's LED indica-
tor is green, the function is activated. When a
function is initially activated, an additional text will
be displayed (certain functions only) in the button
for approx. 5 seconds, after which the button will
be displayed with the LED indicator illuminated.
Press the button briefly to deactivate the func-
tion.
INTRODUCTION
}}
47
Using the center display keyboard
A keyboard can be used on the center display to
enter characters and search for e.g., destina-
tions using the navigation system, adding con-
tacts in phone book, etc. It is also possible to
use handwriting on the screen.
Entering text using the keyboard
The keyboard will only appear at the bottom of
the center display in situations when it is possible
to write on the screen.
NOTE
The keyboard cannot be used if the vehicle is
moving.
||
INTRODUCTION
48
Keyboard function buttons (the appearance may vary depending on language settings, context, etc.)
Field for possible search hits. The word
changes as new letters are added. Scroll in
the list using the left/right arrows. Tap a
word to select it. The keyboard may not sup-
port all language selections, in which case
this line on the screen will not be displayed.
The characters that can be entered are lan-
guage-dependent (see point 7). Tap a char-
acter to enter it.
INTRODUCTION
}}
49
Several buttons (depending on the context
for which the keyboard is being used) will be
displayed here. In certain cases, it can be
used to enter @ (for an email address) or to
start a new line.
Press to hide the keyboard. In cases where
this is not possible, the button will not be dis-
played.
Tap once to enter one uppercase letter.
Double-tap for Caps lock (tap again to
return to lowercase letters). Letters entered
after the !, . and ? characters will automati-
cally be uppercase. The first letter in the text
field or in text fields intended for names,
addresses or company names will also auto-
matically be uppercase. The first letter in text
fields intended for passwords, web
addresses or email addresses will automati-
cally be lowercase unless upper case is
chosen.
Press to display the numbers that can be
entered. When numbers are displayed, tap
to resume entering text or to
enter special characters.
Tap to change the keyboard language (in this
example, English is the selected language).
The characters available will change accord-
ing to the selected language (2). This button
will only be displayed if several keyboard lan-
guages have been selected (see the section
"Changing keyboard languages" below).
Press and hold to display a list of possible
languages and tap a language to use it. To
add keyboard languages, see the heading
"Changing keyboard languages" below.
Tap to enter blank spaces.
Tap to erase one character at a time.
Tap to enable handwriting. See the section
"Handwritten text" below.
Tap the button above the keyboard to confirm the
text that has been entered (not shown in the
illustration). This button's appearance differs
depending on the context.
Changing keyboard languages
In order to change keyboard languages, they
must first be selected under
Settings.
The keyboard language can be changed without
changing the language used for the other sys-
tems/menus in the vehicle.
1. Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap
Settings.
2.
Tap
System Keyboard Layouts.
3. Select and one or more of the languages in
the list.
> This makes it possible to change the key-
board layout and characters available
depending on the language(s) selected.
When more than one language
has been selected, this button
(7) will appear on the keyboard.
To shift between keyboard languages by display-
ing the list of available languages:
1. Press and hold the button (7).
> A list will be displayed.
2. Tap the desired language. If more than four
languages have been selected in
Settings,
scroll in the list.
> The keyboard layout and characters avail-
able will change to the selected language.
To shift between keyboard languages without
displaying the list of available languages:
–
Tap the button (7).
> The keyboard will switch to the next lan-
guage in the list (without displaying the
list itself).
||
INTRODUCTION
50
Special characters
To enter language-specific characters such as é
or è (if available):
1. Press and hold a character key.
> A box with available characters will open.
2. Tap the desired character. If none of the spe-
cial characters is selected, the key's initial
character will be entered.
Handwritten text
Tap button (10), see the overview illustration
above, to enter the handwriting mode.
Area for entering characters.
Text box where the characters entered in
area (1) appear.
Suggested characters. Scroll in the list if
necessary.
Blank spaces.
Tap to erase one character at a time.
Tap to return to the standard keyboard.
Press to hide the keyboard. In cases where
this is not possible, the button will not be dis-
played.
Tap to change the keyboard language.
Entering characters
1. Enter a handwritten character (1) using a fin-
gertip or by holding e.g., a pen near the
screen.
> Several character suggestions will appear
(3). The most likely character will be at the
top of the list.
CAUTION
Do not touch the screen with sharp objects
because this could cause scratches.
2. Continue entering characters.
> If no other choice is made, the character
at the top of the list will be used. Tap one
of the other characters in the list to use it
instead.
INTRODUCTION
51
Erasing/changing handwritten characters
Erase a character by swiping over the handwriting area
(1)
Characters can be erased/changed in several
ways:
•
Tap the desired character in the list (3).
•
Tap button (5) to erase the character and
start again.
•
Sweep horizontally from right to left over the
handwriting area (1). Erase several charac-
ters by swiping over the area several times.
•
Tap the "x" in the text box (2) to delete all
characters.
New lines
Create a new line by drawing above the characters as
shown in the illustration
Blank spaces
Add a blank space by swiping from left to right
Related information
•
Using the center display (p. 34)
•
Center display overview (p. 32)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 38)
INTRODUCTION
52
Changing settings in different types
of apps
App view, which is one of the center display's
basic views, contains all of the vehicle's apps
(applications/programs). Access this view by
swiping the screen from right to left.
Basic apps
A number of apps are standard and are part of
Volvo Sensus, such as
FM Radio, USB and CD.
To change settings in a basic app:
1.
Open the app, for example
Phone, either on
the home screen or full-screen from App
view.
2. Pull down Top view.
3.
Tap
Phone settings.
4. Change the desired settings and confirm.
5. Press the Home button, tap the screen out-
side of Top view or pull Top view up.
Third-party apps
Third party apps have to be selected and down-
loaded. In these apps, setting are made from
within the app, not from Top view.
INTRODUCTION
}}
53
General information about Twin
Engine Plug-in Hybrid vehicles
Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid vehicles are driven
like any other vehicle but have certain functional-
ity that differs from a vehicle powered exclusively
by a gasoline engine. The electric motor powers
the vehicle primarily at low speeds; the gasoline
engine is used at higher speeds or during more
active driving.
||
INTRODUCTION
54
Overview
INTRODUCTION
}}
55
Electrical current for charging the hybrid bat-
tery
Electric motor for powering the rear wheels
Hybrid battery
Drive modes (change in the center display or
by using the drive mode control in the tunnel
console)
Instrument panel showing unique hybrid-rela-
ted information
WARNING
Please be aware that there is no sound from
the gasoline engine when the vehicle is being
powered by the electric motor and the vehicle
may be difficult to detect by children, pedes-
trians, cyclists and animals. This is especially
true at low speeds.
High-voltage electrical current
WARNING
A number of electrical components in Twin
Engine Plug-in Hybrid vehicles use high-volt-
age current and can be extremely dangerous
if handled incorrectly. These components and
any orange wiring in the vehicle may only be
handled by trained and qualified Volvo service
technicians.
Hybrid-unique functions
Drive modes
Different drive modes can be selected while driv-
ing, e.g., electric power only or a combination of
electric and gasoline power. The vehicle calcu-
lates the optimal combination of drivability, driving
experience, environmental impact and fuel econ-
omy for the selected drive mode. See also the
article "Drive modes" for additional information.
Instrument panel
In certain driving situations, hybrid-unique infor-
mation may be displayed in the instrument panel,
such as: a hybrid battery gauge (current charge
level), the current drive mode, a symbol that illu-
minates when the gasoline engine is being used,
a Hybrid Guide and the level of energy regenera-
tion.
Preconditioning
In order to function optimally, the hybrid battery
(and its related electrical systems) and the gaso-
line engine (and its drive systems) should be at
the correct operating temperature. The hybrid
battery's capacity is reduced considerably if it is
too cold or hot. Preconditioning prepares the
vehicle's drive systems and passenger compart-
ment before the vehicle is driven to help reduce
wear and energy consumption.
Charging the hybrid battery
CAUTION
Never connect the charging cable if there is a
risk of thunderstorms/lightning.
Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid vehicles use a lith-
ium-ion battery that can be charged in several
ways:
•
A charging cable can be connected from the
vehicle to a 110-volt AC socket. Charging
time depends on the strength of the current.
•
When the brakes are applied lightly, the elec-
tric motor is used for engine braking, during
which the vehicle's kinetic energy is conver-
ted into electric current that is used to help
recharge the hybrid battery.
•
The hybrid battery is also recharged to a cer-
tain extent when the gasoline engine is in
operation.
Related information
•
Drive modes (p. 380)
•
Hybrid-related information in the instrument
panel (p. 100)
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 414)
INTRODUCTION
}}
57
Volvo Structural Parts Statement
Volvo has always been and continues to be a
leader in automotive safety.
Volvo engineers and manufactures vehicles
designed to help protect vehicle occupants in the
event of a collision.
Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of a
collision. This energy absorption system including,
but not limited to, structural components such as
bumper reinforcement bars, bumper energy
absorbers, frames, rails, fender aprons, A-pillars,
B-pillars and body panels must work together to
maintain cabin integrity and protect the vehicle
occupants.
The supplemental restraint system including but
not limited to air bags, side curtain air bags, and
deployment sensors work together with the
above components to provide proper timing for
air bag deployment.
Due to the above, Volvo Car USA does not sup-
port the use of aftermarket, alternative or any-
thing other than original Volvo parts for collision
repair.
Volvo Car USA also recommends using Volvo-
approved replacement glass. The use of after-
market glass, particularly a windshield, can have
an adverse effect on collision avoidance and
advanced lighting systems.
In addition Volvo does not support the use or re-
use of structural components from an existing
vehicle that has been previously damaged.
Although these parts may appear equivalent, it is
difficult to tell if the parts have been previously
replaced with non-OE parts or if the part has
been damaged as a result of a prior collision. The
quality of these used parts may also have been
affected due to environmental exposure.
Related information
•
Crash event data (p. 22)
•
Contacting Volvo (p. 59)
Driver distraction
Please keep the following warnings in mind
when operating/servicing your vehicle.
A driver has a responsibility to do everything pos-
sible to ensure his or her own safety and the
safety of passengers in the vehicle and others
sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions is part
of that responsibility.
Driver distraction results from driver activities that
are not directly related to controlling the vehicle
in the driving environment. Your new Volvo is, or
can be, equipped with many feature-rich enter-
tainment and communication systems. These
include hands-free cellular telephones, navigation
systems, and multipurpose audio systems. You
may also own other portable electronic devices
for your own convenience. When used properly
and safely, they enrich the driving experience.
Improperly used, any of these could cause a dis-
traction.
For all of these systems, we want to provide the
following warning that reflects the strong Volvo
concern for your safety. Never use these devices
or any feature of your vehicle in a way that dis-
tracts you from the task of driving safely. Distrac-
tion can lead to a serious accident. In addition to
this general warning, we offer the following guid-
ance regarding specific newer features that may
be found in your vehicle:
||
INTRODUCTION
58
WARNING
•
Never use a hand-held cellular telephone
while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit
cellular telephone use by a driver while
the vehicle is moving.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga-
tion system, set and make changes to
your travel itinerary only with the vehicle
parked.
•
Never program your audio system while
the vehicle is moving. Program radio pre-
sets with the vehicle parked, and use your
programmed presets to make radio use
quicker and simpler.
•
Never use portable computers or per-
sonal digital assistants while the vehicle
is moving.
Accessory installation
•
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners
install only genuine, Volvo-approved acces-
sories, and that accessory installations be
performed only by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
•
Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to
ensure compatibility with the performance,
safety, and emission systems in your vehicle.
Additionally, a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician knows where accessories
may and may not be safely installed in your
Volvo. In all cases, please consult a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician before
installing any accessory in or on your vehicle.
•
Accessories that have not been approved by
Volvo may or may not be specifically tested
for compatibility with your vehicle. Addition-
ally, an inexperienced installer may not be
familiar with some of your car's systems.
•
Any of your car's performance and safety
systems could be adversely affected if you
install accessories that Volvo has not tested,
or if you allow accessories to be installed by
someone unfamiliar with your vehicle.
•
Damage caused by unapproved or improperly
installed accessories may not be covered by
your new vehicle warranty. See your Warranty
and Service Records Information booklet for
more warranty information. Volvo assumes no
responsibility for death, injury, or expenses
that may result from the installation of non-
genuine accessories.
WARNING
The driver is always responsible for operating
the vehicle in a safe manner and for comply-
ing with current statutes and regulations.
It is also essential to maintain and service the
vehicle according to Volvo's recommendations
as stated in the owner's information and the
service and warranty booklet.
If the on-board information differs from the
printed owner's manual, the printed informa-
tion always takes precedence.
Related information
•
Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 57)
INTRODUCTION
59
Technician certification
In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo sup-
ports certification by the National Institute for
Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.).
Certified technicians have demonstrated a high
degree of competence in specific areas. Besides
passing exams, each technician must also have
worked in the field for two or more years before a
certificate is issued. These professional techni-
cians are best able to analyze vehicle problems
and perform the necessary maintenance proce-
dures to keep your Volvo at peak operating con-
dition.
Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid vehicles
Technicians performing work on a vehicle with
electrification should also have the necessary
training and specialized certification required for
performing repairs and/or maintenance on a
vehicle with electrification.
WARNING
A number of electrical components in Twin
Engine Plug-in Hybrid vehicles use high-volt-
age current and can be extremely dangerous
if handled incorrectly. These components and
any orange wiring in the vehicle may only be
handled by trained and qualified Volvo service
technicians.
Contacting Volvo
Use the following contact information if you
would like to get in touch with Volvo in the Uni-
ted States or Canada.
In the USA:
Volvo Car USA, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive,
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552
www.volvocars.com/us
In Canada:
Volvo Car Canada Ltd.
Customer Care Centre
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
1-800-663-8255
www.volvocars.com/ca
Volvo Roadside Assistance
Your new Volvo comes with a four year Volvo
Roadside Assistance program.
Additional information, features, and benefits of
this program are described in a separate informa-
tion package in your glove compartment.
If you require assistance, dial:
In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63-
VOLVO)
In Canada 1-800-263-0475
SAFETY
SAFETY
62
General safety information
The vehicle is equipped with a number of safety
systems for the driver and passengers.
In the event of an accident, there are a number of
sensors in the vehicle that react and trigger
safety systems such as Roll Stability Control, air-
bags, seat belt pretensioners, etc., depending on
the severity of the collision. There are also
mechanical systems such as the Whiplash
Protection System.
Warning symbol in the instrument panel
The warning symbol in the instrument
panel illuminates when the ignition is in
mode II or higher. It will go out after
approx. 6 seconds if no faults are
detected in the airbag system.
WARNING
•
If the SRS warning light stays on after the
engine has started or if it illuminates
while you are driving, have the vehicle
inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician as soon as possible.
•
Never try to repair any component or part
of the SRS yourself. Any interference in
the system could cause malfunction and
serious injury. All work on these systems
should be performed by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
If the dedicated warning symbol is not
functioning, the general warning sym-
bol will illuminate instead and the same
message will be displayed in the instru-
ment panel.
Related information
•
Safety during pregnancy (p. 62)
•
Seat belts (p. 66)
•
Airbag system (p. 71)
•
Safety mode (p. 79)
•
Whiplash protection system (p. 63)
•
Child safety (p. 81)
Safety during pregnancy
The seat belt should always be worn during
pregnancy. However, it is crucial that it be worn
correctly.
The diagonal section should wrap over the shoul-
der then be routed between the breasts and to
the side of the belly. The lap section should lay
flat over the thighs and as low as possible under
the belly. It must never be allowed to ride upward.
Remove all slack from the belt and ensure that it
fits close to the body without any twists.
As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel such
that they can easily maintain control of the vehi-
cle as they drive (which means they must be able
to easily operate the foot pedals and steering
wheel). Within this context, they should strive to
position the seat with as large a distance as pos-
sible between their belly and the steering wheel.
SAFETY
}}
* Option/accessory.
63
Related information
•
Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 68)
•
Adjusting power front seats* (p. 128)
•
Manually operated front seats (p. 127)
Whiplash protection system
The Whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con-
sists of specially designed hinges and brackets
on the front seat backrests designed to help
absorb some of the energy generated in a colli-
sion from the rear (when the vehicle is rear-
ended).
Function
In the event of certain rear-end collisions, the
hinges and brackets of the front seat backrests
are designed to change position slightly to allow
the backrest/head restraint to help support the
occupant's head before moving slightly rearward.
This movement helps absorb some of the forces
that could result in whiplash.
WARNING
•
The WHIPS system is designed to sup-
plement the other safety systems in your
vehicle. For this system to function prop-
erly, the three-point seat belt must be
worn. Please be aware that no system
can prevent all possible injuries that may
occur in an accident.
•
The WHIPS system is designed to func-
tion in certain collisions from the rear,
depending on the crash severity, angle
and speed.
WARNING
•
Occupants in the front seats must never
sit out of position. The occupant's back
must be as upright as comfort allows and
be against the seat back with the seat
belt properly fastened.
•
If your vehicle has been involved in a rear-
end collision, the front seat backrests
must be inspected by a trained and quali-
fied Volvo service technician, even if the
seats appear to be undamaged. Certain
components in the WHIPS system may
need to be replaced.
•
Do not attempt to service any component
in the WHIPS system yourself.
WARNING
•
Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind the
front seats could impede the function of
the Whiplash Protection System.
•
If the rear seat backrests are folded
down, cargo must be secured to prevent
it from sliding forward against the front
seat backrests in the event of a collision
from the rear. This could interfere with
the action of the Whiplash Protection
System.
||
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
64
Do not place any objects behind the front seats that
could impede the WHIPS function
WARNING
Any contact between the front seat backrests
and the folded rear seat or a rear-facing child
seat could impede the function of the WHIPS
system. If the rear seat is folded down, the
occupied front seats must be adjusted for-
ward so that they do not touch the folded rear
seat.
Related information
•
General safety information (p. 62)
•
Rear Collision Warning (RCW) (p. 321)
•
Manually operated front seats (p. 127)
•
Power front seats* (p. 127)
Occupant safety
Safety is Volvo's cornerstone.
Volvo's concern for safety
Our concern for safety dates back to 1927 when
the first Volvo rolled off the production line.
Three-point seat belts (a Volvo invention), safety
cages, and energy-absorbing impact zones were
designed into Volvo vehicles long before it was
fashionable or required by government regulation.
We will not compromise our commitment to
safety. We continue to seek out new safety fea-
tures and to refine those already in our vehicles.
You can help. We would appreciate hearing your
suggestions about improving automobile safety.
We also want to know if you ever have a safety
concern with your vehicle. Call us in the U.S. at:
1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at:
1-800-663-8255.
Occupant safety reminders
How safely you drive doesn't depend on how old
you are but rather on:
•
How well you see.
•
Your ability to concentrate.
•
How quickly you make decisions under
stress to avoid an accident.
The following suggestions are intended to help
you cope with the ever changing traffic environ-
ment.
•
Never drink and drive.
•
If you are taking any medication, consult your
physician about its potential effects on your
driving abilities.
•
Take a driver-retraining course.
•
Have your eyes checked regularly.
•
Keep your windshield and headlights clean.
•
Replace wiper blades when they start to
leave streaks.
•
Take into account the traffic, road, and
weather conditions, particularly with regard to
stopping distance.
•
Never send text messages while driving.
•
Refrain from using or minimize the use of a
cell phone while driving.
Related information
•
Recall information (p. 66)
•
Reporting safety defects (p. 65)
SAFETY
65
Reporting safety defects
The following information will help you report any
perceived safety-related defects in your vehicle.
Reporting safety defects in the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Volvo
Car USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives simi-
lar complaints, it may open an investi-
gation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy cam-
paign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems
between you, your retailer, or Volvo Car
USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may
either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-
free at
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transpor-
tation, Washington D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov, where you can also
enter your vehicle's VIN (Vehicle Identi-
fication Number) to see if it has any
open recalls.
Volvo strongly recommends that if your
vehicle is covered under a service cam-
paign, safety or emission recall or simi-
lar action, it should be completed as
soon as possible. Please check with
your local retailer or Volvo Car USA,
LLC if your vehicle is covered under
these conditions.
NHTSA can be reached at:
Internet:
http://www.nhtsa.gov
Telephone:
1-888-DASH-2-DOT
(1-888-327-4236).
Reporting safety defects in Canada
If you believe your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Transport Canada in
addition to notifying Volvo Car Canada Ltd.
Transport Canada can be contacted at:
1-800-333-0510
Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500
Fax: 1-819-994-3372
Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road
Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z 0A1
Related information
•
Recall information (p. 66)
•
Occupant safety (p. 64)
SAFETY
66
Recall information
On our website, select the "Own" tab on the
upper left side of the screen and click the head-
ing "Recall Information" on the right side of the
screen. Enter your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) for your vehicle (found at the base of the
windshield). If your vehicle has any open Recalls,
they will be displayed on this page.
You can also enter the Vehicle Identification
Number in the search field on the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration's (NHTSA)
website at: www.nhtsa.gov.
Volvo customers in Canada
For any questions regarding open recalls for your
vehicle, please contact your authorized Volvo
retailer. If your retailer is unable to answer your
questions, please contact Volvo Customer Rela-
tions at 800-663-8255, Monday through Friday,
8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. EST or volvocars.com/ca.
You may also write us at:
Volvo Car Canada Ltd.
Customer Care Centre
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
www.tc.gc.ca
Related information
•
Occupant safety (p. 64)
•
Reporting safety defects (p. 65)
Seat belts
Seat belts should always be worn by all occu-
pants of your vehicle. Children should be prop-
erly restrained, using an infant, car, or booster
seat determined by age, weight and height.
Most states and provinces make it mandatory for
occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.
Reversible seat belt pretensioners
Reversible seat belt pretensioners is a system in
the front seats that pulls the seat belts slightly
taut prior to a collision. This function helps posi-
tion the front seat occupants to help improve the
effects of other safety systems, e.g., the airbag
system.
Seat belt maintenance
Check periodically that the seat belts are in good
condition. Use water and a mild detergent for
cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism function as
follows: attach the seat belt and pull rapidly on
the strap.
WARNING
•
Never repair the belt yourself; have this
work done by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician only.
•
Any device used to induce slack into the
shoulder belt portion of the three-point
belt system will have a detrimental effect
on the amount of protection available to
you in the event of a collision.
•
The seat back should not be tilted too far
back. The shoulder belt must be taut in
order to function properly.
•
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that children who have outgrown these
devices sit in the rear seat with the seat
belt properly fastened.
Related information
•
Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 68)
•
Door and seat belt reminders (p. 70)
•
Seat belt pretensioners (p. 67)
SAFETY
67
Seat belt pretensioners
The vehicle's seat belts are equipped with stand-
ard and electric pretensioners that can help pull
the seat belts taut in a critical situation or a colli-
sion. Some or all of the pretensioners will be
triggered in certain types of collisions, depend-
ing on the direction and severity of the impact.
Reversible seat belt pretensioners
Reversible seat belt pretensioners is a system in
the front seats that pulls the seat belts slightly
taut prior to a collision. This function helps posi-
tion the front seat occupants to help improve the
effects of other safety systems, e.g., the airbag
system.
Seat belt pretensioners in collisions
The seat belts are equipped with standard pre-
tensioners that are triggered according to the
severity of a collision.
Seat belt pretensioners in critical
situations
In addition to the standard pretensioners, the
seat belts in the front seats are also equipped
with electric pretensioners.
The pretensioners interact and can be triggered
along with the City Safety and Rear Collision
Warning systems. In critical situations such as
sudden braking, evasive maneuvers, etc., the seat
belt can be pulled taut by the pretensioner's
electric motor.
The electric pretensioner positions the occupant
in the seat to help reduce the risk of striking the
interior of the passenger compartment and
improves the effect of other safety systems such
as the airbags.
Resetting the electric pretensioners
When a critical situation has passed, the seat belt
and the electric pretensioner are reset automati-
cally.
If the seat belt should remain taut:
1. Stop the vehicle safely.
2. Unbuckle the seat belt and rebuckle it.
> The seat belt and the electric preten-
sioner will be reset.
WARNING
•
Never repair the belt yourself; have this
work done by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician only.
•
Any device used to induce slack into the
shoulder belt portion of the three-point
belt system will have a detrimental effect
on the amount of protection available to
you in the event of a collision.
•
The seat back should not be tilted too far
back. The shoulder belt must be taut in
order to function properly.
•
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that children who have outgrown these
devices sit in the rear seat with the seat
belt properly fastened.
Related information
•
Seat belts (p. 66)
•
Door and seat belt reminders (p. 70)
•
Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 68)
SAFETY
68
Buckling and unbuckling seat belts
Seat belts should be used by all occupants in
the vehicle when it is in motion.
Buckling a seat belt
1. Pull the belt out slowly. It should not be twis-
ted or turned.
NOTE
Each seat belt is equipped with a seat belt
retractor that will lock up in the following sit-
uations:
•
if the belt is pulled out rapidly
•
during braking and acceleration
•
if the vehicle is leaning excessively
•
when driving in turns
•
if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-
gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is
activated (each seat belt (except for the
driver's belt) is equipped with the
ALR/ELR function, which is designed to
help keep the seat belt taut. ALR/ELR
activates if the seat belt is pulled out as far
as possible. If this is done, a sound from
the seat belt retractor will be audible,
which is normal, and the seat belt will be
pulled taut and locked in place. This func-
tion is automatically disabled when the
seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted).
2. Insert the latch plate into the receptacle. The
seat belt retractor is normally "unlocked" and
you can move freely, provided that the shoul-
der belt is not pulled out too far.
> A distinct click will be audible.
WARNING
The seat belt latch plate should only be
inserted into its intended receptacle. Inserting
it into one of the other receptacles may pre-
vent it from functioning properly.
3. The height of the seat belts in the front seats
can be adjusted. The height of the shoulder
section of the seat belt must be correctly
adjusted.
Press the button and move the upper seat
belt anchor up or down.
Position it as high as possible so that the
shoulder section of the belt is across the seat
occupant's collarbone and not across the
throat.
SAFETY
69
The seat belt should be positioned over the shoulder
(not over the arm)
4. Tighten the lap section of the seat belt by
pulling the diagonal section upward toward
the shoulder.
The lap section of the belt must be positioned low on the
hips (not pressing against the abdomen)
Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled up
into its retractor and that the shoulder and
lap belts are taut.
WARNING
Never use a seat belt for more than one
occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion of
the belt under the arm, behind the back or
otherwise out of position. Such use could
cause injury in the event of an accident. As
seat belts lose much of their strength when
exposed to violent stretching, they should be
replaced after any collision, even if they
appear to be undamaged.
Unbuckling the seat belt
To remove the seat belt, press the red section on
the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the vehi-
cle, check that the seat belt retracts fully after
being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the belt
back into the retractor slot.
Related information
•
Door and seat belt reminders (p. 70)
•
Seat belts (p. 66)
SAFETY
70
Door and seat belt reminders
The door and seat belt reminders are intended
to alert all occupants of the vehicle that their
seat belts should be buckled before the vehicle
begins to move or if a door, the hood, tailgate or
fuel filler door have not been closed properly.
Graphics in the instrument panel
Warning colors for doors/tailgate vary depending on the
vehicle's speed (generic illustration)
The instrument panel graphic shows the seats
where seat belts are not buckled.
The same graphic also indicates if a door, the
hood, tailgate or fuel filler door is/are open.
This graphic disappears automatically after
approx. 6 seconds or if the if the O button on the
steering wheel keypad is pressed.
Seat belt reminder
Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console
The seat belt reminder consists of an
audible signal, an indicator light near
the rearview mirror and a symbol in the
instrument panel that alert all occu-
pants of the vehicle to buckle their seat belts.
The audible signal is speed-dependent and will
sound for several seconds.
If the driver's or a passenger's seat belt is not
buckled, this will be indicated in the instrument
panel.
Child seats are not included in the seat belt
reminder system.
Front seats
An audible signal and an indicator light will
remind the driver and front seat passenger to
buckle their seat belts.
Rear seats
The rear seat belt reminder has two functions.
•
It indicates which seat belts are buckled in
the rear seats. This will also be displayed in
an instrument panel graphic. This graphic
can be erased by pressing the O button on
the steering wheel keypad.
•
It also provides audio and visual reminders if
a rear seat belt is unbuckled while the vehi-
cle is in motion. The reminders will disappear
when the seat belt has been buckled again.
Door/hood/tailgate/fuel filler door
reminder
If a door, the hood, tailgate or fuel filler door
is/are not properly closed, this will be indicated in
a graphic in the instrument panel. Stop the vehi-
cle safely and close the source of the reminder.
If the vehicle is moving at a speed
under approx.6 mph (10 km/h), the
information symbol will illuminate in the
instrument panel.
At speeds above approx. 6 mph
(10 km/h), the warning symbol will illu-
minate in the instrument panel.
Related information
•
Seat belts (p. 66)
•
Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 68)
•
Seat belt pretensioners (p. 67)
SAFETY
}}
71
Airbag system
As an enhancement to the three-point seat belts,
your vehicle is equipped with an airbag system.
WARNING
•
If the airbag warning light stays on after
the engine has started or if it illuminates
while you are driving, have the vehicle
inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician as soon as possible.
•
Never try to repair any component or part
of the airbag systems yourself. Any inter-
ference in the system could cause mal-
function and serious injury. All work on
these systems should be performed by a
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian.
WARNING
If your vehicle has become flood-damaged in
any way (e.g., soaked carpeting/standing
water on the floor of the vehicle), do not
attempt to start the vehicle. This may cause
airbag deployment which could result in seri-
ous injury. Have the vehicle towed to a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician for
repairs.
Before attempting to tow the vehicle:
1. Switch off the ignition for at least
10 minutes and disconnect the battery.
2. Follow the instructions for manually over-
riding the shiftlock system.
Deployed airbags
WARNING
If any of the airbags have deployed:
•
Do not attempt to drive the vehicle. Have
it towed to a qualified repair facility.
•
If necessary seek medical attentIon.
Driver/passenger side airbags
The front airbags supplement the three-point
seat belts. For these airbags to provide the pro-
tection intended, seat belts must be worn at all
times.
Driver and passenger side front airbags
The front airbag system
The front airbag system includes gas generators
surrounded by the airbags, and deceleration sen-
sors that activate the gas generators, causing the
airbags to be inflated with nitrogen gas.
As the movement of the seats' occupants com-
presses the airbags, some of the gas is expelled
at a controlled rate to provide better cushioning.
Both seat belt pretensioners also deploy, mini-
mizing seat belt slack. The entire process, includ-
ing inflation and deflation of the airbags, takes
approximately one fifth of a second.
||
SAFETY
72
The location of the front airbags is indicated by
SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel
pad and above the glove compartment, and by
decals on both sun visors and on the front and
far right side of the dash.
The driver's side front airbag is folded and
located in the steering wheel hub.
The knee airbag is folded on the underside of
the dashboard on the driver's side. The text
AIRBAG is embossed on the panel.
The passenger's side front airbag is folded
behind a panel located above the glove compart-
ment.
WARNING
•
The airbags in the vehicle are designed to
be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a replace-
ment for–the three-point seat belts. For
maximum protection, wear seat belts at all
times. Be aware that no system can pre-
vent all possible injuries that may occur in
an accident.
•
Never drive with your hands on the steer-
ing wheel pad/airbag housing.
•
The front airbags are designed to help
prevent serious injury. Deployment occurs
very quickly and with considerable force.
During normal deployment and depend-
ing on variables such as seating position,
one may experience abrasions, bruises,
swellings, or other injuries as a result
from deployment of one or both of the
airbags.
•
When installing any accessory equipment,
make sure that the front airbag system is
not damaged. Any interference in the sys-
tem could cause malfunction.
Front airbag deployment
•
The front airbags are designed to deploy dur-
ing certain frontal or front-angular collisions,
impacts, or decelerations, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and object
impacted. The airbags may also deploy in
certain non-frontal collisions where rapid
deceleration occurs.
•
The airbag system sensors, which trigger the
front airbags, are designed to react to both
the impact of the collision and the inertial
forces generated by it, and to determine if
the intensity of the collision is sufficient for
the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags to
be deployed.
However, not all frontal collisions activate the
front airbags.
•
If the collision involves a nonrigid object (e.g.,
a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed object
at a low speed, the front airbags will not nec-
essarily deploy.
•
Front airbags do not normally deploy in a
side impact collision, in a collision from the
rear or in a rollover situation.
•
The amount of damage to the bodywork
does not reliably indicate if the airbags
should have deployed or not.
SAFETY
}}
73
NOTE
•
Deployment of front airbags occurs only
one time during an accident. In a collision
where deployment occurs, the airbags
and seat belt pretensioners activate.
Some noise occurs and a small amount
of powder is released. The release of the
powder may appear as smoke-like matter.
This is a normal characteristic and does
not indicate fire.
•
Volvo's front airbags use special sensors
that are integrated with the front seat
buckles. The point at which the airbag
deploys is determined by whether or not
the seat belt is being used, as well as the
severity of the collision.
•
Collisions can occur where only one of
the airbags deploys. If the impact is less
severe, but severe enough to present a
clear injury risk, the airbags are triggered
at partial capacity. If the impact is more
severe, the airbags are triggered at full
capacity.
WARNING
•
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) in height who have outgrown
these devices sit in the rear seat with the
seat belt fastened. See also the Occu-
pant Weight Sensor information.
•
Never drive with the airbags deployed.
The fact that they hang out can impair the
steering of your vehicle. Other safety sys-
tems can also be damaged.
•
The smoke and dust formed when the
airbags are deployed can cause skin and
eye irritation in the event of prolonged
exposure.
Should you have questions about any component
in the SRS system, please contact a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician or Volvo cus-
tomer support:
In the USA
Volvo Car USA, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552
www.volvocars.com/us
In Canada
Volvo Car Canada Ltd.
Customer Care Centre
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
1-800-663-8255
www.volvocars.com/ca
Airbag decals
Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors
||
SAFETY
74
Passenger's side airbag decal
WARNING
•
Children must never be allowed in the
front passenger's seat.
•
Occupants in the front passenger's seat
must never sit on the edge of the seat, sit
leaning toward the instrument panel or
otherwise sit out of position.
•
The occupant's back must be as upright
as comfort allows and be against the seat
back with the seat belt properly fastened.
•
Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on the
dash, seat or out of the window.
WARNING
•
No objects or accessory equipment, e.g.
dashboard covers, may be placed on,
attached to, or installed near the air bag
hatch (the area above the glove compart-
ment) or the area affected by airbag
deployment.
•
There should be no loose articles, such
as coffee cups on the floor, seat, or dash-
board area.
•
Never try to open the airbag cover on the
steering wheel or the passenger's side
dashboard. This should only be done by a
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian.
•
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the vehicle occupants.
Related information
•
Seat belts (p. 66)
•
Occupant weight sensor (p. 74)
Occupant weight sensor
The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is
designed to meet the regulatory requirements of
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
208 and is designed to disable (will not inflate)
the passenger's side front airbag under certain
conditions.
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light
Disabling the passenger's side front
airbag
Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults
and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any vehi-
cle with a front passenger side airbag and be
properly restrained for their size and weight.
The OWS works with sensors that are part of the
front passenger's seat and seat belt. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly
SAFETY
}}
75
seated occupant and determine if the passeng-
er's side front airbag should be enabled (may
inflate) or disabled (will not inflate).
The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas-
senger's side front airbag when:
•
the front passenger's seat is unoccupied, or
has small/medium objects in the front seat,
•
the system determines that an infant is pres-
ent in a rear-facing infant seat that is instal-
led according to the manufacturer's instruc-
tions,
•
the system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint
that is installed according to the manufactur-
er's instructions,
•
the system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat,
•
a front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time,
•
a child or a small person occupies the front
passenger's seat.
The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on to
remind you that the passenger's side front airbag
is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indi-
cator lamp is located in the overhead console,
near the base of the rearview mirror.
NOTE
When the ignition is switched on, the OWS
indicator light will illuminate for several sec-
onds while the system performs a self-diag-
nostic test.
However, if a fault is detected in the system:
•
The OWS indicator light will stay on
•
The SRS warning light will come on and stay
on and a text message will be displayed.
WARNING
If a fault in the system is detected and indi-
cated as described, be aware that the pas-
senger's side front airbag will not deploy in
the event of a collision. In this case, the SRS
system and Occupant Weight Sensor should
be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician as soon as possible.
WARNING
•
Never try to open, remove, or repair any
components in the OWS system. This
could result in system malfunction. Main-
tenance or repairs should only be carried
out by an a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
•
The front passenger's seat should not be
modified in any way. This could reduce
pressure on the seat cushion, which
might interfere with the OWS system's
function.
||
SAFETY
76
Passenger's
seat occu-
pancy status
OWS indi-
cator light
status
Passenger's
side front air-
bag status
Seat unoccu-
pied
OWS indi-
cator light
lights up.
Passenger's
side front air-
bag disabled
Seat occu-
pied by low
weight occu-
pant/object
A
OWS indi-
cator light
lights up
Passenger's
side front air-
bag disabled
Seat occu-
pied by heavy
occupant/
object
OWS indi-
cator light is
not lit
Passenger's
side front air-
bag enabled
A
Volvo recommends that children always be properly restrained
in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do not assume
that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled unless the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. Make sure the
child restraint is properly installed. If there is any doubt as to the
status of the passenger's side front airbag, move the child
restraint to the rear seat.
The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate) the
passenger's side front airbag in the event of a
collision anytime the system senses that a per-
son of adult size is sitting properly in the front
passenger's seat. The PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF indicator lamp will be off and remain off.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front pas-
senger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible that the
person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If this
happens:
•
Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in an upright position.
•
Have the person sit upright in the seat, cen-
tered on the seat cushion, with the person's
legs comfortably extended.
•
Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two minutes.
This will allow the system to detect that per-
son and enable the passenger's frontal air-
bag.
•
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp remains on even after this, the person
should be advised to ride in the rear seat.
This condition reflects limitations of the OWS
classification capability. It does not indicate OWS
malfunction.
Modifications
If you are considering modifying your vehicle in
any way to accommodate a disability, for example
by altering or adapting the driver's or front pas-
senger's seat(s) and/or airbag systems, please
contact Volvo at:
In the USA
Volvo Car USA, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552
In Canada
Volvo Car Canada Ltd.
Customer Care Centre
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
1-800-663-8255
SAFETY
77
WARNING
•
No objects that add to the total weight on
the seat should be placed on the front
passenger's seat. If a child is seated in
the front passenger's seat with any addi-
tional weight, this extra weight could
cause the OWS system to enable the air-
bag, which might cause it to deploy in the
event of a collision, thereby injuring the
child.
•
The seat belt should never be wrapped
around an object on the front passeng-
er's seat. This could interfere with the
OWS system's function.
•
The front passenger's seat belt should
never be used in a way that exerts more
pressure on the passenger than normal.
This could increase the pressure exerted
on the weight sensor by a child, and
could result in the airbag being enabled,
which might cause it to deploy in the
event of a collision, thereby injuring the
child.
WARNING
•
Keep the following points in mind with
respect to the OWS system. Failure to
follow these instructions could adversely
affect the system's function and result in
serious injury to the occupant of the front
passenger's seat:
•
The full weight of the front seat passen-
ger should always be on the seat cushion.
The passenger should never lift him/
herself off the seat cushion using the
armrest in the door or the center console,
by pressing the feet on the floor, by sit-
ting on the edge of the seat cushion, or
by pressing against the backrest in a way
that reduces pressure on the seat cush-
ion. This could cause OWS to disable the
front, passenger's side airbag.
WARNING
•
Do not place any type of object on the
front passenger's seat in such a way that
jamming, pressing, or squeezing occurs
between the object and the front seat,
other than as a direct result of the correct
use of the Automatic Locking Retractor/
Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR)
seat belt.
•
No objects should be placed under the
front passenger's seat. This could inter-
fere with the OWS system's function.
Related information
•
Airbag system (p. 71)
SAFETY
78
Side impact airbags
As an enhancement to the structural side impact
protection built into your vehicle, it is also equip-
ped with Side Impact Protection System (SIPS)
airbags.
The SIPS airbag system is designed to help
increase occupant protection in the event of cer-
tain side impact collisions. The SIPS airbags are
designed to deploy only during certain side-
impact collisions, depending on the crash
severity, angle, speed and point of impact.
NOTE
SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs
only on the side of the vehicle affected by the
impact. The airbags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact situations.
Components in the SIPS airbag system
This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas gener-
ator, the side airbag modules built into the out-
board sides of both front seat backrests, and
electronic sensors/wiring.
WARNING
•
The SIPS airbag system is a supplement
to the structural Side Impact Protection
System and the three-point seat belt sys-
tem. It is not designed to deploy during
collisions from the front or rear of the
vehicle or in rollover situations.
•
The use of seat covers on the front seats
may impede SIPS airbag deployment.
•
No objects, accessory equipment or stick-
ers may be placed on, attached to or
installed near the SIPS airbag system or
in the area affected by SIPS airbag
deployment.
•
Never try to open or repair any compo-
nents of the SIPS airbag system. This
should be done only by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
•
In order for the SIPS airbag to provide its
best protection, both front seat occupants
should sit in an upright position with the
seat belt properly fastened.
•
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the occupants of the
vehicle in the event of an accident.
Related information
•
Airbag system (p. 71)
•
Seat belts (p. 66)
SAFETY
}}
79
Inflatable curtains
The inflatable curtain is designed to help protect
the heads of the occupants of the front seats
and the occupant of the outboard rear seating
positions in certain side impact collisions.
This system consists of inflatable curtains located
along the sides of the roof liners, stretching from
the center of both front side windows to the rear
edge of the rear side door windows.
In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Cur-
tain (IC) and the side Impact Airbag System
(SIPS airbag) will deploy. The IC and the SIPS
airbag deploy simultaneously.
WARNING
•
Never try to open or repair any compo-
nents of the IC system. This should be
done only by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
•
Never hang heavy items from the ceiling
handles. This could impede deployment
of the Inflatable Curtain.
•
The cargo compartment and rear seat
should not be loaded to a level higher
than 4 in. (10 cm) below the upper edge
of the rear side windows. Objects placed
higher than this level could impede the
function of the Inflatable Curtain.
•
In order for the IC to provide its best pro-
tection, both front seat occupants and
both outboard rear seat occupants should
sit in an upright position with the seat belt
properly fastened; adults using the seat
belt and children using the proper child
restraint system.
Related information
•
Airbag system (p. 71)
•
Side impact airbags (p. 78)
•
Child safety (p. 81)
•
Seat belts (p. 66)
Safety mode
As a safety precaution after a collision, the func-
tionality of some of the vehicle's systems may be
reduced.
If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, the
text
Safety mode may appear in the information
display.
NOTE
This text can only be shown if the display is
undamaged and the vehicle's electrical sys-
tem is intact.
Safety mode is a feature that is triggered if one
or more of the safety systems such as the front/
side airbags inflatable curtain, etc., or one or
more of the seat belt pretensioners has deployed.
The collision may have damaged an important
function in the vehicle, such as the fuel lines,
sensors for one of the safety systems, the brake
system, etc.
||
SAFETY
80
WARNING
•
Never attempt to repair the vehicle your-
self or to reset the electrical system after
the vehicle has displayed
Safety mode.
This could result in injury or improper sys-
tem function.
•
Restoring the vehicle to normal operating
status should only be done by a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
•
After
Safety mode has been displayed, if
you detect the odor of fuel vapor, or see
any signs of fuel leakage, do not attempt
to start the vehicle. Leave the vehicle
immediately.
Related information
•
Starting or moving a vehicle in safety mode
(p. 80)
•
General safety information (p. 62)
Starting or moving a vehicle in
safety mode
If
Safety mode has been set, it may be possible
to start and move the vehicle, for example, if it is
blocking traffic.
Starting the vehicle in safety mode
1. Check the vehicle for damage, particularly for
fuel leakage or the smell of gasoline fumes.
If the damage to the vehicle is minor and
there is no fuel leakage/fumes, you may
attempt to start the engine and move the
vehicle.
WARNING
If you smell gasoline fumes or detect fuel
leakage while
Safety mode See Owner's
manual is displayed in the instrument panel,
do not attempt to start the vehicle. Leave
the vehicle immediately.
2. Turn the start knob clockwise as far as possi-
ble and release it.
3. Try to start the vehicle.
>
Vehicle start System check, wait will
be displayed in the instrument panel while
the vehicle's electrical system attempts to
reset to normal mode. This may take up to
a minute.
4.
When
Vehicle start System check, wait is
no longer displayed, try to start the vehicle
again.
WARNING
If the message Safety mode See Owner's
manual is still displayed, the vehicle should
not be driven and must be towed (lifted onto a
flatbed tow truck. The vehicle may never be
towed with the wheels on the ground). Con-
cealed faults may make the vehicle difficult to
control.
Moving the vehicle after safety mode
has been set
If the message Normal mode The vehicle is
now in normal mode is displayed, the vehicle
may be moved carefully from its present position
if, for example, it is blocking traffic.
It should, however, not be moved farther than
is absolutely necessary.
WARNING
After Safety mode has been set, the vehicle
should not be driven or towed (pulled on the
ground by another vehicle). It must be trans-
ported on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician for inspec-
tion/repairs.
SAFETY
}}
81
Related information
•
Safety mode (p. 79)
•
Towing recommendations (p. 413)
Child safety
Children should always be seated safely when
traveling in the vehicle.
General information
Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint
systems for all occupants including children.
Remember that, regardless of age and size, a
child should always be properly restrained in a
vehicle.
Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/
LATCH attachments, which make it more conven-
ient to install child seats.
Some restraint systems for children are designed
to be secured in the vehicle by lap belts or the
lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. Such child
restraint systems can help protect children in
vehicles in the event of an accident only if they
are used properly. However, children could be
endangered in a crash if the child restraints are
not properly secured in the vehicle. Failure to fol-
low the installation instructions for your child
restraint can result in your child striking the vehi-
cle's interior in a sudden stop.
Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable
substitute for a child restraint system. In an acci-
dent, a child held in a person's arms can be
crushed between the vehicle's interior and an
unrestrained person. The child could also be
injured by striking the interior, or by being ejected
from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver or
impact. The same can also happen if the infant or
child rides unrestrained on the seat. Other occu-
pants should also be properly restrained to help
reduce the chance of injuring or increasing the
injury of a child.
All states and provinces have legislation govern-
ing how and where children should be carried in
a vehicle. Find out the regulations existing in your
state or province. Recent accident statistics have
shown that children are safer in rear seating
positions than front seating positions when prop-
erly restrained. A child restraint system can help
protect a child in a vehicle. Here's what to look
for when selecting a child restraint system:
It should have a label certifying that it meets
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-
ards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada, CMVSS 213.
Make sure the child restraint system is approved
for the child's height, weight and development –
the label required by the standard or regulation,
or instructions for infant restraints, typically pro-
vide this information.
In using any child restraint system, we urge you
to carefully look over the instructions that are
provided with the restraint. Be sure you under-
stand them and can use the device properly and
safely in this vehicle. A misused child restraint
system can result in increased injuries for both
the infant or child and other occupants in the
vehicle.
||
SAFETY
82
When a child has outgrown the child safety seat,
you should use the rear seat with the standard
seat belt fastened. The best way to help protect
the child here is to place the child on a cushion
so that the seat belt is properly located on the
hips. Legislation in your state or province may
mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in
combination with the seat belt, depending on the
child's age and/or size. Please check local regu-
lations.
A specially designed and tested booster cushion
and backrest can be obtained from your Volvo
retailer. See also the article "Integrated booster
cushion."
WARNING
•
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that children under 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) in height who have outgrown
these devices sit in the rear seat with the
seat belt fastened.
•
On hot days, the temperature in the vehi-
cle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure
to these high temperatures for even a
short period of time can cause heat-rela-
ted injury or death. Small children are par-
ticularly at risk. Never leave children unat-
tended in a vehicle.
Child seats should always be registered.
Volvo's recommendations
Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit in
the front seat of a car? It's quite simple really. A
front airbag is a very powerful device designed,
by law, to help protect an adult.
Because of the size of the airbag and its speed
of inflation, a child should never be placed in the
front seat, even if he or she is properly belted or
strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo has been
an innovator in safety for over seventy-five years,
and we'll continue to do our part. But we need
your help. Please remember to put your children
in the back seat, and buckle them up.
WARNING
A child restraint should never be reused if:
•
The vehicle has been involved in a colli-
sion, no matter how minor
•
Its history is unknown
•
It is older than the manufacturer's expira-
tion date
Volvo has some very specific
recommendations
•
Always wear your seat belt.
•
Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety
device which, when used with a three-point
seat belt can help reduce serious injuries
during certain types of accidents. Volvo rec-
ommends that you do not disconnect the air-
bag system in your vehicle.
•
Volvo strongly recommends that everyone in
the vehicle be properly restrained.
•
Volvo recommends that ALL occupants
(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet
7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back
seat of any vehicle with a front passenger
side airbag.
•
Drive safely!
Related information
•
Booster cushions (p. 89)
•
Convertible seats (p. 87)
SAFETY
}}
83
•
Infant seats (p. 85)
•
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 90)
•
Top tether anchors (p. 92)
Child restraints
Suitable child restraints should always be used
when children travel in the vehicle.
Child restraint systems
Infant seat
There are three main types of child restraint sys-
tems: infant seats, convertible seats and booster
cushions. They are classified according to the
child's age and size.
The child restraint should be secured using a
three-point seat belt, ISOFIX/LATCH anchors or
top tether anchors.
Convertible seat
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the front
passenger seat of any vehicle with a front
passenger airbag – not even if the "Passen-
ger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mir-
ror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with
Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an
accident were to cause the airbag to inflate,
this could lead to serious injury or death to a
child seated in this position.
||
SAFETY
84
Booster cushion
WARNING
Always refer to the child restraint manufactur-
er's instructions for detailed information on
securing the restraint.
WARNING
•
When not in use, keep the child restraint
system secured or remove it from the
passenger compartment to help prevent it
from injuring passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or collision.
•
A small child's head represents a consid-
erable part of its total weight and its neck
is still very weak. Volvo recommends that
children up to age 4 travel, properly
restrained, facing rearward. In addition,
Volvo recommends that children should
ride rearward facing, properly restrained,
as long as possible.
Automatic Locking Retractor/
Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/
ELR)
To make child seat installation easier, each seat
belt (except for the driver's belt) is equipped with
a locking mechanism to help keep the seat belt
taut.
When attaching the seat belt to a child seat:
1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat accord-
ing to the child seat manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.
3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the buckle
(lock) in the usual way.
4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around
the child seat.
A sound from the seat belt retractor will be audi-
ble at this time and is normal. The belt will now
be locked in place. This function is automatically
disabled when the seat belt is unlocked and the
belt is fully retracted.
WARNING
Do not use child safety seats or child booster
cushions/backrests in the front passenger's
seat. We also recommend that children who
have outgrown these devices sit in the rear
seat with the seat belt properly fastened.
Child restraint registration and recalls
Child restraints could be recalled for safety rea-
sons. You must register your child restraint to be
reached in a recall. To stay informed about child
safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out and return
the registration card that comes with new child
restraints.
Child restraint recall information is readily availa-
ble in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall infor-
mation in the U.S., call the U.S. Government's
Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393 or go to
http://www-odi.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/
recalls/register/childseat/index.cfm. In Canada,
visit Transport Canada's Child Safety website at
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/
menu.htm.
SAFETY
}}
85
Infant seats
Suitable child restraints should always be used
when children (depending on their age/size) are
seated in the vehicle.
Securing an infant seat with a seat belt
Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's
seat
1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the
vehicle.
2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat
WARNING
•
An infant seat must be in the rear-facing
position only.
•
The infant seat should not be positioned
behind the driver's seat unless there is
adequate space for safe installation.
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the front
passenger seat of any vehicle with a front
passenger airbag – not even if the "Passen-
ger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mir-
ror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with
Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an
accident were to cause the airbag to inflate,
this could lead to serious injury or death to a
child seated in this position.
3.
Fasten the seat belt
Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
||
SAFETY
86
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out
as far as possible to activate the belt's auto-
matic locking function.
NOTE
The locking retractor will automatically
release when the seat belt is unbuckled and
allowed to retract fully.
5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the
seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound from
the seat belt retractor's automatic locking
function will be audible at this time and is
normal. The seat belt should now be locked
in place.
Ensure that the seat is securely in place
6. Push and pull the infant seat along the seat
belt path to ensure that it is held securely in
place by the seat belt.
WARNING
It should not be possible to move the child
restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm)
in any direction along the seat belt path.
The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling
the seat belt and letting it retract completely.
Related information
•
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 90)
•
Top tether anchors (p. 92)
•
Convertible seats (p. 87)
•
Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 68)
•
Child safety (p. 81)
SAFETY
}}
87
Convertible seats
Suitable child restraints should always be used
when children (depending on their age/size) are
seated in the vehicle.
Securing a convertible seat with a seat
belt
Do not place the convertible seat in the front passeng-
er's seat
Convertible seats can be used in either a forward
or rearward-facing position, depending on the
age and size of the child.
Route the seat belt through the convertible seat
WARNING
Always use a convertible seat that is suitable
for the child's age and size. See the converti-
ble seat manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat of
the vehicle.
WARNING
•
A small child's head represents a consider-
able part of its total weight and its neck is
still very weak. Volvo recommends that
children up to age 4 travel, properly
restrained, facing rearward. In addition,
Volvo recommends that children should
ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as
long as possible.
•
Convertible child seats should be installed
in the rear seat only.
•
A rear-facing convertible seat should not
be positioned behind the driver's seat
unless there is adequate space for safe
installation.
2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
||
SAFETY
88
Fasten the seat belt
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out
as far as possible to activate the belt's auto-
matic locking function.
NOTE
The locking retractor will automatically
release when the seat belt is unbuckled and
allowed to retract fully.
5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place, let
the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound
from the seat belt retractor's automatic lock-
ing function will be audible at this time and is
normal. The seat belt should now be locked
in place.
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt
6. Push and pull the convertible seat along the
seat belt path to ensure that it is held
securely in place by the seat belt.
WARNING
It should not be possible to move the child
restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm)
in any direction along the seat belt path.
The convertible seat can be removed by unbuck-
ling the seat belt and letting it retract completely.
Ensure that the seat is securely in place
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the front
passenger seat of any vehicle with a front
passenger airbag – not even if the "Passen-
ger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mir-
ror is illuminated. If the severity of an accident
were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could
lead to serious injury or death to a child
seated in this position.
SAFETY
}}
89
Related information
•
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 90)
•
Top tether anchors (p. 92)
•
Booster cushions (p. 89)
•
Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 68)
•
Child safety (p. 81)
Booster cushions
Securing a booster cushion
Position the child correctly on the booster cushion
Booster cushions are recommended for children
who have outgrown convertible seats.
1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat of
the vehicle.
2. With the child properly seated on the booster
cushion, attach the seat belt to or around the
cushion according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
Positioning the seat belt
4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and
fits snugly around the child.
WARNING
•
The hip section of the three-point seat
belt must fit snugly across the child's
hips, not across the stomach.
•
The shoulder section of the three-point
seat belt should be positioned across the
chest and shoulder.
•
The shoulder belt must never be placed
behind the child's back or under the arm.
||
SAFETY
90
Related information
•
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 90)
•
Top tether anchors (p. 92)
•
Child safety (p. 81)
•
Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 68)
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors
Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped
child seats are located in the rear, outboard
seats, hidden below the backrest cushions.
Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child
seat anchors
Location of the ISOFIX/LATCH anchors
Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the
ISOFIX/LATCH anchor positions as shown. To
access the anchors, kneel on the seat cushion
and locate the anchors by feel. Always follow your
child seat manufacturer's installation instructions,
and use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and
top tethers whenever possible.
To access the anchors
1. Put the child restraint in position.
2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down
the seat cushion and locate the anchors by
feel.
3. Fasten the attachment on the child
restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/
LATCH/LATCH lower anchors.
4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING
Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to
FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to
the child restraint system's manual for weight
and size ratings.
NOTE
•
The rear seat's center position is not
equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH lower
anchors. When installing a child restraint
in this position, attach the restraint's top
tether strap (if it is so equipped) to the
top tether anchorage point and secure
the restraint with the vehicle's center seat
belt.
•
Always follow your child seat manufactur-
er's installation instructions, and use both
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and top
tethers whenever possible.
SAFETY
}}
91
Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/LATCH
lower anchors
WARNING
•
Be sure to fasten the attachment cor-
rectly to the anchor (see the illustration).
If the attachment is not correctly fas-
tened, the child restraint may not be
properly secured in the event of a colli-
sion.
•
The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraint
anchors are only intended for use with
child seats positioned in the outboard
seating positions. These anchors are not
certified for use with any child restraint
that is positioned in the center seating
position. When securing a child restraint
in the center seating position, use only
the vehicle's center seat belt.
Related information
•
Top tether anchors (p. 92)
Lower child seat attachment points
1
The vehicle is equipped with lower attachment
points for child seats in the rear seats.
The lower attachment points are intended for use
with rear-facing child restraints.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's
installation instructions when attaching a child
restraint to these attachment points.
Location
Attachment points in the rear seats
The attachment points in the rear seat are in the
rear section of the front seat's floor rails.
||
SAFETY
92
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the front
passenger seat of any vehicle with a front
passenger airbag – not even if the "Passen-
ger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mir-
ror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with
Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an
accident were to cause the airbag to inflate,
this could lead to serious injury or death to a
child seated in this position.
Related information
•
Child restraints (p. 83)
•
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 90)
•
Occupant weight sensor (p. 74)
Top tether anchors
Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint top
tether anchorages, located on the rear side of
the backrests, for all three seating positions in
the rear seat.
Child restraint anchorages
Top tether anchors and symbols on the rear side of the
rear seat backrests.
Securing a child seat
1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat.
2. Route the top tether strap under the head
restraint and attach it to the anchor.
3. Attach lower tether straps to the lower ISO-
FIX/LATCH anchors. If the child restraint is
not equipped with lower tether straps, or the
restraint is used in the center seating posi-
tion, follow instructions for securing a child
restraint using the Automatic Locking
Retractor seat belt.
–
Firmly tension all straps.
Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's
instructions for information on securing the child
seat.
NOTE
On models equipped with the optional cargo
compartment cover, this cover should be
removed before a child seat is attached to the
child restraint anchors.
WARNING
•
Always refer to the recommendations
made by the child restraint manufacturer.
•
Volvo recommends that the top tether
anchors be used when installing a for-
ward-facing child restraint.
•
Never route a top tether strap over the
top of the head restraint. The strap
1
Not available in all markets
SAFETY
93
should be routed beneath the head
restraint.
•
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses. The ancho-
rages are not able to withstand excessive
forces on them in the event of collision if
full harness seat belts or adult seat belts
are installed to them. An adult who uses a
belt anchored in a child restraint anchor-
age runs a great risk of suffering severe
injuries should a collision occur.
•
Do not install rear speakers that require
the removal of the top tether anchors or
interfere with the proper use of the top
tether strap.
Related information
•
Child safety (p. 81)
•
Child restraints (p. 83)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
96
Instruments and controls
This overview shows the location of the primary
displays, and controls/buttons/switches.
Display/function/control
Transmission manual shifting paddle*
Head-up-display*
Instrument panel
Wipers/washers, rain sensor*
Right-side steering wheel keypad
Steering wheel adjustment
Display/function/control
Horn
Left-side steering wheel keypad
Hood open
Display lighting, tailgate unlock, tailgate
open/close*
Display/function/control
Front reading lights and courtesy lighting
Laminated panoramic roof*
Display/function/control
Ceiling console display
Manual rearview mirror auto-dim (certain
markets only)
Display/function/control
Center display
Hazard warning flashers, max. defroster/
heated windshield*, media player, glove
compartment open
Gear selector
Start knob
Drive modes
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
97
Display/function/control
Parking brake
Auto-hold brakes
Display/function/control
Memory control for:
•
power seats*
•
door mirrors
•
head-up display*
Door open, door/tailgate lock/unlock
Power windows, power door mirrors
Controls for power front seat*
Related information
•
Steering wheel (p. 138)
•
Manually operated front seats (p. 127)
•
Adjusting power front seats* (p. 128)
•
Climate system controls (p. 186)
•
Lighting panel and controls (p. 139)
•
Center display overview (p. 32)
•
General information about Twin Engine Plug-
in Hybrid vehicles (p. 53)
Instrument panel
The instrument panel displays vehicle- and driv-
ing-related information.
The gauges, indicators, symbols and functions
displayed in the instrument panel depend on the
equipment/systems installed in the vehicle and
which functions are currently activated.
Some of the functions listed below are optional.
WARNING
•
If the instrument panel is not functioning
properly, information about e.g., brakes,
airbags or other safety-related messages
cannot be displayed and the driver cannot
be alerted to possible problems.
•
If the instrument panel turns off, does not
activate when the ignition is switched on
or is completely/partially not possible to
read, do not drive the vehicle. Contact a
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
98
Instrument panel
Left side
•
Speedometer
•
Trip odometer
•
Odometer
•
Cruise control/speed limiter information
•
Road sign information*
Center
•
Indicator and warning symbols
•
Ambient temperature sensor
•
Clock
•
Messages (in certain cases also graphics)
•
Door and seat belt status
•
Hybrid battery charge information
•
Media player
•
Navigation system map
•
Cell phone
•
Voice control
•
Compass*
Right side
•
Tachometer (depending on current driving
mode)
•
Hybrid gauge (depending on current driving
mode)
•
Gear indicator
•
Current driving mode
•
Current driving mode (Hybrid, Off Road, Pure,
Power and AWD)
•
Fuel gauge
•
Hybrid battery's charge level
•
Driving distance to empty fuel tank
•
Driving distance to discharged hybrid battery
•
Current fuel consumption
•
App menu (activated using the right-side
steering wheel keypad)
Position for variable symbols
Sample indicator symbol in the 12" instrument panel
Different symbols for various types of messages
will be displayed in the center of the instrument
panel. This may consist of an indicator or warning
symbol or may be a series of graphics in this
position which then convert to a larger graphic.
Activating the instrument panel
The instrument panel is activated as soon as a
door is opened (i.e., ignition mode 0). After a
short period, the panel will go out if it is not used.
To reactivate it, do one of the following:
•
Press the brake pedal
•
Turn the start knob clockwise as far as possi-
ble and release it (without pressing the brake
pedal). This activates ignition mode I
•
Open one of the doors
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
99
Related information
•
Instrument panel App menu (p. 112)
•
Warning symbols in the instrument panel
(p. 104)
•
Indicator symbols in the instrument panel
(p. 102)
•
Instrument panel licenses (p. 107)
Instrument panel settings
Instrument panel settings can be made from its
app menu and under
Settings in the center dis-
play.
App menu settings
Settings can be made in the instrument panel's
app menu to determine the information to be dis-
played from:
•
the trip computer
•
the media player
•
a cell phone
•
the navigation system.
The instrument panel's app menu is opened and
settings are made using the right-side keypad on
the steering wheel.
Making settings from the center display
Selecting types of information
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
My Car Displays Driver Display
Information
.
3. Select the information to be displayed in the
background:
•
Show no information in the
background
•
Show information for current playing
media
•
Show navigation even if no route is
set.
Selecting themes
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
My Car Displays Display
Themes
3. Select a theme (appearance) for the instru-
ment panel:
•
Glass
•
Minimalistic
•
Performance
•
Chrome Rings.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
100
Selecting a language
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
To select a language, tap
System
System Languages and Units System
Language
.
> Changing languages affects all of the
vehicle's displays. Changing to a language
that you do not understand may make it
difficult to change back to the original lan-
guage.
Related information
•
Instrument panel App menu (p. 112)
•
Instrument panel (p. 97)
•
Settings view (p. 170)
Hybrid-related information in the
instrument panel
Different types of information will be displayed in
the instrument panel, depending on the drive
mode selected. These drive modes offer unique
ways of helping the driver achieve the best pos-
sible driving economy.
The vehicle also stores driving statistics that can
be viewed in the form of a bar graph.
Hybrid-unique symbols
The various gauges and indicators in the instru-
ment panel show the relationship between the
electric motor's current power consumption and
the remaining power available.
Indicates the currently available output
from the electric motor. A solid symbol
indicates that the electric motor is
being used.
Indicates the currently available output
from the electric motor. A hollow sym-
bol means that the electric motor is
not being used.
Indicates the output level when the
gasoline engine starts. A solid symbol
indicates that the gasoline engine is
being used.
Indicates the output level when the
gasoline engine will start. A hollow
symbol indicates that the gasoline
engine is not being used.
Indicates that the hybrid battery is
being charged.
Indicates the current charge level in
the electric motor's battery. This indica-
tor is located by the hybrid battery
gauge in the lower right corner.
eDTE (Electrical Distance To Empty)
indicator (distance until the hybrid bat-
tery is discharged).
The hybrid gauge
Available electric motor output
This hybrid battery indicator is located between
the hybrid gauge and the fuel gauge on the lower
right side of the instrument panel. It indicates the
current (charge level) remaining in the hybrid bat-
tery, which can be used to power the electric
motor or to heat/cool the vehicle.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
101
Power utilized by the driver
The indicator shows the amount of power utilized
(requested) by the driver through pressure on the
accelerator pedal. The higher the reading on the
scale, the greater the amount of power utilized in
the current gear. The mark between the "light-
ning" and "drop" symbols is the point at which
the electric motor switches off and the gasoline
engine starts.
Examples
The vehicle has started but is stationary and no
power is being utilized.
The electric motor alone cannot provide the
power requested and the gasoline engine will
start.
The vehicle is generating current to recharge the
battery, e.g., during moderate braking or during
engine braking on a downslope.
The "Hold" and "Charge" functions
The "Hold" or "Charge" function is activated,
which is shown by the
symbol near the bat-
tery indicator. See also the article "Maintaining/
increasing hybrid battery charge while driving" for
additional information.
Related information
•
Drive modes (p. 380)
•
Displaying trip computer information (p. 168)
•
Displaying trip statistics (p. 170)
•
Instrument panel (p. 97)
•
Maintaining/increasing the hybrid battery's
charge while driving (p. 384)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
102
Indicator symbols in the instrument
panel
The indicator symbols alert the driver when cer-
tain functions are activated, that a system is
actively working or that a fault may have occur-
red in a system or function.
Symbol Explanation
Information, see the text mes-
sage in the instrument panel
The information symbol illuminates
in combination with a text mes-
sage if one of the vehicle's sys-
tems requires the driver's atten-
tion. The information symbol can
also illuminate in combination with
other symbols.
A
B
Brake system
Symbol Explanation
A
B
ABS brake system
This symbol indicates a possible
fault in the ABS braking function.
The vehicle's normal brakes will
still function but without ABS
brake modulation.
A
B
Parking brake/Auto-brake
This function keeps the vehicle at
a standstill after it has stopped.
The symbol is on when the func-
tion is activated and the brakes or
parking brake are being used.
Tire pressure system
The symbol illuminates to indicate
low tire pressure or a fault in the
tire pressure system.
Malfunction indicator light
(check engine light)
This symbol will illuminate if there
is a fault in the emissions control
system. If this happens, please
have your vehicle checked by a
trained and qualified Volvo service
technician as soon as possible.
Symbol Explanation
Left/right turn signals
Both turn signal indicators will
flash when the hazard warning
flashers are being used.
Forward lights
Active Bending Lights (ABL)
This symbol will illuminate if there
is a fault in the ABL system or if
any other fault is detected in the
headlight system.
Automatic/active high beams
on
The symbol will be blue when the
automatic high beams are on.
Automatic/active high beams
offThe symbol will be white when
the automatic high beams are off.
High beam indicator
The symbol will illuminate when
the high beams are on or when
high beam flash is being used.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
103
Symbol Explanation
Automatic/active high beams
on
The symbol will be blue when the
automatic high beams are on. The
parking lights will also be on.
Automatic/active high beams
off
The symbol will be white when the
automatic high beams are off. The
parking lights will be on.
High beams on
The high beams and parking lights
will be on.
Not in use
Rear fog light
C
The symbol illuminates when the
rear fog light is on.
Rain sensor
The symbol illuminates when the
rain sensor is on.
Symbol Explanation
Not in use
Preconditioning
D
The symbol illuminates when the
engine/cabin heater/air condition-
ing are preconditioning the vehi-
cle.
Stability system
This symbol flashes when the sta-
bility system is actively working to
stabilize the vehicle. If the symbol
glows steadily, there is a fault in
the system.
Stability system, sport mode
This symbol illuminates when
Sport mode is activated. Sport
mode offers more active driving
characteristics by monitoring
movement of the accelerator
pedal, steering wheel and corner-
ing by allowing more lateral move-
ment of the rear wheels before
the stability system is activated.
Symbol Explanation
Lane keeping aid
White symbol: lane keeping aid on
and marker lines detected.
Gray symbol: lane keeping aid on
and no marker lines detected.
Yellow symbol: lane keeping aid
active
Lane keeping aid and rain sen-
sor
White symbol: lane keeping aid on
and marker lines detected. Rain
sensor on.
Gray symbol: lane keeping aid on
and no marker lines detected.
Rain sensor on.
A
US models
B
Canadian models
C
Not available in all markets.
D
Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid vehicles only.
Door/hood/tailgate/fuel filler door
reminder
If a door or the hood/tailgate/fuel filler door are
not closed properly, the information or warning
symbol will illuminate and a graphic will be dis-
played in instrument panel. Stop the vehicle in a
safe place as soon as possible and close the
door, etc.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
104
Related information
•
Instrument panel (p. 97)
•
Warning symbols in the instrument panel
(p. 104)
•
Door and seat belt reminders (p. 70)
Warning symbols in the instrument
panel
The warning symbols alert the driver that an
important function is activated or that a serious
fault has occurred.
Symbol Meaning
Warning
The red warning symbol alerts the
driver that an important function is
activated or that a serious fault
has occurred that may affect the
vehicle's drivability. The warning
symbol can also illuminate in com-
bination with other symbols.
Seat belt reminder
This symbol will flash for approxi-
mately 6 seconds if the driver or
front seat passenger has not fas-
tened his or her seat belt or if any-
one in the rear seat has unbuck-
led a seat belt.
Symbol Meaning
Airbags
If this light remains on after the
vehicle has been started or comes
on while the vehicle is being
driven, a fault has been detected
in one of the vehicle's safety sys-
tems. See the message in the
instrument panel. Have the sys-
tem(s) inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician
as soon as possible.
A
B
Brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the
brake fluid level may be too low.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place
and check the level in the brake
fluid reservoir. See also the warn-
ing following this table.
A
B
Parking brake
This symbol flashes while the
parking brake is being applied and
then glows steadily when the
parking brake has been set.
If the symbol flashes in any other
situation, this indicates a fault. See
the text message in the instru-
ment panel.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
105
Symbol Meaning
Oil pressure
If the symbol illuminates during
driving, stop the vehicle, the
engine oil level is too low. Stop the
engine immediately and check the
engine oil level. Add oil if neces-
sary. If the oil level is normal and
the symbol remains illuminated,
have the vehicle towed to the
nearest authorized Volvo work-
shop or trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
Generator not charging
This symbol illuminates during
driving if a fault has occurred in
the electrical system. Contact an
authorized Volvo workshop or
trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
A
US models
B
Canadian models
WARNING
•
If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in
the brake fluid reservoir or if a warning
message is displayed in the text window:
DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed
to a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician and have the brake system
inspected.
•
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols illumi-
nate at the same time, there is a risk of
reduced vehicle stability.
Door/hood/tailgate/fuel filler door
reminder
It a door, tailgate, the hood or the fuel filler door
are not closed properly, the information or warn-
ing symbol will illuminate and a graphic will be
displayed in the instrument panel.
Related information
•
Instrument panel (p. 97)
•
Indicator symbols in the instrument panel
(p. 102)
Ambient temperature sensor
The ambient temperature sensor displays the
temperature outside the vehicle in the instrument
panel.
Location of the ambient temperature sensor in 12"
(upper) and 8" (lower) instrument panels (temperature
shown here in degrees Celsius)
NOTE
When the ambient temperature is between
23° and 36 °F (–5° and +2 °C), a snowflake
symbol will be displayed next to the tempera-
ture. This symbol serves as a warning for pos-
sible slippery road surfaces. Please note that
this symbol does not indicate a fault with your
vehicle.
At low speeds or when the vehicle is not mov-
ing, the temperature readings may be slightly
higher than the actual ambient temperature.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
106
Settings
Changing measurement standard in the center
display:
1. Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap
Settings.
2.
Tap
System Units of Measurement.
3.
Select measurement standard,
Metric,
Imperial or US.
Related information
•
Instrument panel (p. 97)
•
Climate system sensors (p. 182)
Clock
The clock is displayed in the instrument panel
and in the center display.
Location of the clock in the instrument panel in 12"
(upper) and 8" (lower) instrument panels
Certain messages and other information in the
instrument panel may temporarily obscure the
clock.
In the center display, the clock is located at the
upper right of the status bar.
Settings for date and time
Select Settings System Date and Time
in the center display's Top view to change the
format for displaying date or time.
Set the date and time by tapping the up or down
arrows on the center display.
Automatic time
The function Auto Time is also available, which
adjusts the time zone automatically, depending
on the vehicle's location. If Auto Time has not
been selected, set the date and time manually by
tapping the up or down arrows on the center dis-
play.
Daylight savings time
In certain countries, an automatic change to day-
light savings time can be selected by activating
Auto. If the automatic change is not available,
change to daylight savings time by selecting On
or Off.
Related information
•
Instrument panel (p. 97)
•
Center display overview (p. 32)
•
Using the center display (p. 34)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
107
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge in the instrument panel shows
the current fuel level and indicates when the
level is low.
Fuel gauge - 12” instrument panel
The beige area in the fuel gauge indicates the
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
When the fuel level is low, the “fuel pump” symbol
will change from white to amber. The trip com-
puter will also indicate the approximate distance
that can be driven on the remaining fuel.
When there is very little usable fuel remaining in
the tank, the fuel pump symbol will change from
amber to red.
Refuel as soon as possible.
Related information
•
Octane rating (p. 402)
•
Opening/closing the fuel filler door (p. 400)
•
Trip computer (p. 167)
Instrument panel licenses
BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old"
License
Copyright ©) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993
The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features
or use of this software must display the
following acknowledgment: This product
includes software developed by the
University of California, Berkeley and its
contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the
names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
108
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised"
License
Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the organisation nor the
names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derive from this
software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
BSD 2-clause “Simplified” license
Copyright ©) <YEAR>, <OWNER> All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
109
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The views and conclusions contained in the
software and documentation are those of the
authors and should not be interpreted as
representing official policies, either expressed or
implied, of the FreeBSD Project.
FreeType Project License
1. 1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
Introduction The FreeType Project is
distributed in several archive packages; some
of them may contain, in addition to the
FreeType font engine, various tools and
contributions which rely on, or relate to, the
FreeType Project. This license applies to all
files found in such packages, and which do
not fall under their own explicit license. The
license affects thus the FreeType font
engine, the test programs, documentation
and makefiles, at the very least. This license
was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG
(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which
all encourage inclusion and use of free
software in commercial and freeware
products alike. As a consequence, its main
points are that: o We don't promise that this
software works. However, we are be
interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is'
distribution) o You can use this software for
whatever you want, in parts or full form,
without having to pay us. (`royalty-free'
usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote
this software. If you use it, or only parts of it,
in a program, you must acknowledge
somewhere in your documentation that
you've used the FreeType code. (`credits')
We specifically permit and encourage the
inclusion of this software, with or without
modifications, in commercial products,
provided that all warranty or liability claims
are assumed by the product vendor. Legal
Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license,
the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and
`FreeType archive' refer to the set of files
originally distributed by the authors (David
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be they
named as alpha, beta or final release. `You'
refers to the licensee, or person using the
project, where `using' is a generic term
including compiling the project's source code
as well as linking it to form a `program' or
`executable'. This program is referred to as `a
program using the FreeType engine'. This
license applies to all files distributed in the
original FreeType archive, including all source
code, binaries and documentation, unless
otherwise stated in the file in its original,
unmodified form as distributed in the original
archive. If you are unsure whether or not a
particular file is covered by this license, you
must contact us to verify this. The FreeType
project is copyright (C) 1996-1999 by David
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
Lemberg. All rights reserved except as
specified below. 1. No Warranty THE
FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS PROVIDED `AS IS'
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY
THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF
THE FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not
signed this license, you are not required to
accept it. However, as the FreeType project
is copyrighted material, only this license, or
another one contracted with the authors,
grants you the right to use, distribute, and
modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or
modifying the FreeType project, you indicate
that you understand and accept all the terms
of this license.
2. Redistribution Redistribution and use in
source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met: o Redistribution
of source code must retain this license file
(`licence.txt') unaltered; any additions,
deletions or changes to the original files
must be clearly indicated in accompanying
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
110
documentation. The copyright notices of the
unaltered, original files must be preserved in
all copies of source files. o Redistribution in
binary form must provide a disclaimer that
states that the software is based in part of
the work of the FreeType Team, in the
distribution documentation. We also
encourage you to put an URL to the
FreeType web page in your documentation,
though this isn't mandatory. These conditions
apply to any software derived from or based
on the FreeType code, not just the
unmodified files. If you use our work, you
must acknowledge us. However, no fee need
be paid to us.
3. Advertising The names of FreeType's authors
and contributors may not be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written
permission. We suggest, but do not require,
that you use one or more of the following
phrases to refer to this software in your
documentation or advertising materials:
`FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine',
`FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.
4. Contacts There are two mailing lists related
to FreeType: o [email protected]
Discusses general use and applications of
FreeType, as well as future and wanted
additions to the library and distribution. If you
are looking for support, start in this list if you
haven't found anything to help you in the
documentation. o [email protected]
Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals,
design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.
o http://www.freetype.org Holds the current
FreeType web page, which will allow you to
download our latest development version and
read online documentation. You can also
contact us individually at: David Turner
<[email protected]> Robert Wilhelm
<[email protected]> Werner
Libpng License
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for
your convenience. In case of any discrepancy
between this copy and the notices in the file
png.h that is included in the libpng distribution,
the latter shall prevail.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and
LICENSE:
If you modify libpng you may insert additional
notices immediately following this sentence.
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through
1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c)
2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following
individuals added to the list of Contributing
Authors
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Eric S. Raymond
Gilles Vollant
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
There is no warranty against interference with
your enjoyment of the library or against
infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts
or the library will fulfill any of your particular
purposes or needs. This library is provided with all
faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality,
performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user.
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through
1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998,
1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-0.96, with the following
individuals added to the list of Contributing
Authors:
Tom Lane
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96,
May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997
Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same
disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the
following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors:
John Bowler
Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell
Magnus Holmgren
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
111
Greg Roelofs
Tom Tanner
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88,
January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy
Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.
For the purposes of this copyright and license,
"Contributing Authors" is defined as the following
set of individuals:
Andreas Dilger
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS".
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied,
including, without limitation, the warranties of
merchantability and of fitness for any purpose.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental,
special, exemplary, or consequential damages,
which may result from the use of the PNG
Reference Library, even if advised of the
possibility of such damage.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy,
modify, and distribute this source code, or
portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee,
subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this source code must not be
misrepresented.
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as
such and must not be misrepresented as
being the original source.
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or
altered from any source or altered source
distribution.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
specifically permit, without fee, and encourage
the use of this source code as a component to
supporting the PNG file format in commercial
products. If you use this source code in a product,
acknowledgment is not required but would be
appreciated.
A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for
convenient use in "about" boxes and the like:
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is
supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and
"pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31).
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software.
OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark
of the Open Source Initiative.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson [email protected]
April 15, 2002
MIT License
Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders>
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in all copies or
substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
zlib License
The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c) <year>
<copyright holders>
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
112
This software is provided 'as-is', without any
express or implied warranty. In no event will the
authors be held liable for any damages arising
from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this
software for any purpose, including commercial
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it
freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not claim that you
wrote the original software. If you use this
software in a product, an acknowledgment in
the product documentation would be
appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly
marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original
software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered
from any source distribution.
SGI Free Software B License Version
2.0.
SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0,
Sept. 18, 2008)
Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Silicon
Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is
hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
of the Software, and to permit persons to whom
the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions: The above copyright notice
including the dates of first publication and either
this permission notice or a reference to http://
oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of
Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
or other dealings in this Software without prior
written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Related information
•
Instrument panel (p. 97)
Instrument panel App menu
The App (application) menu in the instrument
panel provides quick access to commonly used
functions in certain apps.
In some cases, the App menu can be used instead of
the center display
The App menu is displayed in the instrument
panel and is controlled using the right-side steer-
ing wheel keypad. This menu makes it possible to
toggle between apps or functions in apps without
removing your hands from the steering wheel.
App menu functions
The following apps and their functions can be
controlled from the App menu:
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
113
App Functions
Trip com-
puter
Select a trip odometer, make
instrument panel display set-
tings, etc.
Media
player
Select the active source for the
media player.
Phone Call a contact from the call list.
Related information
•
Instrument panel (p. 97)
•
Center display overview (p. 32)
•
Using the instrument panel App menu
(p. 113)
Using the instrument panel App
menu
The App (application) menu in the instrument
panel is controlled using the right-side steering
wheel keypad.
App menu and right-side steering wheel keypad
App menu
Left/right
Up/down
Confirm
Opening/closing the App menu
–
Press the App menu (1).
The App menu cannot be opened if there are
unread/unconfirmed messages in the instru-
ment panel. The message must be confirmed
before the App menu can be opened.
> The App menu opens/closes.
The App menu closes automatically after a period
of inactivity or after certain selections are made.
Navigating and making selections in the
App menu
1. Navigate between the various apps by press-
ing left or right (3).
> Functions for the preceding/next app will
be displayed in the App menu.
2. Scroll through the current app's selections
using up or down (4).
3. Confirm or select a function by pressing (2).
> The function will be activated and in cer-
tain cases, the App menu will close.
Related information
•
Instrument panel App menu (p. 112)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
114
Messages in the instrument panel
and center display
Information and warning messages are dis-
played in the instrument panel and center dis-
play.
Instrument panel
Message in the instrument panel (12" version)
High-priority messages are displayed in the
instrument panel.
Messages may appear in different parts of the
instrument panel depending on their context. The
message will time out after a short period of time
or disappear when it has been confirmed or if
action has been taken. Messages that need to be
stored will be saved under
My car messages in
the center display's Top view.
The message may be displayed along with graph-
ics, symbols or buttons for e.g., confirming the
message or accepting a request.
Service messages
The following table lists a selection of important
service messages and the action that should be
taken.
Message Action
Stop safely
A
Stop and switch off the
engine. There is a risk of
serious damage to the vehi-
cle
B
.
Turn off
engine
A
Stop and switch off the
engine. There is a risk of
serious damage to the vehi-
cle
B
.
Service
urgent Drive
to workshop
A
Contact a workshop
B
to have
the vehicle inspected imme-
diately.
Service
required
A
Contact a workshop
B
to have
the vehicle inspected as
soon as possible.
Book time for
maintenance
Time for
maintenance
Time for the next scheduled
service. Contact a work-
shop
B
.
Message Action
Maintenance
overdue
Time for the next scheduled
service. Contact a work-
shop
B
. If the service sched-
ule is not followed, this may
void all or part of the vehi-
cle's warranty and result in
damage to vehicle compo-
nents.
Temporarily
off
A
A function has been tempo-
rarily deactivated and will be
reactivated automatically
while driving or after the
engine is restarted.
A
Part of the message is context-dependent.
B
Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
115
Center display
Message in the center display's status bar
Messages with lower priority for the driver are
shown in the center display.
Most of the messages are shown in the center
display's status bar. The message times out after
a short period of time or disappears if it has been
confirmed or if action has been taken. Messages
that need to be stored are saved under
My car
messages in Top view.
Some messages in the center display contain
one or more buttons for e.g., confirming the mes-
sage or accepting a request.
Messages' form can vary and they may be dis-
played with graphics, symbols or buttons for e.g.,
confirming a message or accepting a request.
Pop-up messages
Messages are sometimes displayed in pop-up
windows. Messages of this type have higher pri-
ority than ones in the status bar and must be
confirmed or action must be taken before they
disappear. Messages that need to be stored are
saved under
My car messages in Top view.
Related information
•
Instrument panel (p. 97)
•
Center display overview (p. 32)
Handling messages in the
instrument panel and center display
Messages in the instrument panel and center
display are handled using the controls on the
right-side steering wheel keypad and in the cen-
ter display's various views.
Instrument panel
Message in the instrument panel (12" version) and the
right-side steering wheel keypad
Left/right arrow keys
Confirm
Some messages in the instrument panel contain
one or more buttons for e.g., confirming a mes-
sage or accepting a proposal.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
116
Handling new messages
For messages with buttons:
1. Navigate among the buttons available by
pressing the left/right arrow keys (1).
2. Confirm a choice by pressing (2).
> The message will disappear from the
instrument panel.
For messages without buttons:
–
Close the message by pressing (2) or let the
message time-out after a short period.
> The message will disappear from the
instrument panel.
If a message needs to be saved, it will be stored
in the
Car status app, which can be opened in
the center display's App view. Car message
stored in Car Status application will be dis-
played at this time in the center display.
Center display
Message in the center display
Some buttons in the center display have a button
(or several buttons in a pop-up) to make it possi-
ble to e.g., activate/deactivate a function related
to the message.
Handling new messages
For messages with buttons:
–
Tap the button to carry out the action or let
the message time-out after a short period.
> The message will disappear from the cen-
ter display's status bar.
For messages without buttons:
–
Close the message by tapping it or let the
message time-out after a short period.
> The message will disappear from the cen-
ter display's status bar.
If a message needs to be saved, it will be stored
in the center display's Top view.
Related information
•
Messages in the instrument panel and center
display (p. 114)
•
Using the instrument panel App menu
(p. 113)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
117
Handling messages stored from the
instrument panel and center display
Messages in the instrument panel and center
display are handled using the right-side steering
wheel keypad and in the center display's views.
Messages saved from the instrument
panel
Saved messages can be seen in the Car status app
Messages that have been dis-
played in the instrument panel
and need to be saved are
stored in the
Car status app,
which can be opened in the
center display's App view. Car
message stored in Car
Status application
will be displayed at this time
in the center display.
Reading saved messages
Reading a saved message immediately:
–
Tap the button to the right of the message
Car message stored in Car Status
application in the center display.
> The saved message will be displayed in
the
Car status app.
Reading a saved message at a later time:
1.
Open the
Car status app in the center dis-
play's App view.
> The app will open in Home view's lowest
sub-view.
2.
Select the
Messages tab in the app.
> A list of saved messages will be displayed.
3. Tap the arrow to the right to expand/mini-
mize the message.
> More information about the message will
appear in the list and the image to the left
in the app will show information about the
message in graphic form.
Handling a saved message
In expanded form, some messages have two but-
tons for booking service or reading the owner's
manual.
Booking service:
–
With the message in expanded form, tap
Request appoint./Call to make
Appointment
1
to book a service/repair
appointment.
>
Request appoint.: the Appointments
tab will open in the app and create a
request for a service/repair appointment.
Call to make Appointment: the phone
app will start and initiate a call to your pre-
ferred retailer to make a service/repair
appointment.
Reading the owner's manual:
–
With the message in expanded form, tap
Owner's manual to read the section of the
owner's manual related to the message.
> The owner's manual will open in the cen-
ter display and provide information related
to the message.
Messages stored in the app will be erased auto-
matically each time the engine is started.
1
Certain markets only.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
118
Messages saved from the center
display
Saved messages and possible selections in Top view
Messages that have been shown in the center
display and need to be saved are stored in the
center display's Top view.
Reading a saved message
1. Open the center display's Top view.
> A list of saved messages will be displayed.
The ones with an arrow to the right can
be expanded.
2. Tap the arrow to the right to expand/mini-
mize the message.
Handling a saved message
Some messages have a button to e.g., activate/
deactivate a function related to the message.
–
Tap the button to carry out the action.
Messages saved in Top view are erased automat-
ically when the engine is switched off.
Related information
•
Handling messages in the instrument panel
and center display (p. 115)
Head-up display (HUD)*
The head-up display provides information such
as speed, cruise control functions, navigation,
traffic sign information, incoming phone calls,
etc. at the base of the windshield in the driver's
field of vision.
Incoming phone call
The HUD supplements the instrument panel and
projects information on the lower section of the
windshield. The projected information can only be
seen from the driver's seat.
CAUTION
The HUD's projection unit is located in the
dashboard. Avoid scratching or placing
objects on the unit's glass surface.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
119
Example of information in the head-up display. The infor-
mation shown is generic and may vary slightly from mar-
ket to market or in terms of units of measure
Speed
Cruise control
Navigation
Road signs
Symbols such as the following ones may appear
temporarily in the HUD.
If the warning symbol appears, read the
warning text in the instrument panel.
If the information symbol appears, read
the warning text in the instrument
panel.
NOTE
If the City Safety is activated, the information
in the HUD will be replaced by a City Safety-
related graphic. This graphic will illuminate
even if the HUD is turned off.
A graphic for the City Safety flashes to attract the driv-
er's attention
NOTE
The driver's ability to see information in the
HUD may be impeded by:
•
the use of polarizing sunglasses
•
the use of an aftermarket or non-Volvo
replacement windshield
•
not sitting in the center of the driver's
seat
•
objects on the HUD projector glass on
the dashboard
•
certain ambient lighting conditions
•
certain types of vision problems, which
may also result in headaches or eye
strain.
•
Activating/deactivating and settings for
HUD are only possible when an image is
projected on the windshield. The engine
must be running.
Activating/deactivating HUD
HUD can be activated in two ways in the center
display:
Via Function view
Tap the Head-up display but-
ton.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
120
Via settings
1.
Tap
Settings in Top view.
2.
Tap
My Car Displays.
3.
Select/deselect
Head-Up Display.
This selection can be stored as a personal set-
ting in a driver profile.
Selecting display alternatives
1.
Tap
Settings in Top view.
2.
Tap
My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Options
.
Tap Go to the center display's Settings view
and select
Driver Display & Head-up
Display
.
3.
Select :
Show Navigation, Show Road
Sign Information, Show Driver Support
or Show Phone.
This selection can be stored as a personal set-
ting in a driver profile.
Adjusting HUD brightness and height
position
1.
Tap
Head-up display adjustments in the
center display's Function view.
2. Use the right-side steering wheel keypad to
adjust the HUD's brightness and height posi-
tion on the windshield in the driver's field of
vision.
Reduce brightness
Increase brightness
Higher position
Lower position
Confirm
Adapting brightness
The brightness of the graphics displayed in the
HUD are also automatically adjusted according to
ambient lighting conditions. HUD brightness is
also affected by adjustments to the brightness of
the other displays in the vehicle.
Power front seat* memory function
The position of the HUD can be stored in the
power seat's memory function.
Replacing the windshield
Vehicles with a head-up display have a special
type of windshield meeting the requirements for
displaying projected information.
If the windshield has to be replaced, contact a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician or
authorized workshop. The correct type of replace-
ment windshield must be used for a head-up dis-
play.
Calibrating the horizontal position
If the windshield has been replaced, it may be
necessary to calibrate the HUD's horizontal posi-
tion. This means that the projected image will
have to be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise.
To do so:
1. Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap
Settings.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
121
2.
Select
My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Calibration
.
3. Use the buttons on the right-side steering
wheel keypad to calibrate the horizontal posi-
tion.
Rotate counterclockwise
Rotate clockwise
Confirm
Cleaning
Wipe the glass covering the HUD projection unit
carefully with a clean and dry (or very slightly
damp if necessary) microfiber cloth.
Never use strong stain removers. For difficult
cleaning conditions, a special cleaning agent can
be purchased at a Volvo retailer.
Related information
•
Center display overview (p. 32)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 38)
Voice control
Voice commands make it possible for the driver
to voice-control certain functions in the media
player, a Bluetooth-connected cell phone, cli-
mate system and the Volvo navigation system*.
Voice control offers convenience and enables the
driver to keep his/her hands on the steering
wheel and concentrate on driving and the traffic
situation around the vehicle.
WARNING
As the driver, you have full responsibility for
operating the vehicle safely and adhering to
all applicable traffic regulations.
Input to the system is in dialog form and compri-
ses commands from the driver and a verbal
response from the system.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
122
The voice control system uses the same micro-
phone as the Bluetooth hands-free system and
system responses come via the infotainment sys-
tem's speakers.
In certain cases, text messages are also provided
in the instrument panel.
The functions are controlled using the right-side
steering wheel keypad and settings are made
from the center console.
System updates
The voice control system is being constantly
improved and updates should be downloaded for
optimal functionality. See the support site
support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
Using voice commands (p. 122)
•
Voice control settings (p. 123)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 124)
•
Voice control for cell phones (p. 123)
•
System updates (p. 511)
•
Navigation system voice commands (p. 126)
•
Climate system voice commands (p. 125)
Using voice commands
The following is an introduction for using voice
commands.
Press the button on the right-
side steering wheel keypad to
activate the system and initiate
a voice command dialog.
Keep the following points in mind when using
voice commands:
•
When giving a command, speak at your usual
speed and in a normal tone of voice after
the tone.
•
Avoid speaking while the system is respond-
ing. Commands cannot be processed during
a response.
•
Avoid background noises in the cabin when
using the system by closing the vehicle's
doors, windows and panoramic roof* when
giving voice commands.
Voice command dialogs can be cancelled by:
•
Saying "Cancel".
•
By pressing and holding the
button on
the right-side steering wheel keypad.
To speed up a command dialog or to skip system
responses, press the
button on the right-
side steering wheel keypad when the system is
responding and give your next command.
Voice command examples
Press , say "Call"-"[First-name]"-"[Last-
name]"-"[number category]" to call a contact
in your phonebook if the person has more than
one phone number listed (i.e., home, mobile, work,
etc.).
For example, press
and say
"Call"-"Robin"-"Smith"-"mobile".
Commands/phrases
The following commands can always be used:
•
Repeat: the system will repeat the most
recent voice instruction.
•
Cancel: cancel the dialog.
•
Help: Initiates a help dialog. The system will
provide several alternative commands that
can be used in a given situation.
The commands for specific situations are descri-
bed in the respective articles such as "Cell phone
commands", etc.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
123
Numbers
Numbers can be spoken in different ways
depending on the context and function being
used:
•
Phone numbers and zip codes should be
spoken individually, number by number, e.g.,
five five five one two three four (5551234).
•
Addresses (house numbers) can be spo-
ken individually or as a group, e.g., two two or
twenty-two (22). It is also possible to say a
sequence of numbers, e.g., twenty-two
twenty-two (22 22) and "double" or "triple"
can also be used, e.g., double zero (00) or tri-
ple zero (000). Numbers in the range
0-2300 can be used.
•
Frequencies can be spoken ninety-eight
point eight (98.8), one hundred four point
two (104.2) or hundred four point two
(104.2).
Related information
•
Voice control (p. 121)
Voice control settings
There are a number of settings that can be made
for the voice control system.
Open the center display's Top view and tap
Settings System Voice Control and
select settings.
•
Repeat Voice Command
•
Gender
•
Speech Rate
Sound settings
Open Top view and tap Settings Sound
System Volumes Voice Control.
Changing languages
The voice control system only understands the
languages marked by the
symbol in the list
of possible system languages.
Changing the language for this system also
affects menus, messages and help texts.
Open Top view and tap
Settings System
System Language.
Related information
•
Voice control (p. 121)
•
Using voice commands (p. 122)
•
Navigation system voice commands (p. 126)
Voice control for cell phones
Voice commands can be used to control many
of the most common functions in a Bluetooth
®
-
connected cell phone.
To specify a phone book contact, the voice com-
mand has to include the contact's information
that is in the phone book. For example, if a con-
tact such as
John Smith has several phone
numbers, a number category such as home or
mobile can be specified. To call, say: "Call John
Smith mobile".
To use the voice control system, press the
on the right-side steering wheel keypad and say
one of the following commands after the tone:
•
"
Call [contact]": call a contact from your
phone book.
•
"
Call [phone number]": call a phone num-
ber.
•
"
Recent calls": displays the list of recent
calls.
•
"
Read message": reads a message aloud.
If there are several messages, select the one
to be read.
•
"
Message to [contact]": The user will be
prompted to dictate a message. The mes-
sage will then be read aloud and the user
can opt to send or modify it.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
124
Related information
•
Voice control (p. 121)
•
Using voice commands (p. 122)
•
Voice control settings (p. 123)
Voice control for radio and media
The following voice commands can be used for
the radio or an external media player.
To use the voice control system, press the
on the right-side steering wheel keypad and say
one of the following commands after the tone:
•
"
Media": initiates a dialog and displays pos-
sible commands.
•
"
Play [artist]": plays music by the selected
artist.
•
"
Play [song title]": plays the selected song.
•
"
Play [song title] from [album]": plays the
selected song from the selected album.
•
"
Play [radio station]": starts the selected
radio station.
•
"
Tune to [frequency]": tunes to the
selected frequency on the current waveband.
If no waveband has been selected, FM is the
default.
•
"
Tune to [frequency] [waveband]": tunes
to the selected station on the selected wave-
band.
•
"
Radio": starts FM radio.
•
"
Radio FM": starts FM radio.
•
"
SiriusXM": starts SiriusXM radio*
•
"
CD": starts playback from a CD.
•
"
USB": starts playback from a USB flash
drive.
•
"
iPod": starts playback from an iPod.
•
"
Bluetooth": starts playback from a Blue-
tooth-connected device.
•
"
Similar music": starts playback from a
USB flash drive with music similar to the type
currently playing.
Related information
•
Voice control (p. 121)
•
Using voice commands (p. 122)
•
Voice control settings (p. 123)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
126
Navigation system voice commands
Many of the navigation system's functions can
be activated using voice commands.
The procedure for using voice control is descri-
bed in greater detail in the articles "Voice con-
trol," "Using voice control" and "Voice control
settings."
Voice commands
The following list contains examples of com-
mands that are unique to navigation system.
To use the voice control system, press the
on the right-side steering wheel keypad and say
one of the following commands after the tone:
•
"
Navigation": Starts a navigation voice com-
mand dialog and displays available com-
mands.
•
"
Take me home": Guidance will be given to
the location set as Home.
•
"
Go to [City]": Enter a city as a destination,
e.g., "Go to New York."
•
"
Go to [Address]": Enter an address as a
destination, e.g., Go to 125 43 St., New
York."
•
"
Go to Intersection": Starts a dialog where
two street names are entered. The destina-
tion will then be the intersection of the two
streets.
•
"
Go to [Zip code]": Enter a zip code as a
destination, e.g., "Go to 07405."
•
"
Go to [Name]": Enter a name from a list of
contacts e.g., "Go to John Smith."
•
"
Search [POI category] in [City]": The list
of results will be sorted around the center of
the selected city/town, e.g., Search restau-
rants in Butler.
•
Search [POI category]": For example,
Search Yankee Stadium.
•
"
Change country/Change state":
Changes the country/state in which a search
is conducted.
•
"
Show favorites": Shows a list of Favorites
in the center display's Top view.
•
"
Clear itinerary": Deletes all intermediate
destinations in an itinerary.
•
"
Repeat voice guidance": Repeats the
most recent guidance instruction.
•
"
Turn off voice guidance": Turns voice
navigation guidance off.
•
"
Turn on voice guidance": Turns voice
navigation guidance on.
Related information
•
Voice control (p. 121)
•
Using voice commands (p. 122)
•
Voice control settings (p. 123)
Seats
The front seats can be adjusted electronically* or
manually. The rear seats are adjusted primarily
manually.
The adjustment settings for the power front
seats*, door mirrors and the head-up display can
be stored in memory buttons.
Using the multi-function control*, comfort in the
front seats can be further enhance by e.g., adjust-
ing the lumbar support or extending the length of
the front seat cushion.
Related information
•
Adjusting power front seats* (p. 128)
•
Adjusting function settings in the multifunc-
tional front seats* (p. 130)
•
Manually operated front seats (p. 127)
•
Using the power seat memory function*
(p. 128)
•
Folding down the rear seat backrests
(p. 135)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
127
Manually operated front seats
The front seats can be adjusted in a number of
ways to help provide the most comfortable seat-
ing position.
Raise/lower the front edge of seat cushion
by pumping up/down
Change the length of the seat cushion by
pulling up the lever and moving the cushion
forward/rearward with your hand
Move the seat forward/rearward by pulling
the bar upward and moving the seat.
Change lumbar support by pressing the but-
ton*
Raise/lower the seat by moving the control
up/down
Change backrest tilt by turning the wheel
WARNING
•
Do not adjust the seat while driving. The
seat should be adjusted so that the brake
pedal can be depressed fully. In addition,
position the seat as far rearward as com-
fort and control allow.
•
Check that the seat is securely locked
into position after adjusting.
Related information
•
Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 199)
•
Power front seats* (p. 127)
•
Multifunctional front seats* (p. 129)
•
Seat belts (p. 66)
Power front seats*
The power front seats offer a number of adjust-
ment possibilities to help maximize comfort and
ergonomics.
The power seats have an overload protector that
activates if a seat is blocked by any object. If this
occurs, put the ignition in mode I or 0 and wait
for a short period before operating the seat
again.
The power seat(s) can be adjusted for a short
period after unlocking the door with the remote
key without switching the ignition on. Seat adjust-
ment can always be made when the engine is
running.
Related information
•
Multifunctional front seats* (p. 129)
•
Adjusting power front seats* (p. 128)
•
Using the power seat memory function*
(p. 128)
•
Manually operated front seats (p. 127)
•
Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 199)
•
Turning front seat ventilation* on and off
(p. 200)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
128
Adjusting power front seats*
The power front seat(s) can be adjusted to many
positions to help improve comfort and ergonom-
ics.
Adjust lumbar support by pressing the con-
trol up/down/forward/rearward
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cush-
ion by moving the control up/down
Raise/lower the seat by moving the control
up/down
Move the seat forward/rearward by moving
the control forward/rearward
Change backrest tilt by moving the control
forward/rearward
Only one of the power seat's controls can be
used at the same time.
The front seat backrests can not be folded down
completely.
Related information
•
Power front seats* (p. 127)
•
Using the power seat memory function*
(p. 128)
•
Multifunctional front seats* (p. 129)
•
Seat belts (p. 66)
Using the power seat memory
function*
The memory function can be used to store the
settings (positions) of the power front seats*,
door mirrors and the head-up display*.
Two different settings can be stored using this
function. Memory controls are found on one or
both of the front doors*.
M (memory) button
Button for storing a position
Button for storing a position
Storing a position
1. Adjust the seat, door mirrors and head-up
display to the desired positions.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
129
2.
Press and release the M button. The indica-
tor light in the button will illuminate.
3.
Press button 1 or 2 within 3 seconds to
store the current position of the seat/
mirrors/head-up display in the selected but-
ton.
> When the position has been stored in the
selected button, an audible signal will
sound and the indicator light in the M but-
ton will go out.
If none of the buttons (1 or 2) are pressed within
3 seconds, the indicator light in the M button will
go out and the position will not be stored.
The seat/mirrors/head-up display must be
moved before new settings can be stored.
Using a stored position
A stored position can be used when one of the
front doors is opened or closed:
Front door open
–
Press one of the bottons (1 or 2) briefly. The
seat, door mirrors and head-up display will
move to the positions stored in that button.
Front door closed
–
Press and hold one of the buttons (1 or 2)
until the seat, door mirrors and head-up dis-
play have moved to the positions stored in
that button.
The seat, door mirrors and head-up display will
stop automatically if the button is released before
the they have reached the stored positions.
WARNING
•
Because the driver's seat can be adjusted
with the ignition off, children should never
be left unattended in the vehicle.
•
Movement of the seat can be STOPPED
at any time by pressing any button on the
power seat control panel.
•
Do not adjust the seat while driving. The
seat should be adjusted so that the brake
pedal can be depressed fully. In addition,
position the seat as far rearward as com-
fort and control allow.
•
The seat rails on the floor must not be
obstructed in any way when the seat is in
motion.
Related information
•
Adjusting power front seats* (p. 128)
•
Power front seats* (p. 127)
Multifunctional front seats*
In addition to the adjustment settings offered by
the power seat controls, the multifunction control
provides additional possibilities for convenience
and comfort.
Multifunction control on the side of the seat
The multifunction control can be used to adjust
lumbar support*, the backrest's side bolsters*, the
length of the seat cushion and the massage
function*. The adjustment settings made with the
control are shown in the center display* and cer-
tain settings can be made directly from the cen-
ter display.
Center display
The adjustment settings for the driver and pas-
senger seats made using the multifunction con-
trol are shown in the center display. If only one
seat is adjusted, the settings are shown in the
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
130
center of the display. If both seats are adjusted,
the settings for the driver seat are shown on the
upper half of the screen and the ones made for
the passenger seat are on the lower half.
Press the Home button on the center console to
exit the seat adjustment setting view.
Related information
•
Power front seats* (p. 127)
•
Adjusting function settings in the multifunc-
tional front seats* (p. 130)
•
Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 199)
Adjusting function settings in the
multifunctional front seats*
The multifunction controls on the side of the seat
as well as the center display can be used to
make seat adjustments. The adjustment settings
are shown in the center display*.
Multifunction control on the side of the seat
Turn the control up or down to activate.
Front seat massage settings*
The front seat backrests have a massage func-
tion. Air-filled cushions provide the massaging
action and a number of settings are available.
The massage function can only be used when
the engine is running.
Massage view in the center display
1. Activate the multifunction control by turning
it up or down. Seat settings will be displayed
in the center display.
2.
Tap
Massage in the seat settings view.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
131
3. Select massage settings by tapping the cen-
ter display or by moving the cursor up/down
using the multifunction control's upper/lower
buttons. Change a setting in the selected
function by tapping the arrows on the center
display or by using the multifunction control's
front/rear buttons.
Massage settings
The following massage settings are available:
•
On/Off.
•
Program 1-5: There are 5 preset massage
programs. Select Swell, Tread, Advanced,
Lumbar or Shoulder.
•
Intensity: Select Low, Normal or High.
•
Speed: Select Slow, Normal or Fast.
Restarting the massage function
Massage restart button in the center display
The massage function switches off automatically
after 20 minutes and must be restarted manually
for continued use.
Tap Restart in the center display to restart the
selected massage program.
Adjusting the side bolsters in the front
seats*
The side bolsters in the front seat backrests can
be inflated/deflated to adjust the amount of sup-
port provided.
Side bolster view in the center display
1. Activate the multifunction control on the side
of the seat by moving it up/down. The seat
settings view will appear in the center dis-
play.
2.
Select
Side bolsters in the seat settings
view.
•
Tap the front button to increase bolster
support.
•
Tap the rear button to decrease bolster
support.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
132
Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
Lumbar support can be adjusted up/down/front/
rear.
Lumbar support view in the center display
1. Activate the multifunction control on the side
of the seat by moving it up/down. The seat
settings view will appear in the center dis-
play.
2.
Select
Lumbar in the seat settings view.
•
Tap the button up/down to move lumbar
support up/down.
•
Tap the front button to make lumbar sup-
port firmer.
•
Tap the rear button to make lumbar sup-
port softer.
Extending the seat cushion
The seat cushion can be extended/retracted
using the multifunction control.
Seat cushion extension view in the center display
1. Activate the multifunction control on the side
of the seat by moving it up/down. The seat
settings view will appear in the center dis-
play.
2.
Select
Cushion extension in the seat set-
tings view.
•
Tap the front button to extend the cush-
ion.
•
Tap the rear button to retract the cushion.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
133
Related information
•
Multifunctional front seats* (p. 129)
Adjusting the passenger's seat from
the driver's seat*
Using the controls on the side of the driver's
seat, the driver can adjust the position of the
front passenger's seat.
Activating the function in the center
display
From the center display, the function can be acti-
vated in two ways.
After activating the function, adjust the passeng-
er's seat within 10 seconds. If no adjustments
are made in that time span, the function deacti-
vates automatically.
Activating from Function view
1. Go to the center display's Function view.
2.
Activate the function by tapping
Adjust
passenger seat.
Activating from Settings
–
In the center display, select Settings My
Car
Seats Adjust Passenger Seat
From Driver Position
.
Power seat controls
Move the passenger's seat forward/rearward
by moving the control forward/rearward.
Change the passenger seat's backrest tilt by
moving the control forward/rearward.
Related information
•
Power front seats* (p. 127)
•
Adjusting power front seats* (p. 128)
•
Seat belts (p. 66)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
134
Rear seats
The rear seat has three seating positions and the
backrests can be folded down separately. This
feature may be optional on certain models.
Related information
•
Adjusting the second row head restraints
(p. 134)
•
Folding down the rear seat backrests
(p. 135)
•
Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 199)
Adjusting the second row head
restraints
The center head restraint in the second row of
seats can be adjusted to suit the height of the
seat's occupant. The outboard head restraints
can be folded down* for a better rear view.
Adjusting the center head restraint
The center head restraint should be adjusted up
or down according to the passenger's height. The
restraint should be carefully adjusted to support
the occupant's head.
The center rear seat head restraint should only
be in its lowest position when this seat is NOT
occupied. When the center seat is occupied, the
head restraint must be correctly adjusted to the
passenger’s height so that, if possible, the whole
of the back of the head is covered.
WARNING
The center rear seat head restraint should
only be in its lowest position when this seat is
NOT occupied. When the center seat is occu-
pied, the head restraint must be correctly
adjusted to the passenger’s height so that, if
possible, the entire back of the head is cov-
ered.
Center head restraint button
To lower the head restraint, press and hold the
button (see the illustration) and push the head
restraint down carefully.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
136
WARNING
•
When one or more sections of the back-
rest is returned to the upright position,
check that it is properly locked in place by
pushing and pulling it.
•
Return the outboard head restraints to
the upright position.
•
Long loads should always be securely
anchored to help avoid injury in the event
of a sudden stop.
•
Always turn the engine off and apply the
parking brake when loading/unloading
the vehicle.
•
Place the transmission in the Park (P)
position to help prevent inadvertent
movement of the gear selector.
Folding down a section of the backrest
Folding down electrically*
2
•
On models equipped with the electric fold-
down function, the buttons used are located
in the cargo compartment.
•
Before the electric fold-down function can
be used, the vehicle must be stationary and
the tailgate must be open.
WARNING
Before using the electric fold-down function,
be sure that no one is sitting in or is near the
rear seat, that there are no objects on the rear
seat and that the backrest is not obstructed in
any way.
1. If necessary, manually press down the center
position's head restraint.
2. Press and hold one of the buttons marked
(L)eft or (R)ight to fold down the respective
sections of the backrest.
3. The backrest will fold down automatically.
The head restraint will also fold down auto-
matically.
Folding down manually
1. If necessary, press down the center posi-
tion's head restraint.
2. Pull up the handle on the upper outboard
edge of the backrest to be folded down.
3. The backrest lock will release and the back-
rest can then be folded down. The head
restraint will fold down automatically.
2
The backrests can also be folded down manually.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
137
Models not equipped with the electric fold-
down function
The three sections of the backrest can be folded
down in different ways:
•
The section on the driver's side can be
folded down separately.
•
The center section can be folded down sepa-
rately.
•
The section on the passenger's side can be
only be folded down along with the center
section.
To fold the center section, release the head
restraint and press it down. See the article
"Adjusting the second row head restraints"
for additional information.
The outboard head restraints fold down auto-
matically when the backrest is folded down.
Pull up the handle
to release the back-
rest. When the red indicator
is visible, the
backrest is no longer locked in place. Fold
the backrest down.
NOTE
When the backrests are folded down, move
the outboard head restraints forward slightly
so that they do not press on the seat cushion.
Returning a backrest to the upright
position
The backrests always have to be returned to the
upright position manually.
1. Fold the backrest up.
2. Press the backrest into place until it locks in
the upright position.
3. Manually return the head restraint to the
upright position.
4. If necessary, adjust the height of the center
position's head restraint.
WARNING
Be sure the backrest and head restraint are
securely locked in position after they have
been folded up. The red indicators should also
not be visible.
Related information
•
Rear seats (p. 134)
•
Adjusting the second row head restraints
(p. 134)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
138
Steering wheel
The steering wheel has controls for the horn,
certain optional driver support systems, menus/
messages and paddles for manually shifting
gears*.
Steering wheel keypads and paddles*
Driver support system controls
3
Paddles for manually shifting gears*
Keypad for voice controls, adjusting the
head-up display*accessing menus and mes-
sages, and handling phone calls
Horn
The horn is located in the steering wheel hub.
Related information
•
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 139)
•
Turning steering wheel heating* on and off
(p. 201)
•
Cruise Control (CC) (p. 265)
•
Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 259)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 272)
•
Distance Alert* (p. 270)
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 286)
•
Steering wheel paddles* (p. 378)
•
Voice control (p. 121)
•
Head-up display (HUD)* (p. 118)
•
Using the instrument panel App menu
(p. 113)
•
Phone (p. 459)
3
Cruise control*, Speed limiter *, Adaptive cruise control*, Distance alert* and Pilot Assist*.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
139
Adjusting the steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted to various
positions.
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel while driving.
The steering wheel's height and reach can be adjusted
Adjusting the steering wheel
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Push the lever downward/forward to release
the steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to a suitable posi-
tion.
3. Pull back the lever to lock the steering wheel
in place. If the lever is difficult to pull into
place, press the steering wheel lightly at the
same time as you pull the lever.
Related information
•
Steering wheel (p. 138)
•
Adjustable steering force* (p. 254)
Lighting panel and controls
The lighting ring on the left-side steering wheel
lever can be used to activate the vehicle's exte-
rior lighting.
Instrument lighting brightness can be adjusted
using the thumb wheel on the lighting panel.
Lighting ring on the left-side steering
wheel lever
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
140
Lighting
ring posi-
tion
Result
With the ignition in mode II or if
the engine is running:
•
In the US: the Daytime Run-
ning Lights (DRL) will be off
•
In Canada: the Daytime Run-
ning Lights will be on
•
High beam flash can be used
With the ignition in mode II or if
the engine is running:
A
•
Parking lights will be on
•
In the US: the Daytime Run-
ning Lights will be off
•
In Canada: the Daytime Run-
ning Lights will be on
•
High beam flash can be used
With the ignition in mode II or if
the engine is running:
•
The Daytime Running Lights
will be off
•
The low beam headlights will
be on
•
High Beams/High Beam
flash can be used
Lighting
ring posi-
tion
Result
With the ignition in mode II or if
the engine is running:
•
The Daytime Running Lights
will be on in daylight condi-
tions
B
•
The low beam headlights will
automatically switch on in
dark conditions
•
Tunnel detection will be acti-
vated
•
Active High Beams (AHB)
can be activated
•
High beam flash can be used
•
Continuous high beams can
be used in dark conditions
Active High Beams On/Off
A
The parking lights will be on in this position, even if the ignition
is switched off. In dark conditions, the rear parking lights illumi-
nate automatically when the tailgate is open, regardless of the
ring's position or ignition mode.
B
US models only: The use of Daytime Running Lights can be
activated/deactivated in the center display's Settings menu.
NOTE
Volvo recommends the use of Daytime Run-
ning Lights in the United States. The use of
these lights is mandatory in Canada.
Volvo recommends using the position
whenever possible.
WARNING
•
Daytime Running Lights are a driving aid
designed to help make the vehicle visible
to other roads users.
•
The driver is always responsible for
adapting the use of Daytime Running
Lights/headlights according to ambient
lighting and weather conditions.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
141
Lighting panel
Instrument lighting
Thumb wheel (to the left) for adjusting display bright-
ness
Illumination of the display and instrument lights
will vary, depending on ignition mode.
The display lighting is automatically subdued in
darkness and the sensitivity is set with the thumb
wheel.
Related information
•
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (p. 144)
•
High and low beam headlights (p. 142)
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
Parking lights
Turn the parking lights on by turning the lighting
ring on the left-side steering wheel lever.
Lighting ring in the parking light position
Turn the lighting ring to the position (the
license plate lighting comes on at the same
time).
Canadian models: If the ignition is in position II
or the engine is running, the daytime running
lights will illuminate instead of the front parking
lights.
With the lighting ring in this position, the parking
lights will remain on even when the ignition is
switched off.
In dark conditions, the rear parking lights also
illuminate when the tailgate is opened to alert
anyone traveling behind your vehicle. This hap-
pens regardless of the position that the lighting
ring is in or which mode the ignition is in.
Related information
•
Lighting panel and controls (p. 139)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
142
Low beam headlights
The low beam headlights can be activated in
several ways.
Lighting ring
In dark conditions, the low beams will be acti-
vated automatically when the engine is started or
the ignition is in mode II and the lighting ring is
turned to the
position.
With the lighting ring in the
position, the
low beams will also be activated if:
•
the rear fog light is activated
If the lighting ring is turned to
, the low
beams will be activated automatically when the
engine is started or the ignition is in mode II,
regardless of the ambient lighting conditions.
Related information
•
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (p. 144)
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
High and low beam headlights
If the ignition is in mode II or when the engine is
started, the low beams are activated automati-
cally if the lighting ring is in position
. In
dark conditions, the low beams will also be on if
the lighting ring is in the
position.
Lighting ring
High beam flash
Continuous high beams
High beam flash
Pull the lever slightly toward the steering wheel.
The high beams illuminate until the lever is
released.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}}}
143
Continuous high beams
Continuous high beams are available if the light-
ing ring is turned to
4
or
. Toggle to
high beams by moving the lever forward. Return
to low beams by moving the lever toward the
steering wheel.
The
symbol will illuminate in the instrument
panel when the high beams are on.
Active high beams
The active high beam system uses a camera at
the upper edge of the windshield to detect the
headlights of oncoming vehicles or the taillights
of a vehicle directly ahead. When this happens,
the headlights will automatically switch from high
beams to low beams.
When the camera no longer detects an
approaching vehicle or one that is ahead, your
headlights will switch back to high beams.
Vehicles with halogen headlights
5
When the camera no longer detects the head-
lights of an approaching vehicle or the taillights
of a vehicle ahead, your headlights will switch
back to high beams after several seconds.
Operation
Activate/deactivate this function by turning the
lighting ring past the
position to .
When released, the ring will automatically return
to the
position.
If the active high beam function has not been
activated, switching between high and low beams
must be done manually.
A white symbol (
) in the instrument panel
indicates that the function has been activated.
When the high beams are on, the symbol will
change to blue.
NOTE
•
Keep the windshield in front of the cam-
era free of ice, snow, dirt, etc.
•
Do not mount or in any way attach any-
thing on the windshield that could
obstruct the camera.
If a message is displayed in the instru-
ment panel saying that active high
beams are temporarily unavailable,
switching between high and low beams
will have to be done manually. However, the light
switch can remain in the
position. The
same applies if a message saying that the wind-
shield sensors are blocked and the symbol above
are displayed. The
symbol will go out if this
happens.
Active high beams may be temporarily unavailable
(e.g., in heavy fog or rain). When the system
becomes active again or if the sensors in the
windshield are no longer obscured, the messages
will disappear and the
symbol will illumi-
nate.
WARNING
•
Automatic high beams are a driving aid
designed to help provide the best possi-
ble headlight illumination in good driving
conditions.
•
The use of aftermarket or non-Volvo
glass can have an adverse effect on the
automatic high beam function.
•
The driver is always responsible for man-
ually toggling between high and low
beams when this is required by traffic or
weather conditions.
CAUTION
In the following situations, it may be neces-
sary to switch between high and low beams
manually:
•
In heavy fog or rain
•
In blowing snow or slush
•
In bright moonlight
4
When the low beams are on.
5
Halogen headlights are not available on all models.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
144
•
In freezing rain
•
In areas with dim street lighting
•
When oncoming vehicles have dim front
lighting
•
If there are pedestrians on or near the
road
•
If there are reflective objects, such as
signs, near the road
•
When oncoming vehicles' lights are
obscured by e.g., fences, bushes, etc.
•
When there are vehicles on connecting
roads
•
At the top of hills or in dips in the road
•
In sharp curves
Related information
•
Lighting panel and controls (p. 139)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
The car monitors ambient lighting conditions.
With the ring on the left-side steering wheel
lever in the
position and the ignition in
mode II (or the engine running), the lights toggle
automatically between DRL and low beam head-
lights.
Ring in the AUTO position.
NOTE
Volvo recommends the use of Daytime Run-
ning Lights in the United States. The use of
these lights is mandatory in Canada.
With the lighting ring in the 0 position:
•
In the US: DRL will be off
•
In Canada: DRL will be on
With the lighting ring in the
6
position
and the ignition in mode II or if the engine is
running:
•
In the US: DRL will be off
•
In Canada: DRL will be on
With the lighting ring in the
position:
•
DRL will be on (the low beam headlights will
automatically switch on in dark conditions)
US models only: DRL can be deactivated in the
center display's Settings view.
With
selected, a tunnel detection function
activates the low beams when the vehicle enters
a tunnel.
With the lighting ring in the
position:
•
DRL will be off and the low beam headlights
will be on
6
The parking lights will be on in this position, even if the ignition is switched off.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
145
Active Bending Lights*
Active Bending Lights (ABL) are designed to
help light up a curve according to movements of
the steering wheel.
Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light function
deactivated (left) and activated (right)
ABL is activated automatically
7
when the engine
is started and the low beam headlights are on.
ABL can be deactivated in the center display.
If a fault is detected in the system, the
symbol in the instrument panel will illuminate. A
text message will be displayed and an additional
symbol will also illuminate.
NOTE
This function is only active in twilight or dark
conditions, and only when the vehicle is in
motion.
Deactivating/activating the function
ABL can be deactivated/activated in two ways in
the center display:
Via Function view
Tap the Active Bending
Lights button.
Via settings
1.
Tap
Settings in Top view.
2.
Tap
My Car Lights and Lighting
Exterior Lights.
3.
Deselect/select
Active Bending Lights.
Related information
•
Settings view (p. 170)
Rear fog light
The rear fog light is considerably brighter than
the normal taillight and should be used only
when conditions such as fog, rain, snow, smoke
or dust reduce visibility for other vehicles to less
than approx. 500 ft. (150 meters).
Rear fog light button
The rear fog light can only be used when:
•
the ignition is in mode II or if the engine is
running and the lighting ring is in the
or position
Press the button to turn the rear fog light on/off.
The rear fog light indicator symbol
in the
instrument panel illuminates when the rear fog
light is switched on.
7
The factory default setting is on.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
146
•
the ignition is switched off or when the light-
ing ring is turned to the
position
The rear fog light turns off automatically when
the ignition is switched off or when the lighting
ring is turned to the
or positions.
The rear fog light indicator symbol
in the
instrument panel will go out when the rear fog
light is off.
Related information
•
Lighting panel and controls (p. 139)
Brake lights
The brake lights illuminate automatically when
the brakes are applied.
In addition to illuminating when the brake pedal is
depressed, the brake lights also illuminate when
one of the driver support systems (e.g., adaptive
cruise control, City Safety or collision warning)
slow the vehicle.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 272)
•
City Safety™ (p. 309)
•
Emergency brake lights (p. 390)
Hazard warning flashers
The hazard warning flashers should be used to
indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic
hazard.
Hazard warning flasher button
Press the button to activate the flashers. Press
the button again to turn off the flashers.
Regulations regarding the use of the hazard
warning flashers may vary, depending on where
you live.
Related information
•
Using turn signals (p. 147)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
147
Using turn signals
The turn signals are controlled using the left
steering wheel lever. The turn signals flash three
times or continuously, depending on how far up
or down the lever is moved.
Turn signals
Short flashing sequence
The driver can automatically flash the turn
signals 3 times by moving the left steering
wheel lever up or down to the first position
and releasing it. This function can be acti-
vated/deactivated in the center display.
NOTE
•
This automatic flashing sequence can be
interrupted by immediately moving the
lever in the opposite direction.
•
If the turn signal indicator flashes faster
than normal, see the message in the
instrument panel.
Continuous flashing sequence
Move the lever as far up or down as possible
to start the turn signals.
The turn signals will be cancelled automatically
by the movement of the steering wheel, or the
lever can be returned to its initial position by
hand.
Related information
•
Lighting panel and controls (p. 139)
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 146)
•
Settings view (p. 170)
Passenger compartment lighting
The passenger compartment lighting is con-
trolled using the buttons in the ceiling above the
front and rear seats.
All passenger compartment lighting can be
turned on and off manually within 30 minutes
after:
•
the vehicle is unlocked but the engine has
not been started
•
the engine is switched off and the ignition is
in mode 0.
Front interior lighting
Controls in the ceiling console for front reading lights
and courtesy lighting
Driver's side reading light
Courtesy lighting
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
148
Courtesy lighting (AUTO) switch
Passenger's side reading light
Front reading lights
Turn the reading lights on or off by pressing the
respective buttons briefly. Adjust the brightness
by pressing and holding the button.
Courtesy lighting
Turn the footwell and overhead courtesy lighting
on or off by pressing the button briefly.
Courtesy lighting switch
Activate the automatic function by briefly press-
ing the AUTO button in the ceiling console. The
indicator light in the button will illuminate. With
AUTO activated, the courtesy lighting will switch
on and off as follows:
The courtesy lighting:
•
comes on when the vehicle is unlocked and
when the ignition is switched off
•
goes off when the engine is started and
when the vehicle is locked
•
comes on or goes off when one of the side
doors is opened or closed
•
remains on for 2 minutes if a side door is left
open
The courtesy lighting switches off when:
Rear reading lighting
The rear reading lights are located in the ceiling
and are turned on or off by briefly pressing the
button in the ceiling console. Adjust the bright-
ness by pressing and holding the button.
Rear reading lights:
8
Rear reading light: models with a laminated panoramic
roof*
Rear reading lights
Glove compartment lighting
The glove compartment lighting comes on or
goes off when the glove compartment is opened
or closed.
Vanity mirror lighting
The vanity mirror lighting comes on or goes off
when the cover over the mirror is opened or
closed.
Ground lighting
The ground lighting comes on or goes off when a
door is opened or closed.
8
In models with a laminated panoramic roof* there are lights on each side of the roof
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
149
Doorsill lighting
The doorsill lighting comes on or goes off when a
door is opened or closed.
Cargo compartment lighting
The cargo compartment lighting comes on or
goes off when the tailgate is opened or closed.
Ambience lighting
1. In the center display's Top view, select
Settings My Car Lights and Lighting
Ambient Lighting
2. Choose among the following settings:
•
Under
Ambient Light Intensity, choose:
Off, Low or High.
•
Ambient Light Level: Reduced or Full.
The ambience lighting can also be fine-tuned using the
thumb wheel (on the dashboard to the left of the steer-
ing wheel)
Mood lighting*
When the overhead courtesy lighting has gone
out and the engine is running, several LEDs
located near the roof console illuminate to pro-
vide faint lighting to help e.g., see objects in stor-
age compartments. This lighting goes out just
after the overhead courtesy lighting when the
vehicle is locked.
The following settings can be made for the mood
lighting in the center display:
Brightness
1. In the center display's Top view, select
Settings My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Mood Lighting.
2.
Press
Interior Mood Light Intensity and
choose Off, Low or High.
Change the color of the light
1. In the center display's Top view, select
Settings My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Mood Lighting.
2.
Choose
By Temperature, By Color or
Theme Colors.
The intensity of the mood lighting can also be fine-tuned
using the thumb wheel (on the dashboard to the left of
the steering wheel)
Lighting in the door storage
compartments
This lighting is illuminated when the engine is
running. Adjust brightness with the thumb wheel
on the lighting panel.
Lighting in the front tunnel console cup
holders
This lighting is switched on or off when the vehi-
cle is unlocked or locked. Adjust brightness with
the thumb wheel on the lighting panel.
Related information
•
Lighting panel and controls (p. 139)
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
•
Settings view (p. 170)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
150
Home safe lighting
The home safe lighting function illuminates the
area in front of the vehicle in dark conditions.
This function turns on the headlights, parking
lights, outer door handle lights* and license plate
lights for a set amount of time.
The length of time that these lights remain illumi-
nated can be set in the center display. The
default setting is 30 seconds.
To activate home safe lighting:
1.
Switch off the ignition (mode 0).
2. Push the turn signal lever as far as possible
towards the dashboard and release it.
3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.
Related information
•
Using the center display (p. 34)
•
Settings view (p. 170)
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
Approach lighting
Approach lighting (the parking lights, outer door
handle lights*, license plate lighting, courtesy
lighting and footwell lighting) can be activated to
provide light as you walk toward the vehicle.
To use this feature, deselect/select Welcome
Light in the center display's menu system.
If this function has been selected in the menu, it
is activated by pressing the unlock button on
the remote key as you approach the vehicle.
If a door is opened while the function is activated,
the lighting in the outer door handle* and cour-
tesy lighting will remain illuminated for a some-
what longer period of time.
Related information
•
Settings view (p. 170)
•
Home safe lighting (p. 150)
•
Remote key (p. 226)
Using the windshield wipers
Before using the wipers, ice and snow should
be removed from the windshield. Be sure the
wiper blades are not frozen in place.
Right-side steering wheel lever
Thumb wheel to set rain sensor* sensitivity/
interval wiper speed
Single sweep
Move the lever down and release it for a
single sweep.
Wipers off
Move the lever to position 0 to turn off
the windshield wipers.
Interval wipers
Set the wiper interval speed by moving
the thumb wheel upward or downward.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
151
Continuous wipers
Move the lever upward for the wipers to
operate at normal speed.
NOTE
Before using the wipers, be sure that the
wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind-
shield and that any ice or snow on the wind-
shield has been removed.
Move the lever upward to the next posi-
tion for maximum wiper speed.
Related information
•
Tailgate window wiper and washer (p. 153)
•
Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
(p. 151)
•
Windshield and headlight washers (p. 152)
Activating/deactivating the rain
sensor
The rain sensor monitors the amount of water on
the windshield and automatically regulates wiper
speed.
Right-side steering wheel lever
Rain sensor button
Thumb wheel for adjusting sensitivity/interval
wiper speed
When the rain sensor is activated, the
symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel.
Activating the rain sensor
When activating the rain sensor, the engine must
be running or the ignition must be in mode I or II.
The windshield wiper lever must also be in posi-
tion 0 or in the single sweep position.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the
button. The wipers will make one sweep.
If the lever is pressed down, the wipers will make
additional sweeps across the windshield.
Move the thumb wheel upward for increased sen-
sitivity or downward for decreased sensitivity. The
wipers will make one extra sweep if the thumb
wheel is moved upward.
Deactivating the rain sensor
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the
button or by moving the lever upward to another
wiper position.
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated in
ignition mode 0.
The rain sensor is also automatically deactivated
when the wipers blades are put in the service
position and will reactivate when the wipers have
been returned to the normal operating position.
CAUTION
Deactivate the rain sensor when washing the
vehicle in an automatic car wash if the engine
is running or if the ignition is left in mode I or
II. The symbol in the instrument panel will go
out. If the rain sensor is not deactivated, the
wipers may start inadvertently in the car wash
and could be damaged.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
152
Activating/deactivating the memory
function
The rain sensor's memory function can be set to
activate the rain sensor each time the engine is
started:
1.
In the center display, select
Settings My
Car
Wipers
2.
Activate by selecting the
Rain Sensor
Memory box.
Deactivate by deselecting the
Rain Sensor
Memory box.
Related information
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 150)
•
Windshield wipers in the service position
(p. 521)
•
Tailgate window wiper and washer (p. 153)
Windshield and headlight washers
Use the windshield/headlight washers to help
improve visibility.
Starting the windshield and headlight
washers
Washing function
–
Move the right-side steering wheel lever
toward the wheel to start the windshield and
headlight washers.
> After the lever is released the wipers
make several extra sweeps.
CAUTION
•
Use ample washer fluid when washing
the windshield. The windshield should be
thoroughly wet when the wipers are in
operation.
•
Avoid using the washers if the fluid reser-
voir is frozen or empty to help avoid dam-
age to the pump.
When the washing system is used, the length of
time that the windshield washers operate
depends on the ambient temperature. In cold
weather, the amount of washer fluid used will
also be increased automatically to help improve
cleaning.
Heated washer nozzles*
The washer nozzles are heated automatically in
cold weather to help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing.
High-pressure headlight washing*
High-pressure headlight washing consumes a
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
headlights are washed once for every five times
the windshield is washed.
Reduced washing
When approx. 1 US quart (1 liter) of washer fluid
remains in the reservoir, the headlights will no
longer be washed to conserve fluid.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
153
A text message and the symbol will be dis-
played in the instrument panel to remind the
driver to fill the washer fluid reservoir.
Related information
•
Refilling the windshield washer fluid reservoir
(p. 524)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 150)
•
Tailgate window wiper and washer (p. 153)
Tailgate window wiper and washer
Start the tailgate window wiper/washer with con-
trols on the right-side steering wheel lever.
NOTE
The rear wiper is equipped with a cut-off
function, which means that it will not operate
if its electric motor overheats. The wiper will
function again after a cool-down period
(30 seconds or longer, depending on the heat
of the motor and ambient temperature condi-
tions).
Using the tailgate wiper/washer
Press for tailgate interval wiper
Press for tailgate continuous wiper
–
Move the lever forward to wash/wipe the tail-
gate window.
Tailgate wiper and reverse gear
1.
In the center display, select
Settings My
Car
Wipers.
2. Activate/deactivate by selecting/deselecting
the
Auto Rear Wiper box.
If the windshield wipers are on and the transmis-
sion is put into reverse gear, the tailgate wiper
will start. This function is deactivated when a dif-
ferent gear is selected.
Related information
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 150)
•
Windshield and headlight washers (p. 152)
•
Refilling the windshield washer fluid reservoir
(p. 524)
•
Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
(p. 151)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
154
Power windows
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel in the driver's door. The control
panels in the other doors only operate the win-
dow in the respective doors.
Driver's door control panel
Switch for power child safety locks* and dis-
engaging rear power window buttons
Rear window controls
Front window controls
Related information
•
Operating the power windows (p. 154)
•
Child safety locks (p. 247)
Operating the power windows
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel in the driver's door. The control
panels in the other doors only operate the win-
dow in the respective doors. Only one of the
control panels can be used at a time.
WARNING
•
Always put the ignition in mode 0 and
remove the ignition key from the vehicle
when the vehicle is unattended
•
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
•
Make sure that the windows are com-
pletely unobstructed before they are
operated.
Operating
Operating the power windows
Manual up/down
Auto up/down.
For the power windows to function, the ignition
must be in at least mode I. When the vehicle has
been running, the power windows can be oper-
ated for several minutes after the ignition has
been switched off, or until a door has been
opened.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
155
NOTE
•
Movement of the windows will stop if they
are obstructed in any way. If this happens
twice in succession, the automatic func-
tion will not work for several minutes and
the window can be closed by holding the
button up.
•
To reduce buffeting wind noise if the rear
windows are opened, also open the front
windows slightly.
Manual up/down
–
Move one of the controls up/down slightly.
> The power windows move up/down as
long as the control is held in position.
Auto up/down
–
Move one of the controls up/down as far as
possible and release it.
> The window will open or close completely.
Resetting
If the battery has been disconnected, the auto
open function must be reset so that it will work
properly
1. Gently raise the front section of the button to
close the window and hold it for one second.
2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.
Related information
•
Child safety locks (p. 247)
Using sun curtains*
Both rear doors have integrated sun curtains.
Rear doors
Hook and locking mechanism
–
Pull up the sun curtain and hook it to the
upper section of the door frame.
The window can be opened/closed when the sun
curtain is being used.
Related information
•
Power windows (p. 154)
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
156
Adjusting the power door mirrors
The control on the driver's door is used to adjust
the position of the door mirrors.
Door mirror controls
Adjusting
1.
Press the L button for the left door mirror or
the R button for the right door mirror. The
light in the button comes on.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
center.
3.
Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be on.
WARNING
Objects seen in the wide-angle passenger's
side mirror may be closer than they appear to
be.
Storing the position*
The mirror positions are stored in the key mem-
ory* when the vehicle has been locked with the
remote key. When the vehicle is unlocked with
the same remote key, the mirrors and the driver's
seat adopt the stored positions when the driver's
door is opened. The mirrors' position can also be
stored in the power seat's* memory.
Tilting the door mirrors when parking
9
The door mirrors can be tilted down to help give
the driver a better view along the sides of the
vehicle, for example when parallel parking.
–
To activate this function, select reverse gear
and press the L or R mirror control button to
tilt the mirror down.
The door mirror will reset to its normal position:
•
after 10 seconds when reverse is disen-
gaged
•
immediately if you press the corresponding L
or R button again.
NOTE
Only one mirror can be tilted down at a time.
Automatically tilting the door mirrors
when parking
9
This function can be activated/deactivated in the
center display.
1.
Tap
Settings in Top view.
2.
Tap
My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.
3.
Under
Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse,
select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to
activate/deactivate and select which mirror
to tilt.
Folding mirrors*
When parking in a limited space, the mirrors can
be folded in:
1.
Press the L and R buttons at the same time
(the ignition must be in at least mode I).
2. Release the buttons after approx. 1 second.
The mirrors will stop automatically when they
are completely folded in.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing the L and R at
the same time. The mirrors will stop automatically
when they return to their original positions.
9
Only on models equipped with a power driver's seat.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
157
Automatic folding when the vehicle is
locked
9
The mirrors can be folded in/out automatically
when the vehicle is locked/unlocked.
This function can be activated/deactivated in the
center display.
1.
Tap
Settings in Top view.
2.
Tap
My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.
3.
Select
Fold Mirror When Locked to acti-
vate/deactivate.
Resetting the mirrors' position
A mirror that has been moved manually (e.g.,
bumped into in a parking lot, etc.) has to be
returned to its normal position electrically before
automatic folding will function correctly.
1.
Fold in the mirrors with the L and R buttons.
2.
Fold out the mirrors with the L and R buttons.
The mirrors have now been reset to their original
positions.
Auto-dim*
Settings can be made for the auto-dim function
in the rearview and door mirrors.
The auto-dim function is always active while the
vehicle is being driven except when the reverse
gear has been selected. The level of sensitivity
for this function can be set to three levels, which
affect the rearview mirror and door mirrors.
NOTE
When the level of sensitivity is changed, this
change will not be noticeable immediately but
will take effect after a short period of time.
The level of sensitivity is set from the center dis-
play:
1.
Tap
Settings in Top view.
2.
Tap
My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.
3.
Under
Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming,
select Normal, Dark or Light.
Related information
•
Using the power seat memory function*
(p. 128)
•
Rearview mirror (p. 157)
Rearview mirror
The interior rearview mirror has an auto-dim
function that helps reduce glare from following
vehicle's headlights.
Auto-dim function
The auto-dim function is controlled by two sen-
sors: one pointing forward (located on the for-
ward-facing side of the mirror, which monitors the
amount of ambient light) and one pointing rear-
ward (located on the side of the mirror facing the
driver at the upper edge, which senses the
strength of following vehicles' headlights), and
work together to help eliminate glare.
NOTE
Obstructing the forward sensor with e.g.,
parking stickers, transponders, etc., or the rear
sensor by loading the cargo compartment or
the rear seat in such a way that light is pre-
vented from reaching the sensor will reduce
the auto-dim function in the interior rearview
mirror and optional auto-dim function in the
door mirrors.
The auto-dim function is always active while the
vehicle is being driven except when the reverse
gear has been selected. The level of sensitivity
9
Only on models equipped with a power driver's seat.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
158
for this function can be set to three levels, which
affect the rearview mirror and door mirrors.
NOTE
When the level of sensitivity is changed, this
change will not be noticeable immediately but
will take effect after a short period of time.
The level of sensitivity is set from the center dis-
play:
1.
Tap
Settings in Top view.
2.
Tap
My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.
3.
Under
Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming,
select Normal, Dark or Light.
Related information
•
Adjusting the power door mirrors (p. 156)
Compass
The rear-view mirror has an integrated compass
that shows the direction in which the vehicle is
traveling.
Rearview mirror with compass
Eight different directions are shown with the
abbreviations:
N (north) NE (northeast) E (east),
SE (southeast) S (south), SW (southwest) W
(west) NW (northwest)
Switching the compass on/off
The compass is displayed automatically when the
vehicle is started.
To switch the compass on/off:
–
Use a pen, paperclip or similar object and
press in the button on the underside of the
mirror.
Related information
•
Calibrating the compass (p. 159)
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
159
Calibrating the compass
North America is divided into 15 magnetic zones
and the compass will need to be calibrated if the
vehicle is driven from one zone to another.
To calibrate the compass:
1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area, safely
out of traffic and away from steel structures
and high-tension electrical wires.
2. Start the vehicle.
NOTE
•
For best calibration results, switch off all
electrical equipment in the vehicle (climate
system, windshield wipers, audio system,
etc.) and make sure that all doors are
closed.
•
Calibration may not succeed or be incor-
rect if the vehicle's electrical equipment is
not switched off.
3. Using a pen, paperclip or similar object, press
and hold the button on the underside of mir-
ror for approx. 3 seconds until the number of
the current magnetic zone is displayed.
15
14
13
12
11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
Magnetic zones
4. Press the button on the underside of mirror
repeatedly until the desired magnetic zone
(
1–15) is displayed (see the map of mag-
netic zones).
5.
Wait until
C is again displayed in the mirror
or hold the button on the underside of mirror
for approx. 6 seconds until C is displayed in
the mirror.
6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more
than 6 mph (10 km/h) until a direction is dis-
played. This indicates that calibration is com-
plete. Drive around in a circle an additional
two times to fine-tune the calibration.
7.
Vehicles with an electrically heated wind-
shield:* if
C is displayed when the heating
function is activated, perform step 6 with the
heating function on.
8. Repeat the calibration procedure if neces-
sary.
Related information
•
Defrosting windows and mirrors (p. 191)
•
Compass (p. 158)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
160
Laminated panoramic roof*
The laminated panoramic roof is divided into two
sections and only the front section can be
opened; it can be slid horizontally to the open or
closed positions or its rear edge can be raised
and lowered to allow ventilation.
The laminated panoramic roof also has a sun
shade made of perforated fabric that is located
below the sections of glass. This shade can be
opened or closed, for example when driving in
bright sunlight.
The laminated panoramic roof also has a wind
blocker that folds up when the roof is open.
CAUTION
The optional panoramic roof should not be
opened while load carriers are installed on
the vehicle.
The laminated panoramic roof and the sun shade
are operated using the controls in the ceiling
console, near the rear-view mirror. The controls
are activated when the vehicle's ignition is in
mode I or II.
CAUTION
•
Remove ice and snow before opening the
laminated panoramic roof.
•
Do not operate the laminated panoramic
roof if it is frozen closed.
•
Never place heavy objects on the lamina-
ted panoramic roof.
Wind blocker
The laminated panoramic roof is equipped with a
wind blocker that folds up when the roof is open.
Related information
•
Operating the laminated panoramic roof*
(p. 161)
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
161
Operating the laminated panoramic
roof*
When the laminated panoramic roof is opened
using the controls in the front ceiling console, it
opens horizontally to the "comfort" position.
In the tilt (ventilation) position, the rear edge of
the front section of the roof is raised.
WARNING
•
During manual closing, if the laminated
panoramic roof is obstructed, immediately
open it again.
•
Never open or close the laminated panor-
amic roof if it is obstructed in any way.
•
Never allow a child to operate the lamina-
ted panoramic roof.
•
Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.
•
When leaving the vehicle, ensure that the
ignition is in mode 0. Never leave a
remote key in the vehicle.
•
Never extend any object or body part
though the open laminated panoramic
roof, even if the vehicle's ignition is com-
pletely switched off.
CAUTION
The optional panoramic roof should not be
opened while load carriers are installed on
the vehicle.
The laminated panoramic roof and sun shade can
be operated when the ignition is in at least
mode I. Without pressing the brake pedal, turn
the start knob clockwise as far as possible and
release it.
Tilt (ventilation) position
Tilt position, raised at the rear edge
Open (raise the rear edge of the front glass
section) by pressing the rear edge of the
control upward.
Close by pressing the rear edge of the con-
trol downward/forward and holding it until
the laminated panoramic roof has closed
completely.
If the sun shade is completely closed, it will open
approximately 2 inches (5 cm) when the lamina-
ted panoramic roof is opened to the tilt position.
The sun shade follows automatically if the panor-
amic roof is closed from the tilt position.
Operating using the controls in the
ceiling console
Manual open (arrow points toward the rear of
the vehicle)
Auto open
Manual close
Auto close
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
162
Manual operation
1.
Opening the sun shade: Pull the control
back to the first stop (the manual open posi-
tion) and hold it until the sun shade has
opened to the position of your choice.
2.
Opening the laminated panoramic roof:
Pull the control back a second time to the
first stop (the manual open position) and
hold it to open the laminated panoramic roof
to the "comfort" position that helps reduce
wind noise while driving. Pull the control a
third time to open the roof completely.
Perform this procedure in reverse order to close
the laminated panoramic roof and/or sun shade.
Movement of the laminated panoramic roof will
stop if the control is released or when the roof
reaches the "comfort", fully opened or closed
position. Movement will also stop if the control is
moved in the direction opposite to the direction
of the roof's movement.
NOTE
For manual opening, the sun shade must first
be fully open before it will be possible to open
the laminated panoramic roof. When closing,
the laminated panoramic roof must be fully
closed before the sun shade can be closed.
Automatic operation
1.
Opening the sun shade: Pull the control as
far back as possible (to the auto open posi-
tion) and release it.
2.
Opening the laminated panoramic roof:
Pull the control as far back as possible a
second time (to the auto open position) and
release it to open the laminated panoramic
roof to the "comfort" position that helps
reduce wind noise while driving. Pull the con-
trol a third time (to the auto open position)
and release it to open the roof completely.
Perform this procedure in reverse order to close
the laminated panoramic roof/sun shade.
The laminated panoramic roof will stop when it
reaches the "comfort" position, the fully open
position or the closed position. Movement will
also stop if the control is moved in the direction
opposite to the direction of the roof's movement.
The roof will not stop at the "comfort" position if
it is closed from the fully open position.
Automatic operation: quick open/close
The laminated panoramic roof and the sun shade
can be opened/closed at the same time:
–
Open: pull the control back (to the auto
open position) twice in quick succession and
release it.
–
Close: push the control forward (to the auto
close position) twice in quick succession and
release it.
The laminated panoramic roof will stop when it
reaches the "comfort" position or the closed
position. The roof will not stop at the "comfort"
position if it is closed from the fully open position.
The sun shade never stops when the roof rea-
ches the "comfort" position. Movement will also
stop if the control is moved in the direction oppo-
site to the direction of the roof's movement.
Automatically closing the sun shade
10
When the vehicle is parked in sunny/warm
weather, the sun shade can be closed automati-
cally 15 minutes after the vehicle has been
locked to help keep the temperature in the pas-
senger compartment down and to protect the
upholstery from the sun.
This function is deactivated by default and can be
activated/deactivated:
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
My Car Locking.
Select
Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to
activate/deactivate.
10
Not available in all markets
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
163
Closing using an outside door handle
11
To close the panoramic roof when locking the
vehicle, hold the pressure sensitive surface on
the outside of a door handle until the panoramic
roof has closed completely. The panoramic roof
will stop if the button is released before it is fully
closed. (This also applies to the windows).
Pinch protection (auto-stop)
The laminated panoramic roof has a pinch pro-
tection feature that is triggered if the glass sec-
tion of the roof and/or the sun shade is blocked
in any way when being closed. In this case, the
laminated panoramic roof and/or sun shade will
stop and reverse automatically approximately 2 in.
(5 cm) from the point at which it was blocked (or
will open fully to the tilt position).
The pinch protection feature also functions when
the laminated panoramic roof and/or sun shade
is being opened.
WARNING
If the pinch protection (auto-stop) feature has
been triggered, the laminated panoramic roof
and/or sun shade can still be operated once
more within 10 seconds without pinch pro-
tection.
Pinch protection will be overridden if the clos-
ing procedure has been interrupted (e.g., due
to ice around the laminated panoramic roof)
by pressing and holding the control forward/
downward until the laminated panoramic roof
and/or sun shade is closed.
Operating the laminated panoramic roof when
the pinch protection function has been disa-
bled should only be done if absolutely neces-
sary and with extreme caution.
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System*
HomeLink
®
can be used to open garage doors,
gates, etc.
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3
Indicator light
The HomeLink
®12
Wireless Control System pro-
vides a convenient way to replace up to three
hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters used
to activate devices such as gate operators,
garage door openers, entry door locks, security
11
Vehicles with the optional keyless Passive Entry system only.
12
HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
164
systems, even home lighting. Additional informa-
tion can be found on the Internet at,
www.homelink.com/www.youtube.com/
HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 1–
800–355–3515.
WARNING
•
If you use HomeLink
®
to open a garage
door or gate, be sure no one is near the
gate or door while it is in motion.
•
When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park outside of the
garage.
•
Do not use HomeLink
®
with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and
reverse features as required by U.S. fed-
eral safety standards (this includes any
garage door opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage door that
cannot detect an object - signaling the
door to stop and reverse - does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards. For
more information, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com.
Retain the original transmitter of the RF device
you are programming for use in other vehicles as
well as for future HomeLink programming. It is
also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased
for security purposes. See the article "Program-
ming HomeLink."
Related information
•
Programming the HomeLink
®
Wireless Con-
trol System* (p. 164)
Programming the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System*
NOTE
Some vehicles may require the ignition to be
switched on or be in the “accessories” posi-
tion for programming and/or operation of
HomeLink. It is also recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter
of the device being programmed to Home-
Link for quicker training and accurate trans-
mission of the radio-frequency signal. The
HomeLink buttons must be reset first. When
this has been completed, Homelink is in
learning mode so that you can perform pro-
gramming.
To program HomeLink
®
1.
Press the HomeLink
®
button to be pro-
grammed. The HomeLink
®
indicator will
begin flashing yellow once a second. You do
not need to continue holding the button.
2. Point the hand-held transmitter toward the
HomeLink
®
button to be programmed and
hold it approx. 6–12 inches (15–30 cm)
away from the HomeLink
®
button. Do not
obstruct the HomeLink
®
indicator light.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
165
3. Press and hold the button on the original
remote control that is to be programmed on
HomeLink
®
and observe the HomeLink
®
indicator light. Hold the button until the indi-
cator light has changed from flashing yellow
once a second to either flashing green 10
times a second or by glowing steadily green.
When the HomeLink
®
indicator light flashes
or glows steadily green, the button on the
original remote control can be released.
Note: for certain remote controls, the
instructions listed under "Gate operators/
Canadian programming" at the end of this
article should be used instead of step 3.
4.
Press the programmed HomeLink
®
button
and check the indicator light.
Indicator light glows steadily green: pro-
gramming has been completed. The garage
door, gate, etc., should now be activated
when the programmed button is pressed.
Indicator light flashes 10 times a second:
press the HomeLink
®
button that is being
programmed. Hold it for 2 seconds and
release it. Repeat the “press/hold/release”
sequence a second time, and, depending on
the brand of the garage door opener, repeat
this sequence a third time to complete the
programming process. Programming should
now be completed and the garage door,
gate, etc., should now be activated when the
programmed button is pressed.
If the garage door, etc. still does not
react: continue with steps 6-8 to complete
programming.
5. Locate the "training" button on the garage
door opener, etc. The designation and color
of the button may vary, depending on the
manufacturer. It is usually located near the
antenna attachment on the device.
6. Press the device's "training" button. When
this has been done, step 8 must be comple-
ted within 30 seconds.
7.
Press and hold the HomeLink
®
button being
programmed for 2 seconds and release it.
Repeat the “press/hold/release” sequence a
second time, and, depending on the brand of
the garage door opener, repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the pro-
gramming process. Programming should now
be completed and the garage door, gate, etc.,
should now be activated when the pro-
grammed button is pressed.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
166
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmit-
ter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission – which may not be long
enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal dur-
ing programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-
out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
programming a gate operator or garage door
opener by using the “Programming” procedures,
replace “Programming HomeLink” step 3
with the following:
•
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink
button while you press and release - every
two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held trans-
mitter until the HomeLink indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking
light. Now you may release both the Home-
Link and hand-held transmitter buttons.
Proceed with “Programming” step 4 to complete.
Using HomeLink
®
When programming has been completed,
HomeLink
®
can be used instead of the original
remote controls.
To operate, press and hold the programmed
HomeLink
®
button until the trained device begins
to operate
13
(this may take several seconds). The
indicator light will glow steadily or flash when the
button has been pressed. Activation will now
occur for the trained device (i.e., garage door
opener, gate operator, security system, entry door
lock, home/office lighting, etc.).
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink will
function for 30 minutes after the driver's door
has been opened.
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time.
In the event that there are still programming diffi-
culties or questions, contact HomeLink at:
www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/
HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 1–
800–355–3515.
Resetting HomeLink
®
buttons
Use the following procedure to reset (erase pro-
gramming) from the three HomeLink
®
buttons
(individual buttons cannot be reset but can be
“reprogrammed” as outlined in the following sec-
tion):
1.
Press and hold HomeLink
®
buttons 1 and 3
for approx. 10 seconds until the indicator
light begins to flash green.
2. Release both buttons.
>
HomeLink
®
is now in the training (or
learning) mode and can be programmed
at any time beginning with “To program
HomeLink
®
" above.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink
®
button
To reprogram an individual HomeLink
®
button:
1.
Press and hold the desired HomeLink
®
but-
ton. DO NOT release the button.
2. The yellow indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
HomeLink button, proceed with “To program
HomeLink
®
" step 1 above.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink
at: www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/
HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 1–
800–355–3515.
FCC (USA) and IC (Canada)
This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and
Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This
device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause
undesired operation. WARNING: The transmitter
has been tested and complies with FCC and IC
13
Do not hold the button for more than 20 seconds as this will clear the programming of the button.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
167
rules. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party are prohibited.
NOTE
The transmitter has been tested and complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifica-
tions not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the device.
14
Related information
•
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System*
(p. 163)
Trip computer
The trip computer registers and calculates infor-
mation such as distance driven, fuel consump-
tion and average speed. This information is dis-
played in the instrument panel.
To help promote fuel efficient driving, the trip
computer provides readings for current and aver-
age fuel consumption.
The trip computer includes the following
gauges:
•
Trip odometers
•
Odometer
•
Current fuel consumption
•
Distance to empty
•
Tourist (alternative speedometer)
Trip odometer
There are two trip odometers: TM and TA. During
a drive, the trip odometer registers:
•
Mileage
•
Driving time
•
Average speed
•
Average fuel consumption
The values displayed are those since the last
time the trip odometer was reset.
Odometer
The odometer registers the vehicle's total mile-
age and cannot be reset.
Current fuel consumption
This gauge shows the current fuel consumption.
This reading is updated once a second.
Distance to empty
This function shows the approximate distance
that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the
tank.
The calculation is based on average fuel con-
sumption during the last 20 miles (30 km) of
driving and the amount of fuel remaining in the
tank.
When the gauge displays "----", there is very little
useable fuel remaining in the tank; refuel as soon
as possible.
14
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
168
The accuracy of this figure may vary if your driv-
ing style changes. An economical driving style will
generally increase this distance.
Distance to discharged battery
This gauge shows the approximate dis-
tance that can be driven on the charge
remaining in the hybrid battery.
When the gauge displays "----" there is no guar-
anteed driving charge remaining in the battery.
This calculation is based on the average electrical
current consumption in a normally loaded vehicle
during normal driving, and whether the A/C is on
or off. Changing drive modes from
Hybrid to
Pure may increase the calculated distance to a
discharged battery since Pure mode reduces
certain climate system functions.
An economical driving style will generally
increase this distance.
Distance using the electric motor
To get the optimal driving distance using the
electric motor, it is essential to conserve current.
Functions that use a great deal of current (e.g.,
audio system, electrical heating in the steering
wheel/door mirrors/rear window/seats, very cold
air from the climate system, etc.) reduce the pos-
sible driving distance.
NOTE
In addition to high electrical consumption in
the passenger compartment, fast accelera-
tion, sudden braking, heavy loads, low ambient
temperatures and driving up hills can reduce
the possible driving distance.
Tourist (alternative speedometer)
This is an alternative digital speedometer can be
used when driving in areas in which the speed
limit is listed in a different unit of measure. If the
speedometer is in mph, this gauge will show the
vehicle's speed in km/h and vice versa.
Related information
•
Displaying trip computer information (p. 168)
•
Displaying trip statistics (p. 170)
•
Using the electric motor in city driving
(p. 406)
Displaying trip computer
information
The trip computer registers and calculates infor-
mation such as distance driven, fuel consump-
tion and average speed. This information is dis-
played in the instrument panel.
Use the right-side steering wheel keypad to navigate in
the trip computer (generic illustration)
Open/close the app menu
Left/right arrow keys
Up/down arrow keys
Confirm
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
169
1. Press (1) to open the app menu in the
instrument panel.
The app menu cannot be opened if there is
an a message in the instrument panel that
has not been confirmed. Press (4) to confirm.
2. The top four lines show readings from trip
odometer TM. The following four lines show
readings from trip odometer TA. Scroll up/
down in the list using (3).
3. Scroll to the selection buttons in the lines
below TA and select the trip odometer to be
displayed.
•
Current fuel consumption
•
Distance to empty
•
Odometer
•
Trip odometers TM, TA or none
•
Tourist (alternative speedometer).
•
Distance to discharged battery
Select or deselect an alternative using the
center button (4). The change will be made
immediately.
Resetting a trip odometer
Reset trip odometer TM by pressing and holding
the RESET button the left-side steering wheel
lever. Trip odometer TA resets automatically if the
ignition is switched off for more than 4 hours.
Changing the unit of measure
Change the units of measure for driven distance
and fuel consumption in the center display's Top
view by selecting
Settings System Units
of Measurement
and marking the desired unit.
NOTE
Changing these units of measure will also
change the ones used in the Volvo navigation
system*.
Related information
•
Displaying trip statistics (p. 170)
•
Trip computer (p. 167)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
170
Displaying trip statistics
Trip computer statistics can be displayed graphi-
cally in the center display.
Open the Driver performance
app in the app menu to display
trip statistics.
Each bar in the graph repre-
sents a driving distance of
1 mile, 10 miles or 100 miles
15
depending on the current scale; bars are added
from the right and the bar at the far right shows
the value for the current trip.
Average fuel consumption is calculated from the
most recent time at which the current trip odom-
eter was reset.
Fuel and electrical current consumption are
shown in separate graphs. The electrical current
graph shows "net" consumption, i.e., consumed
current minus regenerated current generated by
braking.
Trip statistic settings
Select Preferences to:
•
change the graph's scale
•
Reset data after each trip (this occurs if the
vehicle remains parked for more than 4
hours)
•
Reset data for the current trip
The illustration is generic; the layout may vary depending
on the model or due to software updates
Changing the unit of measure
Change the units of measure for driven distance
and fuel consumption in the center display's Top
view.
1.
Tap
Settings in Top view.
2.
Tap
System Units.
3.
Under
Units of Measurement, select:
Metric, Imperial or US.
Related information
•
Trip computer (p. 167)
•
Displaying trip computer information (p. 168)
Settings view
The center display's Settings view is used to
make many of the vehicle's function settings and
to display vehicle-related information.
Opening Settings view
Top view with the Settings button
1. Pull down the tab on the upper edge of the
center display to open Top view.
2.
Tap
Settings.
3. Tap one of the categories displayed and nav-
igate to sub-categories and settings by tap-
ping again.
4.
Tap
Back to go back in Settings view.
Tap
Close to close Settings view.
15
This can also be displayed in kilometers.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
171
Changing a setting
A sub-category in Settings view with various possible
settings
1. Tap the category/sub-category to navigate to
the desired setting.
2. Change the setting(s).
> The changes are saved immediately.
Types of settings
Type of
setting
Description
Trigger
function
Starts an app or a separate view
for more advanced settings. Tap
the text to e.g., connect a
Bluetooth device.
Radio
button
Select one of the possible set-
tings by tapping the desired radio
button to e.g., change the system
language.
Type of
setting
Description
Multi-
selection
button
Select a level for a particular set-
ting by pressing the desired part
of the button e.g., to set the
desired level for City Safety.
Check
box
Tap to activate/deactivate a func-
tion e.g., to select automatic start
for steering wheel heating.
Slider Select a level for a function by
pressing and dragging the slider
control e.g., to set a volume level.
Informa-
tion dis-
play
This is not an actual setting but
displays information such as the
vehicle's VIN number.
Related information
•
Center display overview (p. 32)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 38)
•
Using the center display (p. 34)
•
Changing system settings in Settings view
(p. 173)
•
Categories in Settings view (p. 171)
Categories in Settings view
Settings view consists of a number of main cate-
gories and sub-categories that contain settings
and information for many of the vehicle's fea-
tures and functions.
The main categories in Settings view are: My
Car, Sound, Navigation, Media,
Communication, Climate and System.
Each main category, in turn, contains several sub-
categories with possible settings. The table
shows the first level of sub-categories. The possi-
ble settings for a function or area are described
in greater detail in their respective articles in the
owner's manual. For system settings not descri-
bed in the respective articles, see "Changing sys-
tem settings in Settings view."
My Car
Sub-categories Type of setting
Displays
Personal
IntelliSafe
Combination
Park Assist
Global
Drive Mode/Individual
Drive Mode
*
Combination
Lights and Lighting
Combination
Mirrors and Easy Entry
Personal
Locking
Combination
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
172
Sub-categories Type of setting
Parking Brake and Sus-
pension
Combination
Seats
Combination
Wipers
Combination
Suspension
Global
Sound
Sub-categories Type of setting
Sound Experience*
Personal
Tone
Personal
Balance
Personal
System Volumes
Combination
Navigation
Sub-categories Type of setting
Map
Personal
Route and Guidance
Personal
Traffic
Personal
Guidance
Personal
System
Personal
Media
Sub-categories Type of setting
AM/FM Radio
A
Personal
SiriusXM
Personal
Gracenote®
Personal
Video
Personal
A
AM radio is not available in hybrid models.
Communication
Sub-categories Type of setting
Phone
–
Text Messages
–
Bluetooth Devices
–
Wi-Fi
Global
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Global
Vehicle Modem Internet
Global
Volvo On Call
–
Volvo Service Networks
Global
Climate
The main category Climate has no sub-catego-
ries.
System
Sub-categories Type of setting
Driver Profile
Personal
Date and Time
–
System Language
Personal
Keyboard Layouts
Global
Voice Control
Personal
Units
Personal
Storage
–
Download Center
–
Factory Reset
–
Services
–
Related information
•
Settings view (p. 170)
•
Changing system settings in Settings view
(p. 173)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
173
Changing system settings in
Settings view
Settings view's main category
System contains
general settings and information, such as lan-
guage, units of measure, etc.
The system settings under Driver Profile, Date
and Time, Keyboard Layouts, Voice Control,
Download Center, Factory reset and
Services are described in their respective arti-
cles in the owner's manual.
Changing system languages
1. Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap
Settings.
2.
Tap
System System Language.
3. Select a new system language. Languages
that can be used for voice commands are
indicated by a voice control symbol.
> This change affects the language used in
the instrument panel, center display and
the head-up display*.
Changing units of measure
Changing length and volume units
1. Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap
Settings.
2.
Tap
System Units Units of
Measurement
.
3. Select one of the following measurement
standards:
•
Metric: kilometers, liters and degrees Cel-
sius.
•
Imperial: miles, gallons and degrees Cel-
sius.
•
US: miles, gallons and degrees Fahren-
heit.
> This change affects the units of measure
used in the instrument panel, center dis-
play and the head-up display*
Changing tire inflation pressure units
1. Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap
Settings.
2.
Tap
System Units Tire Pressure
Units
.
3. Select a unit of measure for tire pressure.
> This changes the tire inflation pressure
units used in the
Car status app in the
center display.
Viewing storage information
1. Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap
Settings.
2.
Tap
System Storage.
> Storage information for the vehicle's hard
drive will be displayed, including total
capacity, available capacity and the
amount of storage space used by the
apps that have been installed.
Viewing the VIN (Vehicle Identification
Number)
1. Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap
Settings.
2.
Tap
System Vehicle Identification
Number
.
> The vehicle's VIN will be displayed.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
174
Resetting the settings view
All of the changes made under Settings view
can be reset to their default values at the same
time.
Types of reset
There are three ways to reset the settings in Set-
tings view under
Factory Reset:
•
Factory Reset: erases all data and media
and resets to the settings used when the
vehicle left the factory.
•
Reset Vehicle Settings: resets all global
settings to standard ones.
•
Reset Personal Settings: erases all per-
sonal data and resets to standard settings.
Resetting
NOTE
Factory Reset is only possible when the
vehicle is stationary.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap System Factory Reset.
> A pop-up menu will appear.
3.
Tap
OK to confirm your choice.
For Reset Personal Settings, tap Reset
for the active profile or Reset for all
profiles for confirmation.
> The selected settings will be reset.
Related information
•
Settings view (p. 170)
•
Resetting user data when the vehicle
changes owners (p. 179)
•
Changing system settings in Settings view
(p. 173)
Driver profiles
Many of the vehicle's settings can be adapted to
the driver's personal preferences and saved in
one or more driver profiles.
The personal settings made are automatically
saved in the active driver profile. Each remote key
is linked to a driver profile and when this key is
used, the vehicle's settings are adapted accord-
ing to the specific ones saved in that profile.
Which settings are saved in driver
profiles?
The settings that can be changed in the vehicle
are either personal or global.
Changes made to personal settings are saved
automatically in the active (current) driver profile,
assuming that this profile is not locked. See the
article "Editing a driver profile" for additional
information.
Changes to global settings are not saved in a
specific driver profile but instead affect all driver
profiles.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
175
Global settings
Global settings and parameters remain the same
regardless of which driver profile is currently
active.
Keyboard layout is an example of a global setting.
If driver profile X is used to add additional key-
board languages, these languages will also be
available even if driver profile Y is used. This type
of global change is not specific to a single driver
profile.
Personal settings
If driver profile X has been used to e.g., set the
brightness for the center display, driver profile Y
will not be affected by this setting since it is spe-
cific (personal) to driver profile X.
See also the article "Categories in Settings view"
for an overview of global and personal settings.
Related information
•
Editing a driver profile (p. 176)
•
Categories in Settings view (p. 171)
Selecting a driver profile
The most recently selected driver profile will be
used automatically the next time the vehicle is
started. However, a different driver profile can be
selected after the vehicle has started.
When the vehicle is started, the most recently
selected driver profile will be shown at the top of
the center display. There are two alternatives for
changing to another driver profile.
Alternative1:
1. Tap the name of the drive profile shown at
the top of the center display when the vehi-
cle has been started.
> A list of driver profiles that can be
selected will be displayed.
2. Select the desired profile.
3.
Tap
Confirm.
> The new driver profile has now been
selected and the system will load the set-
tings stored in that profile.
Alternative 2:
1. Pull down the center display's Top view.
2.
Tap
Profile.
> A list of driver profiles that can be
selected will be displayed.
3. Select the desired profile.
4.
Tap
Confirm.
> The new driver profile has now been
selected and the system will load the set-
tings stored in that profile.
Related information
•
Driver profiles (p. 174)
•
Editing a driver profile (p. 176)
•
Linking a remote key to a driver profile
(p. 176)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
176
Editing a driver profile
The names of the driver profiles created for the
vehicle can be changed.
All types of changes in driver profiles are made
from the center display's Top view:
Settings
System Driver Profiles.
Changing a profile's name
Changing a driver profile's name is done from the
Driver Profile window:
1.
Tap
Edit Profile.
> A menu will open in which the profile can
be edited.
2.
Tap the
Profile Name box.
> A keyboard will be displayed and can be
used to change the name. Tap to
close the keyboard.
3.
Save the changes by tapping
Back/Close.
> The name has now been changed.
Resetting driver profile changes
Settings that have been changed and saved in
one or more driver profiles can be reset.
NOTE
Factory Reset is only possible when the
vehicle is stationary.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Select
System Factory Reset Reset
Personal Settings
.
3.
Select one of the following:
Reset for the
active profile, Reset for all profiles or
Cancel.
Related information
•
Driver profiles (p. 174)
•
Resetting the settings view (p. 174)
•
Using the center display keyboard (p. 47)
•
Using the center display (p. 34)
•
Selecting a driver profile (p. 175)
Linking a remote key to a driver
profile
A remote key can be linked to a driver profile,
which means that all of the settings stored in the
driver profile will apply each time that particular
remote key is used with the vehicle.
A remote key is not initially linked to a specific
driver profile. When the key is used to unlock the
vehicle/start the engine for the first time, the
Guest profile will be used.
A driver profile can be selected manually each
time the vehicle is unlocked/started without a
remote key being linked to that profile. When the
vehicle is started, the most recently selected
driver profile will be activated. If the key has previ-
ously been linked to a driver profile, it is not nec-
essary to manually select a profile when that par-
ticular key is used.
Linking a remote key to a driver profile
for the first time
Select a profile to link to the remote key (if that
profile is not already active).
1. Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap
Settings.
2.
Tap
System Driver Profiles.
3. Tap the profile to be linked to the remote
key. The display will return to Home view. The
Guest profile cannot be linked to a remote
key.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
177
4. Open Top view in the center display again
and tap
Settings System Driver
Profiles
Edit Profile.
5.
Select
Connect key to link the selected pro-
file to the remote key currently being used. A
profile can only be linked to the remote key
that is currently being used. If there are sev-
eral keys in the vehicle at the same time,
More than one key is found, put the key
you want to connect on backup reader
will be displayed.
Location of the backup reader in the tunnel console
>
When
Profile connected to key is dis-
played, the remote key and the selected
driver profile have been linked.
6.
Tap
OK to confirm.
> The key currently in use will remain linked
to the selected driver profile as long as
the
Connect key box is not deselected.
Related information
•
Driver profiles (p. 174)
•
Editing a driver profile (p. 176)
•
Remote key (p. 226)
Importing/exporting a driver profile
from/to a USB flash drive
The personal settings stored in a driver profile
can be imported or exported to another vehicle
using a USB flash drive.
The following steps describe the procedure for
importing or exporting personal settings saved in
a driver profile to a USB flash drive:
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
System Driver Profiles.
3. Insert a flash drive in the USB socket in the
tunnel console.
USB socket in the tunnel console
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
178
4.
Select
Import profile from USB/Export
profile to USB.
NOTE
•
The
Guest profile cannot be imported or
exported.
•
Several profiles can be exported to USB
but only one profile can be imported.
When a profile is imported, it overwrites
the one currently being used in the vehicle.
5. Select the profile(s) to be imported/exported.
6.
Select
OK.
If an export does not succeed, this may be due
to:
•
USB flash drive is full.
•
USB flash drive was not inserted correctly or
was removed before the export was comple-
ted.
If an import does not succeed, this may be due
to:
•
USB flash drive was not inserted correctly or
was removed before the import was comple-
ted.
•
No driver profile had been stored on the USB
flash drive.
•
The driver profile file on the USB flash drive
is damaged.
Related information
•
Driver profiles (p. 174)
Changing settings in apps
App view, which is one of the center display's
basic views, contains all of the apps installed in
the vehicle. From Home view, navigate to App
view by swiping the screen from right to left.
Apps for integrated (basic) functions
Certain apps in your vehicle are factory-installed,
such as
FM, USB and CD and are part of Sen-
sus. Settings in these apps can be changed in
the center display's Top view.
Changing settings for a basic app
1.
Tap one of the basic apps, for example
FM
radio.
2. Pull down Top view.
3.
Tap
FM Radio Settings.
4. Change the desired settings and confirm.
5. Press the Home button below the center dis-
play or tap the screen outside of Top view or
pull up Top view to return to your original
view. See also the article "Categories in Set-
tings view."
Third party apps
Third party apps have to be downloaded e.g.,
Volvo ID. Settings for these apps are made in
the apps themselves, not in Top view.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
179
Related information
•
Settings view (p. 170)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 38)
•
Categories in Settings view (p. 171)
Resetting user data when the
vehicle changes owners
When the vehicle changes owners, all user set-
tings should be reset to the factory defaults.
When the vehicle changes owners, it is essential
to reset all user data and system settings to their
factory defaults, including Volvo On Call.
Related information
•
Resetting the settings view (p. 174)
•
Volvo ID (p. 25)
CLIMATE
CLIMATE
182
Climate control system
The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Climate
Control (ECC) that cools, heats, dehumidifies
and filters the air in the passenger compartment.
4-zone climate system
4-zone system climate zones
The 4-zone climate system makes it possible to
set the left- and right-side temperatures sepa-
rately for the front and rears seats.
All climate system settings are made from the
center display and the buttons in the center con-
sole. Settings for the rear seats can also be
made from the climate system panel on the rear
side of the tunnel console.
Related information
•
Climate system sensors (p. 182)
•
Perceived temperature (p. 183)
•
Climate system controls (p. 186)
•
Air quality (p. 183)
•
Air distribution (p. 194)
•
Air conditioning refrigerant (p. 562)
•
Parking climate (preconditioning) (p. 201)
•
Air quality (p. 183)
•
Climate system controls (p. 186)
•
Air distribution (p. 194)
•
Parking climate (preconditioning) (p. 201)
Climate system sensors
The climate system's sensors help regulate the
passenger compartment temperature, humidity
level, etc.
Location of the sensors
Humidity sensor: in the rearview mirror con-
sole.
Ambient temperature sensor: in the pas-
senger's side door mirror.
Sunlight sensor: on the upper side of the
dashboard.
Passenger compartment temperature sen-
sor: near the center console buttons.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with cloth-
ing or other objects.
CLIMATE
}}
* Option/accessory.
183
On models equipped with the optional Interior Air
Quality System, there is also an air quality sensor
located at the climate system's air intake.
Related information
•
Climate control system (p. 182)
•
Perceived temperature (p. 183)
•
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* (p. 185)
Perceived temperature
The climate system regulates passenger com-
partment temperature based on the perceived
temperature, not on the actual one.
The selected passenger compartment tempera-
ture is based on a physical perception relating to
the current ambient temperature, air flow, humid-
ity, sunlight in the passenger compartment, etc.
The system's sunlight sensor monitors the side of
the car where sunlight is entering the passenger
compartment. This means that the actual tem-
perature may differ between the right and left
sides of the compartment, even if the tempera-
ture setting is the same for both sides.
Related information
•
Climate system sensors (p. 182)
•
Climate control system (p. 182)
Air quality
The materials used in the passenger compart-
ment have been selected and designed to be
pleasant and comfortable, even for people with
asthma or other types of allergies.
Materials in the passenger
compartment
The materials used have been developed to help
minimize the amount of dust and make the cabin
easier to keep clean.
All floor mats (including the cargo compartment)
can be easily removed for cleaning.
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and fol-
low the instructions included with the product.
Air filtering systems
In addition to the passenger compartment filter,
the Clean Zone Interior Package* and the Interior
Air Quality System* contribute to a cleaner pas-
senger compartment environment.
Clean Zone*
The Clean Zone function monitors the conditions
that affect good passenger compartment air
quality.
||
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
184
The indicator is shown in center display's Cli-
mate view.
The indicator is shown in the climate bar
when the Climate view is not open.
If the air quality conditions are not met, the text
Clean Zone will be white. When the conditions
are met, the text will change to blue.
The conditions monitored are:
•
All side windows, doors, tailgate and panor-
amic roof* are closed
•
The Interior Air Quality System* is activated
•
The air conditioning is activated
•
Recirculation is deactivated
NOTE
Please be aware that the Clean Zone function
does not indicate that the air quality in the
passenger is good, only that the conditions
for good air quality have been met.
Related information
•
Passenger compartment air filter (p. 184)
•
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* (p. 185)
•
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*
(p. 185)
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 545)
•
Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 186)
Passenger compartment air filter
All air entering the passenger compartment
through the climate system air intake is filtered.
Filter replacement
The filter must be replaced according to the serv-
ice schedule for your vehicle. When driving in e.g.,
dusty or industrial areas, the filter may need to be
replaced more often. Consult your Volvo retailer.
Related information
•
Air quality (p. 183)
•
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*
(p. 185)
•
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* (p. 185)
•
Volvo's service program (p. 506)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
185
Clean Zone Interior Package
(CZIP)*
The Clean Zone Interior Package includes a
number of features that help further reduce aller-
genic substances in the passenger compart-
ment.
CZIP includes the following:
•
An enhanced blower function that starts the
blower when the vehicle is unlocked with the
remote key to fill the passenger compart-
ment with fresh air. This function starts auto-
matically when required and shuts off auto-
matically after a short period or if one the
doors is opened. The time for which the
blower operates decreases gradually due to
reduced need until the vehicle is four years
old.
•
The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS).
Related information
•
Air quality (p. 183)
•
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* (p. 185)
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)*
The Interior Air Quality System uses a multifilter
and an air quality sensor to remove gases, parti-
cles and other contaminants from the air enter-
ing the passenger compartment.
The IAQS air quality sensor monitors increased
levels of contaminants in the outside air and if
contaminants are detected, the air intake closes
and the air inside the passenger compartment is
recirculated, i.e., no outside air enters the vehicle.
The filter also cleans recirculated passenger
compartment air.
NOTE
•
The air quality sensor should always be
engaged in order to obtain the best air in
the passenger compartment.
•
Recirculation is limited in cold weather to
avoid fogging.
•
If the insides of the windows start fog-
ging, disengage the air quality sensor.
Use the defroster function to increase
airflow to the front, side, and rear win-
dows.
Activating/deactivating IAQS
To change the setting for IAQS activation/deacti-
vation:
1. In the center display's Settings view, go to
Climate.
2. Activate/deactivate IAQS by selecting/dese-
lecting the
Air Quality Sensor box.
Related information
•
Air quality (p. 183)
•
Passenger compartment air filter (p. 184)
•
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*
(p. 185)
•
Turning recirculation on and off (p. 193)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
186
Climate system controls
Climate system functions are controlled using
buttons on the center console and on the center
display.
Overview of climate system controls
Climate system controls in the center display
Defroster buttons on the center console
Related information
•
Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 186)
•
Climate control system (p. 182)
•
Defrosting windows and mirrors (p. 191)
•
Climate system voice commands (p. 125)
•
Air quality (p. 183)
Climate system controls in the
center display
All climate system functions can be controlled
from the center display's climate bar and Cli-
mate view.
Climate bar
The most common climate system functions can
be controlled from the climate bar.
Temperature control for the driver and pas-
senger sides.
Control for heated* and ventilated* driver/
passenger seats and heated steering wheel*.
Button for opening Climate view. The graphic
in the button shows the activated climate
system settings.
Climate view
Tap the center button on the climate bar to
access Climate view, which is divided into the fol-
lowing tabs:
Main climate and Parking climate.
Toggle between the tabs by swiping the screen
to the left/right or by tapping the respective
headings.
CLIMATE
}}
* Option/accessory.
187
Main climate settings
In addition to the climate bar's functions, other
primary climate system functions can also be
controlled from the
Main climate tab.
Max, Electric, Rear: controls for defrosting
windows and door mirrors.
AC: air conditioning controls.
Recirc: recirculation controls.
Air distribution controls.
Blower control.
AUTO: climate system Auto mode.
Parking climate
All of the parking climate functions can be con-
trolled from the
Parking climate tab.
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 186)
•
Defrosting windows and mirrors (p. 191)
•
Air conditioning (p. 188)
•
Adjusting air distribution (p. 194)
•
Setting the temperature (p. 189)
•
Setting the blower speed (p. 190)
•
Automatic climate control (p. 187)
•
Turning steering wheel heating* on and off
(p. 201)
•
Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 199)
Automatic climate control
The Auto feature automatically controls a num-
ber of climate system functions.
The Auto climate button in Climate view
1. Go to the center display's Climate view.
2.
Tap or press and hold
AUTO.
> Auto mode is activated (button lights up)/
deactivated (button is off). Auto mode
automatically controls air recirculation, air
conditioning, and air distribution.
Blower speed and temperature change
depending on how long the button is
pressed.
•
Tap: return to previous settings.
•
Press and hold: change to default set-
tings (level
3 and 72 °F (22 °C)/(level
3.
||
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
188
Related information
•
Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 186)
Air conditioning
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies the
air in the passenger compartment.
Activating/deactivating the main air
conditioning unit
Air conditioning button in Climate view
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Tap
AC.
> The air conditioning is activated (button
lights up)/deactivated (button is off).
When the air conditioning is activated, it will be
switched on and off automatically by the climate
system as necessary.
NOTE
•
For the air conditioning to function opti-
mally, close the side windows and lamina-
ted panoramic roof*
•
The air conditioning cannot be activated
if the blower is set to
Off
Related information
•
Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 186)
CLIMATE
}}
189
Setting the temperature
The temperature can be set separately for the
left and right sides of the passenger compart-
ment.
Setting the temperature for the front
seats
1
Temperature buttons in the climate bar
1. Tap the right or left side temperature button
in the center display's climate bar to open
the control.
Temperature control
2. Set a temperature by:
•
dragging the control to the desired tem-
perature or
•
tapping
+/− to raise/lower the tempera-
ture.
> The temperature will change and the new
temperature will be shown in the button.
Synchronizing the temperature
Synchronization button on the driver's side temperature
control
1. Tap the driver's side temperature button to
open the control.
2.
Tap
Synchronize temperature .
> The temperature for all of the vehicle's cli-
mate zones will be synchronized with the
one set for the driver's side and the syn-
chronization symbol will be displayed in
the temperature button.
Synchronization can be stopped by tapping
Synchronize temperature again or by chang-
ing the temperature for the passenger's side.
1
The same setting applies to the rear seats in models with the 2-zone climate system.
||
CLIMATE
190
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 186)
•
Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 186)
•
Perceived temperature (p. 183)
Setting the blower speed
The blower can be set to five different automatic
speeds plus
Off and Max.
Setting blower speed for the front
seats
2
Blower control buttons in Climate view
1. Go to the center display's Climate view.
2.
Tap the desired blower speed:
Off, 1–5 or
Max.
> The blower speed will change and the
button for the selected speed will light up.
NOTE
If the blower is turned off completely, the air
conditioning is disengaged, which may result
in fogging on the windows.
Related information
•
Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 186)
2
The same setting applies to the rear seats in models with the 2-zone climate system.
CLIMATE
}}
* Option/accessory.
191
Defrosting windows and mirrors
The max. defroster, heated windshield* and
heated rear window/door mirror functions are
used to remove ice or condensation.
Using the buttons in the center console
The buttons in the center console offer quick
access to the defroster functions.
On models with the optional heated windshield,
the max. defroster function can only be activated
separately from the Climate view in the center
display.
Center console buttons
Button for the heated windshield* and max.
defroster.
Button for the heated rear window and door
mirrors.
Models without a heated windshield.
–
Press button (1).
> Max. defroster is activated (button indica-
tor light on)/deactivated (button indicator
light off).
Models with a heated windshield*.
–
Press button (1) repeatedly to access the
function's three levels:
•
Activate windshield heating
•
Activate windshield heating and max.
defroster
•
Deactivated
> The windshield heating is activated (but-
ton indicator light on)/deactivated (button
indicator light off).
NOTE
Max. defroster starts after a slight delay to
avoid a brief increase in blower speed if the
heated windshield function has been deacti-
vated by pressing the button twice in quick
succession.
Heated rear window and door mirrors
–
Press button (2).
> Heating for the rear window/door mirrors
is activated (button indicator light on)/
deactivated (button indicator light off).
||
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
192
From the center display's Climate view
Activate/deactivate max. defroster
Max. defroster button in Climate view
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Tap
Max.
> Max. defroster is activated (button lights
up)/deactivated (button is off).
Max. defroster overrides automatic climate
control and recirculation, and activates the
air conditioning, changes blower speed to
5
3
and the temperature to
HI
3
.
When max. defroster is deactivated, the
climate system returns to the previous
settings.
Activating/deactivating windshield heating*
Windshield heating button in Climate view
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Tap
Electric.
> Windshield heating is activated (button
lights up)/deactivated (button is off).
NOTE
•
Triangular areas at the far sides of the
windshield are not heated electrically and
will take slightly longer to defrost/de-ice.
•
The heated windshield may affect the
performance/range of e.g., transponders
used to automatically pay highway tolls or
other communication equipment.
Activating/deactivating rear window and
door mirror heating
Rear window/door mirror heating button in Climate view
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Tap
Rear.
> Rear window/door mirror heating is acti-
vated (button lights up)/deactivated (but-
ton is off).
Automatically activating/deactivating
the window heating function when the
engine is started
The rear window/door mirror/windshield heating*
can be set to start automatically when the engine
is started. The heating function switches off auto-
matically when the glass surfaces are sufficiently
warm and the condensation/ice has disappeared.
3
In models with the 4-zone climate system*, front seats only.
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
193
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view and select Climate.
2. Activate/deactivate the respective defroster
functions when the engine is started by
selecting/deselecting the boxes for
Auto
Front Defroster and Auto Rear Defroster.
The heating function will switch off automatically
when the window/mirror is sufficiently warm and
the ice/condensation has disappeared.
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 186)
•
Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 186)
•
Defrosting windows and mirrors (p. 191)
•
Air conditioning (p. 188)
•
Turning recirculation on and off (p. 193)
•
Adjusting air distribution (p. 194)
•
Setting the blower speed (p. 190)
•
Automatic climate control (p. 187)
•
Turning front seat ventilation* on and off
(p. 200)
•
Turning steering wheel heating* on and off
(p. 201)
Turning recirculation on and off
Recirculation can be used to shut out exhaust
fumes, smoke, etc., from the passenger com-
partment.
Recirculation button in Climate view
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Press
Recirc.
> Recirculation is activated (button lights
up)/deactivated (button is off)
NOTE
•
If recirculation is on for too long, there is
a risk of condensation forming on the
insides of the windows, especially in win-
ter.
•
Recirculation cannot be deactivated if
max. defroster is being used.
Activating/deactivating the recirculation
timer
With the timer activated, recirculation will switch
off automatically after 20 minutes.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
Climate.
3. Activate/deactivate the timer by selecting/
deselecting the box for
Recirculation
Timer.
Related information
•
Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 186)
CLIMATE
194
Air distribution
The incoming air is distributed through a number
of different vents in the passenger compartment.
Air distribution overview
Air distribution with a 2-zone climate system
Automatic and manual air distribution
When the auto-climate feature is being used, air
distribution is regulated automatically. However,
air distribution can also be adjusted manually.
Adjustable air vents
There are 6 adjustable air vents in the passenger
compartment.
Location of the air vents
Four vents on the dashboard and one on
each of the pillars between the front and rear
doors.
Related information
•
Climate control system (p. 182)
•
Adjusting air distribution (p. 194)
•
Opening/closing/directing air vents (p. 195)
•
Air distribution table (p. 197)
•
Automatic climate control (p. 187)
Adjusting air distribution
Air distribution can be adjusted manually.
Air distribution buttons in Climate view
Defrost the windshield
Air vents in the dashboard and center con-
sole
Floor air vents
1. Go to Climate view in the center display.
2. Tap one or more of the air distribution but-
tons to open/close the corresponding air
flow.
> Air distribution changes and the buttons
light up or go out.
Related information
•
Air distribution (p. 194)
•
Opening/closing/directing air vents (p. 195)
CLIMATE
}}
195
•
Air distribution table (p. 197)
•
Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 186)
Opening/closing/directing air vents
Some of the passenger compartment air vents
can be open/closed/directed individually.
Direct the dashboard and door pillar outer air
vents toward the side windows to demist/defrost.
Direct the vents into the passenger compartment
to help maintain a comfortable temperature in
warm weather.
Opening/closing air vents
Air vent thumb wheel
4
–
Turn the thumb wheel to open/close the air
flow from the vent.
The more of the white lines on the thumb
wheel that are visible, the greater the air flow.
Rear seat air vents
Air vent thumb wheel
4
.
–
Turn the thumb wheel to open/close the air
flow from the vent.
The more of the white lines on the thumb
wheel that are visible, the greater the air flow.
4
The illustration is generic; the air vent's design varies, depending on its location.
||
CLIMATE
196
Directing air flow
Air flow control
4
–
Move the control from side to side or up/
down to direct the flow of air from the vent.
Related information
•
Air distribution (p. 194)
•
Adjusting air distribution (p. 194)
•
Air distribution table (p. 197)
4
The illustration is generic; the air vent's design varies, depending on its location.
CLIMATE
}}
197
Air distribution table
Air distribution can be adjusted manually.
Air distribution Use
If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate system
will revert to automatic mode.
Main air flow from the defroster vents, some flow from the other vents. To remove ice and condensation (with moderate
blower speed).
Main air flow from the dashboard vents, some flow from the other vents. For best comfort in hot weather.
Main air flow from the floor vents, some flow from the other vents. For heating/cooling near the floor.
||
CLIMATE
198
Air distribution Use
Main air flow from the defroster and dashboard vents, some flow from the other
vents.
For best comfort in hot and dry weather.
Main air flow from the defroster and floor vents, some flow from the other vents. For best comfort and defrosting in cold or humid con-
ditions.
Main air flow from the dashboard and floor vents, some flow from the other
vents.
For good comfort in sunny, cool weather.
For cooling or heat to the floor.
Main air flow from the defroster, dashboard and floor vents. For cooler air toward the floor in warm weather or
warmer air upward in cold weather.
Related information
•
Air distribution (p. 194)
•
Opening/closing/directing air vents (p. 195)
•
Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 186)
•
Adjusting air distribution (p. 194)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
199
Turning seat heating* on and off
The seats can be heated for added comfort in
cold weather.
Activating/deactivating front seat
heating
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate bar
1. Tap the left or right side steering wheel and
seat button in the center display's climate
bar to open the steering wheel and seat
heating controls.
If the vehicle is not equipped with the
optional heated steering wheel or ventilated
seats, the button for seat heating will be
directly accessible in the climate bar.
2. Tap the seat heating button repeatedly to
select one of four levels:
Off, High, Medium
or Low.
> The level changes and is displayed in the
button.
Activating/deactivating rear seat
heating
From the rear seat
Seat heating buttons on the rear side of the tunnel con-
sole
–
Press repeatedly on the left or right side but-
tons on the rear side of the tunnel console to
select one of four levels:
Off, High, Medium
or Low.
> The level changes and the indicator lights
in the button display the selected level.
Automatically activating/deactivating
the seat heating function when the
engine is started
The seat heating* can be set to start automati-
cally when the engine is started.
The automatic function starts heating the seats
when the ambient temperature is sufficiently cold.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
Climate.
3.
Under
Auto Driver Seat Heating Level and
Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level,
select Off, Low, Medium or High to acti-
vate/deactivate the automatic function and
select a level for the driver's and passenger's
seats.
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 186)
•
Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 186)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
200
Turning front seat ventilation* on
and off
Seat ventilation can be used e.g., to help remove
dampness from the seat occupant's clothing.
The ventilation system consists of fans in the
seats and backrests that draw air through the
seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases as
the air in the passenger compartment becomes
cooler. This feature can be activated when the
engine is running.
Activating/deactivating front seat
ventilation
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate bar
1. Tap the left or right side steering wheel and
seat button in the center display's climate
bar to open the steering wheel and seat con-
trols.
If the vehicle is not equipped with the
optional heated steering wheel/seats, the
button for seat ventilation will be directly
accessible in the climate bar.
2. Tap the seat ventilation button repeatedly to
select one of four levels:
Off, High, Medium
or Low.
> The level changes and is displayed in the
button.
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 186)
•
Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 186)
CLIMATE
}}
* Option/accessory.
201
Turning steering wheel heating* on
and off
The steering wheel can be heated electrically for
added comfort in cold weather.
Activating/deactivating steering wheel
heating
Buttons for heated steering wheel and seats in the cli-
mate bar
1. Tap the driver side steering wheel and seat
button in the center display's climate bar to
open the steering wheel and seat heating
controls.
If the vehicle is not equipped with the
optional heated or ventilated seats, the but-
ton for steering wheel heating will be directly
accessible in the climate bar.
2. Tap the steering wheel heating button
repeatedly to select one of four levels:
Off,
High, Medium or Low.
> The level changes and is displayed in the
button.
Automatic steering wheel heating
The automatic function starts heating the steer-
ing wheel automatically when the engine is
started if the temperature is sufficiently cold. This
feature can be activated/deactivated.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
Climate.
3.
Under
Auto Steering Wheel Heating
Level, select Off, Low, Medium or High to
activate/deactivate the automatic function.
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 186)
•
Climate system controls in the center display
(p. 186)
•
Steering wheel (p. 138)
Parking climate (preconditioning)
The climate in the passenger compartment can
be preconditioned and maintained, even when
the vehicle is parked. For full functionality, the
vehicle's charging cable must be connected.
Parking climate/preconditioning and maintaining pas-
senger compartment climate comfort is controlled from
the Parking climate tab in the center display's Climate
view.
||
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
202
Preconditioning
Preconditioning the vehicle before driving can
help reduce wear and reduce energy consump-
tion during a trip.
NOTE
Full preconditioning is only possible when the
vehicle's charging cable is connected.
In other cases, the passenger compartment
can be cooled for 3 minutes in warm weather.
This function is started from the
Parking
climate
tab in the center display's Climate
view.
With the charging cable connected, precondition-
ing can be started immediately or a timer function
can start this procedure at a later time.
This feature utilizes several of the vehicle's sys-
tems:
•
The High Voltage Coolant Heater (HVCH)
warms the hybrid battery and passenger
compartment in cold weather.
•
In warm weather, the ventilation system will
attempt to cool the passenger compartment
to the current ambient temperature.
•
In warm weather, the air conditioning system
will cool the passenger compartment to a
comfortable temperature.
•
The electrically heated steering wheel and
seats can be activated.
If preconditioning is used in warm weather, a cer-
tain amount of water may condense under the
vehicle, which is normal.
When preconditioning is used, this system will
attempt to establish a comfortable temperature in
the passenger compartment but not necessarily
the temperature currently set in the climate
system.
Maintaining a comfortable passenger
compartment climate
The climate in the passenger compartment can
be maintained even when the vehicle is parked
and the engine is turned off (e.g., if anyone
intends to remain in the vehicle).
This function can only be direct-started.
This function utilizes several of the vehicle's sys-
tems:
•
Residual heat from the engine is used help
keep the passenger compartment warm in
cool temperatures.
•
In warm weather, the ventilation system will
attempt to cool the passenger compartment
to the current ambient temperature.
This function will not be activated if the vehicle is
locked from the outside in order to avoid using
residual engine heat unnecessarily. This function
is primarily intended for use when the engine is
not running but someone remains in the vehicle.
Related information
•
Starting and stopping preconditioning
(p. 203)
•
Activating/deactivating the climate comfort
retaining function* (p. 206)
•
Activating/deactivating the parking climate
timer (p. 205)
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 414)
•
Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 416)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
203
Starting and stopping
preconditioning
Preconditioning heats/cools the passenger com-
partment prior to driving. Please note that the
charging cable must be connected.
Starting/stopping from the center
display
The preconditioning button in the Parking climate tab
in Climate view.
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Tap
Parking climate.
The window for seat/steering wheel heating in Climate
view's Parking climatetab
3. Tap the boxes to select if seat/steering
wheel heating is to be activated/deactivated
when preconditioning starts.
4.
Tap
Preconditioning.
> Preconditioning starts/stops and the indi-
cator lights in the buttons will be on/off.
NOTE
Full preconditioning is only possible when the
vehicle's charging cable is connected.
In other cases, the passenger compartment
can be cooled for 3 minutes in warm weather.
This function is started from the
Parking
climate
tab in the center display's Climate
view.
The vehicle's doors and windows should be
closed during preconditioning.
Starting from a cell phone*
Starting preconditioning and checking the cur-
rent settings can be done from a cell phone with
the Volvo On Call mobile app. Preconditioning
heats the passenger compartment to a comforta-
ble temperature or cools the compartment to the
current ambient temperature.
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional
Engine Remote Start (ERS), the air conditioning
can be used to pre-cool the passenger compart-
ment to a comfortable temperature.
Related information
•
Setting the parking climate (preconditioning)
timer (p. 204)
•
Activating/deactivating the parking climate
timer (p. 205)
•
Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 416)
CLIMATE
204
Preconditioning timer
The timer can be set to start preconditioning at a
predetermined time.
The timer can store up to 8 preset times for:
•
A time on a particular date
•
A time on one or more days of the week, with
or without the repeat function.
NOTE
Full preconditioning is only possible when the
vehicle's charging cable is connected.
In other cases, the passenger compartment
can be cooled for 3 minutes in warm weather.
This function is started from the
Parking
climate
tab in the center display's Climate
view.
Related information
•
Parking climate (preconditioning) (p. 201)
Setting the parking climate
(preconditioning) timer
The parking climate (preconditioning) timer can
be activated or deactivated at any time. How-
ever, the vehicle's changing cable must be
connected.
Adding a timer
Timer button in the center display's Parking climate tab
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Tap
Parking climate.
3.
Tap
Add timer.
> A pop-up window will open.
NOTE
A new timer setting cannot be made if there
are already 8 timers set. Delete one of the
existing timer settings in order to add a new
one.
4.
Tap
Date to set a specific date for the timer
setting.
Tap
Days to set a timer for one or more days
of the week.
For
Days: activate/deactivate the repeat
function by selecting/deselecting the
Repeat weekly box.
5.
For
Date: Select a date for preconditioning
by scrolling in the date list using the arrow
keys.
For
Days: Select days of the week for pre-
conditioning by tapping the days' buttons.
6. Set the time at which preconditioning should
be completed by scrolling with the arrows in
the clock.
7.
Tap
Confirm to add the timer setting.
> The timer settings will be added to the list
and activated.
CLIMATE
}}
205
Editing a timer setting
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Tap the
Parking climate tab.
3. Tap the timer setting to be changed.
> A pop-up window will open.
4. Change the setting as described in the sec-
tion "Adding a timer setting" above.
Deleting a timer setting
The button for editing a list/deleting a timer setting in
the Climate setting's Parking climatetab
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Tap the
Parking climate tab.
3.
Tap
Edit list.
4. Tap the delete icon at the right in the list.
>
The icon will change to the text
Delete.
5.
Tap
Delete to confirm.
> The timer setting will be deleted from the
list.
Activating/deactivating the parking
climate timer
With the vehicle's charging cable connected,
the parking climate timer can be activated or
deactivated at any time.
The timer button in the Parking climate tab in Climate
view
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Tap
Parking climate.
3. Activate/deactivate the timer by tapping the
button to the right of the setting.
> The timer setting will be activated/deacti-
vated and the indicator light in the button
will be on/off.
||
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
206
Related information
•
Preconditioning timer (p. 204)
•
Setting the parking climate (preconditioning)
timer (p. 204)
•
Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 416)
Activating/deactivating the climate
comfort retaining function*
This function helps keep the passenger com-
partment comfortable if anyone remains in the
vehicle after the engine has been switched off.
Button for retaining climate comfort in the Parking
climate tab in Climate view
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Tap
Parking climate.
3.
Tap
Keep climate comfort.
> The function for retaining climate comfort
in the passenger compartment will be
activated/deactivated and the indicator
light in the button will be on/off.
NOTE
•
If there is not sufficient residual engine
heat available, this function cannot be
started
•
This function will be turned off if the vehi-
cle is locked from the outside in order to
avoid using residual engine heat unnec-
essarily. This function is primarily
intended for use when the engine is not
running but someone remains in the vehi-
cle
CLIMATE
207
Preconditioning symbols and
messages
A symbol and various texts relating to precondi-
tioning may be displayed in the instrument panel.
Symbol Message Explanation
Parking climate
Unavailable Charge level too low
Preconditioning cannot be started because the hybrid battery's charge level is too low. Connect the
charging cable. In certain cases, the parking climate function can be started with limited functionality.
Parking climate
Unavailable, fuel and charge level
too low
A
Preconditioning cannot be started because the hybrid battery's charge level is too low. Connect the
charging cable. In certain cases, the parking climate function can be started with limited functionality.
Parking climate
Service required
Preconditioning is not functioning properly. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo serv-
ice technician to have the system checked as soon as possible.
Parking climate
Temporarily unavailable
Preconditioning is temporarily not functioning properly. If the problem persists, contact a Volvo retailer or
a trained and qualified Volvo service technician to have the system checked.
Parking climate
Unavailable, not connected to
power supply
Preconditioning cannot be started if the charger cable is not connected. Connect the cable.
A
The reference to fuel level does not apply in North America.
LOADING AND STORAGE
LOADING AND STORAGE
210
Passenger compartment storage
spaces
The following is an overview of the passenger
compartment and its storage spaces.
Front seats
Storage spaces in the door panel, the glove compart-
ment and the sun visors
Storage spaces, cup holders and 12-volt socket/USB
socket in the tunnel console
Rear seats
Storage compartments in the door panels, cup holders
in the center seat's backrest, storage pockets on the
rear side of the front seat backrest, 12-volt socket on
the rear side of the tunnel console and a storage com-
partment under the seat
Related information
•
Tunnel console (p. 211)
•
Using the glove compartment (p. 215)
•
Electrical sockets (p. 212)
•
Sun visors (p. 216)
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
211
Tunnel console
The tunnel console, located between the front
seats, contains a 12-volt electrical socket, cup
holders and storage spaces, etc.
Storage space*. Press the handle to open
the cover.
Storage space with cup holders for the driver
and passenger and a 12-volt socket
Storage space and USB socket under the
armrest
Climate control panel for the rear seats* or
storage space
NOTE
One of the alarm sensors, which is sensitive
to metallic objects, is located under the tunnel
console cup holders. Avoid leaving coins,
keys, etc., in the cup holders because they
may inadvertently trigger the alarm.
Related information
•
Passenger compartment storage spaces
(p. 210)
•
Electrical sockets (p. 212)
•
Alarm (p. 248)
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
212
Electrical sockets
There are two 12-volt sockets in the tunnel con-
sole, a 120-volt socket on the rear side of the
tunnel console, and one 12-volt socket in the
cargo compartment*.
120-volt socket in the tunnel console
1
120-volt socket in the tunnel console for the rear seats
This socket is intended for 120-volt devices such
as laptops, chargers, etc.
The max. current provided is 150W.
Using the sockets
1. Slide down the cover over the socket and
plug in the device.
> The socket's indicator light will indicate its
status. The socket can only provide elec-
trical current when the light is green.
2. Disconnect the device by pulling its plug, not
its cord.
Pull up the cover over the socket when it is not in
use.
CAUTION
•
Do not connect devices with large or
heavy plugs that could come loose while
driving.
•
Do not use devices that can cause inter-
ference with the vehicle's radio receiver
or electrical system.
WARNING
•
Be sure to place any devices connected
to the socket safely so that they do not
become projectiles in the event of a sud-
den stop and injure the occupants of the
vehicle.
•
Be aware that connected devices may
generate heat and become very hot.
•
Only connect devices that function cor-
rectly and are free from defects. These
devices should be intended for use in a
120-volt, 60Hz socket with a plug
intended for the socket in the vehicle and
be UL-approved (or the equivalent
thereof).
•
Never let the device, its plug or the
socket itself come in contact with fluids
of any kind. Never touch or use the
socket if it appears to be damaged or
wet.
•
Never connect multiple plugs, adapters or
extension cords to the socket. This could
override the socket's safety functions.
•
Never let children play or tamper with the
socket, or attempt to insert any objects
into it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle when the socket is active.
•
Never try to modify or repair the 120-volt
socket. This should only be done by a
1
Certain models only.
LOADING AND STORAGE
}}
213
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian.
Failure to follow the points above could result
in electrical shock and/or serious injury.
Status indication
An LED (Light Emitting Diode) on the socket
indicates its status:
Status indicator light Socket status Action
Steady green light The socket is providing current to a connected device. None.
Flashing orange light The socket's voltage converter is too hot (the connected device draws too much
current, etc. or the temperature in the passenger compartment is very high).
Unplug the device, let the converter cool down
and plug in the device again.
The connected device draws too much current (constantly or currently) or is not
functioning properly.
None. The device should not be plugged into the
socket.
Indicator light off The socket has not detected a plugged in device. Be sure the device is correctly plugged into the
socket.
The socket is not active.
Put the vehicle's ignition in at least mode I.
The socket has been active but has been deactivated. Start the engine and/or charge the start battery.
If a problem persists, have the socket checked by
a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
||
LOADING AND STORAGE
214
12-volt socket in the tunnel console
12-volt socket in the tunnel console for the front seats
12-volt socket in the tunnel console for the rear seats
The electrical sockets can be used for 12-volt
devices such as monitors, MP3 players and cell
phones. For the sockets to provide electrical cur-
rent, the ignition must be in at least mode I.
WARNING
Always keep the sockets covered when not in
use.
CAUTION
Max. current provided is 10 A (120 W) if one
socket is used at a time. If both of the sock-
ets in the tunnel console are used at the
same time, the max. current provided per
socket is 7.5 A (90 W)
If a tire sealing system's compressor is being
used, no other device should be connected to
any of the other sockets while the compres-
sor is operating.
12-volt socket in the cargo
compartment
12-volt socket in the cargo compartment
Fold down the cover to access the socket. Max.
current provided is 10 A (120 W).
NOTE
The 12-volt socket in the cargo compartment
provides electrical current even when the igni-
tion is switched off. Using the socket while
the engine is not running will drain the bat-
tery.
Related information
•
Passenger compartment storage spaces
(p. 210)
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
LOADING AND STORAGE
}}
* Option/accessory.
215
Using the glove compartment
The glove compartment provides storage space
for small items.
The owner's manual and maps can be kept here.
There are also holders for pens on the inside of
the glove compartment door.
Locking/unlocking the glove
compartment*
Storage compartment for the key
The glove compartment and tailgate can be
locked when e.g., the vehicle is in a workshop for
service, etc. See also the article "Private locking"
for additional information.
To lock the glove compartment:
Insert the key into the lock.
Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise.
Remove the key from the lock.
–
Unlock the glove compartment in the reverse
order.
Using the glove compartment as a
cooler*
The glove compartment can be used to cool
drinks or food and the cooling feature functions
when the climate system is active (i.e., when the
ignition is in mode II or when the engine is run-
ning).
||
LOADING AND STORAGE
216
Cooling activated
Cooling deactivated
–
Activate/deactivate cooling by moving the
control as far as possible toward the passen-
ger compartment/glove compartment.
Related information
•
Passenger compartment storage spaces
(p. 210)
•
Private (valet) locking (p. 236)
Sun visors
There are vanity mirrors with card holders on the
upper sides of the sun visors.
Lighted vanity mirror and card holder
The vanity mirror lighting comes on when the mir-
ror is opened.
The vanity mirror's frame has a holder for e.g., a
card or ticket.
Related information
•
Passenger compartment storage spaces
(p. 210)
Loading
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is
determined by factors such as the number of
passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight of
any accessories that may be installed, etc.
Loading recommendations
•
Load objects in the cargo compartment
against the backrest whenever possible.
•
If the backrests of the second row seats are
folded down, they should not be in contact
with the front seat backrests. This could
impede the function of the Whiplash
Protection System (WHIPS).
•
Unstable loads can be secured to the load
anchoring eyelets with straps or web lash-
ings to help keep them from shifting.
•
Stop the engine and apply the parking brake
when loading or unloading long objects. The
gear selector can be knocked out of position
by long loads, which could set the vehicle in
motion.
LOADING AND STORAGE
}}
* Option/accessory.
217
WARNING
•
Stop the engine, put the gear selector in
P, and apply the parking brake when
loading or unloading long objects.
•
The vehicle's driving characteristics may
change depending on the weight and dis-
tribution of the load.
•
A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces a
force of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in a
head-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h).
•
The cargo compartment and rear seat
should not be loaded to a level higher
than 2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge of
the rear side windows. Objects placed
higher than this level could impede the
function of the Inflatable Curtain.
WARNING
•
Cover sharp edges on long loads to help
prevent injury to occupants. Secure the
load to help prevent shifting during sud-
den stops.
•
Always secure large and heavy objects
with a seat belt or cargo retaining straps.
•
Always secure the load to help prevent it
from moving in the event of sudden stops.
•
Switch off the engine, apply the parking
brake and put the gear selector in P
when loading and unloading the vehicle.
Extra loading space
The vehicle has flexible cargo capacity that
makes it possible to load and secure large
objects and loading capacity can be increased
when needed.
By folding down the rear seat backrests, the
cargo capacity of the vehicle increases consider-
ably. Use the load anchoring eyelets or the gro-
cery bag holder to secure objects and the cargo
compartment cover to help conceal the load.
The hatch in the center section of the rear seat
backrest can be opened without folding the
backrest down to transport long objects such as
skis, etc.
The jack*, tire sealing system and tools can be
found under the cargo compartment's floor.
WARNING
•
Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind the
front seats could impede the function of
the Whiplash Protection System.
•
If the rear seat backrests are folded
down, cargo must be secured to prevent
it from sliding forward against the front
seat backrests in the event of a collision
from the rear. This could interfere with
the action of the Whiplash Protection
System.
WARNING
•
Cover sharp edges on long loads to help
prevent injury to occupants. Secure the
load to help prevent shifting during sud-
den stops.
•
Always secure large and heavy objects
with a seat belt or cargo retaining straps.
•
Always secure the load to help prevent it
from moving in the event of sudden stops.
•
Switch off the engine, apply the parking
brake and put the gear selector in P
when loading and unloading the vehicle.
Roof loads
Load carriers are available as Volvo accessories.
Observe the following points when in use:
•
To avoid damaging your vehicle and to
achieve maximum safety when driving, we
recommend using the load carriers that Volvo
has developed especially for your vehicle.
•
Volvo-approved removable roof racks are
designed to carry the maximum allowable
roof load for this vehicle (see the article
"Weights" for specific information).
•
Never exceed the rack manufacturer's weigh
limits.
•
Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads
evenly.
||
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
218
•
Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the
load.
•
Secure the cargo correctly with appropriate
tie-down equipment.
•
Check periodically that the load carriers and
load are properly secured.
•
Remember that the vehicle's center of gravity
and handling change when you carry a load
on the roof.
•
The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel con-
sumption will increase with the size of the
load.
•
Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast cor-
nering and hard braking.
CAUTION
The optional panoramic roof should not be
opened while load carriers are installed on
the vehicle.
See the article "Weights" for information about
the maximum permissible load that can be trans-
ported on the roof.
Related information
•
Weights (p. 557)
•
Cargo net (p. 221)
•
Cargo compartment cover* (p. 220)
•
Steel cargo grid* (p. 223)
•
Load anchoring eyelets (p. 218)
•
Whiplash protection system (p. 63)
•
Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 235)
Load anchoring eyelets
The eyelets in the cargo compartment can be
folded out to secure objects with straps, a net,
etc.
Load anchoring eyelets
WARNING
•
Cover sharp edges on long loads to help
prevent injury to occupants. Secure the
load to help prevent shifting during sud-
den stops.
•
Always secure large and heavy objects
with a seat belt or cargo retaining straps.
•
Always secure the load to help prevent it
from moving in the event of sudden stops.
•
Switch off the engine, apply the parking
brake and put the gear selector in P
when loading and unloading the vehicle.
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
219
Related information
•
Loading (p. 216)
•
Grocery bag holder (p. 219)
•
Cargo net (p. 221)
•
Steel cargo grid* (p. 223)
•
Cargo compartment cover* (p. 220)
Grocery bag holder
The grocery bag holders (hooks) and elastic
strap help keep shopping bags in place.
On the sides
There is a hook on each side of the cargo com-
partment.
CAUTION
The grocery bag holders (hooks) are only
intended to hold weights less than approx.
11 lbs (5 kg).
Related information
•
Cargo net (p. 221)
•
Steel cargo grid* (p. 223)
•
Cargo compartment cover* (p. 220)
Ski hatch
The hatch in the rear seat backrest can be
opened without folding the backrest down to
transport long objects such as skis, etc.
1. From the cargo compartment, grasp the ski
hatch's handle and pull it down.
2. Fold down the rear seat's center armrest.
If the vehicle is equipped with the private locking
function*, the ski hatch must be closed.
Related information
•
Loading (p. 216)
•
Load anchoring eyelets (p. 218)
•
Private (valet) locking (p. 236)
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
220
Cargo compartment cover*
The cover can be used to conceal objects in the
cargo compartment.
Installing the cover
With the cover retracted, press the end piece
on one side of the cargo compartment cover
into the retaining bracket in the side panel of
the cargo compartment.
Do the same on the opposite side.
Be sure that the front section of the cover is
angled downward before the cassette is put
in place.
Press both sides of the cover, one at a time,
until they click into place.
> The red mark will no longer be visible.
Check that both ends of the cover are
securely locked in place.
Using the cover
The cover can be used in two positions: fully
open to completely cover the cargo compartment
or partially retracted to make it easier to reach
farther into the cargo compartment.
Fully open
1.
Grasp the handle and pull out the cover as
far as possible.
2. Press the attaching pins on the rear corners
of the cover into the grooves in the rear pil-
lars.
Cover in full covering position.
LOADING AND STORAGE
}}
221
Loading (partially retracted) position
From the fully open position:
–
Grasp the handle to release the attaching
pins from the grooves.
> The cover will retract until it reaches the
loading position.
To fully open the cover from the loading position:
1. Grasp the handle and pull out the cover to
the fully open position.
2. Release the handle so that the attaching
pins hook into the grooves in the rear pillars.
> The cover will remain in the fully open
position.
WARNING
When the cargo area cover is in the loading
position, it may partially obscure the driver's
rear view. For this reason, the cover should
either be fully open or fully retracted when the
vehicle is being driven.
Retracting the cover
From the fully open position:
–
Lift the cover's handle and pull it rearward
slightly to release the attaching pins from
their grooves. Allow the cover to retract.
From the partially retracted position:
–
Grasp the handle and lift it slightly to release
the attaching pins from their grooves. Pull
the cover to the fully open position.
> Allow the cover to retract completely.
Removing the cover
1. With the cover retracted, press the button on
one of the cover's ends and lift out that end.
2. Carefully lift the cover up/out.
> The other end will release automatically.
Lift the cover out of the cargo compart-
ment.
Related information
•
Loading (p. 216)
•
Load anchoring eyelets (p. 218)
Cargo net
The cargo net helps protect passengers from
objects in the cargo compartment in the event of
a sudden stop or hard braking.
The cargo net is attached at four points.
The cargo net can be mounted in two positions:
•
Rear mounting: behind the rear seat back-
rests.
•
Front mounting: behind the front seats' back-
rests.
WARNING
•
Objects in the cargo compartment should
always be securely anchored.
•
All of the net's attachment points must be
securely in place when the net is used.
•
A damaged net must never be used.
||
LOADING AND STORAGE
222
Installing the net
NOTE
Front mounting is done most easily through
one of the rear doors.
1. Fold out the cargo net and be sure the two
sections of the upper rod are locked in the
folded-out position.
2. Insert one of the net's upper hooks into the
front or rear ceiling mounting point with the
net's lower straps' locks facing you.
3. Insert the other upper hook into the ceiling
mounting point on the opposite side. It is
spring-loaded to make mounting easier.
Press each of the hooks as far forward into
the respective mounting points as possible.
Rear mounting
4.
Rear mounting: with the upper hooks
inserted into the rear ceiling mounting points,
hook the lower straps through the load
anchoring eyelets on the floor of the cargo
compartment that are closest to the rear seat
backrest.
Front mounting
Front mounting: with the upper hooks
inserted into the front ceiling mounting
points, hook the lower straps through the
eyelets on the front seat floor rails. Attaching
the net is easier if the front seat backrests
are upright and the seats are moved slightly
forward.
5. Pull the lower straps taut.
CAUTION
When moving the front seats with the cargo
net installed, only move the seat(s)/back-
rest(s) rearward until they touch the net.
Excessive pressure from the front seats
against the cargo net could damage the net
and/or its brackets.
LOADING AND STORAGE
}}
* Option/accessory.
223
Removing and storing
1. Reduce tension on the net by pressing the
button on the lower straps' respective locks
and allow some slack on both sides.
2. Press in the catches and release both of the
straps' hooks.
3. Remove the upper hooks from the ceiling
mounting points.
4. Press the red button on the upper rod to
allow it to fold.
5. Fold and roll up the net.
Store the net under the cargo compartment floor.
Related information
•
Cargo compartment cover* (p. 220)
•
Load anchoring eyelets (p. 218)
•
Steel cargo grid* (p. 223)
•
Loading (p. 216)
Steel cargo grid*
Your vehicle can be equipped with a steel grid
that helps prevent objects in the cargo compart-
ment from moving forward into the passenger
area.
WARNING
•
No one should ever be allowed to remain
in the cargo compartment when the vehi-
cle is moving.
•
The steel grid may only be used in the
rear position described in this article. The
ceiling attachment points above the front
seats are not intended to anchor the
steel grid.
•
After being mounted, be sure that the
steel grid is securely anchored in place.
Mounting
Before installing the steel grid, the existing plas-
tic ceiling mounting consoles must be replaced
by steel ones. This should preferably be done by
a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
1. Fold down the rear seat backrests.
2. Be sure that the steel grid is turned in the
right direction. Lift the grid into the vehicle
through one of the rear doors.
3. Place the grid's attachment points in the
ceiling mounting consoles.
This is easier to do if two people hold the
grid in the correct position prior to the follow-
ing step.
||
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
224
4. Insert the screw included in the kit into the
hole and tighten it. Do the same on the
opposite side.
> Check that the steel grid is securely
attached.
For additional information about the installation
procedure and the tools required, see the instal-
lation instructions included with the steel grid kit.
NOTE
The steel grid cannot be folded up or down
when the optional cargo compartment cover
is in place.
Related information
•
Cargo net (p. 221)
•
Cargo compartment cover* (p. 220)
•
Load anchoring eyelets (p. 218)
•
Loading (p. 216)
LOCKS AND ALARM
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
226
Locks and remote keys
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked in vari-
ous ways and there are several types of remote
keys that can be used.
Locking/unlocking/opening/closing
The vehicle can be locked/unlocked from the
passenger compartment, using the buttons on
the remote key or by using the optional Passive
Entry system where it is only necessary to have a
key in your possession to lock or unlock the
doors.
On models equipped with a power tailgate*, it can
also be opened/closed by moving your foot
under a sensor* beneath the rear bumper.
If for any reason a remote key does not function
properly, it may be necessary to replace its bat-
teries but the vehicle can always be locked or
unlocked manually using the remote key's
detachable key blade.
Remote key
The remote key does not have to be physically
handled in order to start the engine because the
vehicle is equipped with the standard Passive
Start system (the key only needs to be in the
front part of the passenger compartment). If the
vehicle is equipped with the optional Passive
Entry system that enables keyless entry and start,
the key can be anywhere in the vehicle when the
engine is started.
Models with Passive Entry* also have an extra,
smaller key without buttons called a Key Tag.
Additional keys can be ordered from a Volvo
retailer.
Related information
•
Immobilizer (p. 246)
•
Alarm (p. 248)
•
Child safety locks (p. 247)
•
Remote key (p. 226)
•
Foot movement tailgate operation* (p. 242)
•
Locking/unlocking from inside the vehicle
(p. 234)
•
Locking/unlocking from outside the vehicle
(p. 230)
•
Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 235)
•
Power tailgate* (p. 239)
•
Starting the engine (p. 369)
Remote key
The remote key is used to lock/unlock the vehi-
cle and must be in the passenger compartment
in order to start the engine.
The standard remote key (left) and the Key Tag (right)
In models with the standard Passive Start system,
the remote key only needs to be in the front sec-
tion of the passenger compartment or in the tun-
nel console cup holders in order to start the
engine.
The keyless Passive Entry system for locking/
unlocking the vehicle is available as an option.
This system has a range of approximately 5 feet
(1.5 meters) from the sides of the vehicle or
approximately 3 feet (1 meter) from the tailgate.
With this system, a remote key can be anywhere
in the vehicle.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
227
Each of the remote keys provided with the vehicle
can be linked to a driver profile containing unique
personal settings that will be applied when that
particular key is used. See also the article "Driver
profile" for additional information.
NOTE
Avoid placing the remote key closer than
approx. (4-6 in.) (10-15 cm) to any metallic
objects or electronic devices such as cell
phones, tablets, laptops or chargers.
If interference persists, unlock the vehicle with
the detachable key blade and place the remote
key in the backup key reader in the tunnel con-
sole cup holder to disarm the alarm.
WARNING
Always remove the remote key from the pas-
senger compartment when leaving the vehicle
and ensure that the ignition in mode 0, espe-
cially if there are children in the vehicle.
Key Tag
In addition to the two remote keys provided, a
smaller third key, called a Key Tag, is also provi-
ded for vehicles equipped with the optional
Passive Entry system.
This key functions in the same way as a standard
remote key but does not have a detachable key
blade and its battery cannot be replaced; a new
Key Tag has to be ordered.
Ordering new keys
Two remote keys are provided with the vehicle (a
Key Tag
1
is also included for vehicles equipped
with the optional Passive Entry system). Addi-
tional keys (a total of 12) can be ordered and
used with the vehicle.
The remote key's buttons
The remote key has four buttons: one on the left side
and three on the right side
Lock: Press to lock the doors/tailgate and
arm the alarm.
Unlock: Press to unlock the doors/tailgate
and disarm the alarm. This setting can be
changed in the center display's Settings
menu.
Tailgate: Press to unlock the tailgate only
(and disarm the alarm for the tailgate). On
vehicles equipped with the power tailgate*,
press and hold to open the tailgate. Press
and hold to close an open tailgate (an audi-
ble warning signal will sound).
Panic alarm: Press to attract attention dur-
ing emergency situations. To activate, press
and hold this button for at least 3 seconds or
press it twice within 3 seconds to activate
the turn signals and horn. To deactivate,
wait approximately 5 seconds and press the
button again (the panic alarm will also deac-
tivate automatically after several minutes).
Interference
Metallic objects or electromagnetic fields may
interfere with the remote key's function. Avoid
placing the remote key within 4-6 in. (10-15 cm)
of a cell phone or a metallic object.
If interference persists, use the remote key's
detachable key blade to unlock the vehicle and
place the remote key in the backup key reader in
the tunnel console cup holder.
Loss of a remote key
If a remote key is lost, the others should be taken
with the vehicle to a Volvo retailer. As an anti-
1
The Key Tag is also referred to as a Sport key. This key is designed to be waterproof to a depth of approximately 30 ft (10 meters) for up to 60 minutes, making it suitable for use in activities in and around water.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
228
theft measure, the code of the lost remote key
must be erased from the system. The number of
registered keys for the vehicle can be found in
the center display's Top view.
NOTE
Additional or duplicate remote control keys
can be obtained from any authorized Volvo
retailer.
You can also obtain additional or duplicate
remote control keys from certain independent
repair facilities and locksmiths that are quali-
fied to make remote control keys. Each key
must be programmed to work with your vehi-
cle.
A list of independent repair facilities and/or
locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut and
code replacement keys can be found:
•
on the Volvo website,
www.volvocars.com/us
•
by calling Volvo Customer Care at
1-800-458-1552.
Related information
•
Remote key's range (p. 228)
•
Detachable key blade (p. 237)
•
Changing the remote key's battery (p. 243)
•
Driver profiles (p. 174)
Remote key's range
In order to function correctly, the remote key
must be within a certain distance of the vehicle.
Manual use
The remote key's functions, such as locking and
unlocking the vehicle, which are activated by
pressing the
or buttons, have a range of
approx. 65 feet (20 meters) from the vehicle.
Buildings or other obstacles may interfere with
the function of the remote key. The vehicle can
also be locked or unlocked with the key blade.
If the vehicle's locks do not react, move closer
and try again.
Keyless use
2
The shaded areas illustrate the range of the Passive
Entry system's antennas
For keyless entry into the vehicle, the remote key
must be within approximately 5 feet (1.5 meters)
of the sides of the vehicle or approximately 3 feet
(1 meter) of the tailgate as shown in the illustra-
tion.
The remote key may not function properly due to
ambient radio waves, buildings or topographical
obstructions, etc. The vehicle can always be
locked/unlocked with the detachable key blade.
If the remote key is removed from the
vehicle
If all of the remote keys are removed from the
vehicle while the engine is running,
Vehicle key
not found Removed from vehicle will be dis-
played in the instrument panel and an audible
signal will sound when all of the doors have been
closed. The message will be erased when a
remote key has been returned to the vehicle and
the O button on the right-side steering wheel
keypad has been pressed or when all of the
doors have been closed again.
Related information
•
Remote key (p. 226)
•
Antenna locations for the start and lock sys-
tem (p. 230)
2
Models equipped with the optional Passive Entry only.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
229
Red Key*
The Red Key (also referred to as a restricted
key) makes it possible to limit several of the vehi-
cle's functions to help ensure that it is operated
safely, for instance if the vehicle is used by a
young driver.
A Red Key makes it possible to limit the vehicle's
maximum speed, add speed reminders and limit
the audio system's volume. Several of the vehi-
cle's safety systems will also always be active.
Otherwise, this key functions in the same way as
a standard remote key.
One or more Red Keys can be ordered from a
Volvo retailer after the vehicle has been pur-
chased. A total of 11 keys can be programmed
and used for the same vehicle, one of which has
to be a standard remote key.
Settings for the Red Key can be made by a
standard remote key user from the center dis-
play's Top view under:
Settings System
Driver Profiles Red key.
Several of the vehicle's safety function cannot be
turned off by a Red Key user.
The restrictions are designed to help reduce the
risk of an accident and they cannot be changed
by a Red Key user. These settings cannot be
changed by the Red Key's user.
Possible settings
The following settings can be made for a Red
Key:
Speed Limiter* (On/Off)
•
Setting interval: 30-160 mph (50-250 km/h)
•
Default setting: 75 mph (120 km/h)
•
Increments: 1 mph (1 km/h)
This symbol will appear in the instru-
ment panel and the message
Red
keySpeed limitation cannot be
exceeded will be displayed.
See the article "Speed limiter" for additional
information.
Speed reminder (On/Off):
•
Setting interval: 0-155 mph (0-250 km/h
•
Default settings: 30, 45 and 55 mph (50, 70
and 90 km/h.)
•
Increments: 1 mph (1 km/h)
•
Max. number of reminders: 6
Reduced max. volume (on/off)
•
Default setting: On
Adaptive cruise control * (On/Off)
•
Initial setting: On at the longest interval
•
See the article "Adaptive cruise control" for
additional information
Safety functions
The following safety functions will always be
active for a Red Key user:
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*
•
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)*
•
Distance Alert*
•
City Safety*
•
Driver Alert Control (DAC)*
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)*
Related information
•
Remote key (p. 226)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 272)
•
Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 259)
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 322)
•
Driving lane assistance (p. 333)
•
Distance Alert* (p. 270)
•
City Safety™ (p. 309)
•
Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 332)
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 329)
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
230
Antenna locations for the start and
lock system
The vehicle is equipped with a keyless
3
start and
lock system that requires a number of antennas
located at various points in the vehicle.
Under the cup holders in the front section of
the tunnel console
In the upper front section of the driver side
rear door
3
In the upper front section of the passenger
side rear door
3
In the cargo compartment
WARNING
People with implanted pacemakers should not
allow the pacemaker to come closer than
9 inches (22 cm) to any of the Passive Entry
system's antennas. This is to help prevent
interference between the pacemaker and the
Passive Entry system.
Related information
•
Remote key (p. 226)
•
Remote key's range (p. 228)
Locking/unlocking from outside the
vehicle
The buttons on the remote key can be used to
lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate at the
same time. This can also be done without press-
ing the remote key buttons on models equipped
with the optional keyless Passive Entry system.
The power tailgate* can also be opened/closed
by moving your foot under a sensor beneath the
rear bumper.
Locking and unlocking
The lock/unlock settings can be changed in the
center display's Top view.
Go to:
Settings My Car Remote and
Interior Unlock
and select Unlock All Doors or
Single Door.
In order to lock the vehicle, the driver's door must
be closed. If the tailgate or any of the other doors
are open, they will be locked and the alarm will be
armed when they are closed.
NOTE
Be sure the remote key is outside of the vehi-
cle before the other doors/tailgate are closed
to help avoid locking the remote inside the
vehicle.
3
Vehicles with the optional Passive Entry system only.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
231
The settings made for the
Remote and Interior
Unlock function also affect the central locking
system when a door is opened from inside the
vehicle using a door handle. See also the article
"Locking/unlocking from inside the vehicle" for
additional information.
If the locks repeatedly do not react when the
unlock button is pressed, begin by moving closer
to the vehicle. However, it may be necessary to
replace the battery in the remote. In this case, the
driver's door can be unlocked with the detacha-
ble key blade. See also the article "Detachable
key blade" for additional information.
Keyless Passive Entry*
If the vehicle is equipped with this system, it is
only necessary to have a remote key in your pos-
session to operate the central locking system.
Models with Passive Entry have an indentation on
the outside of the handle for locking the vehicle
and a pressure sensitive surface on the inside of
the handle for unlocking.
The tailgate has a rubberized button used only
for unlocking.
Outer indentation for locking, the pressure sensitive sur-
face on the inside of the handle is for unlocking
Pressure sensitive indentation for locking
Pressure sensitive surface for unlocking
Rubberized button on the tailgate used only for unlock-
ing
Locking
All of the doors have to be closed before the
vehicle can be locked but the tailgate can be
open.
Lock the doors and tailgate by pressing the pres-
sure sensitive indentation on the outside of any
of the door handles. The lock indicator light on
the dashboard will begin to flash to show that the
vehicle is locked and the alarm has been armed.
NOTE
Only one of a door handle's lock/unlock sur-
faces should be pressed at a time. If both
areas are pressed simultaneously, the desired
locking/unlocking action may not occur or
may be delayed.
To close windows or the panoramic roof* when
locking the vehicle, hold the pressure sensitive
surface on the outside of a door handle until the
window(s)/panoramic roof have closed com-
pletely. The windows/panoramic roof will stop if
the button is released before they are fully
closed.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
232
Unlocking
Pull a door handle to unlock and open the door
or press the rubberized button under the tailgate
opening control. The lock indicator light on the
dashboard will go out to show that the vehicle is
unlocked and the alarm has been disarmed.
The lock/unlock settings can be changed in the
center display's Top view:
Go to:
Settings My Car Keyless Unlock
and select All Doors or Single Door.
Automatic relocking
If no door or the tailgate is opened within two
minutes after being unlocked, the vehicle will
automatically relock.
Remote door unlock
The vehicle can be unlocked using the Volvo On
Call app.
Related information
•
Remote key (p. 226)
•
Remote key's range (p. 228)
•
Detachable key blade (p. 237)
•
Alarm (p. 248)
•
Locking/unlocking from inside the vehicle
(p. 234)
•
Foot movement tailgate operation* (p. 242)
•
Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 235)
Locking and unlocking confirmation
The turn signals can be used to indicate that the
vehicle has been locked/unlocked with the
remote key. These settings can also be changed
in the center display's Top view by going to:
Settings My Car Locking Visible
Locking Feedback.
Exterior confirmation
•
Locking: the turn signals flash once and the
door mirrors will fold in (retract)
4
•
Unlocking: the turn signals flash twice and
the door mirrors will fold out
4
When the vehicle is locked, confirmation will only
be given if all doors/tailgate and the hood are
closed.
If the vehicle is locked while only the driver's door
is closed
5
, all doors/tailgate will lock but confir-
mation will only be given when all doors/tailgate/
hood are closed.
Interior confirmation
Lock and alarm indicator light on the dashboard
A long flash indicates the vehicle is locked. While
the vehicle is locked, the indicator will flash
briefly.
LEDs in the lock buttons on the doors illuminate
when the doors are locked.
4
Models with electrically retractable door mirrors only.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
233
Indicators in the interior lock buttons
Lock buttons in the front doors
Front door lock button and indicator light
Indicator lights on: all doors are locked.
If a door is opened, the lights in both doors will
go out.
In all doors*
Rear door lock button and indicator light
Indicator light in the respective door on: that door
is locked. If a door is opened, the light in that
door will go out but the other indicator lights will
remain on.
Confirmation alternatives
Various alternatives for locking/unlocking confir-
mation can be selected in the center display.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
My Car Locking.
3.
Change the settings under
Visible Locking
Feedback.
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking from outside the vehicle
(p. 230)
•
Home safe lighting (p. 150)
•
Adjusting the power door mirrors (p. 156)
5
This does not apply to vehicles equipped with the optional keyless Passive Entry system.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
234
Locking/unlocking from inside the
vehicle
The lock buttons in either of the front doors can
be used to lock or unlock all doors and the tail-
gate at the same time. The rear doors can be
locked using their respective lock buttons*.
The central locking system
Central locking/unlocking buttons and indicator lights in
the front doors
–
Press the button to lock the vehicle.
Press
to unlock.
Unlocking
•
Press the
button to unlock all doors and
the tailgate.
•
Pull the door opening handle on either of the
front doors. This will unlock the vehicle com-
pletely
6
and the door will open.
Locking
–
Press the button in either of the front
doors to lock the vehicle (both front doors
must be closed).
Lock buttons in the rear doors*
Lock button and indicator light in a rear door
The lock buttons in the rear doors lock/unlock
each door respectively.
To unlock a rear door:
–
To open one of the rear doors individually,
pull its handle once to unlock the door and
pull the handle again to open the door
7
.
Automatic locking
All of the doors/tailgate will lock automatically
when the vehicle begins to move.
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking from outside the vehicle
(p. 230)
•
Locking and unlocking confirmation (p. 232)
•
Child safety locks (p. 247)
6
The unlock setting "
All Doors" must be selected. If the setting "Driver door, then all" has been selected, only that door will unlock and open.
7
Assuming that the child safety locks are not activated.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
235
Locking/unlocking the tailgate
The tailgate can be locked/unlocked in different
ways, depending on whether the vehicle is
equipped with the optional keyless Passive Entry
system.
Unlocking with the remote key
Remote key tailgate button
1.
Press the
button on the remote key.
> The tailgate will be unlocked but remain
closed. The alarm indicator on the dash-
board will go out to indicate that the tail-
gate alarm is no longer armed. The other
doors will remain locked and the alarm will
remain armed for them.
2. Open the tailgate.
> If the tailgate is not opened within two
minutes, it will relock and the alarm will
rearm.
Keyless unlocking*
Rubberized pressure plate
Opening the tailgate:
1. With the remote key in your possession,
unlock the tailgate by pressing lightly on the
rubberized pressure plate under the outer
tailgate handle. If the remote key is not
detected, the tailgate cannot be unlocked/
opened. Three audible signals will sound.
2. Lift the handle to open the tailgate fully.
CAUTION
•
When pressing the rubberized pressure
plate, only light pressure is necessary to
release the tailgate's electronic locking
mechanism.
•
When opening the tailgate, pull it up
using the handle. Too much pressure on
the rubberized pressure plate can dam-
age its electrical connections.
WARNING
Avoid driving with the tailgate open if at all
possible. Doing so could allow exhaust gases
to enter the passenger compartment.
Unlocking the tailgate from inside the
vehicle
Tailgate unlock button
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
236
To unlock the tailgate:
–
Press the button on the lighting panel.
> The tailgate will unlock and can be
opened within two minutes (if the vehicle
has been locked from the inside).
Locking with the remote key
–
Press the button on the remote key.
> The alarm indicator on the dashboard will
begin to flash to show that the alarm has
been armed.
Related information
•
Remote key (p. 226)
•
Power tailgate* (p. 239)
•
Foot movement tailgate operation* (p. 242)
•
Remote key's range (p. 228)
Private (valet) locking
The tailgate can be locked when e.g., the vehicle
is in a workshop for service, etc.
Activating private locking/setting a
security code
The ignition has to be in at least mode I in order
to activate private locking.
1. Private locking can be activated from the
center display's Function view or under Set-
tings in Top view:
•
In Function view, tap
Private Locking.
•
In Top view, tap
Settings and then tap
My Car Locking. Tap the Private
Locking box.
> A pop-up window will appear.
NOTE
•
A security code has to be selected the first
time this function is used. This code is
used to deactivate any previously used PIN
codes. Keep this code in a safe place.
•
If private locking is activated and the vehi-
cle is unlocked using Volvo On Call or the
Volvo On Call mobile app, it will be auto-
matically deactivated.
2. Enter the code to be used to unlock the tail-
gate after it has been locked and tap
Confirm.
> The tailgate will lock. Confirmation is pro-
vided by a green indicator light in the but-
ton in Function view and an X in the pri-
vate locking box under Top view's Set-
tings.
3. The glove compartment is locked using the
key provided.
NOTE
•
The key blade in the remote key cannot
be used to lock/unlock the glove com-
partment. This can only be done with the
separate key provided.
•
The key used to lock/unlock the glove
compartment is longer than the lock cyl-
inder. Only half of the key can be inserted
into the cylinder.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
237
Deactivating private locking
1. This function can be deactivated from the
center display's Function view or under Set-
tings in Top view:
•
In Function view, tap
Private Locking.
•
In Top view, tap
Settings and then tap
My Car Locking. Tap (deselect) the
Private Locking box.
> A pop-up window will appear.
2. Enter the code used for locking and tap
Confirm.
>
3. The glove compartment is unlocked using
the key provided.
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 235)
•
Using the glove compartment (p. 215)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 38)
Detachable key blade
Your vehicle's remote key contains a detachable
key blade that can be used to unlock the driver's
door, etc.
A Volvo retailer can provide you with the key
blade's unique code.
Using the detachable key blade
The remote key's detachable key blade can be
used to:
•
Unlock the driver's door if the central locking
system cannot be activated using the remote
key
•
Lock all doors
•
Activate/deactivate the mechanical child
safety locks in the rear doors
The Key Tag
8
does not have a detachable key
blade.
Detaching the key blade
Hold the remote key with the front side
(with the Volvo symbol) facing up and move
the button on the key ring section of the key
to the right. Slide the front cover slightly
upward.
The cover will loosen and can be
removed from the key.
Remove the key blade by pulling it up.
8
Models with the optional Passive Entry system only.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
238
After use, press the key blade back into its
position in the key.
Press the front cover (with the Volvo
logo) until it clicks into place.
Slide the cover into position as indicated
by arrow 2 in the illustration.
> An additional click indicates that the cover
is correctly in place.
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking with the detachable key
blade (p. 238)
•
Child safety locks (p. 247)
Locking/unlocking with the
detachable key blade
The detachable key blade can be used to e.g.,
unlock the driver's door from the outside if, for
example, the remote key's battery is weak.
Unlocking
Pull out the driver's door handle as far as
possible to access the lock cylinder.
Remove the key blade from the remote key
and insert it into the lock cylinder.
Turn it clockwise 45 degrees so that the key
blade points straight rearward.
Turn the key blade back 45 degrees to its
original position. Remove the key blade from
the lock cylinder and release the door han-
dle.
5. Pull the door handle again to open the door.
> This will trigger the alarm.
Lock the door in the same way, but turn the key
in step 3 counterclockwise.
Turning off the alarm
Backup key reader under the tunnel console cup hold-
ers
To turn off the alarm:
1. Place the remote key in the cup holder (on
the key symbol) in the tunnel console (see
the illustration).
2. Turn the start knob clockwise as far as possi-
ble and release it.
> The start knob will return to its original
position and the alarm will be turned off.
Locking
If necessary, the vehicle can be locked by insert-
ing the detachable key blade into the lock cylin-
der in the driver's door.
Each of the other doors has a lock mechanism
that must be pressed in using the key blade so
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
239
that the door cannot be opened from the outside.
The doors can still be opened from the inside.
Manually locking a door (this is not the child safety lock)
–
Remove the detachable key blade from the
remote key. Insert it into the opening for the
lock mechanism and press it in as far as pos-
sible.
The door can be opened from inside and
outside.
The door cannot be opened from the outside.
To override the locking function, open the
door from the inside.
The doors can also be unlocked by pressing the
unlock button on the remote key or by pressing
the unlock button on the driver's door panel.
NOTE
If the child safety locks are activated for the
rear doors and the mechanical locking mech-
anism has also been activated with the key
blade, it will not be possible to open these
doors from the inside or the outside.
To unlock, use the central unlocking button
on either of the front doors or the unlock but-
ton on the remote key.
Related information
•
Detachable key blade (p. 237)
Power tailgate*
The optional power tailgate can be opened/
closed in several ways.
The power tailgate can be opened/closed using
the
button on the lighting panel in the pas-
senger compartment, the
on the remote key,
by moving your foot under a sensor under the
rear bumper* or manually.
WARNING
When operating the tailgate manually, do not
use force to open or close it. This could result
in injury.
Button on the lighting panel in the passenger compart-
ment
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
240
Opening the tailgate
The power tailgate can be opened electrically by:
•
Pressing and holding the
button on the
lighting panel until the tailgate begins to
open.
•
Pressing and holding the
button on the
remote key until the tailgate begins to open.
•
Pressing lightly on the rubber-covered button
under the tailgate's outside handle.
•
Moving your foot under a sensor under the
rear bumper*.
Closing the tailgate
The tailgate can be closed by moving your foot
under a sensor beneath the rear bumper*, by
pressing the button on the lighting panel, with
the remote key or by pressing the button on the
lower edge of the tailgate*
9
To close the tailgate
10
:
–
Press the button on the lighting panel
or on the
button on the remote key.
> The tailgate will close automatically and
audible signal will sound. This will not
lock the tailgate.
Buttons on the lower edge of the tailgate
–
Press the button
9
on the lower edge of
the tailgate.
> The tailgate will close automatically but
will not be locked.
–
Press the button
9
on the lower edge of
the tailgate.
> The tailgate will close automatically. The
tailgate and doors will also be locked and
the alarm will be armed.
If the remote key is not close enough to the tail-
gate, automatic locking/unlocking/opening/clos-
ing will not be possible. Three short audible sig-
nals will sound.
Interrupting opening/closing
–
This can be done in five ways:
•
Press the button on the lighting panel
•
Press the button on the remote key
•
Press either of the buttons on the lower
edge of the tailgate
•
Press lightly on the rubber-covered button
under the tailgate's outside handle
•
Move your foot under a sensor beneath
the rear bumper*
> The tailgate will stop moving
Programming the tailgate's maximum
opening angle
The tailgate's maximum opening angle can be
programmed, for example, if the tailgate has to be
opened in a garage with a low ceiling.
Programming the opening angle:
–
Open the tailgate manually to the desired
angle and press and hold the closing button
on the tailgate's lower edge for at least 3
seconds. Release the tailgate.
> Two audible signals will sound to indicate
that the selected opening angle has been
stored.
9
Models equipped with the optional Passive Entry system have a button to close the tailgate and a button to close and lock the tailgate.
10
See also the article "Foot movement tailgate opening/closing."
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
241
Erasing tailgate programming
–
Open the tailgate manually to its highest
position and press and hold the closing but-
ton on the tailgate's lower edge for at least 3
seconds. Release the tailgate.
> Two audible signals will sound to indicate
that the programmed opening angle has
been erased.
NOTE
If the tailgate has been opened and closed
continuously too long, the automatic function
will be deactivated to avoid overloading the
electrical system. The automatic function can
be used again after approximately 2 minutes.
If the vehicle's battery has been discharged or
disconnected, or if the tailgate has been open
for more than 24 hours, the tailgate must be
opened and closed once manually to reset
the system.
Pinch protection
If the tailgate is obstructed when being opened/
closed, a pinch protection mechanism is acti-
vated.
•
While opening: the tailgate will stop moving
and an audible signal will sound.
•
While closing: the tailgate will stop and
return to the currently programmed maximum
opening position. An audible signal will
sound.
WARNING
Pay attention to the risk of injury when open-
ing/ closing the tailgate. Before opening/
closing: Make sure that no one is in the path
of the tailgate as an injury could occur.
Preloaded springs
Preloaded springs for the power tailgate
WARNING
Never touch or attempt to access the preloa-
ded springs for the power tailgate. Doing so
could result in serious injury.
Related information
•
Remote key's range (p. 228)
•
Locking/unlocking from outside the vehicle
(p. 230)
•
Foot movement tailgate operation* (p. 242)
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
242
Foot movement tailgate operation*
The foot movement sensor* simplifies opening or
closing the tailgate if your hands are full.
11
The foot movement sensor is located to the left of cen-
ter under the rear bumper
NOTE
One of the remote keys must be in your pos-
session or within range when you are behind
the vehicle in order to activate the foot move-
ment sensor, even if the tailgate is already
unlocked. This is done to help prevent the
sensor from inadvertently opening the tail-
gate, for example, in a car wash.
Be sure that the key is not within range when
the vehicle is in an automatic carwash.
Operation
Kicking motion under the sensor's activation area
Opening/closing
–
With the remote key within range, move your
foot slowly forward in a kicking motion below
the left section of the rear bumper without
touching the bumper and take a step back.
> A brief audible signal will sound when the
tailgate begins to open/close.
The tailgate can be closed (or closed and locked)
by pressing the or buttons on the lower
edge of the tailgate
12
.
It can also be operated manually or by pressing
the button on the lighting panel in the passenger
compartment or on the remote key.
If several attempts have been made to open/
close the tailgate using the foot sensor without a
remote key within range, the function will time
out and will not be available for a short period.
NOTE
Foot operation may not be possible or func-
tion normally if the sensor is obstructed by
snow, ice, dirt, etc.
Interrupting opening/closing
–
Move your foot slowly forward in a kicking
motion while the tailgate is opening/closing
to stop its movement.
No remote keys need to be within range in order
to interrupt movement of the tailgate.
Vehicles equipped with a skid plate/
diffuser*
If the vehicle is equipped with a skid plate/
diffuser, the sensor is located under the left cor-
ner of the rear bumper.
11
Models equipped with the optional power tailgate only.
12
Vehicles equipped with the optional Passive Entry system only.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
243
Sensor location on vehicles equipped with a skid plate/
diffuser*
To open/close the tailgate, make the kicking
motion from the side of the rear bumper.
Kicking motion under the sensor's activation area
Related information
•
Power tailgate* (p. 239)
•
Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 235)
•
Remote key's range (p. 228)
Changing the remote key's battery
The remote key can be opened if the battery
needs to be replaced.
The battery should be replaced if:
The information symbol illuminates and
Vehicle key bat. low See Owner's
manual is displayed in the instrument
panel.
and/or
if the locks do not react after several attempts to
unlock or lock the vehicle with the remote key
within approx. 65 feet (20 meters) of the vehicle.
NOTE
If the locks do not react, move closer to the
vehicle and try to unlock it again.
The battery in the smaller extra key without but-
tons (Key Tag) provided with models with the
optional Passive Entry system cannot be
replaced. A new Key Tag can be ordered from a
Volvo retailer.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
244
NOTE
A Key Tag with a depleted battery should be
returned to an authorized Volvo retailer. The
key should also be erased from the vehicle's
electrical system because it could still be
used to start the vehicle from the back-up
start system.
Replacing the battery
Hold the remote key with the front side
(with the Volvo symbol) facing up and move
the button on the key ring section of the key
to the right. Slide the front cover slightly
upward.
The cover will loosen and can be
removed from the key.
Move the button to the side and slide
rear cover slightly upward.
The cover will loosen and can be
removed from the key.
Use e.g., a screwdriver to turn the battery
cover counterclockwise so that the markers
align toward OPEN.
Remove the cover carefully by pressing
e.g., a finger nail into the indentation.
Pry the cover up.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
245
The battery's positive (+) side is up. Pry
out the battery as shown in the illustration.
CAUTION
When handling batteries, avoid touching their
contact surfaces as this could result in poor
battery function in the remote key.
Insert a new battery
13
with the positive (+)
side up. Put the battery cover back in place
by:
Placing the battery's edge downward in
the holder. Slide the battery forward so that it
is held in place by the two plastic catches.
Pressing the battery downward so that it
is also held in place by the two upper
catches under the upper black holder.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries used in
the remote control meet the UN Manual of
Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 38.3.
Batteries installed in the key from the factory
and batteries exchanged by an authorized
Volvo workshop fulfill the above criteria.
Old batteries should be disposed of properly
at a recycling center or at your Volvo retailer.
Put the battery cover in place and turn it
clockwise until the marker points to CLOSE.
13
Use a CR2032, 3 V battery.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
246
Put the rear cover in position and press
down until it clicks into place.
Slide the cover into place as indicated by
arrow 2 in the illustration.
> Another click indicates that it is correctly
in position and closed.
Press the front cover (with the Volvo
logo) until it clicks into place.
Slide the cover into position as indicated
by arrow 2 in the illustration.
> Another click indicates that it is correctly
in position and closed.
Related information
•
Remote key (p. 226)
Immobilizer
The immobilizer is a start inhibitor that helps pre-
vent unauthorized persons from starting the
engine.
Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle con-
tains a unique coded transponder. The vehicle
code in the key is transmitted to the vehicle's
ignition system where it is compared to the code
stored in the start inhibitor module.
The following message (which may appear in the
instrument panel) is related to the immobilizer:
Symbol Message Explanation
Vehicle key
not found
See
Owner's
manual
Remote key not
recognized during
start. Place the
remote key on the
key symbol in the
tunnel console cup
holder and try to
start the vehicle
again.
Related information
•
Remote key's range (p. 228)
•
Remote key (p. 226)
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
247
Child safety locks
Child safety locks help prevent children from
inadvertently opening one of the rear doors from
inside the vehicle.
Electronic* activation/deactivation
The electronic child safety locks can be acti-
vated/deactivated as long as the ignition is not
completely switched off and this can be done for
up to two minutes after the engine has been
switched off if no door has been opened.
To activate:
Child safety lock button on the driver door control panel
1. Switch on the ignition or start the engine.
2. Press the button on the driver's door control
panel.
>
Rear child lock Activated will be dis-
played in the instrument panel and the
indicator light in the button will illuminate
to show that the child safety locking func-
tion is activated.
While the child safety locks are activated:
•
the rear door windows can only be opened
from the driver door control panel
•
the rear doors cannot be opened from the
inside
To deactivate:
–
Press the button in the driver door control
panel.
>
Rear child lock Deactivated will be dis-
played in the instrument panel and the
indicator light in the button will go out to
show that the child safety locking function
is deactivated.
When the ignition is switched off, the current set-
ting for the child safety locks will be stored. If the
locks were activated at that time, they will con-
tinue to be activated when the ignition is
switched on again.
Symbol Message Explanation
Rear child
lockActivated
The rear-door
child safety
locks are acti-
vated.
Rear child
lockDeacti-
vated
The rear-door
child safety
locks are deacti-
vated.
Manual activation/deactivation
Manual child safety locks in the rear doors
–
Use the detachable key blade in the remote
key to adjust these controls.
The rear doors can only be opened from the
outside.
The rear doors can be opened from the
inside or the outside.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
248
NOTE
•
Each control on the respective doors
control that door only, not both doors.
•
There are no manual child safety locks on
models equipped with the electronic
option.
Related information
•
Detachable key blade (p. 237)
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
Alarm
The alarm system provides a warning if an
attempt is made to break into the vehicle.
The following conditions will trigger the alarm:
•
a door/hood/tailgate are opened
•
the battery is disconnected
•
the alarm siren is disconnected
If a problem is detected in the alarm
system, this symbol and
Alarm
system failure Service required will
be displayed in the instrument panel.
Do not attempt to repair any of the components
in the alarm system yourself; this could affect the
insurance policy on the vehicle. Contact a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
NOTE
One of the alarm sensors, which is sensitive
to metallic objects, is located under the tunnel
console cup holders. Avoid leaving coins,
keys, etc., in the cup holders because they
may inadvertently trigger the alarm.
Arming the alarm
–
Lock the vehicle by pressing the remote
key's lock button. On models with the
optional Passive Entry system, the vehicle
can also be locked by pressing the outer
indentation for locking on one of the door
handles or by pressing the tailgate's rubber-
ized pressure plate.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power tail-
gate*, the button on the lower edge of the
tailgate can also be used to lock the vehicle
and arm the alarm.
Disarming the alarm
The alarm can be disarmed by:
•
Unlock the vehicle by pressing the remote
key's unlock button
•
Pressing the pressure-sensitive area on the
inside of one of the door handles on models
with the optional Passive Entry system.
•
Pressing the tailgate's rubberized pressure
plate on models with the optional Passive
Entry system.
Turning off a triggered (sounding)
alarm
–
Press the remote key's unlock button or put
the ignition in mode I by turning the start
knob clockwise as far as possible and releas-
ing it.
LOCKS AND ALARM
249
Alarm signals
The following occurs if the alarm has been trig-
gered:
•
A siren will sound for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is turned off
•
All turn signals flash for 5 minutes or until
the alarm is turned off
If the door that triggered the alarm is left open,
the alarm cycle will be repeated 10 times.
Alarm indicator
A red indicator light on the upper side of the
dashboard shows the alarm's status:
•
Indicator off: the alarm is disarmed
•
Indicator flashes once every two seconds:
the alarm is armed
•
Indicator flashes quickly after the alarm has
been disarmed (max. 30 seconds) or until
the ignition has been put in mode I (turn the
start knob clockwise as far as possible and
release it): the alarm has been triggered
Related information
•
Automatically arming/disarming the alarm
(p. 249)
•
Deactivating the alarm without a functioning
remote key (p. 250)
Automatically arming/disarming the
alarm
Automatically arming the alarm helps prevent
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without alarm
protection.
If the vehicle has been unlocked with the remote
key (and the alarm has been disarmed) but no
door or the tailgate has been opened within
2 minutes, the vehicle will automatically relock
and the alarm will re-arm.
In certain markets, the alarm will be re-armed
automatically after a slight delay after the driver's
door has been opened and closed without being
locked.
Related information
•
Alarm (p. 248)
•
Deactivating the alarm without a functioning
remote key (p. 250)
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
250
Deactivating the alarm without a
functioning remote key
If the remote key is not functioning properly, the
alarm can be turned off and the vehicle can be
started as follows:
1. Unlock and open the driver's door with the
detachable key blade.
> This will trigger the alarm.
Location of the back-up key reader in the cup holder
2. Place the remote key on the back-up key
reader in the tunnel console's cup holder.
3. Turn the start knob clockwise as far as possi-
ble and release it.
> The alarm will turn off.
Related information
•
Alarm (p. 248)
•
Detachable key blade (p. 237)
•
Starting the engine (p. 369)
•
Automatically arming/disarming the alarm
(p. 249)
Foreign Component Detection
The Foreign Component Detection function can
detect if an aftermarket component has been
connected to your vehicle.
Each headlight
14
is adapted to your vehicle. If an
aftermarket headlight is connected,
Unknown
vehicle part. Service required, unknown part
found will be displayed in the instrument panel. If
this happens, contact a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
Start and lock system type
designations
The following information contains type designa-
tions for the start and lock system.
Alarm system
USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following condi-
tions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3)
This device is subject to the following conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Remote keys (Passive entry/Passive
start*)
USA
Volvo Standard Key FCC ID: YGOHUF8423
Volvo Tag ID FCC ID: YGOHUF8432
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
251
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Any changes or modification not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate this
equipment.
Canada
Volvo Standard Key IC: 4008C-HUF8423
Volvo Tag ID IC: 4008C-HUF8432
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Immobilizer and Passive entry/Passive
start* systems
USA–FCC ID: LTQVO3134
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Any changes or modification not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate this
equipment.
Canada–IC:3659A-VO3134
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Related information
•
Alarm (p. 248)
•
Remote key (p. 226)
14
Models with LED headlight only
DRIVER SUPPORT
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
254
Driver support systems
The vehicle is equipped with a number of driver
support systems that help provide the driver with
active/passive support.
Some of these systems are standard while others
are optional and they are designed to e.g., help
the driver maintain a set speed or a set distance
to a vehicle ahead, or warn the driver of a poten-
tial collision situation and in certain cases apply
the brakes if necessary. Certain optional systems
can also assist in various parking situations.
Related information
•
Adjustable steering force* (p. 254)
•
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (p. 255)
•
Roll stability control (RSC) (p. 255)
•
Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 259)
•
Distance Alert* (p. 270)
•
Cruise Control (CC) (p. 265)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 272)
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 286)
•
Driver support system radar sensor (p. 300)
•
Driver support system camera (p. 305)
•
City Safety™ (p. 309)
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 322)
•
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 324)
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 329)
•
Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 332)
•
Driving lane assistance (p. 333)
•
Steering assist with run-off mitigation
(p. 341)
•
Park Assist* (p. 345)
•
Park Assist Camera (PAC)* (p. 350)
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 359)
Adjustable steering force*
Steering force increases with the speed of the
vehicle to give the driver an enhanced sense of
control and stability. At low speed the vehicle is
easier to steer in order to facilitate parking, etc.
Changing the steering force level
To change the level of steering force, see the
information under the heading "individual" in arti-
cle "Drive modes" for additional information.
On models not equipped with the drive mode
control in the center console, the selection is
made in the center display's Top view under:
Settings My Car Drive Modes
Steering force
NOTE
•
This steering force level menu function
cannot be accessed when the vehicle is
in motion.
•
In certain situations, the power steering
function may become too hot and must
be temporarily cooled. During cooling,
power steering effect will be reduced and
more force may be necessary to turn the
steering wheel and a message will be
displayed in the instrument panel.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
255
Roll stability control (RSC)
Volvo's Roll Stability Control (RSC) is a stability
system designed to help minimize the risk of a
rollover in emergency maneuvers or if a skid
should occur.
RSC registers the amount of change in the lat-
eral angle at which the vehicle is leaning. Using
this information, RSC calculates the likelihood of
a rollover. If there is an imminent risk of a rollover,
the stability system is activated, power to the
engine is cut and the brakes are applied to one
or more of the wheels until the vehicle regains
stability.
WARNING
The vehicle’s stability systems, including RSC,
do not replace the driver’s responsibility for
operating the vehicle in a safe manner. Speed
and driving style should always be adapted to
the current road, traffic and weather condi-
tions. Posted speed limits should always be
respected.
Related information
•
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (p. 255)
•
General safety information (p. 62)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) helps reduce
wheel spin, counteract skidding and to generally
help improve directional stability.
A pulsating sound will be audi-
ble when the system is actively
operating and is normal. Accel-
eration may also be slightly
slower than normal.
WARNING
•
The stability system (ESC) is intended to
help improve driving safety but cannot
deal with all situations, or traffic, road and
weather conditions. Speed and driving
style should always be adapted to the
current driving situation.
•
ESC supplements, but can never replace,
the driver's judgment and responsibility
when operating the vehicle. The driver is
always responsible for operating the vehi-
cle in a safe manner in accordance with
applicable traffic regulations.
ESC consists of the following functions:
•
Traction control
•
Spin control
•
Active Yaw Control
•
Engine Drag Control
•
Trailer Stability Assist
Traction control
This function is designed to help reduce wheel
spin by transferring power from a drive wheel that
begins to lose traction to the wheel on the oppo-
site side of the vehicle (on the same axle).
Spin control
This function is designed to help prevent the
drive wheels from spinning while the vehicle is
accelerating.
Active Yaw Control
At low speeds, this function helps maintain direc-
tional stability by braking one or more of the
wheels if the vehicle shows a tendency to skid or
slide laterally.
Engine Drag Control EDC
EDC helps keep the engine running if the wheels
show a tendency to lock, e.g., when shifting down
in the manual shifting mode or while using the
engine's braking function on a slippery surface. If
the wheels were to lock, the vehicle would
become more difficult to steer.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
256
Trailer Stability Assist*
1
TSA helps stabilize a vehicle that is towing a
trailer when the vehicle and trailer have begun to
sway.
This system is automatically deactivated if the
driver selects Sport mode.
Related information
•
Detachable trailer hitch* (p. 408)
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 409)
•
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) (p. 411)
•
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) sport mode
(p. 256)
•
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) symbols
and messages (p. 257)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
sport mode
ESC is always activated and cannot be switched
off.
However, the driver can select Sport mode,
which offers more active driving characteristics.
In Sport mode, the engine management system
monitors movement of the accelerator pedal and
steering wheel for sportier driving and allows
more lateral movement of the rear wheels before
ESC is triggered.
Under certain circumstances, such as when driv-
ing with snow chains, or driving in deep snow or
loose sand, it may be advisable to temporarily use
Sport mode for maximum tractive force.
If the driver releases pressure on the accelerator
pedal, ETC will also activate to help stabilize the
vehicle.
Activating/deactivating Sport mode
In the center display's Function
view, tap
ESC Sport Mode.
The green indicator light in the
button will illuminate to show
that the function has been acti-
vated or gray when the function
is deactivated.
When Sport mode is activated, this
symbol will illuminate in the instrument
panel. It will remain on until the driver
deactivates the function. ETC will also
return to normal mode when the engine is restar-
ted.
Sport mode limitations
ESC sport mode cannot be selected if any of the
following functions are activated:
•
Cruise Control
•
Speed Limiter*
•
Adaptive Cruise Control*
Related information
•
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (p. 255)
•
Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 259)
•
Cruise Control (CC) (p. 265)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 272)
1
This function is included if the vehicle is equipped with a Volvo original trailer hitch.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
257
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
symbols and messages
Symbol Message Description
Steady glow for 2 seconds
when the engine is started.
The system is performing a self-diagnostic test.
Flashing symbol. ESC is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.
Steady glow.
Sport mode has been activated.
Please note that ESC is not deactivated at this time but its functionality is reduced.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
258
Symbol Message Description
ESC Temporarily off
The ESC system function has been temporarily reduced due to high brake disc temperature. The function reacti-
vates automatically when the brakes have cooled.
See the message in the instrument panel.
ESC Service required
The ESC system is not functioning properly.
•
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and restart it.
•
If the message is still displayed when the engine has restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo workshop to have
the system inspected.
WARNING
•
The stability system (ESC) is intended to
help improve driving safety but cannot
deal with all situations, or traffic, road and
weather conditions. Speed and driving
style should always be adapted to the
current driving situation.
•
ESC supplements, but can never replace,
the driver's judgment and responsibility
when operating the vehicle. The driver is
always responsible for operating the vehi-
cle in a safe manner in accordance with
applicable traffic regulations.
A text message can be erased by briefly pressing
the O button on the right-side steering wheel
keypad. If the message recurs, contact a trained
and authorized Volvo service technician or
retailer.
Related information
•
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (p. 255)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
259
Speed limiter (SL)*
The Speed Limiter (SL) is a feature that helps
prevent the driver from exceeding a preset maxi-
mum speed.
Overview
Function buttons and symbols (generic illustration)
SL switches from standby mode to
active mode and the set maximum speed will
be used
Increases the set maximum speed
From standby mode, press to put SL
in active mode and set the current speed as
the maximum or from active mode, press to
put SL in standby mode (the set maximum
speed can be exceeded)
— Decreases the set maximum speed
Set maximum speed indicator
The vehicle's current speed
The set maximum speed
WARNING
•
The Speed Limiter cannot cover all driv-
ing situations and traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The vehicle must always be driven
according to current traffic/road condi-
tions.
•
The driver must take action if SL does not
maintain the set maximum speed.
•
The driver is always responsible for oper-
ating the vehicle in a safe manner and
observing posted speed limits.
Limitations
On steep downslopes, the Speed limiter's braking
capacity may not be sufficient and the set maxi-
mum speed may be exceeded. If this happens,
Speed limit exceeded will be displayed in the
instrument panel to alert the driver.
This message will appear if the set maximum
speed is exceeded by more than approx. 2 mph
(3 km/h).
Related information
•
Starting and activating the Speed Limiter
(SL)* (p. 260)
•
Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter*
(p. 261)
•
Changing a Speed Limiter (SL)* maximum
speed (p. 260)
•
Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 262)
•
Activating/deactivating the Automatic Speed
Limiter (ASL)* (p. 264)
•
Changing tolerance for the Automatic Speed
Limiter (p. 264)
•
Turning the Speed Limiter* off (p. 262)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
260
Starting and activating the Speed
Limiter (SL)*
The Speed Limiter (SL) is a feature that has to
be selected and activated in order to set a maxi-
mum speed.
Selecting SL (putting it in standby
mode)
Function buttons and symbols
–
Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to scroll to the Speed
Limiter (
) function.
> The symbol (4) will be displayed in the
instrument panel. This indicates that SL
has been selected and is in standby
mode (no maximum speed has been set).
Activating SL (putting it in active mode
and setting a maximum speed)
The engine must be running before SL can be
put in active mode. The lowest maximum speed
that can be set is 20 mph (30 km/h).
–
With SL in standby mode (the will
be displayed), press the
button (2).
> This puts SL in active mode and sets the
vehicle's current speed as the maximum
speed.
Related information
•
Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 259)
•
Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter*
(p. 261)
•
Changing a Speed Limiter (SL)* maximum
speed (p. 260)
•
Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 262)
•
Activating/deactivating the Automatic Speed
Limiter (ASL)* (p. 264)
•
Changing tolerance for the Automatic Speed
Limiter (p. 264)
•
Turning the Speed Limiter* off (p. 262)
Changing a Speed Limiter (SL)*
maximum speed
Function buttons and symbols
–
Change a set speed by pressing the (1)
or
(3) buttons briefly or by pressing and
holding them:
•
Press briefly: each press changes speed
in +/– 5 mph (+/– 5 km/h) increments.
•
Press and hold: release the button when
the set speed indicator (4) has moved to
the desired speed.
Limitations
When driving down steep hills, the Speed
Limiter's braking effect may not be adequate and
the set maximum speed may be exceeded. The
message
Speed limit exceeded will appear in
the instrument panel to alert the driver.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
261
NOTE
This message will appear if the maximum
speed is exceeded by more than approx.
2 mph (3 km/h).
Related information
•
Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 259)
Deactivating/reactivating the Speed
Limiter*
The Speed Limiter (SL) can be temporarily deac-
tivated and put in standby mode.
Deactivating and putting SL in standby
mode
To temporarily put the Speed Limiter in standby
mode:
Function buttons and symbols (generic illustration)
–
Press the button (2).
> The symbols in the instrument panel will
change colors from WHITE to GRAY.
This indicates that SL is temporarily in
standby mode and will not limit the vehi-
cle's maximum speed.
Reactivating SL from standby mode
To reactivate SL after it has temporarily been put
in standby mode:
–
Press the button (1).
> The maximum speed marker (4) and sym-
bols will change colors to WHITE and the
vehicle's maximum speed will be limited to
the previously set maximum speed.
or
–
Press the button (2).
> The symbols will change colors from
GRAY to WHITE and the vehicle's current
speed will be set as the maximum speed.
Increasing the speed with the
accelerator pedal
The set maximum speed can be temporarily
exceeded using the accelerator pedal without
putting SL in standby mode, for instance when
quick acceleration is required.
1. Press the accelerator pedal as far down as
possible and release it when the vehicle has
reached the desired speed.
> SL remains activated (the symbols in the
instrument panel will remain WHITE).
2. Release the accelerator pedal when the tem-
porary acceleration is completed.
> The vehicle will slow down and its speed
will remain under the set maximum speed.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
262
Related information
•
Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 259)
•
Starting and activating the Speed Limiter
(SL)* (p. 260)
Turning the Speed Limiter* off
The Speed Limiter (SL) can be turned off.
Function buttons and symbols
1.
Press the
button (2).
> SL will go into standby mode.
2.
Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) buttons to select
another function.
> The SL symbol (4) in the instrument panel
will go out and the set maximum speed
will be erased from the system's memory.
3.
Press the
button (2) again.
> The newly selected function will be acti-
vated.
Related information
•
Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 259)
•
Starting and activating the Speed Limiter
(SL)* (p. 260)
Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)*
Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) helps the driver
adapt the vehicle's maximum speed to the pos-
ted speed limits.
The Speed Limiter (SL) function can be switched
to Automatic Speed Limiter.
Where applicable, ASL uses speed information
from the Road Sign Information* system to auto-
matically adapt the vehicle's maximum speed.
WARNING
•
ASL is a supplemental aid to the driver
and does not function in all driving situa-
tions or in all traffic, weather or road con-
ditions. It can never replace the driver’s
attention to traffic conditions or his/her
responsibility for operating the vehicle in
a safe manner.
•
Even if the driver clearly sees a speed
limit sign, the speed information from
Road Sign Information to ASL may not be
correct. The driver must adapt the vehi-
cle's speed accordingly.
See also the article "Road Sign Information
limitations".
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
263
Is SL or ASL active?
Symbols in the instrument panel indicate which
function is active:
Symbol SL ASL
A
✓ ✓
Sign symbol
B
next to "70": ASL is acti-
vated.
✓
A
WHITE symbol: the function is active, GRAY symbol: the func-
tion is in standby mode.
B
See the section "ASL symbol" below for an explanation of the
symbol's different colors.
The ASL symbol
A road sign symbol (next to the stored
speed in the center of the speedome-
ter) can be displayed in three different
colors as explained in the following
table:
Road sign
symbol's color
Explanation
Green/yellow ASL is active
Gray ASL is in standby mode
Amber/orange ASL is temporarily in standby
mode (e.g., because a speed
limit sign could not be read)
ASL limitations
•
ASL utilizes the speed limit information provi-
ded by the Road Sign Information* system
(RSI), not from the speed limit signs that the
vehicle passes.
•
If RSI cannot provide ASL with speed-related
information, ASL will go into standby mode
and switch to SL. The driver will have to react
and adapt the vehicle's speed.
•
ASL will reactivate when RSI is once again
able to read a speed limit sign.
See also the article "Road Sign Information limi-
tations".
Related information
•
Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 259)
•
Activating/deactivating the Automatic Speed
Limiter (ASL)* (p. 264)
•
Changing tolerance for the Automatic Speed
Limiter (p. 264)
•
Starting and activating the Speed Limiter
(SL)* (p. 260)
•
Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter*
(p. 261)
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 329)
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* limitations
(p. 331)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
264
Activating/deactivating the
Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)*
The function Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) is a
supplement to the Speed Limiter (SL) and can
be activated/deactivated.
ASL is activated/deactivated in
the center display's Function
view.
Activating ASL
With SL activated:
1.
Tap the
Speed Sign Assist button in the
center display's Function view.
> ASL will go into standby mode and a
green indicator light in the button will illu-
minate. A road sign symbol will be dis-
played in center of the speedometer.
2.
Press the
button on the left-side steer-
ing wheel keypad.
> ASL will be activated with the vehicle's
current speed.
Deactivating ASL
–
Tap the Speed Sign Assist button in the
center display's Function view.
> ASL will be deactivated, the indicator will
be GRAY and the Speed limiter (SL) will
be activated.
WARNING
After switching from ASL to SL, the vehicle
will no longer adapt speed to posted speed
limits. It will only limit the vehicle's maximum
speed.
Related information
•
Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 259)
•
Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 262)
Changing tolerance for the
Automatic Speed Limiter
Automatic Speed Limiter can be set to different
tolerance levels.
Posted speed limit tolerance
ASL can be set to allow the vehicle to drive
above or below the posted speed limit. For exam-
ple, if the current posted speed limit is 43 mph
(70 km/h), the driver can opt to allow the vehicle
to drive at a speed of 47 mph (75 km/h).
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
265
Function buttons and symbols (generic illustration)
–
Press the button (1) until 43 mph
(70 km/h) has changed to 47 mph
(75 km/h) in the center of the speedometer
(4).
> The vehicle will then use the selected tol-
erance +4 mph (+5 km/h) until the vehi-
cle passes a sign with a lower or higher
speed limit. The vehicle will then adjust to
the new maximum speed and the set tol-
erance will be deleted from the system's
memory.
If the Road Sign Information* system is
activated, the posted speed limit will be
indicated by a RED marker on the spee-
dometer's speed scale.
The set tolerance can be adjusted in the
same way as the Speed Limiter's set
maximum speed.
NOTE
The greatest tolerance that can be set is +/–
5 mph (10 km/h).
Related information
•
Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 262)
•
Activating/deactivating the Automatic Speed
Limiter (ASL)* (p. 264)
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 329)
•
Changing a Speed Limiter (SL)* maximum
speed (p. 260)
Cruise Control (CC)
Cruise Control (CC) is designed to assist the
driver by maintaining a set speed. It is primarily
intended for use on long straight roads in steady
traffic, such as on highways and other main
roads in smoothly flowing traffic.
Overview
Function buttons and symbols (generic illustration)
Increases the set speed or CC switches
from standby mode to active mode
The set speed will be resumed
Press to put CC in active mode and set
the current speed or from active mode, press
to put CC in standby mode
— Decreases the set speed
Set speed indicator
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
266
The vehicle's current speed
The set speed
In models equipped with the optional Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC), the driver can toggle
between CC and ACC – see the article "Switch-
ing between Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise
Control".
WARNING
•
The vehicle must always be driven
according to current traffic/road condi-
tions. The driver must take action if CC
does not maintain a suitable speed
and/or distance to other vehicles.
•
The driver is always responsible for oper-
ating the vehicle in a safe manner.
Related information
•
Starting and activating Cruise Control
(p. 266)
•
Changing Cruise Control (CC) speed
(p. 267)
•
Deactivating/resuming Cruise Control (CC)
(p. 268)
•
Turning Cruise Control off (p. 269)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 272)
•
Switching between Cruise Control (CC) and
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 283)
Starting and activating Cruise
Control
Cruise Control (CC) must be selected and acti-
vated before it can regulate the vehicle's speed.
Selecting CC (putting it in standby
mode)
Function buttons and symbols
–
Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to scroll to the CC
(
) function.
> The symbol (4) will be displayed in the
instrument panel. This indicates that CC
has been selected and can then be acti-
vated to maintain a set speed.
NOTE
Before CC can be activated, the vehicle's
speed must be at least 20 mph (30 km/h).
This is also the lowest speed that can be set.
Activating CC (putting it in active mode
and setting a speed)
–
With the symbol displayed (CC is in
standby mode), press the
button (2) on
the left-side steering wheel keypad.
> This puts CC in active mode and will
maintain the vehicle's current speed.
Related information
•
Cruise Control (CC) (p. 265)
•
Switching between Cruise Control (CC) and
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 283)
•
Deactivating/resuming Cruise Control (CC)
(p. 268)
•
Turning Cruise Control off (p. 269)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
267
Changing Cruise Control (CC)
speed
Changing a set speed
Function buttons and symbols (generic illustration)
Models equipped with Cruise Control only
–
Change a set speed by pressing the (1)
or
(3) buttons briefly or by pressing and
holding them:
•
Press briefly: each press changes speed
in +/– 1 mph (+/– 1 km/h) increments.
•
Press and hold: release the button when
the set speed indicator (4) has moved to
the desired speed.
Models equipped with Cruise Control and
Adaptive Cruise Control*
–
Change a set speed by pressing the (1)
or
(3) buttons briefly or by pressing and
holding them:
•
Press briefly: each press changes speed
in +/– 5 mph (+/– 5 km/h) increments.
•
Press and hold: release the button when
the set speed indicator (4) has moved to
the desired speed.
•
The most recently set speed will be stored in
the function's memory.
If speed is increased by pressing the accelerator
pedal before the
button is pressed, the vehi-
cle's speed when the button is pressed will
become the set speed assuming that the accel-
erator pedal is still depressed when the button is
pressed.
A temporary increase in speed, such as when
passing another vehicle, does not affect the CC
set speed. The vehicle will return to the set speed
when the accelerator pedal is released. Always
observe posted speed limits.
Engine braking instead of applying the
brakes
CC regulates speed by applying the brakes
lightly. To avoid a loss of speed when driving
down hills, use the engine braking function
instead of letting CC apply the brakes. In this sit-
uation, the driver can temporarily deactivate CC
braking function.
To do so:
–
Press the accelerator pedal approx. halfway
down and release it.
> CC will automatically deactivate the auto-
matic brake function and will then only
use the engine braking function.
Related information
•
Cruise Control (CC) (p. 265)
DRIVER SUPPORT
268
Deactivating/resuming Cruise
Control (CC)
Cruise Control (CC) can be temporarily deacti-
vated and put in standby mode.
Deactivating and putting CC in standby
mode
To temporarily deactivate and put Cruise Control
in standby mode:
Function buttons and symbols (generic illustration)
–
Press the button (2).
> The set speed marker (4) and symbols will
change colors from WHITE to GRAY.
This indicates that CC is temporarily in
standby mode and will not maintain a set
speed.
Standby mode due to action by the driver
CC is temporarily deactivated and put in standby
mode if:
•
the brakes are applied
•
the gear selector is moved to N
•
the vehicle is driven faster than the set
speed for more than 1 minute.
In these cases, the driver will have to regulate the
vehicle's speed.
A temporary increase in speed, such as when
passing another vehicle, does not affect the CC
set speed. The vehicle will return to the set speed
when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode
CC switches automatically to standby mode if:
•
the wheels lose traction
•
engine speed (rpm) is too high/low
•
brake temperature is too high
•
the vehicle's speed goes below approx.
20 mph (30 km/h)
In these cases, the driver will have to regulate the
vehicle's speed.
Reactivating CC from standby mode
To reactivate CC after it has temporarily been put
in standby mode:
–
Press the button (1).
> The set speed marker (4) will change
color from GRAY to WHITE. The vehicle
will then return to the most recently set
speed.
WARNING
There may be a significant increase in speed
after the
button has been pressed.
or
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
269
–
Press the button (2).
> The set speed marker (4) and symbols will
change colors from GRAY to WHITE. CC
will then set and maintain the vehicle's
current speed.
Related information
•
Cruise Control (CC) (p. 265)
•
Starting and activating Cruise Control
(p. 266)
Turning Cruise Control off
Cruise Control (CC) can be deactivated (turned
off).
Function buttons and symbols
1.
Press the
button (2) on the left-side
steering wheel keypad.
> This puts CC in standby mode.
2.
Press the ◀ or ▶ button to switch to another
function.
> The Cruise Control symbol in the instru-
ment panel
will go out.
3.
Press the
button (2) again.
> Another function will be activated and the
set speed in the CC system's memory will
be erased.
In models equipped with the optional Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC), the driver can toggle
between CC and ACC – see the article "Switch-
ing between Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise
Control".
Related information
•
Cruise Control (CC) (p. 265)
•
Starting and activating Cruise Control
(p. 266)
•
Switching between Cruise Control (CC) and
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 283)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
270
Distance Alert*
Distance Alert is a function that alerts the driver
if the time interval to the vehicle ahead is too
short.
Distance Alert is active at speeds above approxi-
mately 20 mph (30 km/h) and only reacts to a
vehicle ahead that is driving in the same direc-
tion. No information is provided for vehicles driv-
ing toward you, moving very slowly, or at a stand-
still.
NOTE
Distance Alert only monitors distance to the
vehicle ahead while Adaptive Cruise Control is
in standby mode or off.
WARNING
Distance Alert only indicates the distance to
the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the
speed of your vehicle.
Head-up-display*
Distance Alert symbol in the windshield (generic illustra-
tion)
In vehicle is equipped with the head-up display*,
the symbol in the windshield will only appear if
the distance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than
the preset value. However, the
Show Driver
Support function has to be activated in the Set-
tings menu. See the article "Head-up display" for
additional information.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-
trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
not looking straight ahead may make the
warning symbol in the windshield difficult to
see.
Related information
•
Distance Alert* limitations (p. 272)
•
Using Distance Alert* (p. 271)
•
Head-up display (HUD)* (p. 118)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 272)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
271
Using Distance Alert*
Distance Alert can be set to different time inter-
vals and can also be deactivated.
Activate/deactivate
Tap the Distance alert button
in the center display's Function
view.
•
GREEN indicator light: Distance Alertis acti-
vated
•
GRAY indicator light: Distance Alert is deac-
tivated
Distance Alert is activated automatically when the
engine is started.
Setting a time interval
Controls for setting a time interval
Reduce the time interval
Increase the time interval
Distance/time indicator
–
Press button (1) or (2) on the left-side steer-
ing wheel keypad to reduce or increase the
time interval to the vehicle ahead.
> The indicator (3) shows the current time
interval.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle ahead can be selected
and are shown in the instru-
ment panel as 1–5 horizontal
bars. The greater the number of
bars, the longer the time inter-
val.
One bar between the vehicles represents a time
interval of approximately 1 second; 5 bars is
approximately 3 seconds.
The same symbol appears if Adaptive Cruise
Control is activated.
NOTE
•
The greater the vehicles' speed, the
greater the distance between them for a
set time interval.
•
The set time interval is also used by
Adaptive Cruise Control and Pilot Assist*.
•
Only use time intervals permitted by local
traffic regulations.
WARNING
•
Only use a time interval that is suitable in
current traffic conditions.
•
A short time interval gives the driver lim-
ited reaction time if an unexpected situa-
tion occurs in traffic.
Related information
•
Distance Alert* (p. 270)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
272
Distance Alert* limitations
Distance Alert uses the same radar sensor as
Adaptive Cruise Control* and has several limita-
tions.
WARNING
•
The radar sensor has a limited field of
vision. In some situations it may detect a
vehicle later than expected or not detect
other vehicles at all.
•
The radar sensor cannot cover all driving
situations and traffic, weather and road
conditions.
•
The driver is responsible for maintaining a
safe distance and speed and must inter-
vene if the various driver support systems
do not maintain a suitable speed or suita-
ble distance to the vehicle ahead.
•
Maintenance of radar sensor components
may only be performed by a trained and
qualified Volvo technician.
•
Strong sunlight, reflections from the road
surface, strong lighting contrasts or using
sunglasses may make the warning light in
the windshield difficult to see.
WARNING
•
Poor weather or winding roads can affect
the radar sensor's capacity to detect vehi-
cles ahead.
•
A vehicle's size (e.g., a motorcycle) can
also affect the radar sensor's capacity to
detect another vehicle. This may result in
the warning light illuminating at a shorter
distance than the one that has been set
or not illuminating at all.
•
High speeds may also result in the warn-
ing light illuminating at a shorter distance
than the one that has been set due to
limitations in the radar sensor's range.
For additional information, see also the article
"Radar sensor limitations."
Related information
•
Radar sensor limitations (p. 302)
•
Distance Alert* (p. 270)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
ACC is an optional system designed to assist
the driver by maintaining a set speed or a set
time interval to the vehicle ahead.
ACC helps provide more relaxed driving on long
trips on highways or other major roads in a rela-
tively even flow of traffic.
The camera and radar sensor monitor the distance to
the vehicle ahead (generic illustration - certain details
may vary from model to model)
The driver sets that desired speed and time inter-
val to the vehicle ahead. When the camera and
radar sensor detects a slower moving vehicle
ahead, your vehicle's speed is automatically
adapted. When there are no longer slower mov-
ing vehicles ahead, your vehicle will accelerate to
resume the set speed.
ACC is designed to follow a vehicle ahead in the
same lane and maintain a time interval to that
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
273
vehicle set by the driver. If the radar sensor does
not detect a vehicle ahead, ACC will instead
maintain the speed set by the driver.
ACC is designed to smoothly regulate speed.
However, the driver must apply the brakes in sit-
uations that require immediate braking such as
when there are great differences in speed
between vehicles, or if the vehicle ahead brakes
suddenly. Due to limitations in the radar sensor,
braking may occur unexpectedly or not at all.
Adaptive Cruise Control can follow another vehi-
cle from a standstill up to 125 mph (200 km/h).
Always observe posted speed limits.
The driver can also toggle between ACC and
Cruise Control (CC) – see the article "Switching
between Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise
Control".
WARNING
•
It is advisable to read through all of the
related articles pertaining to ACC (see
the list at the end of this article).
•
Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover all
driving situations and traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
This system is designed to be a supple-
mentary driving aid. It is not, however,
intended to replace the driver's attention
and judgement. The driver is responsible
for maintaining a safe distance and speed
and must intervene if Adaptive Cruise
Control does not maintain a suitable
speed or suitable distance to the vehicle
ahead.
•
Maintenance of ACC components may
only be performed by a trained and quali-
fied Volvo technician.
Overview
The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the same
lane) is monitored by a radar sensor. Your vehi-
cle's speed is regulated by accelerating and
braking. The brakes may emit a sound when they
are being modulated by the adaptive cruise con-
trol system. This is normal.
WARNING
•
Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver is always
responsible for applying the brakes if the
system does not detect another vehicle.
•
Adaptive Cruise Control does not react to
people or animals, or small vehicles such
as bicycles and motorcycles. It also does
not react to slow moving, parked or
approaching vehicles, or stationary
objects.
•
Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in
demanding driving conditions such as city
driving or other heavy traffic situations, in
slippery conditions, when there is a great
deal of water or slush on the road, during
heavy rain or snow, in poor visibility, on
winding roads or on highway on- or off-
ramps.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
274
Controls
Function buttons and symbols (generic illustration)
Increases the set speed or puts ACC back
into active mode (previous settings will be
resumed)
Puts ACC in active mode and stores the cur-
rent speed or puts ACC in standby mode
Reduces the set speed
Increases the time interval/distance to the
vehicle ahead
Reduces the time interval/distance to the
vehicle ahead
Target vehicle indicator: ACC has detected
and is following a target vehicle using the set
time interval
Distance/time indicator
Instrument panel
Speed indicators
Set speed
Speed of the vehicle ahead
The current speed of your vehicle
See the article "Adaptive cruise control symbols
and messages" for examples of different combi-
nations of symbols, depending on the traffic sit-
uation.
Collision warning
Audible/visual warning signals
Audible warning signal
Visual warning symbol
Monitoring distance with the camera and
radar sensor
Adaptive Cruise Control can exert brake force
that is equivalent to approximately 40% of the
vehicle's total braking capacity.
In situations requiring more brake force than
ACC can provide and if the driver does not apply
the brakes, an audible signal from the City Safety
system will sound and warning light will illuminate
in the windshield to alert the driver to react.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
275
WARNING
Adaptive Cruise Control only warns of vehicles
detected by the radar sensor. In some cases
there may be no warning or the warning may
be delayed. The driver should always apply the
brakes when necessary.
Head-up-display*
A flashing light alerts the driver
A flashing icon will appear in the head-up display
to alert the driver of a collision risk.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-
trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
not looking straight ahead may make the
warning symbol in the windshield difficult to
see.
Related information
•
Starting and activating Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)* (p. 275)
•
Changing Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
speed (p. 276)
•
Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
time interval (p. 277)
•
Changing target vehicles and automatic
braking with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(p. 281)
•
Switching between Cruise Control (CC) and
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 283)
•
Passing Assistance with Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)* or Pilot Assist* (p. 280)
•
Deactivating/resuming Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) (p. 278)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) symbols and
messages (p. 284)
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 286)
•
Distance Alert* (p. 270)
•
Head-up display (HUD)* (p. 118)
•
Radar sensor limitations (p. 302)
Starting and activating Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)*
ACC must first be put in active mode before it
can be started in order to regulate speed or a
set time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Starting ACC (putting it in standby
mode)
Function buttons and symbols
–
Press ◀ (2) or ▶ (3) to scroll to the ACC
(
) function. The symbol (4) will be dis-
played in the instrument panel.
> The symbol indicates that ACC has been
started and is in standby mode. In
standby mode, the vehicle will not main-
tain a set speed or a time interval to the
vehicle ahead.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
276
Activating ACC (putting it in active
mode and setting a speed)
Before ACC can be put in active mode:
•
The driver's seat belt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
•
There must be a vehicle ahead (a target vehi-
cle) within a reasonable distance or your
vehicle's current speed must be at least
9 mph (15 km/h).
–
With the symbol (4) displayed (ACC is in
standby mode), press the
button (1) on
the left-side steering wheel keypad.
> This puts ACC in active mode and sets
the vehicle's current speed, which is indi-
cated by digits in the center of the speed-
ometer.
The time interval to the vehi-
cle ahead will only be shown
when two vehicles are dis-
played.
A speed interval will also be
indicated:
•
The higher speed is the one set in ACC
•
The lower one is the speed of the vehicle
ahead (the target vehicle).
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 272)
•
Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
time interval (p. 277)
•
Deactivating/resuming Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) (p. 278)
Changing Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) speed
ACC makes it possible to set various speeds.
Changing a set speed
Function buttons and symbols
–
Change a set speed by pressing the (1)
or
(3) buttons briefly or by pressing and
holding them:
•
Press briefly: each press changes speed
in +/– 5 mph (+/– 5 km/h) increments.
•
Press and hold: release the button when
the set speed indicator (4) has moved to
the desired speed.
•
The most recently set speed will be stored in
the function's memory.
If speed is increased by pressing the accelerator
pedal before the
button is pressed, the vehi-
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
277
cle's speed when the button is pressed will
become the set speed assuming that the accel-
erator pedal is still depressed when the button is
pressed.
A temporary increase in speed, such as when
passing another vehicle, does not affect the ACC
set speed. The vehicle will return to the set speed
when the accelerator pedal is released.
The Adaptive Cruise Control can follow another
vehicle from a standstill up to 125 mph
(200 km/h). Always observe posted speed limits.
The lowest speed that can be set for ACC is
20 mph (30 km/h). However, ACC can monitor
and react to the speed of the vehicle ahead down
to a standstill.
The highest speed that can be set/stored is
approx. 125 mph (200 km/h). Always observe
posted speed limits.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 272)
Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) time interval
ACC makes it possible to set various time inter-
vals to the vehicle ahead.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle ahead can be selected
and are shown in the instru-
ment panel as 1–5 horizontal
bars. The greater the number of
bars, the longer the time inter-
val. One bar between the vehi-
cles represents a time interval of approximately
1 second; 5 bars is approximately 3 seconds.
The same symbol appears if Distance Alert is
activated.
•
If the symbol shows two vehicle's, ACC is
actively following the vehicle ahead (a target
vehicle).
•
If only one vehicle is displayed, ACC is not
actively following another vehicle.
Changing a time interval
Controls for setting a time interval
Reduce the time interval
Increase the time interval
Distance/time indicator
–
Press buttons (1) or (2) to reduce or
increase the time interval.
> The distance/time indicator (3) shows the
current time interval.
In order to follow the vehicle ahead as smoothly
as possible, ACC allows the time interval to vary
considerably in certain situations. At low speeds,
when the distance to the vehicle ahead is short,
ACC increases the time interval slightly.
•
If ACC does not seem to react when it is put
in active mode, this may be because the set
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
278
time interval to the vehicle ahead does not
allow an increase in speed.
•
The higher the speed, the greater the dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead for a given time
interval.
•
Only use time intervals permitted by local
traffic regulations.
NOTE
•
The greater the vehicles' speed, the
greater the distance between them for a
set time interval.
•
The set time interval is also used by
Adaptive Cruise Control and Pilot Assist*.
•
Only use time intervals permitted by local
traffic regulations.
WARNING
•
Only use a time interval that is suitable in
current traffic conditions.
•
A short time interval gives the driver lim-
ited reaction time if an unexpected situa-
tion occurs in traffic.
Choosing how ACC maintains the time
interval to the vehicle ahead*
The driver can select different drive modes to
determine the way in which ACC tries to maintain
the set time interval to the vehicle ahead. This
setting is made using the DRIVE MODE control
on the tunnel console.
Select one of the following:
•
Eco: ACC focuses on optimal fuel economy,
which may result in a longer time interval to
the vehicle ahead.
•
Comfort: ACC focuses on maintaining the
set time interval to the vehicle ahead as
smoothly as possible.
•
Dynamic: ACC focuses on maintaining the
set time interval to the vehicle ahead as pre-
cisely as possible, which can result in faster
acceleration and more immediate braking.
See also the article "Drive modes" for additional
information.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 272)
•
Starting and activating Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)* (p. 275)
•
Deactivating/resuming Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) (p. 278)
•
Passing Assistance with Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)* or Pilot Assist* (p. 280)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) symbols and
messages (p. 284)
•
Distance Alert* (p. 270)
•
Drive modes (p. 380)
Deactivating/resuming Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)
ACC can be put temporarily in standby mode
and then reactivated.
Function buttons and symbols
To temporarily deactivate and put Adaptive Cruise
Control in standby mode:
–
Press the button (2).
>
The
symbol in the instrument panel
will change colors from WHITE to GRAY
and the set speed in the center of the
speedometer will change from BEIGE to
GRAY.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
279
WARNING
When ACC is in standby mode, the driver has
to control the vehicle's speed and distance to
a vehicle ahead.
When ACC is in standby mode, the driver will
be alerted if the distance to the vehicle ahead
is too short by the Distance Alert function.
See the article "Distance Alert" for additional
information.
Standby mode due to action by the driver
ACC is temporarily deactivated and put in
standby mode if:
•
the brakes are applied
•
The gear selector is moved to N
•
the vehicle is driven faster than the set
speed for more than 1 minute.
In these cases, the driver will have to regulate the
vehicle's speed.
A temporary increase in speed, such as when
passing another vehicle, does not affect the ACC
set speed. The vehicle will return to the set speed
when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode
ACC interacts with other systems, such as
Electronic Stability Control. If any of these other
systems are not functioning properly, ACC will
turn off automatically.
WARNING
If this happens, the driver will be alerted by an
audible signal and a message in the instru-
ment panel. The driver will have to adapt the
vehicle's speed, apply the brakes when nec-
essary and keep a safe distance to the vehicle
ahead.
ACC switches automatically to standby mode if:
•
the vehicle's speed goes below approx.
3 mph (5 km/h) and ACC cannot determine
if the vehicle ahead is stationary or is an
object such as a speed bump, etc
•
the vehicle's speed goes below approx.
3 mph (5 km/h) and the vehicle ahead
changes lanes or turns so that ACC no
longer has a target vehicle to follow
•
the driver opens the door
•
the driver unbuckles the seat belt
•
the engine speed (rpm) is too high/low
•
the wheels lose traction
•
the brake temperature is too high
•
the parking brake is applied
•
the stability system's
ESC Sport Mode is
activated
•
the
Off Road drive mode is selected
•
The radar sensor is covered by e.g., wet snow
or if heavy rain interferes with radar waves
Reactivating ACC from standby mode
Generic illustration
To reactivate ACC after it has temporarily been
put in standby mode:
–
Press the button (1).
>
The vehicle will then return to the most
recently set speed.
WARNING
There may be a significant increase in speed
after the
button has been pressed.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 272)
•
Starting and activating Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)* (p. 275)
•
Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
time interval (p. 277)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
280
•
Passing Assistance with Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)* or Pilot Assist* (p. 280)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) symbols and
messages (p. 284)
•
Distance Alert* (p. 270)
Passing Assistance with Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)* or Pilot
Assist*
Adaptive Cruise Control or Pilot Assist can
assist the driver when passing other vehicles.
How passing assistance works
When ACC or Pilot Assist is following another
vehicle and the driver indicates that he/she is
about to pass that vehicle by using the left turn
signal, ACC or Pilot Assist will begin accelerating
toward the vehicle ahead before your vehicle has
moved into the passing lane.
The function will then delay a speed reduction to
avoid early braking as your vehicle approaches
the slower-moving vehicle.
The function is active until your vehicle has
passed the other vehicle.
WARNING
Be aware that this function may be activated
in situations other than when passing a vehi-
cle, such as if the turn signal is used to indi-
cate a lane change or to indicate a turn. The
vehicle will accelerate briefly.
Using passing assistance
To activate passing assistance:
•
Your vehicle (ACC or Pilot Assist) must be
following another vehicle (the target vehicle).
•
Current speed must be at least approx.
43 mph (70 km/h ).
•
The speed set for ACC or Pilot Assist must
be high enough to safely pass the vehicle
ahead.
Starting passing assistance
To start a passing assistance sequence:
•
Activate the left turn signal.
Passing assistance limitations
WARNING
The driver should be prepared for sudden
changes when passing assistance is used. In
certain cases, there may be undesired accel-
eration.
Certain situations should be avoided, such as:
•
If the vehicle is approaching an exit to the
left or a left turn.
•
If the vehicle ahead slows down before
your vehicle has moved into the passing
lane.
•
Traffic in the passing lane slows down.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
281
Passing assistance in these situations can be
deactivated by putting ACC or Pilot Assist in
standby mode.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 286)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 272)
Changing target vehicles and
automatic braking with Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)
At certain speeds, Adaptive Cruise Control can
change target vehicles and automatically apply
the brakes.
Changing target vehicles
If the target vehicle turns suddenly, there may be a sta-
tionary vehicle ahead
When ACC is actively following another vehicle at
speeds under 20 mph (30 km/h) and changes
targets from a moving vehicle to a stationary one,
the system will brake for the stationary vehicle.
WARNING
At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), if ACC
changes targets from a moving vehicle to a
stationary one, the system will not react to the
stationary vehicle and will accelerate to the
previously set speed.
The driver must actively apply the brakes to
slow/stop the vehicle.
Automatic standby mode when changing
targets
ACC disengages and goes into standby mode if:
•
your vehicle's speed goes below approx.
3 mph (5 km/h) and ACC cannot determine
if the target object is a stationary vehicle or
some other type of object such as a speed
bump, etc
•
the vehicle's speed goes below approx.
3 mph (5 km/h) and the vehicle ahead
changes lanes or turns so that ACC no
longer has a target vehicle to follow.
Auto-hold brake function
In slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic or when stop-
ped at a traffic light, driving will resume automati-
cally if the vehicle is not stopped for more than
approx. 3 seconds. If it takes more than
3 seconds for the vehicle ahead to begin moving
again, ACC will go into standby mode and the
auto-hold brake function will activate.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
282
–
The driver will then have to reactivate ACC in
one of the following ways:
•
Press the
button on the left-side
steering wheel keypad.
•
Press the accelerator pedal.
> ACC will resume following the vehicle
ahead (target vehicle) if it begins to move
within approx. 6 seconds.
NOTE
ACC can keep the vehicle at a standstill for
up to 5 minutes, after which the parking brake
will be set and ACC will go into standby
mode.
The parking brake has to be released before
ACC can be reactivated.
Deactivation of the auto-hold brake function
In certain situations, auto-hold will be deactivated
when the vehicle is at a standstill and ACC will go
into standby mode.
This means that the brakes will be released and
the vehicle can begin to roll.
The driver must actively apply the brakes to keep
the vehicle at a standstill.
This can occur in the following situations:
•
the driver presses the brake pedal
•
the parking brake is set
•
the gear selector is moved to the P, N or R
positions
•
the driver puts ACC in standby mode.
Automatically setting the parking brake
In certain situations, the parking brake is set
automatically to help keep the vehicle at a stand-
still.
This occurs if ACC keeps the vehicle at a stand-
still with the brakes and:
•
the driver unbuckles the seat belt or opens
the door
•
ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstill for
more than approx. 5 minutes
•
the brakes overheat
•
the engine is turned off.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 272)
•
Auto-hold brake function (p. 394)
•
Parking brake (p. 391)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) -
limitations
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) functionality may
be limited in certain situations.
Steep roads and/or heavy loads
Adaptive Cruise Control is primarily intended for
use on relatively level roads. The function may not
be able to maintain the correct time interval to
the vehicle ahead when driving down steep hills.
The driver should be attentive and prepared to
apply the brakes in these situations.
Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control when the
vehicle is transporting a heavy load or if it is tow-
ing a trailer.
Additional information
The Off Road drive mode cannot be selected if
Adaptive Cruise Control is activated.
NOTE
This function uses the vehicle's camera and
radar sensor, which have certain general limi-
tations. See the articles "Camera limitations"
and "Radar sensor limitations" for additional
information.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 272)
•
Radar sensor limitations (p. 302)
•
Camera limitations (p. 306)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
283
Switching between Cruise Control
(CC) and Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)*
In models equipped with the optional ACC, the
driver can toggle between CC and ACC.
A symbol in the instrument panel will indicate
which system is currently being used:
CC
Cruise Control
ACC
Adaptive Cruise Control
A A
A
If the symbol is WHITE, the function is active. If the symbol is
GRAY, the function is in standby mode.
Switching from ACC to CC
To switch from ACC to CC:
1.
Put ACC in standby mode with the
but-
ton on the left-side steering wheel keypad.
2. From the center display's Function view, tap
the
Cruise control button. The button's indi-
cator will change from GRAY to GREEN.
> The symbol in the instrument panel will
change from
(ACC) to
(CC) and CC is in standby mode (ready
for use but not currently maintaining a set
speed).
3.
Press the
button on the left-side steer-
ing wheel keypad.
> CC goes into active mode and sets the
vehicle's current speed.
WARNING
Switching from ACC to CC means that:
•
Your vehicle will no longer automatically
maintain a set distance to a vehicle
ahead.
•
Only the set speed will be maintained and
the driver will have to apply the brakes
when needed.
If CC was activated when the engine was turned
off, ACC will be selected and go into standby
mode when the engine is restarted.
Switching from CC to ACC
To switch from CC to ACC:
1.
Put CC in standby mode with the
button
on the left-side steering wheel keypad.
2. In the center display's Function view, tap the
Cruise control button. The button's indica-
tor will change from GREEN to GRAY.
> The symbol in the instrument panel will
change from
(CC) to
(ACC) and ACC is in standby mode (ready
for use but not currently maintaining a set
speed/time interval).
3.
Press the
button on the left-side steer-
ing wheel keypad.
> ACC goes into active mode and sets the
vehicle's current speed and the selected
time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Related information
•
Cruise Control (CC) (p. 265)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 272)
•
Center display overview (p. 32)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
284
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
symbols and messages
A number of ACC symbols and/or messages
may appear in the instrument panel or the head-
up display*.
Several examples
2
are provided here.
This illustration
3
shows that ACC is set at a
speed of 68 mph (110 km/h) and that there is
no vehicle ahead to follow.
This illustration
3
shows that ACC is set at a
speed of 68 mph (110 km/h) and is following
another vehicle traveling at the same speed.
2
In the following illustrations, the optional RSI (Road Sign Information) function is indicating that the posted speed limit is 80 mph (130 km/h).
3
The illustration is generic. 110 km/h is approx. 68 mph.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
285
The following table lists several ACC-related symbols and messages.
Symbol Message Explanation
WHITE symbol ACC is in active mode and maintaining the set speed.
Adaptive cruise
Unavailable
GRAY symbol
ACC is in standby mode.
Adaptive cruise
Service required
GRAY symbol
The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo Service
technician.
Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's
manual
Clean the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor.
A text message can be erased by briefly pressing
the O button on the right-side steering wheel
keypad. If the message recurs, contact a trained
and authorized Volvo service technician or
retailer.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 272)
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 329)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
286
Pilot Assist*
The Pilot Assist feature helps keep the vehicle in
its current traffic lane by providing steering
assistance and maintaining an even speed and a
set time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Function
Pilot Assist helps provide more relaxed driving on
long trips on highways or other limited-access
roads in an even flow of traffic.
Function overview (generic illustration)
Windshield module containing the camera/
radar sensor
Monitoring distance
Monitoring side marker lines
The driver sets the desired time interval to the
vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist monitors that vehicle
and the traffic lane's side market lines using the
camera and radar sensor mounted in the upper,
center section of the windshield. It helps maintain
the set time interval by automatically adjusting
speed and by providing steering assistance to
help keep your vehicle in the lane.
Pilot Assist's steering assistance is based on
monitoring the direction of the vehicle ahead and
the traffic lane's side marker lines. The driver can
always override Pilot Assist and steer the vehicle
to e.g., change lanes, etc.
If the camera and radar sensor cannot detect the
lane's side marker lines, Pilot Assist will tempo-
rarily switch off the steering assistance until the
lane's side marker lines become visible again and
can be detected. However, the function's speed
and distance monitoring will continue to be acti-
vated.
WARNING
Pilot Assist's steering assistance switches on
or off without warning.
The color of the steering wheel
symbol indicates the current
status of the steering assis-
tance function:
GREEN: steering assistance is
active
GRAY (as in the illustration): steering assistance
is deactivated
WARNING
•
Pilot Assist is designed to be a supple-
mentary driving aid and cannot cover all
driving situations, traffic, weather and/or
road conditions.
•
The driver should be familiar with all of
the information in this article regarding
Pilot Assist, including its limitations.
•
Pilot Assist is not intended to replace the
driver's attention and judgement.
•
Pilot Assist must only be used where
there are clearly visible traffic lane side
marker lines on both sides of the current
traffic lane. In other circumstances there
is an increased risk of collision with sur-
rounding obstacles that are not detected
by the system.
•
The driver is always responsible for steer-
ing the vehicle and maintaining a suitable
speed and distance to the vehicle ahead
and must intervene if necessary, even if
Pilot Assist is being used.
Pilot Assist attempts to regulate speed smoothly
but in situations calling for fast braking, the driver
must apply the brakes. This applies to situations
where there are considerable differences in
speed or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly.
Due to the limitations of the camera and radar
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
287
sensor, the system may apply the brakes in your
vehicle suddenly or not at all.
Pilot Assist is designed to follow a vehicle ahead
in the same traffic lane at a preset time interval
set by the driver. If the radar sensor does not
detect a vehicle ahead, the vehicle will instead
maintain the speed set by the driver. This will also
be the case if a vehicle ahead accelerates and
exceeds the set speed.
•
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle from a
standstill up to a speed of approx. 125 mph
(200 km/h)
•
Pilot Assist can provide steering assistance
from very low speeds up to approx. 87 mph
(140 km/h).
Never exceed posted speed limits.
WARNING
•
Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance
system. The driver must react if the sys-
tem does not detect another vehicle.
•
Pilot Assist does not react to people, ani-
mals, stationary objects, small vehicles
(such as bicycles and motorcycles), low
trailers and slow moving, parked or
approaching vehicles.
•
Do not use Pilot Assist in demanding
driving conditions such as city driving or
other heavy traffic situations, in areas with
intersections, in slippery conditions, when
there is a great deal of water or slush on
the road, during heavy rain or snow, in
poor visibility, on winding roads, on high-
way on- or off-ramps or if the vehicle is
towing a trailer, boat, etc.
NOTE
•
Pilot Assist maintenance should only be
carried out by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
•
Pilot Assist regulates your vehicle's
speed using the accelerator pedal and
the brakes. Please be aware that there
may be a faint sound from the brakes
when the system is using them.
Pilot Assist in curves and when a road
divides
Pilot Assist interacts with the driver, who should
never wait for steering assistance from this func-
tion. The driver should always be prepared to
steer the vehicle, particularly in curves.
As the vehicle approaches a highway exit or if a
lane divides, the driver should always steer the
vehicle toward the desired lane in order to indi-
cated the direction for Pilot Assist.
Pilot Assist attempts to keep the
vehicle in the center of a traffic lane
When Pilot Assist provides steering assistance, it
attempts to keep the vehicle in the center of the
traffic lane, which is why it is advisable to let the
vehicle find the optimal position in the lane. The
driver should ensure that the vehicle is properly in
the traffic lane and should steer the vehicle if
adjustments are necessary.
If Pilot Assist does not guide the vehicle into the
traffic lane properly, try deactivating the function
or switching to Adaptive Cruise Control.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
288
Pilot Assist overview
Controls
Function buttons and symbols (generic illustration)
Increase set speed or resume Pilot Assist set
speed and distance (time interval) to the
vehicle ahead
Press to activate Pilot Assist or put it in
standby mode
Change from Pilot Assist to Adaptive Cruise
Control
Reduce set speed
Increase the distance (time interval) to the
vehicle ahead
Change from Adaptive Cruise Control to Pilot
Assist
Reduce the distance (time interval) to the
vehicle ahead
Function symbol
Distance and target vehicle symbol
Steering assistance symbol
Instrument panel
Speed indication (generic illustration)
Set speed
Speed of the vehicle ahead
Your vehicle's current speed.
See also the article "Pilot assist symbols and
messages" for additional information.
Collision warning
Audible/visual warning signals
Audible warning signal
Visual warning signal
Monitoring distance with the camera and
radar sensor
Pilot Assist can exert brake force that is equiva-
lent to approximately 40% of the vehicle's total
braking capacity.
In situations requiring more brake force than Pilot
Assist can provide and if the driver does not
apply the brakes, an audible signal and warning
light will illuminate in the windshield to alert the
driver to react.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
289
WARNING
Pilot Assist only provides warnings for vehi-
cles that its radar sensor and camera have
detected. For this reason, a warning may be
given later than expected or not at all. The
driver should never wait for a warning before
applying the brakes.
Head-up-display*
A flashing symbol alerts the driver
If the vehicle is equipped with a head-up display,
a flashing symbol in the windshield will alert the
driver.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-
trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
not looking straight ahead may make the
warning symbol in the windshield difficult to
see.
Related information
•
Starting and activating Pilot Assist (p. 289)
•
Changing Pilot Assist speed (p. 291)
•
Setting a Pilot Assist time interval (p. 292)
•
Changing target vehicles and automatic
braking with Pilot Assist (p. 296)
•
Deactivating/resuming Pilot Assist (p. 294)
•
Passing Assistance with Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)* or Pilot Assist* (p. 280)
•
Pilot Assist limitations (p. 297)
•
Pilot Assist symbols and messages (p. 299)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 272)
•
Distance Alert* (p. 270)
•
Head-up display (HUD)* (p. 118)
•
Radar sensor limitations (p. 302)
•
Camera limitations (p. 306)
Starting and activating Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist has to be started and then activated
before it can provide steering assistance and
regulate speed and the distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Function buttons and symbols
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
290
Prerequisites
The prerequisites for activating Pilot Assist are:
•
The driver's seat belt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
•
There must be a vehicle ahead (a target vehi-
cle) within a reasonable distance or your
vehicle's current speed must be at least
9 mph (15 km/h).
With ACC in standby mode:
1.
Tap ▶ (6).
>
The symbol
will change to Pilot
Assist in standby mode (8).
2.
Press the
button (2) on the left-side
steering wheel keypad.
> Pilot Assist will go into active mode and
the current speed will be stored and dis-
played in the center of the speedometer.
or
If Adaptive Cruise Control has been started:
–
Tap ▶ (6).
> Pilot Assist will start.
Pilot Assist's steering assis-
tance is only active when the
steering wheel symbol (2)
changes from GRAY to
GREEN.
And Pilot Assist will only regulate the time inter-
val to the vehicle ahead when a vehicle symbol
(1) is displayed above the steering wheel.
At the same time, a speed
interval will be marked.
The higher speed is the one
stored by the driver and the
lower one is the speed of the
vehicle ahead (target vehicle).
WARNING
Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance sys-
tem. The driver is always responsible for
steering or applying the brakes if the system
does not detect another vehicle.
Do not use Pilot Assist in demanding driving
conditions such as city driving or other heavy
traffic situations, in slippery conditions, when
there is a great deal of water or slush on the
road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor visibil-
ity, on winding roads or on highway on- or off-
ramps.
In certain situations, it may be difficult for Pilot
Assist to assist the driver correctly or to deac-
tivate automatically. In such cases, it is advisa-
ble not to use Pilot Assist. Examples of such
situations may be:
•
the lane's side market lines are missing,
badly faded or cross each other.
•
the division of lanes is not clear, e.g.,
when a line divides or merges with
another, at exits or if there are many road
signs/markers.
•
there are edges or other lines on or near
the lane, e.g., curbs, cracks, repaired
areas, sharp shadows, etc.
•
the lane is narrow or winding.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
291
•
the lane is at the top of a hill, on an
uneven road surface or over a bump.
•
bad weather conditions (rain, snow, fog,
slush, poor visibility, backlighting, etc).
The driver should also be aware that Pilot
Assist has the following limitations:
•
High curbs, barriers and temporary obsta-
cles (cones, barriers etc) may not be
detected or could be detected incorrectly
as side marker lines, which may create a
risk of collision. The driver must ensure a
safe distance to these obstacles.
•
The camera or radar sensor may not be
able to detect objects if there are pot-
holes or if there are stationary objects
partially or completely blocking the road.
•
Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians,
animals, etc.
•
Pilot Assist's steering capacity is limited
and may not always be able to help the
driver keep the vehicle in the lane.
Hands on the steering wheel
Pilot Assist only functions when the driver's
hands are on the steering wheel, which is con-
tinuously monitored by the system. If this is not
the case, the driver will be alerted by a text mes-
sage in the instrument panel. If the driver's hands
are not returned to the steering wheel, an audible
signal will sound.
If the driver does not return his/her hands to the
steering wheel after the audible signal, Pilot
Assist will go into standby mode and must be
reactivated by pressing
.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 286)
•
Changing Pilot Assist speed (p. 291)
•
Setting a Pilot Assist time interval (p. 292)
•
Changing target vehicles and automatic
braking with Pilot Assist (p. 296)
•
Deactivating/resuming Pilot Assist (p. 294)
•
Passing Assistance with Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)* or Pilot Assist* (p. 280)
•
Pilot Assist limitations (p. 297)
•
Pilot Assist symbols and messages (p. 299)
Changing Pilot Assist speed
Different speeds can be set for Pilot Assist.
Function buttons and symbols
–
Change a set speed by pressing the (1)
or
(3) buttons briefly or by pressing and
holding them:
•
Press briefly: changes speed in
+/– 5 mph (+/– 5 km/h) increments.
Each press changes the vehicle's speed
by +/– 5 mph (+/– 5 km/h).
•
Press and hold: release the button when
the set speed indicator (4) has moved to
the desired speed.
•
The most recently set speed will be stored in
the function's memory.
If speed is increased by pressing the accelerator
pedal before the
button is pressed, the vehi-
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
292
cle's speed when the button is pressed will
become the set speed assuming that the accel-
erator pedal is still depressed when the button is
pressed.
A temporary increase in speed, such as when
passing another vehicle, does not affect the
speed set for Pilot Assist. The vehicle will return
to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle from a
standstill up to a speed of approx. 125 mph
(200 km/h). Always observe posted speed limits.
The lowest speed that can be set/stored for Pilot
Assist is 20 mph (30 km/h). However, Pilot
Assist can monitor and react to the speed of the
vehicle ahead down to a standstill.
The highest speed that can be set/stored is
approx. 125 mph (200 km/h). Always observe
posted speed limits.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 286)
•
Starting and activating Pilot Assist (p. 289)
•
Setting a Pilot Assist time interval (p. 292)
•
Changing target vehicles and automatic
braking with Pilot Assist (p. 296)
•
Deactivating/resuming Pilot Assist (p. 294)
•
Passing Assistance with Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)* or Pilot Assist* (p. 280)
•
Pilot Assist limitations (p. 297)
•
Pilot Assist symbols and messages (p. 299)
Setting a Pilot Assist time interval
Different time intervals to the vehicle ahead can
be selected and are shown in the instrument
panel as 1–5 horizontal bars.
Changing the time interval
The greater the number of bars,
the longer the time interval.
One bar between the vehicles
represents a time interval of
approximately 1 second; 5 bars
is approximately 3 seconds.
NOTE
When the graphic in the instrument panel
shows a vehicle and a steering wheel, Pilot
Assist is following a vehicle ahead using the
set time interval.
If only a steering wheel is displayed, there is
no vehicle ahead within a reasonable dis-
tance.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
293
Time interval controls
Press to reduce the time interval to the vehi-
cle ahead
Press to increase the time interval to the
vehicle ahead
Distance indicator
In order to follow the vehicle ahead as smoothly
as possible, Pilot Assist allows the time interval to
vary considerably in certain situations. At low
speeds, when the distance to the vehicle ahead
is short, Pilot Assist increases the time interval
slightly.
•
If Pilot Assist does not seem to react when it
is put in active mode, this may be because
the set time interval to the vehicle ahead
does not allow an increase in speed.
•
The higher the speed, the greater the dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead for a given time
interval.
WARNING
•
Only use a time interval that is suitable in
current traffic conditions.
•
A short time interval gives the driver lim-
ited reaction time if an unexpected situa-
tion occurs in traffic.
Choosing how Pilot Assist maintains
the time interval to the vehicle ahead*
The driver can select different drive modes to
determine the way in which Pilot Assist tries to
maintain the set time interval to the vehicle
ahead. This setting is made using the DRIVE
MODE control on the tunnel console.
Select one of the following:
•
Eco: Pilot Assist focuses on optimal fuel
economy, which may result in a longer time
interval to the vehicle ahead.
•
Comfort: Pilot Assist focuses on maintain-
ing the set time interval to the vehicle ahead
as smoothly as possible.
•
Dynamic: Pilot Assist focuses on maintain-
ing the set time interval to the vehicle ahead
as precisely as possible, which can result in
faster acceleration and more immediate
braking.
See also the article "Drive modes" for additional
information.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 286)
•
Starting and activating Pilot Assist (p. 289)
•
Changing Pilot Assist speed (p. 291)
•
Changing target vehicles and automatic
braking with Pilot Assist (p. 296)
•
Deactivating/resuming Pilot Assist (p. 294)
•
Passing Assistance with Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)* or Pilot Assist* (p. 280)
•
Pilot Assist limitations (p. 297)
•
Pilot Assist symbols and messages (p. 299)
•
Drive modes (p. 380)
DRIVER SUPPORT
294
Deactivating/resuming Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist can be temporarily deactivated, put
in standby mode and then reactivated.
Deactivating and putting Pilot Assist in
standby mode
Function buttons and symbols (generic illustration)
–
Press the button (2).
> Pilot Assist will go into standby mode (8).
The symbol in the instrument panel
will change colors from WHITE to GRAY
and the set speed in the center of the
speedometer will change from BEIGE to
GRAY.
or
–
Press the ◀ button (3).
> Pilot Assist will be turned off and shift to
Adaptive Cruise Control in active mode.
In standby mode, the driver will have to regulate
the vehicle's speed and the distance to the vehi-
cle ahead.
When Pilot Assist is in standby mode and your
vehicle comes too close to another vehicle, the
driver will be alerted by the Distance Alert func-
tion.
WARNING
•
When Pilot Assist is in standby mode, the
driver has to steer the vehicle and regu-
late its speed and its distance to a vehicle
ahead.
•
When Pilot Assist is in standby mode, the
driver will be alerted by the Distance Alert
function if the distance to a vehicle ahead
is too short.
Standby mode due to action by the driver
Pilot Assist is temporarily deactivated and put in
standby mode if:
•
the brakes are applied
•
the gear selector is moved to N
•
the turn signals are used for more than
1 minute
•
the vehicle is driven faster than the set
speed for more than 1 minute.
A temporary increase in speed, such as when
passing another vehicle, does not affect the Pilot
Assist set speed. The vehicle will return to the set
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
When the turn signals are used, Pilot Assist's
steering function will be temporarily deactivated.
When this is no longer the case, the steering
function will reactivate if the traffic lane's side
marker lines can still be detected.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
295
Automatic standby mode
Pilot Assist interacts with other systems, such as
Electronic Stability Control. If any of these other
systems are not functioning properly, Pilot Assist
will automatically be deactivated.
WARNING
If this happens, the driver will be alerted by an
audible signal and a message in the instru-
ment panel. The driver will have to adapt the
vehicle's speed, apply the brakes when nec-
essary and keep a safe distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Pilot Assist switches automatically to standby
mode if:
•
the vehicle's speed is below approx. 3 mph
(5 km/h) and Pilot Assist cannot determine if
a vehicle ahead is a stationary vehicle or an
object.
•
the vehicle's speed is below approx. 3 mph
(5 km/h) and the vehicle ahead turns so that
Pilot Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow
(target vehicle).
•
the driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel
•
the driver's door is opened
•
the driver unbuckles the seat belt
•
engine speed (rpm) is too high/low
•
the wheels lose traction
•
brake temperature is too high
•
the parking brake is set
•
the camera lens/radar sensor is covered by
e.g., snow or if heavy rain interferes with
radar waves
Reactivating Pilot Assist from standby
mode
Generic illustration
–
Press the button (1).
> The most recently set speed will be used.
WARNING
There may be a significant increase in speed
after the
button has been pressed.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 286)
•
Starting and activating Pilot Assist (p. 289)
•
Changing Pilot Assist speed (p. 291)
•
Setting a Pilot Assist time interval (p. 292)
•
Changing target vehicles and automatic
braking with Pilot Assist (p. 296)
•
Passing Assistance with Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)* or Pilot Assist* (p. 280)
•
Pilot Assist limitations (p. 297)
•
Pilot Assist symbols and messages (p. 299)
•
Distance Alert* (p. 270)
DRIVER SUPPORT
296
Changing target vehicles and
automatic braking with Pilot Assist
At certain speeds, Pilot Assist can change target
vehicles and automatically apply the brakes.
Changing target vehicles
If the target vehicle turns suddenly, there may be a sta-
tionary vehicle ahead
When Pilot Assist is actively following another
vehicle at speeds under 20 mph (30 km/h) and
changes targets from a moving vehicle to a sta-
tionary one, the system will brake for the station-
ary vehicle.
WARNING
If Pilot Assist changes targets from a moving
vehicle to a stationary one at speeds above
20 mph (30 km/h), the system will not react
to the stationary vehicle and will accelerate to
the previously set speed.
The driver must actively apply the brakes to
slow/stop the vehicle.
Automatic standby mode when changing
targets
Pilot Assist disengages and goes into standby
mode if:
•
your vehicle's speed goes below approx.
3 mph (5 km/h) and Pilot Assist cannot
determine if the target object is a stationary
vehicle or some other type of object such as
a speed bump, etc
•
the vehicle's speed goes below approx.
3 mph (5 km/h) and the vehicle ahead
changes lanes or turns so that Pilot Assist
no longer has a target vehicle to follow
Auto-hold brake function
In slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic or when stop-
ped at a traffic light, driving will resume automati-
cally if the vehicle is not stopped for more than
approx. 3 seconds. If it takes more than
3 seconds for the vehicle ahead to begin moving
again, Pilot Assist will go into standby mode and
the auto-hold brake function will activate.
–
The driver will then have to reactivate Pilot
Assist in one of the following ways:
•
Press the
button on the left-side
steering wheel keypad
•
Press the accelerator pedal
> Pilot Assist will resume following the vehi-
cle ahead (target vehicle) if it begins to
move within approx. 6 seconds.
NOTE
Pilot Assist can keep the vehicle at a stand-
still for up to 5 minutes, after which the park-
ing brake will be set and Pilot Assist will go
into standby mode.
The parking brake has to be released before
Pilot Assist can be reactivated.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
297
Deactivation of the auto-hold brake function
In certain situations, auto-hold will be deactivated
when the vehicle is at a standstill and Pilot Assist
will go into standby mode.
This means that the brakes will be released and
the vehicle can begin to roll.
The driver must actively apply the brakes to keep
the vehicle at a standstill.
This can occur in the following situations:
•
the driver presses the brake pedal
•
the parking brake is set
•
the gear selector is moved to the P, N or R
positions
•
the driver puts Pilot Assist in standby mode
Automatically setting the parking brake
In certain situations, the parking brake is set
automatically to help keep the vehicle at a stand-
still.
This occurs if Pilot Assist keeps the vehicle at a
standstill with the brakes and:
•
the driver unbuckles the seat belt or opens
the door
•
Pilot Assist has kept the vehicle at a stand-
still for more than approx. 5 minutes
•
the engine is turned off
•
the brakes overheat
Related information
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 286)
•
Starting and activating Pilot Assist (p. 289)
•
Changing Pilot Assist speed (p. 291)
•
Setting a Pilot Assist time interval (p. 292)
•
Deactivating/resuming Pilot Assist (p. 294)
•
Passing Assistance with Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)* or Pilot Assist* (p. 280)
•
Pilot Assist limitations (p. 297)
•
Pilot Assist symbols and messages (p. 299)
Pilot Assist limitations
Pilot Assist functionality may be limited in certain
situations.
Pilot Assist is designed to help the driver in a
number of situations. However, the driver always
has the primary responsibility for maintaining a
safe distance to other vehicles and for keeping
the vehicle in its proper traffic lane.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
298
WARNING
Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance sys-
tem. The driver is always responsible for
steering or applying the brakes if the system
does not detect another vehicle.
Do not use Pilot Assist in demanding driving
conditions such as city driving or other heavy
traffic situations, in slippery conditions, when
there is a great deal of water or slush on the
road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor visibil-
ity, on winding roads or on highway on- or off-
ramps.
In certain situations, it may be difficult for Pilot
Assist to assist the driver correctly or to deac-
tivate automatically. In such cases, it is advisa-
ble not to use Pilot Assist. Examples of such
situations may be:
•
the lane's side market lines are missing,
badly faded or cross each other.
•
the division of lanes is not clear, e.g.,
when a line divides or merges with
another, at exits or if there are many road
signs/markers.
•
there are edges or other lines on or near
the lane, e.g., curbs, cracks, repaired
areas, sharp shadows, etc.
•
the lane is narrow or winding.
•
the lane is at the top of a hill, on an
uneven road surface or over a bump.
•
bad weather conditions (rain, snow, fog,
slush, poor visibility, backlighting, etc).
The driver should also be aware that Pilot
Assist has the following limitations:
•
High curbs, barriers and temporary obsta-
cles (cones, barriers etc) may not be
detected or could be detected incorrectly
as side marker lines, which may create a
risk of collision. The driver must ensure a
safe distance to these obstacles.
•
The camera or radar sensor may not be
able to detect objects if there are pot-
holes or if there are stationary objects
partially or completely blocking the road.
•
Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians,
animals, etc.
•
Pilot Assist's steering capacity is limited
and may not always be able to help the
driver keep the vehicle in the lane.
The driver can always take action to override Pilot
Assist.
Steep roads and/or heavy loads
Pilot Assist is primarily intended for use on rela-
tively level roads. The function may not be able to
maintain the correct time interval to the vehicle
ahead when driving down steep hills. The driver
should be attentive and prepared to apply the
brakes in these situations.
•
Do not use Pilot Assist when the vehicle is
transporting a heavy load or if it is towing a
trailer.
•
Pilot Assist cannot be activated if a trailer,
bicycle rack or anything similar is connected
to the vehicle's electrical system.
Additional information
The Off Road drive mode cannot be selected if
Pilot Assist is activated.
NOTE
This function uses the vehicle's camera and
radar sensor, which have certain general limi-
tations. See the articles "Camera limitations"
and "Radar sensor limitations" for additional
information.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 286)
•
Starting and activating Pilot Assist (p. 289)
•
Changing Pilot Assist speed (p. 291)
•
Setting a Pilot Assist time interval (p. 292)
•
Changing target vehicles and automatic
braking with Pilot Assist (p. 296)
•
Deactivating/resuming Pilot Assist (p. 294)
•
Passing Assistance with Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)* or Pilot Assist* (p. 280)
•
Pilot Assist symbols and messages (p. 299)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
299
•
Radar sensor limitations (p. 302)
•
Camera limitations (p. 306)
Pilot Assist symbols and messages
A number of Pilot Assist symbols and/or mes-
sages may appear in the instrument panel or the
head-up display*.
Several examples
4
are provided here.
In this illustration, Pilot Assist is set at 68 mph
(110 km/h) and there is no target vehicle ahead.
In this example, Pilot Assist will not provide steer-
ing assistance because it cannot detect the traf-
fic lane's side marker lines.
In this illustration, Pilot Assist is set at 68 mph
(110 km/h) and there is a target vehicle ahead
that is traveling at the same speed.
In this example, Pilot Assist will not provide steer-
ing assistance because it cannot detect the traf-
fic lane's side marker lines.
4
In the following illustrations, the optional RSI (Road Sign Information) function is indicating that the posted speed limit is 80 mph (130 km/h).
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
300
In this illustration, Pilot Assist is set at 65 mph
(110 km/h) and there is a target vehicle ahead
that is traveling at the same speed.
In this example, Pilot Assist also provides steer-
ing assistance because it is able to detect the
traffic lane's side marker lines.
In this illustration, Pilot Assist is set at 68 mph
(110 km/h) and there is no target vehicle ahead.
In this example, Pilot Assist also provides steer-
ing assistance because it is able to detect the
traffic lane's side marker lines.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 286)
•
Starting and activating Pilot Assist (p. 289)
•
Changing Pilot Assist speed (p. 291)
•
Setting a Pilot Assist time interval (p. 292)
•
Changing target vehicles and automatic
braking with Pilot Assist (p. 296)
•
Deactivating/resuming Pilot Assist (p. 294)
•
Passing Assistance with Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)* or Pilot Assist* (p. 280)
•
Pilot Assist limitations (p. 297)
Driver support system radar sensor
The radar sensor is used by a number of driver
support systems to e.g., help detect other vehi-
cles.
Radar sensor location
The radar sensor is used by the following func-
tions:
•
Distance Alert*
•
Adaptive Cruise Control*
•
Pilot Assist*
•
City Safety
•
Lane Keeping Aid
Any modifications to the radar sensor may make
its use illegal.
DRIVER SUPPORT
302
Radar sensor limitations
The radar sensor used by several of the driver
support systems has certain limitations, which
also affect the systems using it.
Obstructions
The marked area must not be obstructed in any way.
This area of the windshield should always be kept clean
The radar sensor is located at the upper, center
section of the windshield along with the camera.
WARNING
Never place any objects, decals, electronic toll
devices, window tinting films etc., on the wind-
shield in front of or around the camera/radar
sensor. This could reduce or block these com-
ponents' functions, and could cause one or
more of the systems that utilize them to stop
functioning.
This can also result in certain functions being
reduced or disabled, or they may respond
incorrectly.
If this symbol and the message
Windscreen Sensors blocked
appear in the instrument panel, this
indicates that the camera and/or radar
sensor cannot detect other vehicles ahead.
The following table shows some of the situations
that can cause the message to be displayed and
suggested actions.
Cause Action
The area of the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor is dirty or covered by ice
or snow.
Clean the windshield or remove the ice/ snow.
Thick fog or heavy rain/snow reduces the camera/radar sensor's range of visibility. No action. The driver should be extra alert in conditions of this
type.
Water or snow on the surface of the road swirl up and block radar signals or the camera's
view.
No action. The driver should be extra alert in conditions of this
type.
There is dirt between the inside of the windshield and the camera/radar sensor. Have the area of the windshield cleaned by a trained and quali-
fied Volvo service technician.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
303
Vehicle's speed
The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles
ahead is impeded:
•
if the speed of the vehicle ahead differs
greatly from your vehicle's speed.
Limited field of vision
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In
some situations it may detect a vehicle later than
expected or not detect other vehicles at all.
Radar sensor's field of vision
In certain situations, the radar sensor cannot
detect vehicles at close quarters, for example
a vehicle that suddenly enters the lane
between your vehicle and the target vehicle.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehi-
cles not driving in the center of the lane may
remain undetected.
In curves, the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose sight of the target vehi-
cle.
Low trailer in the radar shadow (generic illustration)
Low trailers may also be difficult to detect or may
not be detected at all. The driver should be extra
alert in situations of this type.
High temperatures
If the temperature in the passenger compartment
is very high, the camera and radar sensor may be
temporarily turned off for approx. 15 minutes
after the engine has been started to protect their
electronic components. When the temperature
has cooled sufficiently, the camera and radar
sensor will restart automatically.
Damaged windshield
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
304
CAUTION
•
Service and maintenance on City Safety
may only be carried out by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
•
If a crack, scratch or stone chip should
occur in the section of the windshield in
front of the camera/radar sensor, contact
a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-
nician to repair or replace the windshield.
Failing to do so may result in reduced
City Safety functionality.
•
This can also result in certain functions
being reduced or disabled, or they may
respond incorrectly.
To help avoid the risk of incorrect, reduced or
disabled functionality for driver support sys-
tems using the camera or radar sensors:
•
Volvo recommends that cracks, scratches
or stone chips on the windshield in front
of the camera/radar sensor should not
be repaired; in such cases, the entire
windshield should be replaced.
•
Before the windshield is replaced, con-
tact a Volvo retailer to ensure that the
correct windshield is ordered and instal-
led. If the wrong type of windshield is
used, this may cause City Safety to func-
tion improperly or not at all.
•
Volvo recommends the use of only Genu-
ine Volvo Replacement Windshields.
•
When replacing windshield wipers, use
the same type or ones approved by Volvo.
After the windshield has been replaced, the
camera/radar sensor will have to be recalibra-
ted by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician to help ensure proper function of
all of the vehicle's camera-/radar-based sys-
tems.
Maintenance
In order for camera and radar sensor to function
properly, the area of the windshield must be kept
free of dirt, ice, snow, etc. and should be washed
regularly with a suitable car washing detergent.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and/or snow covering the camera
and radar sensors reduce functionality and
may disable the vehicle's camera-/radar-
based systems.
This can also result in certain functions being
reduced or disabled, or they may respond
incorrectly.
Related information
•
Driver support system radar sensor (p. 300)
•
Camera limitations (p. 306)
•
Pilot Assist limitations (p. 297)
•
City Safety limitations (p. 317)
•
City Safety limitations (p. 317)
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* limitations
(p. 331)
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 363)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
305
Radar sensor - type approval
USA & Canada:
FCC ID: L2C0054TR IC: 3432A-0054TR FCC
ID: L2C0055TR IC: 3432A-0055TR
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
(2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressively
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
The term “IC:” before the radio certification num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Related information
•
Driver support system radar sensor (p. 300)
Driver support system camera
The camera is used by a number of driver sup-
port systems to e.g., detect a driving lane's side
marker lines or traffic signs.
Camera location
The camera is used by the following driver sup-
port systems:
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
•
Driving lane assistance*
•
Driver Alert Control*
•
Pilot Assist*
•
City Safety
•
Run-off Mitigation
•
Road sign information*
•
Active high beams*
Related information
•
Camera limitations (p. 306)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 272)
•
Driving lane assistance (p. 333)
•
Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 332)
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 286)
•
City Safety™ (p. 309)
•
Steering assist with run-off mitigation
(p. 341)
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 329)
•
High and low beam headlights (p. 142)
DRIVER SUPPORT
306
Camera limitations
The camera used by several of the driver support
systems has certain limitations, which also affect
the systems using it.
Reduced visibility
WARNING
•
The camera has the same limitations as
the human eye. In other words, its “vision
is impaired” by adverse weather condi-
tions such as heavy snowfall, dense fog,
etc. These conditions may reduce the
function of systems that depend on the
camera or cause these systems to tem-
porarily stop functioning.
•
Strong sunlight, reflections from the road
surface, ice or snow covering the road, a
dirty road surface, or unclear lane marker
lines may drastically reduce the camera’s
capacity to detect the side of a lane, a
pedestrian, a cyclist, a large animal or
another vehicle.
Obstructions
The marked area must not be obstructed in any way.
This area of the windshield should always be kept clean
The camera is located at the upper, center sec-
tion of the windshield along with the radar sen-
sor.
WARNING
Never place any objects, decals, electronic toll
devices, window tinting films etc., on the wind-
shield in front of or around the camera/radar
sensor. This could reduce or block these com-
ponents' functions, and could cause one or
more of the systems that utilize them to stop
functioning.
This can also result in certain functions being
reduced or disabled, or they may respond
incorrectly.
If this symbol and the message
Windscreen Sensors blocked
appear in the instrument panel, this
indicates that the camera and/or radar
sensor cannot detect other vehicles ahead.
The following table shows some of the situations
that can cause the message to be displayed and
suggested actions.
Cause Action
The area of the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor is dirty or covered
by ice or snow.
Clean the windshield or remove the ice/ snow.
Thick fog or heavy rain/snow reduces the camera/radar sensor's range of visibility. No action. The driver should be extra alert in conditions of this type.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
307
Cause Action
Water or snow on the surface of the road swirl up and block radar signals or the
camera's view.
No action. The driver should be extra alert in conditions of this type.
There is dirt between the inside of the windshield and the camera/radar sensor. Have the area of the windshield cleaned by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
Strong backlighting No action required. The came will reset automatically when lighting
conditions improve.
High temperatures
If the temperature in the passenger compartment
is very high, the camera and radar sensor may be
temporarily turned off for approx. 15 minutes
after the engine has been started to protect their
electronic components. When the temperature
has cooled sufficiently, the camera and radar
sensor will restart automatically.
Damaged windshield
CAUTION
•
Service and maintenance on City Safety
may only be carried out by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
•
If a crack, scratch or stone chip should
occur in the section of the windshield in
front of the camera/radar sensor, contact
a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-
nician to repair or replace the windshield.
Failing to do so may result in reduced
City Safety functionality.
•
This can also result in certain functions
being reduced or disabled, or they may
respond incorrectly.
To help avoid the risk of incorrect, reduced or
disabled functionality for driver support sys-
tems using the camera or radar sensors:
•
Volvo recommends that cracks, scratches
or stone chips on the windshield in front
of the camera/radar sensor should not
be repaired; in such cases, the entire
windshield should be replaced.
•
Before the windshield is replaced, con-
tact a Volvo retailer to ensure that the
correct windshield is ordered and instal-
led. If the wrong type of windshield is
used, this may cause City Safety to func-
tion improperly or not at all.
•
Volvo recommends the use of only Genu-
ine Volvo Replacement Windshields.
•
When replacing windshield wipers, use
the same type or ones approved by Volvo.
After the windshield has been replaced, the
camera/radar sensor will have to be recalibra-
ted by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician to help ensure proper function of
all of the vehicle's camera-/radar-based sys-
tems.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
308
Maintenance
In order for camera and radar sensor to function
properly, the area of the windshield must be kept
free of dirt, ice, snow, etc. and should be washed
regularly with a suitable car washing detergent.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and/or snow covering the camera
and radar sensors reduce functionality and
may disable the vehicle's camera-/radar-
based systems.
This can also result in certain functions being
reduced or disabled, or they may respond
incorrectly.
Related information
•
Driver support system camera (p. 305)
•
Radar sensor limitations (p. 302)
•
Driving lane assistance (p. 333)
•
Driver Alert Control limitations (p. 333)
•
Pilot Assist limitations (p. 297)
•
City Safety limitations (p. 317)
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* limitations
(p. 331)
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 363)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
309
City Safety™
City Safety™ is a support system designed to
help alert the driver to pedestrians, cyclists, large
animals and vehicles that may appear suddenly
in front of your vehicle by providing visual, audi-
ble and haptic alerts. The vehicle will brake auto-
matically if the driver is unable to react quickly
enough.
City Safety introduction
Location of the camera and radar sensor (generic illus-
tration)
City Safety can help prevent a collision or lower
the vehicle's speed at the point of impact.
WARNING
•
City Safety™ is a supplemental aid to the
driver. It can never replace the driver’s
attention to traffic conditions or his/her
responsibility for operating the vehicle in
a safe manner.
•
City Safety™ does not function in all driv-
ing situations or in all traffic, weather or
road conditions.
The City Safety function can help the driver avoid
a collision when e.g., there is a sudden change in
the traffic ahead and the driver's does not take
action.
The function assists the driver by applying the
brakes automatically if there is an imminent risk
of a collision and the driver does not react in
time.
City Safety triggers brief, forceful braking in an
attempt to stop your vehicle immediately behind
the vehicle or object ahead. This braking may be
perceived as being very sudden.
City Safety activates in situations where the driver
has not applied the brakes in time, which means
that the system cannot help the driver in all situa-
tions.
City Safety is designed to intervene as late as
possible to help avoid unnecessary activation.
Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will not be
aware of City Safety except when the system
intervenes when a collision is imminent.
City Safety parameters
Other vehicles
If there is a vehicle ahead, City Safety can reduce
speed by up to 37 mph (60 km/h)
Cyclists
City Safety can help avoid a collision with a cyclist
by reducing speed by up to 30 mph (50 km/h).
Pedestrians
City Safety can help avoid a collision with a
pedestrian by reducing speed by up to 28 mph
(45 km/h).
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
310
Larger animals
If there is a risk of colliding with a large animal,
City Safety can reduce speed by up to 9 mph
(15 km/h).
The braking function for large animals is primarily
intended to mitigate the force of a collision at
higher speeds. Braking is most effective at
speeds above 43 mph (70 km/h) and less effec-
tive at lower speeds.
WARNING
Warnings will only be provided if there is an
imminent risk of a collision taking place. The
driver should be aware of the system's limita-
tions before operating the vehicle.
Warnings and automatic braking for pedes-
trians and cyclists are deactivated at speeds
above approx. 43 mph (70 km/h).
City Safety's auto-brake function can help
prevent a collision or reduce the speed at
which a collision occurs. However, the driver
should always apply the brakes, even if auto-
brake is operating.
The driver is always responsible for maintain-
ing the correct speed and distance in relation
to the vehicle ahead. Never wait for a collision
warning or for City Safety to intervene.
City Safety does not activate the auto-brake
function during fast acceleration.
City Safety maintenance may only be carried
out by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
Overview
Function overview
Audible collision warning
Collision warning symbol
Distance monitoring by a camera and radar
sensor
When triggered, City Safety carries out three
steps in the following order:
1.
Collision warning
2.
Brake assistance
3.
Auto-brake
1: Collision warning
The driver is first alerted to the risk of an immi-
nent collision.
City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or
vehicles that are stationary, are moving in the
same direction as your vehicle or are in your vehi-
cle's path.
City Safety can also detect pedestrians, large ani-
mals or cyclists that are crossing in front of your
vehicle.
If there is a risk of a collision with a pedestrian,
cyclist, large animal or a vehicle, as well as vehi-
cles described in the article "City Safety in cross-
ing traffic," the driver will be alerted by a flashing
red warning signal, an audible signal and a haptic
warning in the form of pulsations in the brake
pedal. At lower speeds, during hard braking or if
the accelerator pedal is pressed, the haptic warn-
ing will not be given.
2: Brake assistance
If the risk of a collision increases, brake support
will be activated.
This function increases pressure on the brake
pedal if the driver does not apply enough pres-
sure to the pedal.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
311
3: Auto-brake
The brakes will be applied automatically.
If the driver has not taken action at this stage and
a collision is imminent, auto-braking will be trig-
gered. Full braking effect will be used to avoid
the collision if possible or to make the speed at
the point of impact as low as possible.
In certain situations, auto-braking may begin with
limited effect before full braking is used.
If City Safety has prevented a collision, the vehi-
cle will be kept at a standstill until the driver
takes action. If the vehicle has slowed to avoid
colliding with the vehicle ahead, your speed will
be reduced to that vehicle's speed.
When auto-brake is triggered, the seat belt pre-
tensioners may also be activated, see the article
"Seat belts" for additional information.
Auto-braking can be cancelled if the driver
presses hard on the accelerator pedal.
When City Safety applies the brakes, the brake
lights will illuminate.
When City Safety is triggered and applies the
brakes, a text message will be displayed in the
instrument panel.
Related information
•
City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 315)
•
City Safety limitations (p. 317)
•
City Safety symbols and messages (p. 320)
•
Detecting obstructions with City Safety
(p. 313)
•
Rear Collision Warning (RCW) (p. 321)
•
City Safety warning level settings (p. 311)
•
City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 315)
•
Seat belts (p. 66)
•
City Safety when evasive action is not possi-
ble (p. 317)
City Safety warning level settings
City Safety is always activated but the function's
warning distance can be adjusted.
NOTE
City Safety cannot be turned off and activates
automatically each time the engine/electric
motor is started.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
312
Setting a warning level (distance)
The distance set for warnings determines the
system's responsiveness and sets the distance at
which visual, audible and tangible (haptic) warn-
ings will be triggered.
To do so:
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap My Car IntelliSafe City Safety
Warning
.
3.
Choose among
Earlier, Normal or Later.
Begin by choosing Earlier. If too many warnings
are given, change to Normal.
If the driver feels that warnings are given too
often, the warning level can be lowered. This
means that warnings will be provided later, result-
ing in fewer warnings being given.
The setting
Later should only used in exceptional
circumstances, e.g., for a more dynamic driving
style.
WARNING
•
No automatic system can be guaranteed
to function 100% correctly in all situa-
tions. For that reason, never test City
Safety by driving toward a person or
object. This could result in serious injury
or death.
•
Even if the setting
Earlier has been
selected, warnings may be perceived as
being given late, e.g., if the difference in
speed is great or if the vehicle ahead
brakes suddenly.
•
City Safety can provide a warning for a
potential collision but it can never shorten
the driver's reaction time.
•
To help make City Safety as effective as
possible, always using the setting
Earlier
is recommended.
NOTE
•
Due to local traffic regulations in certain
markets, Rear Collision Warning (RCW)
will not activate the rear turn signals.
That part of the function will be deacti-
vated.
•
The use of the rear turn signals will also
be deactivated if the City Safety warning
level is set at
Later. See also the section
"Setting a warning level (distance)" in the
article "City Safety settings."
•
If RCW detects a vehicle approaching
from behind, the seat belt pretensioners
and Whiplash Protection System will be
activated.
Related information
•
City Safety limitations (p. 317)
•
City Safety™ (p. 309)
•
Rear Collision Warning (RCW) (p. 321)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
313
Detecting obstructions with City
Safety
City Safety can detect vehicles, cyclists, large
animals and pedestrians.
Vehicles
City Safety detects most types of vehicles that
are either stationary, moving in the same direc-
tion as your vehicle or those described in the arti-
cle "City Safety in crossing traffic."
In order for City Safety to detect a vehicle in
darkness, its headlights and taillights must be on
and clearly visible.
Cyclists
Optimal example of what the system considers to be a
cyclist: clear body/bike contours
To help function optimally, City Safety's function
for cyclist detection needs clear information
about the bike itself and the rider's head, arms,
shoulders, legs, the upper and lower parts of the
body and a cyclist's normal pattern of movement.
•
If major parts of the cyclist's body are not
visible to the camera, the system cannot
detect the cyclist.
•
The cyclist must be an adult riding a bike
intended for an adult.
WARNING
City Safety is designed to be a supplementary
driving aid and cannot detect all cyclists in all
situations, such as:
•
a partially obscured cyclist.
•
in situations where the contrast between
the cyclist and the background is poor;
this may result in late braking or no brak-
ing at all
•
a cyclist whose clothing prevents a clear
view of the person's body contours.
•
a cyclist transporting a large object.
The driver is always responsible for operating
the vehicle in a safe manner.
Pedestrians
Optimal example of what the system considers to be a
pedestrian: clear body contours
To help function optimally, City Safety's function
for pedestrian detection needs clear information
about the person's head, arms, shoulders, legs,
the upper and lower parts of the body and a per-
son's normal pattern of movement.
In order to detect a pedestrian, there must be a
contrast to the background. If there is little con-
trast, the person may be detected late or not at
all, which may result in a late or no reaction from
the system.
•
If major parts of the pedestrian's body are
not visible to the camera, he/she may not be
detected.
•
In order to detect a pedestrian, the system
must have a full view of the person's entire
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
314
body and the person must be at least 32 in.
(80 cm) tall.
•
City Safety can also help detect pedestrians
in dark conditions if they are in the path of
the vehicle's headlights.
WARNING
City Safety is designed to be a supplementary
driving aid.
It cannot detect pedestrians:
•
who are partially obscured, wearing cloth-
ing that prevents a clear view of the per-
son's body contours or who are not at
least 32 in. (80 cm) tall.
•
who have limited contrast to their immedi-
ate background. A warning or braking
may be delayed or not come at all.
•
carrying a large object.
The driver is always responsible for operating
the vehicle in a safe manner.
Large animals
Examples of what City Safety considers to be large ani-
mals: stationary or moving slowly with clear body con-
tours
To function optimally, the system feature for
detecting large animals (moose, horses, etc.)
must receive as clear information about body
contours as possible. This entails being able to
detect the animal straight from the side and
assumes that the animal has a normal pattern of
movement.
If parts of the animal's body are hidden from the
camera, the system cannot detect this animal.
City Safety can also help detect large animals in
dark conditions if they are in the path of the vehi-
cle's headlights.
WARNING
City Safety is designed to be a supplementary
driving aid.
It cannot detect large animals in all situations
such as:
•
large animals that are partially obscured
•
large animals straight from the front or
rear
•
large animals that are running or moving
quickly
•
large animals that have limited contrast to
their immediate background. A warning or
braking may be delayed or not come at
all.
•
smaller animals such as dogs or cats
The driver is always responsible for operating
the vehicle in a safe manner.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 309)
•
City Safety limitations (p. 317)
•
City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 315)
DRIVER SUPPORT
315
City Safety in crossing traffic
City Safety can help the driver when turning in
the path of an oncoming vehicle in an intersec-
tion.
Turning at an intersection
1. The area in which City Safety can detect an oncoming
vehicle
In order for City Safety to detect an approaching
vehicle in situations where there is a risk of a col-
lision, that vehicle must be within City Safety's
range (the red area in the illustration).
The following criteria must also be met:
•
your vehicle's speed must be at least 3 mph
(4 km/h)
•
the approaching vehicle's headlights must be
on
•
your vehicle must be making a left turn
WARNING
•
City Safety is a supplementary driving aid
and does not function in all driving situa-
tions or in all traffic, weather or road con-
ditions.
•
Warnings and braking for an approaching
vehicle will usually come at a very late
stage.
•
The driver is responsible for maintaining a
safe distance and speed. Never wait for a
warning or for City Safety to take action.
Limitations in crossing traffic
In certain situations, it may be very difficult for
City Safety to help the driver avoid a collision with
an approaching vehicle in crossing traffic, for
example:
•
on slippery roads when Electronic Stability
Control is active
•
if the approaching vehicle is detected at a
late stage
•
If the approaching vehicle is partially
obscured by another vehicle
•
if the approaching vehicle moves erratically
(e.g., sudden lane changes at a late stage)
NOTE
This function uses the vehicle's camera and
radar sensor, which have certain general limi-
tations. See the articles "Camera limitations"
and "Radar sensor limitations" for additional
information.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 309)
•
City Safety limitations (p. 317)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
316
City Safety during evasive action*
City Safety's steering assistance function can
help the driver if he/she attempts to take evasive
steering action if a collision cannot be avoided
by only braking the vehicle.
Your vehicle cannot "see" any possibility to brake in time
to avoid the vehicle ahead and helps the driver take eva-
sive steering action
Your vehicle takes evasive action
Slow moving/stationary object or vehicle
City Safety triggers steering assistance when the
driver begins an evasive action to try to avoid a
collision but only if the driver's steering actions
are not sufficient to avoid the collision.
As this is being done, the brakes are also applied
to enhance the steering assistance. This function
can also help stabilize the vehicle after the
obstruction has been passed.
City Safety's steering assistance function can
detect:
•
vehicles
•
cyclists
•
pedestrians
•
larger animals
WARNING
City Safety's capacity to assess certain traffic
situations is a supplemental aid to the driver
and does not function in all driving/traffic sit-
uations or weather/road conditions. It can
never replace the driver’s attention to traffic
conditions or his/her responsibility for operat-
ing the vehicle in a safe manner.
On/Off
City Safety with steering assistance function is
always active and cannot be switched off.
Limitations for City Safety with steering
assistance
City Safety's steering assistance may have
reduced or limited functionality in certain situa-
tions and may not react:
•
outside of the speed interval 30–62 mph
(50–100 km/h)
•
if the driver does not initiate evasive action
NOTE
This function uses the vehicle's camera and
radar sensor, which have certain general limi-
tations. See the articles "Camera limitations"
and "Radar sensor limitations" for additional
information.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 309)
•
City Safety limitations (p. 317)
•
Camera limitations (p. 306)
•
Radar sensor limitations (p. 302)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
317
City Safety when evasive action is
not possible
City Safety can help the driver by automatically
braking the vehicle sooner if it is not possible to
steer out of a potential collision situation.
City Safety assists the driver by continuously try-
ing to determine possible "escape routes" to the
sides if a slow-moving or stationary vehicle ahead
is detected at a late stage.
Your vehicle (1) cannot "see" any way of veering to
avoid the vehicle ahead (2) and will attempt to auto-
brake sooner
Your vehicle
Slow moving/stationary vehicle
City Safety will not trigger the auto-brake func-
tion as long as the driver has a chance to avoid a
collision by steering the vehicle.
However, if City Safety determines that an eva-
sive steering maneuver is not possible due to a
lack of space in the adjacent traffic lanes, the
function will attempt to assist the driver by auto-
matically applying the brakes considerably
sooner.
WARNING
City Safety's capacity to assess certain traffic
situations is a supplemental aid to the driver
and does not function in all driving/traffic sit-
uations or weather/road conditions. It can
never replace the driver’s attention to traffic
conditions or his/her responsibility for operat-
ing the vehicle in a safe manner.
NOTE
This function uses the vehicle's camera and
radar sensor, which have certain general limi-
tations. See the articles "Camera limitations"
and "Radar sensor limitations" for additional
information.
Related information
•
City Safety limitations (p. 317)
•
City Safety™ (p. 309)
City Safety limitations
City Safety™ may have limited or reduced func-
tionality in certain situations.
The function has several limitations that the driver
should be familiar with:
Low objects
Hanging objects, such as flags for overhanging
loads or accessories such as auxiliary lights or
front protective grids that extend beyond the
height of the hood may limit City Safety's func-
tion.
Slippery driving conditions
The extended braking distance on slippery roads
may reduce City Safety's capacity to help avoid a
collision. In situations of this type, the ABS
brakes and Electronic Stability Control will help
provide braking power and stability.
Backlighting
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-
trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not
looking straight ahead may make the visual warn-
ing signal in the windshield difficult to see.
Heat
If the temperature in the passenger compartment
is very high due to e.g., strong sunlight, the visual
warning signal may be temporarily disabled.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
318
Camera and radar sensor's field of vision
The camera and radar sensor have limited fields
of vision. In some situations they may detect a
vehicle, large animal, pedestrian or cyclist later
than expected or not detect them at all.
Other vehicles that are dirty may be detected
later than others and in dark conditions, motorcy-
cles may be detected late or not at all.
If a text message is displayed in the instrument
panel indicates that the camera or radar sensor
are blocked, it may be difficult for City Safety to
detect a vehicle, pedestrian or cyclist and the
system's functionality may be reduced.
WARNING
Text messages may not be displayed in all sit-
uations in which the camera and/or radar
sensor are blocked. It is therefore essential to
keep the windshield in front the camera/radar
sensor clean and free from snow, ice, etc.
Camera and radar sensor components should
only be serviced or replaced by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
Action by the driver
Backing up
City Safety is temporarily deactivated while the
vehicle is backing up.
Low speed
City Safety is not activated at very low speeds
(under approx. 3 mph (4 km/h). This means that
the system will not be triggered if your vehicle
approaches a vehicle ahead at very low speed,
such as when parking.
Active driver
Action by the driver always has priority. For this
reason, City Safety may not react or react later
than expected in situations in which the driver is
actively operating the vehicle, even if a collision is
imminent. This is also done to help eliminate
excessive warnings.
Other limitations
City Safety uses the vehicle's camera and radar
sensor, which have certain general limitations.
See the articles "Camera limitations" and "Radar
sensor limitations" for additional information.
WARNING
•
Warnings and braking may be delayed or
not occur at all if traffic, weather or other
conditions prevent the camera and/or
radar sensor from detecting pedestrians,
cyclists, large animals or other vehicles
correctly.
•
Other vehicles can only be detected in
darkness if their headlights and taillights
are clearly visible.
•
The sensors have a limited range for
pedestrians and cyclists. The system
functions best at relative speeds up to
30 mph (50 km/h). For stationary or
slow-moving vehicles, the system func-
tions best at speeds up to approx.
43 mph (70 km/h).
•
If there is a risk of colliding with a large
animal, City Safety can reduce the vehi-
cle's speed by up to 9 mph (15 km/h).
Warnings and braking are most effective
at speeds above 43 mph (70 km/h) and
less effective at lower speeds.
DRIVER SUPPORT
319
WARNING
•
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles and large animals may be impe-
ded by darkness or poor visibility.
•
Warnings and braking for pedestrians and
cyclists will not be provided at speeds
above approx. 43 mph (70 km/h).
•
Do not place, attach or mount any objects
on the inside or outside of the windshield
near or over the sensor. This could affect
the camera-based functions.
•
Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the camera's
field of vision may result in certain func-
tions being reduced or disabled, or they
may respond incorrectly.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 309)
•
Camera limitations (p. 306)
•
Radar sensor limitations (p. 302)
DRIVER SUPPORT
320
City Safety symbols and messages
A number of City Safety-related messages may
be displayed in the instrument panel.
Several examples are provided in the following table:
Message Explanation
Automatic intervention
City Safety
When City Safety is braking or has applied the brakes, one of more symbols may illuminate in the instrument
panel and a text message will be displayed.
City Safety
Reduced functionality Service required
The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and authorized Volvo service technician.
A text message can be erased by briefly pressing
the O button on the right-side steering wheel
keypad. If the message recurs, contact a trained
and authorized Volvo service technician or
retailer.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 309)
DRIVER SUPPORT
321
Rear Collision Warning (RCW)
The
Rear Collision Warning (RCW) function
can help the driver avoid rear-end collisions.
RCW is activated automatically each time the
engine is started.
RCW can warn the driver of a vehicle approach-
ing yours from behind by rapidly flashing your
turn signals.
RCW is only activated when a vehicle is rapidly
approaching your vehicle from behind.
At speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), if RCW
determines that your vehicle is at risk of a rear-
end collision, the front seat belt pretensioners
and the Whiplash Protection System are acti-
vated.
Just prior to the collision, the brakes are also
applied to help reduce your vehicle's forward
movement if and when the collision occurs. How-
ever, this can only happen if your vehicle is sta-
tionary.
The brakes will be released immediately if the
accelerator pedal is pressed.
NOTE
•
Due to local traffic regulations in certain
markets, Rear Collision Warning (RCW)
will not activate the rear turn signals.
That part of the function will be deacti-
vated.
•
The use of the rear turn signals will also
be deactivated if the City Safety warning
level is set at
Later. See also the section
"Setting a warning level (distance)" in the
article "City Safety settings."
•
If RCW detects a vehicle approaching
from behind, the seat belt pretensioners
and Whiplash Protection System will be
activated.
Limitations
In some circumstances, it may be difficult for
RCW to help the driver if there is a risk of a colli-
sion, such as:
•
If the vehicle approaching from the rear is
detected at a late stage
•
If the vehicle approaching from the rear
changes lanes at a late stage
•
If the vehicle approaching from the rear is
moving at a speed above approx. 50 mph
(80 km/h)
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 309)
•
Whiplash protection system (p. 63)
•
Seat belts (p. 66)
•
City Safety warning level settings (p. 311)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
322
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*
Blind Spot Information is a system designed to
alert the driver to the presence of other vehicles
moving in the same direction as your vehicle on
roads with several lanes.
Blind Spot Information is a driving aid intended
to:
•
detect other vehicles in your door mirrors'
"blind area"
•
detect vehicles that are about to pass your
vehicle or are approaching your vehicle
quickly from behind in the left and/or right
lanes
WARNING
•
Blind Spot Information is an information
system, NOT a warning or safety system
and does not function in all situations.
•
Blind Spot Information does not eliminate
the need for you to visually confirm the
conditions around you, and the need for
you to turn your head and shoulders to
make sure that you can safely change
lanes or back up.
•
As the driver, you have full responsibility
for changing lanes/backing up in a safe
manner.
Overview
Blind Spot Information indicators
Indicator light
BLIS button in the center display's Function
view to activate/deactivate the function
The indicator light illuminates on the side of the
vehicle where the system has detected another
vehicle. If your vehicle is passed on both sides at
the same time, both lights will illuminate.
Principle for Blind Spot Information: Zone 1. Blind area,
Zone 2. Area for approaching/passing vehicles
Blind Spot Information functions when your vehi-
cle is moving at speeds above approx. 6 mph
(10 km/h).
Blind Spot Information is designed to react to:
•
vehicles that are passing your vehicle
•
other vehicles that are rapidly approaching
your vehicle
When Blind Spot Information detects a vehicle in
zone 1 or a fast-approaching vehicle in zone 2,
the indicator light in the respective door mirror
will glow steadily.
If the driver then uses the turn signal on the side
on which the warning is given, the indicator light
will begin flashing and become brighter.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
323
WARNING
•
Blind Spot Information does not function
in sharp curves.
•
Blind Spot Information does not function
when your vehicle is backing up.
Related information
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* On/Off
(p. 323)
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* limitations
(p. 324)
•
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 324)
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*
On/Off
The Blind Spot Information function can be acti-
vated/deactivated.
Blind Spot Information indicators
Indicator light
Blind Spot Information symbol
Blind Spot Information can be activated/deacti-
vated in the center display's Function view.
–
In Function view, tap BLIS.
> When Blind Spot Information is activated/
deactivated, the indicator light in the but-
ton will be green/gray.
If BLIS is activated when the engine is started,
the indicator lights in the door mirrors will flash
once.
If BLIS is deactivated when the engine is
switched off, it will remain off the next time the
engine is started and the indicator lights in the
door mirrors will not illuminate.
Related information
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 322)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
324
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*
limitations
Blind Spot Information functionality may be
reduced in certain situations.
•
Dirt, ice and snow on the sensors may
reduce functionality and prevent the system
from providing warnings.
•
Do not attach any objects, tape, decals, etc.,
on the surface of the sensors.
•
BLIS is deactivated if a trailer is attached to
the vehicle's electrical system.
Maintenance
The BLIS/CTA
5
sensors are located on the
inside of the rear fenders/bumper.
Keep the highlighted area clean (on both sides of the
vehicle) - generic illustration
For the system to function optimally, the area
over and around the sensors must be kept clean.
CAUTION
Repairs to the BLIS/CTA systems and/or
repainting the rear bumper should only be
done by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
Related information
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* On/Off
(p. 323)
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 322)
•
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 324)
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)*
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a supplementary part
of Blind Spot Information and is intended to
detect vehicles crossing behind your vehicle
while you are backing up.
When does Cross Traffic Alert function
Principle for CTA
CTA supplements BLIS by warning the driver of
crossing traffic behind your vehicle, for example,
when backing out of a parking space.
It is primarily designed to detect another vehicle
but in certain cases may also detect pedestrians
or smaller objects such as bicycles.
CTA is only activated when the vehicle is rolling
rearward or when the gear selector is put in
reverse.
5
Cross Traffic Alert*
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
325
If CTA detects that something is approaching
your vehicle from the side:
•
An audible signal indicates will sound from
either the left or right infotainment system
speakers, depending on which the side of
your vehicle the approaching vehicle/ object
has been detected.
•
An icon illuminates in the Park Assist* sys-
tem's graphic in the instrument panel.
•
An icon is also shown in the Park Assist
Camera's* Top view.
Illuminated CTA icon in the Park Assist system's graphic
Related information
•
Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic Alert
(CTA)* (p. 325)
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* with Cross
Traffic Alert (CTA)* symbols and messages
(p. 328)
•
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* limitations (p. 326)
Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic
Alert (CTA)*
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) can be activated/deac-
tivated separately from Blind Spot Information
(BLIS).
Activating/deactivating
Tap Cross Traffic Alert in the
center display's Function view.
•
Green indicator light: CTA is activated
•
Grey indicator light: CTA is deactivated
CTA is activated automatically when the engine is
started.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
326
WARNING
•
BLIS and CTA are information systems,
NOT warning or safety systems and do
not function in all situations.
•
BLIS and CTA do not eliminate the need
for you to visually confirm the conditions
around you, and the need for you to turn
your head and shoulders to make sure
that you can safely change lanes or back
up.
•
As the driver, you have full responsibility
for changing lanes/backing up in a safe
manner.
Related information
•
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 324)
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* On/Off
(p. 323)
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* limitations
CTA functionality may be reduced in certain sit-
uations.
Limitations
CTA has limitations in certain situations, for
example, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through
other parked vehicles or obstructions.
The following are several examples where CTA's
"field of vision" may initially be limited and
approaching vehicles cannot be detected until
they are too close:
The vehicle is pulled far into a parking space
In angled parking spaces, CTA may be "blind" on one
side
CTA's blind area
CTA's "field of vision"
However, as you back your vehicle out of a park-
ing space, CTA's "field of vision" expands.
Examples of other limitations include:
•
Dirt, ice or snow obstructing the sensors may
reduce the system's function or make it
impossible to detect other vehicles or
objects.
•
CTA is deactivated automatically if a trailer,
bicycle rack or anything similar is attached to
the vehicle's electrical system.
•
For optimal performance, bicycle racks, lug-
gage holders, etc. should not be mounted on
the vehicle's trailer hitch-
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
327
Maintenance
The CTA sensors are located on the inside of the
rear fenders/bumper.
Keep the highlighted area clean (on both sides of the
vehicle) - generic illustration
For the system to function optimally, the area
over and around the sensors must be kept clean.
Do not attach any objects, tape, decals, etc., on
the surface of the sensors.
CAUTION
Repairs to the BLIS/CTA systems and/or
repainting the rear bumper should only be
done by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
Related information
•
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 324)
•
Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic Alert
(CTA)* (p. 325)
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* with Cross
Traffic Alert (CTA)* symbols and messages
(p. 328)
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* limitations
(p. 324)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
328
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* with
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* symbols
and messages
In situations where Blind Spot Information
and/or Cross Traffic Alert are not functioning
properly or if the function is interrupted, a sym-
bol and a text message may be displayed in the
instrument panel. Follow the instructions provi-
ded.
The following table lists several symbols and messages:
Message Explanation
Blind spot sensor
Service required
The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician
Blind spot system off
Trailer attached
BLIS and CTA have been deactivated because a trailer has been connected to teh vehicle's electrical system.
A text message can be erased by briefly pressing
the O button on the right-side steering wheel
keypad. If the message recurs, contact a trained
and authorized Volvo service technician or
retailer.
Related information
•
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 324)
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 322)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
329
Road Sign Information (RSI)*
RSI is a feature that helps the driver see road
signs showing the posted speed limit.
Examples of readable road signs
If the vehicle passes a sign showing the speed
limit, this will be displayed in the instrument panel
and the head-up display*.
NOTE
If the vehicle is equipped with the Sensus
Navigation system, speed-related information
is provided by this system in the following
instances:
•
In cases where the speed limit is given
indirectly (e.g., when driving on highways
or other major roads).
•
If a previously read speed limit sign is no
longer considered valid and no new sign
has been passed.
If a third-party navigation system is being
used, RSI has no support for speed-related
information.
WARNING
RSI does not function in all situations and is
only intended to provide supplementary infor-
mation.
The driver is always responsible for operating
the vehicle safely.
Activating/deactivating RSI
Road Sign Information can be activated or deacti-
vated.
Tap the
Road Sign
Information button (generic
illustration) in the center dis-
play's Function view.
•
GREEN indicator light: RSI is activated.
•
GRAY indicator light: RSI is deactivated.
Related information
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* operation
(p. 330)
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* limitations
(p. 331)
•
Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 259)
•
Head-up display (HUD)* (p. 118)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
330
Road Sign Information (RSI)*
operation
Speed limit information
Speed limit information
When RSI registers a road sign showing the
speed limit, this sign is displayed as a symbol on
the instrument panel.
Settings
Activating/deactivating the speed warning
function
The Speed Limit Warning function can be acti-
vated as follows:
1.
Tap
Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the center dis-
play's Top view.
2.
Tap
Speed Limit Warning to activate/deac-
tivate this function.
> If the function is activated, a speed selec-
tor will be displayed.
Setting a speed warning level
The driver can choose to receive a speed warning
at a speed that is lower or higher than the posted
speed limit.
To set a speed warning level:
1.
Tap
Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the center dis-
play's Top view.
2.
Tap
Speed Limit Warning to activate/deac-
tivate this function.
> If the function is activated, a speed selec-
tor will be displayed.
3. Set the warning level by tapping the up/
down arrows on the screen.
Please be aware that the set
warning level will not be used
when a speed camera symbol
is displayed in the instrument
panel.
Speed camera alert
Speed camera warning in the instrument panel (generic
illustration)
If the Sensus Navigation sys-
tem in your vehicle is being
used, the driver can be alerted
if the vehicle is exceeding a
detected speed limit and is
approaching a speed camera.
Activating/deactivating the audible alert
The audible alert can be activated/deactivated
and the limit for a warning can be set.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign
Information
.
3.
Tap
Audio Warning to activate/deactivate
this function.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
331
Sensus Navigation
The Sensus Navigation system provides speed
limit-related information:
•
If a speed limit changes indirectly such as
when a sign indicating the end of an
expressway, highway or other limited access
road is detected.
•
If a previously detected speed limit is no
longer considered to apply and no new
speed limit signs have been detected.
Signs for school zones or children at
play
If warning signs for a school
zone or children at play are
included in the Sensus
Navigation system's map data-
base, this symbol will appear in
the instrument panel when a
sign of this type has been
detected.
Related information
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 329)
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* limitations
(p. 331)
Road Sign Information (RSI)*
limitations
The RSI function may be limited in certain situa-
tions.
RSI may have difficulty reading signs that are:
•
Faded signs
•
Signs located in a curve
•
Twisted or damaged signs
•
Signs place high above the road
•
Signs that are partially hidden/poorly placed
•
Obstructed signs
•
Signs that are partially covered by snow, ice,
etc.
•
If the digital maps used by the Sensus
Navigation system* are not up-to-date, are
inaccurate or do not contain speed informa-
tion
6
.
The camera used by RSI has certain limitations.
See the article "Camera limitations" for additional
information.
NOTE
RSI may perceive certain types of bicycle car-
riers (with wiring attached to the trailer elec-
trical socket) as a trailer, which may result in
faulty speed limit information to the driver.
Related information
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 329)
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* operation
(p. 330)
•
Camera limitations (p. 306)
6
Speed information is not available in all markets.
DRIVER SUPPORT
332
Driver Alert Control (DAC)
DAC is intended to alert the driver if his/her driv-
ing becomes erratic due to e.g., distraction or
fatigue.
DAC is designed to help detect a slowly chang-
ing driving pattern. It is primarily intended to be
used on main roads and is not meant for use in
city traffic.
The function activates initially when the vehicle's
speed first exceeds 40 mph (65 km/h) and
remains active as long the speed remains above
approx. 37 mph (60 km/h)
A camera monitors the traffic lane's side marker
lines and compares the direction of the road with
the driver’s movements of the steering wheel.
If the driving pattern starts to
become noticeably erratic, the
driver will be alerted by this
symbol in the instrument panel
along with the text
Driver Alert
Time for a break.
If the driving pattern does not change, the driver
will be warned by the same symbol in the instru-
ment panel combined with an audible signal and
the text
Time for a break.
If the
Rest Stop Guidance function is activated
in the navigation system when Time for a break
is displayed, suggested rest areas will also be
displayed.
The warning will be repeated if the driving pattern
does not change.
WARNING
•
DAC is not intended to extend the dura-
tion of driving. Always plan breaks at reg-
ular intervals to help remain alert.
•
A warning from DAC should not be
ignored. A driver may not be aware of
how fatigued he/she has become.
•
In certain cases, fatigue may not affect
the driver’s behavior. In situations of this
type, no warning will be provided. There-
fore, it is important to take breaks at reg-
ular intervals, regardless of whether or
not DAC has given a warning.
Related information
•
Using Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 333)
•
Driver Alert Control limitations (p. 333)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
333
Using Driver Alert Control (DAC)
DAC settings are made in the center display's
menu system.
Activating/deactivating Driver Alert
Control
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert
Control
.
3.
Select
Alertness Warning to activate/deac-
tivate DAC.
Activating/deactivating guidance to a
rest area
With this feature activated, DAC will propose a
nearby rest area if a warning has been given.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert
Control
.
3.
Select
Rest Stop Guidance to activate/
deactivate guidance to a rest area.
Related information
•
Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 332)
Driver Alert Control limitations
Driver Alert Control (DAC) may have limited or
reduced functionality in certain situations.
WARNING
A driving pattern may not change despite
driver fatigue, e.g., if a function such as Pilot
Assist is being used, which means that DAC
will not provide a warning. It is always very
important to stop and take a break at the first
sign of driver fatigue, even if the system has
not provided a warning.
In certain situations, DAC may provide warnings
even if the driver’s driving pattern has not
become erratic:
•
in strong crosswinds
•
on grooved road surfaces.
NOTE
DAC uses the vehicle's camera, which has
certain general limitations. See the article
"Camera limitations" for additional informa-
tion.
Related information
•
Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 332)
•
Using Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 333)
•
Camera limitations (p. 306)
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 286)
Driving lane assistance
The
Lane Assistance functions are designed to
help reduce the risk of accidents in situations
where the vehicle unintentionally leaves its lane
on highways or other major roads.
Driving lane assistance system
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) actively steers the vehi-
cle to help keep it in its traffic lane and/or alerts
the driver using an audible signal or through
vibrations in the steering wheel.
The driving lane assistance system is active at
speeds between approx. 40-125 mph
(65-200 km/h) on roads with clearly visible traf-
fic lane marker lines. Always observe posted
speed limits.
On narrow roads, the system may not function
and will go into standby mode. It will return to
active mode if the road becomes sufficiently
wide.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
334
A camera monitors the road/traffic lane's marker lines.
Driving lane assistance attempts to steer the vehicle
back into its lane.
Driving lane assistance provides vibrations in the steer-
ing wheel
7
.
Depending on the settings used, Lane Keeping
Aid functions in different ways:
•
Assistance type
Assist
8
is activated: when
the vehicle approaches a traffic lane marker
line, LKA will provide active steering assis-
tance to help steer it back into the lane.
•
Assistance type
Warning
8
is activated: if the
vehicle is moving out of its traffic lane, an
audible signal and/or vibrations in the steer-
ing wheel will be provided.
NOTE
If the turn signal is used, Lane Keeping Aid
will not provide an alert or steering assis-
tance.
WARNING
Lane Keeping Aid is only intended to assist
the driver and does not function in all driving,
weather, traffic or road conditions.
As the driver, you have full responsibility for
operating the vehicle in a safe manner.
Steering assistance
In order for LKA's steering assistance to function,
the driver's hands must be on the steering wheel,
which the system monitors continuously.
If the driver's hands are not on
the steering wheel, this symbol
will illuminate in the instrument
panel and the following mes-
sage will be displayed:
•
Lane Keeping Aid – Apply steering
If the driver does not begin to steer the vehicle,
the symbol will illuminate again, an audible signal
7
The level of vibrations varies; the farther the vehicle is over a lane marker line, the greater the number of vibrations:
8
See "Type of assistance" in the article "Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Aid".
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
335
will sound and the following message will be dis-
played:
•
Lane Keeping Aid – Standby until
steering applied
If the driver still does not begin to steer the vehi-
cle, LKA will go into standby mode. The function
will not become available again until the driver
actively steers the vehicle
Traffic lane assistance does not react
The traffic lane assistance system does not intervene in
sharp curves
In certain cases, such as during active driving or if
the turn signal is used, the traffic lane system will
not react if the vehicle crosses a lane marker
line.
Limitations
In certain demanding driving situations, the driv-
ing lane assistance functions may not be able to
assist the driver. In these situations, it may be
advisable to turn the function off.
Examples of such situations:
•
road construction
•
winter driving conditions
•
poor road surfaces
•
a very active driving style
•
bad weather with reduced visibility
•
edges or lines other than the lane's marker
lines
•
roads with indistinct or no lane marker lines
The driving lane assistance function use the vehi-
cle's camera, which has general limitations. See
the article "Camera limitations."
Related information
•
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Aid
(LKA) (p. 335)
•
Camera limitations (p. 306)
•
Steering assist with run-off mitigation
(p. 341)
Activating/deactivating Lane
Keeping Aid (LKA)
LKA can be activated/deactivated.
Activating/deactivating
Tap Lane Keeping Aid in the center display's
Function view.
•
GREEN indicator light in the button: LKA is
activated
•
GRAY indicator light in the button: LKA is
activated
Selecting the type of LKA assistance
Select the type of assistance LKA should provide:
1.
Tap
Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Lane Assistance in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Under
Lane Keeping Aid Mode, select:
•
Assist: the system will provide steering
assistance but no warning.
•
Both: the system will provide steering
assistance and warning
•
Warning: the system will provide warning
but no steering assistance
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
337
Driving lane assistance symbols
and messages
A number of symbols and messages relating to
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) may appear in the
instrument panel.
Symbols in the instrument panel
The driving lane assistance
systems use a symbol in the
instrument panel in different
situations.
Several examples of the symbol's appearance will
be given here:
Available
When the driving lane assistance systems are available,
the marker lines in the symbol will be white.
LKA are monitoring the driving lane's marker
line(s).
Not available
When the driving lane assistance systems are not avail-
able, the marker lines in the symbol will be gray
This is because LKA cannot monitor (detect) the
driving lane's marker line(s) or the vehicle's
speed is too low or the road is too narrow.
Steering/warning indicator
Steering/warning: the side marker lines in the symbol
will be colored
LKA indicates that the system is warning and/or
attempting to steer the vehicle back into its lane.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
338
Symbols and messages
The following table lists several LKA-related symbols and messages.
Symbol Message Explanation
Driver support system
Reduced functionality Service required
The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian.
Windscreen sensor
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
The camera's functionality is limited.
Lane Keeping Aid
Apply steering
LKA's steering assistance does not function if the driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel. Steer the vehicle actively.
Lane Keeping Aid
Standby until steering applied
LKA's steering assistance is in standby mode until the driver actively steers the vehicle.
A text message can be erased by briefly pressing
the O button on the right-side steering wheel
keypad. If the message recurs, contact a trained
and authorized Volvo service technician or
retailer.
Related information
•
Driving lane assistance (p. 333)
•
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Aid
(LKA) (p. 335)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
339
Steering assistance when there is a
risk of a collision
The purpose of
Collision Avoidance
Assistance is to help the driver reduce the risk
of the vehicle inadvertently leaving its traffic lane
and/or colliding with another vehicle by actively
steering the vehicle back into its traffic lane or
taking evasive action.
The Collision Avoidance Assistance function
consists of the following three sub-functions:
•
Steering assist with run-off mitigation
•
Steering assistance in oncoming traffic*
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from behind
If one of these functions is triggered,
Collision
avoidance assistance Automatic
intervention will be displayed in the instrument
panel.
WARNING
The driver's actions always determine the
amount of steering assistance that will be
provided. The vehicle can never take control.
Activating/deactivating
This function can be deactivated. To do so:
1.
Tap
Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the center display's Top view.
2.
Deselect
Collision Avoidance Assistance.
> The function is deactivated.
NOTE
Please be aware that when the Collision
Avoidance Assistance function is deacti-
vated, the following sub-functions are also
deactivated:
•
Steering assistance with run-off mitiga-
tion
•
Steering assistance in oncoming traffic
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from behind
Although the function can be deactivated, it is
advisable to keep it activated to help improve
driving safety.
Related information
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from behind (p. 344)
•
Steering assistance in oncoming traffic
(p. 342)
•
Steering assist with run-off mitigation
(p. 341)
•
Driving lane assistance symbols and mes-
sages (p. 337)
•
Steering assistance symbols and messages
(p. 340)
DRIVER SUPPORT
340
Steering assistance symbols and
messages
Several symbols and message relating to this
function may be displayed in the instrument
panel.
Symbol Message Explanation
Collision Avoidance Assistance
Automatic intervention
This message indicates that the function has been activated.
Windscreen sensor
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
The camera's functionality is limited.
A text message can be erased by briefly pressing
the O button on the right-side steering wheel
keypad. If the message recurs, contact a trained
and authorized Volvo service technician or
retailer.
Related information
•
Steering assistance when there is a risk of a
collision (p. 339)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
341
Steering assist with run-off
mitigation
This function is designed to assist the driver by
helping return the vehicle to its traffic lane if it is
about to go off the road.
The function is active at speeds between
40–87 mph (65–140 km/h)
9
on roads with
clearly marked edges or side marker lines.
A camera monitors the edges of a road and its
side marker lines. If the vehicle is about to cross
the edge of the road or side marker line, the
function will attempt to actively steer the vehicle
back onto the road. If the attempt to steer the
vehicle is not sufficient, the brakes will also be
applied.
This function does not provide steering or brak-
ing assistance if a turn signal is being used. If the
vehicle is being driven actively, activation may be
delayed.
The function has two activation levels:
•
Steering assistance only
•
Steering assistance and braking
Run-off Mitigation with steering assistance
only
Steering assistance
Run-off Mitigation with steering assistance
and braking
Steering assistance and braking
Braking is triggered in situations where steering
assistance may not be sufficient. Braking effect is
modulated automatically depending on the situa-
tion when the vehicle begins to run off the road.
WARNING
•
This function is a supplemental aid to the
driver and does not function in all driving/
traffic situations or weather/road condi-
tions. It can never replace the driver’s
attention to traffic conditions or his/her
responsibility for operating the vehicle in
a safe manner.
•
The function is only activated if there is
an imminent risk of a collision. For this
reason, do not wait for the function to
activate before taking action.
On/Off
The steering assistance function in oncoming
traffic can be deactivated. To do so:
1.
Tap
Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the center display's Top view.
2.
Deselect
Collision Avoidance Assistance.
> The function is deactivated.
9
Always observe posted speed limits.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
342
NOTE
Please be aware that when the Collision
Avoidance Assistance function is deacti-
vated, the following sub-functions are also
deactivated:
•
Steering assistance with run-off mitiga-
tion
•
Steering assistance in oncoming traffic
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from behind
Although the function can be deactivated, it is
advisable to keep it activated to help improve
driving safety.
Limitations
In certain situations, it may be difficult for the
function to assist the driver. In such cases, it is
advisable to deactivate the function.
Examples of these situations include:
•
road construction
•
winter driving conditions
•
poor road surfaces
•
narrow roads
•
a very active driving style
•
bad weather with reduced visibility
•
edges or lines other than the lane's marker
lines
•
roads with indistinct or no lane marker lines
NOTE
This function uses the vehicle's camera and
radar sensor, which have certain general limi-
tations that the driver should be aware of. See
the articles "Camera limitations" and "Radar
sensor limitations" for additional information.
Related information
•
Driving lane assistance (p. 333)
•
Camera limitations (p. 306)
Steering assistance in oncoming
traffic
This function can help a driver if the vehicle inad-
vertently begins to cross a road's center line into
the path of oncoming traffic.
This function can provide steering assistance to help
return the vehicle to its traffic lane
oncoming vehicle
Your vehicle
The function is active at speeds between approx.
37–87 mph (60–140 km/h) on roads with clear
lane marker lines.
If the vehicle begins to cross a road's center line
while another vehicle approaches from the oppo-
site direction, this function can assist the driver to
steer the vehicle back into its proper traffic lane.
DRIVER SUPPORT
343
Steering assistance is not provided if a turn sig-
nal is being used. If the vehicle is being driven
actively, activation may be delayed.
When steering assistance has been provided,
Collision avoidance assistance Automatic
intervention will be displayed in the instrument
panel.
After the system has taken automatic action, this
will be indicated in the instrument panel by a
message such as Automatic
intervention Collision avoidance assistance.
WARNING
•
This function is a supplemental aid to the
driver and does not function in all driving/
traffic situations or weather/road condi-
tions. It can never replace the driver’s
attention to traffic conditions or his/her
responsibility for operating the vehicle in
a safe manner.
•
The function is only activated if there is
an imminent risk of a collision. For this
reason, do not wait for the function to
activate before taking action.
On/Off
The steering assistance function in oncoming
traffic can be deactivated. To do so:
1.
Tap
Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the center display's Top view.
2.
Deselect
Collision Avoidance Assistance.
> The function is deactivated.
NOTE
Please be aware that when the Collision
Avoidance Assistance function is deacti-
vated, the following sub-functions are also
deactivated:
•
Steering assistance with run-off mitiga-
tion
•
Steering assistance in oncoming traffic
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from behind
Although the function can be deactivated, it is
advisable to keep it activated to help improve
driving safety.
Limitations
The steering assistance function may have
reduced or limited functionality in certain situa-
tions and may not react:
•
to smaller vehicles such as motorcycles
•
if most of your vehicle is already in an adja-
cent traffic lane
•
outside of the speed interval 37–87 mph
(60–140 km/h)
•
on roads without clear lane marker lines
NOTE
This function uses the vehicle's camera and
radar sensor, which have certain general limi-
tations that the driver should be aware of. See
the articles "Camera limitations" and "Radar
sensor limitations" for additional information.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 309)
•
City Safety limitations (p. 317)
•
Camera limitations (p. 306)
•
Radar sensor limitations (p. 302)
DRIVER SUPPORT
344
Steering assistance during collision
risks from behind
This system is designed to help a driver if the
vehicle inadvertently begins to leave the current
traffic lane while another vehicle approaches
from behind or is in your door mirrors' "blind
area".
This function can help steer your vehicle back into its
traffic lane
Another vehicle in the "blind area"
Your vehicle
If your vehicle begins to drift into another traffic
lane while another vehicle is in your "blind area"
or if a vehicle is approaching quickly from behind
in an adjacent traffic lane, this function can assist
the driver to steer the vehicle back into its proper
traffic lane.
This function can also help provide assistance if
the driver is changing lanes and using the turn
signal and another vehicle is approaching from
behind.
The function is active at speeds between approx.
37–87 mph (60–140 km/h) on roads with clear
lane marker lines.
After the system has taken automatic action, this
will be indicated in the instrument panel by a
message such as
Automatic
intervention Collision avoidance assistance.
WARNING
•
This function is a supplemental aid to the
driver and does not function in all driving/
traffic situations or weather/road condi-
tions. It can never replace the driver’s
attention to traffic conditions or his/her
responsibility for operating the vehicle in
a safe manner.
•
The function is only activated if there is
an imminent risk of a collision. For this
reason, do not wait for the function to
activate before taking action.
On/Off
The steering assist function can be deactivated.
To do so:
1.
Tap
Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the center display's Top view.
2.
Deselect
Collision Avoidance Assistance.
> The function is deactivated.
NOTE
Please be aware that when the Collision
Avoidance Assistance function is deacti-
vated, the following sub-functions are also
deactivated:
•
Steering assistance with run-off mitiga-
tion
•
Steering assistance in oncoming traffic
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from behind
Although the function can be deactivated, it is
advisable to keep it activated to help improve
driving safety.
Limitations
The steering assistance function may have
reduced or limited functionality in certain situa-
tions and may not react:
•
to smaller vehicles such as motorcycles
•
if most of your vehicle is already in an adja-
cent traffic lane
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
345
•
outside of the speed interval 37–87 mph
(60–140 km/h)
•
on roads without clear lane marker lines
Other difficult situations/conditions may include:
•
road construction
•
winter driving conditions
•
narrow roads
•
roads with poor surfaces
•
a very active driving style
•
poor weather conditions with limited visibility
NOTE
This function uses the vehicle's camera and
radar sensor, which have certain general limi-
tations that the driver should be aware of. See
the articles "Camera limitations" and "Radar
sensor limitations" for additional information.
In addition to the front camera and radar sensors,
this system also uses the Blind Spot Information
rear radar sensors, which also has general limita-
tions. See also the article "Blind Spot Information
limitations" for additional information.
Related information
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 322)
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* On/Off
(p. 323)
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* limitations
(p. 324)
•
Camera limitations (p. 306)
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* with Cross
Traffic Alert (CTA)* symbols and messages
(p. 328)
•
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 324)
Park Assist*
The Park Assist system is designed to assist you
when driving into parking spaces, garages, etc.
An audible signal and symbols in the instrument
panel and center display indicate the distance to
the object.
Display view showing object zones and sensor sectors
The center display shows an overview of the vehi-
cle in relation to objects that have been detected.
The highlighted sector shows which of the sen-
sors has detected the object. The closer the
highlighted sector is to the vehicle symbol, the
closer the actual object is to your vehicle.
The Park Assist system uses an intermittent tone
that pulses faster as you come closer to an
object. Sound from the infotainment system will
be temporarily turned down.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
346
The audible signals for objects in front of and to
the sides are active while the vehicle is moving
and will stop after the vehicle has been stopped
for approx. 2 seconds. The audible signals for
objects behind the vehicle are active even when
the vehicle has stopped moving.
The audible signal becomes constant when you
are within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object
and the highlighted sensor field is filled in.
While an audible signal is being given, its volume
level can be raised/lowered using the >II control
in the center console or can be adjusted in the
center displays Top view under
Settings.
NOTE
Audible alerts will only be provided for objects
that are directly in the vehicle's path.
WARNING
•
Park Assist is an information system,
NOT a safety system. This system is
designed to be a supplementary aid when
parking the vehicle. It is not, however,
intended to replace the driver's attention
and judgement.
•
The Park Assist sensors have angles in
which they cannot detect possible
obstructions.
•
Be particularly alert if there are people or
animals near the vehicle.
Rear park assist
The system's rear sensors are activated automat-
ically when the engine is started and are active if
the vehicle rolls rearward with the gear selector
in N or if R has been selected.
The distance monitored behind the vehicle is
approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal
comes from the rear speakers.
The rear sensors will be deactivated automatically
when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine trailer wir-
ing is used. If a non-Volvo trailer hitch is being
used, it may be necessary to switch off the sys-
tem manually.
Side park assist
The system's side sensors are activated automat-
ically when the engine is started and are active at
speeds below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
The distance monitored along the sides of the
vehicle is approximately 1 ft (30 cm). The audible
signal comes from the side speakers.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
347
Front park assist
The system's front sensors are activated auto-
matically when the engine is started and are
active at speeds below approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h).
The distance monitored in front of the vehicle is
approximately 2.5 ft (80 cm). The audible signal
comes from the front speakers.
Front Park Assist is deactivated if the parking
brake is applied or if the gear selector is put in P.
When installing auxiliary headlights, be sure that
they do not obstruct the front sensors. Otherwise,
these lights could trigger a Park Assist warning.
Related information
•
Activating/deactivating Park Assist (p. 347)
•
Park Assist limitations (p. 347)
•
Park Assist symbols and messages (p. 349)
Activating/deactivating Park Assist
The Park Assist system can be turned on or off.
On/Off
Park Assist's front and side sensors are activated
automatically when the engine is started. The
rear sensors activate if the vehicle rolls rearward
in N or if R is selected.
This function can be activated/
deactivated in the center dis-
play's Function view.
–
Tap the Park Assist button.
> Green indicator: the function is active.
Gray indicator: the function is deactivated.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 345)
•
Park Assist limitations (p. 347)
•
Park Assist symbols and messages (p. 349)
Park Assist limitations
The Park Assist system has certain limitations.
WARNING
Use extra caution when
backing up if this symbol is
displayed when a trailer is
connected to the vehicle or
if a bike carrier, etc. is in
use that is connected to the
vehicle's electrical system.
This symbol indicates that the rear park assist
sensors are deactivated and will not detect
anything or anyone behind the vehicle.
NOTE
A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated with
the vehicle's electrical system will be taken
into account when measuring the available
space behind the vehicle.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
348
NOTE
•
The system will not detect high objects,
such as a loading dock, etc.
•
Certain materials or fabrics may not be
detected by the sensors. Objects made of
these materials or people wearing cloth-
ing made of these fabrics may not be
detected.
•
Children or animals near the vehicle may
not always be detected.
•
Objects such as chains, thin shiny poles
or low objects may temporarily not be
detected by the system. This may result
in the pulsing tone unexpectedly stopping
instead of changing to a constant tone as
the vehicle approaches the object. In
such cases, use caution when backing up
or stop the vehicle to help avoid damage.
•
In certain circumstances, the park assist
system may give unexpected warning sig-
nals that can be caused by external
sound sources that use the same ultra-
sound frequencies as the system. This
may include such things as the horns of
other vehicles, wet tires on asphalt, pneu-
matic brakes, motorcycle exhaust pipes,
other vehicles with similar ultrasound sys-
tems, etc. This does not indicate a fault in
the system.
Cleaning the sensors
Location of the Park Assist sensors
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure
that they work properly. Clean them with water
and a suitable car washing detergent.
NOTE
If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt,
snow, or ice, this could result in false warning
signals from the park assist system or the
system may not function at all.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 345)
•
Activating/deactivating Park Assist (p. 347)
•
Park Assist symbols and messages (p. 349)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
349
Park Assist symbols and messages
A number of messages relating to Park Assist
will appear in the instrument panel.
The following table provides some examples.
Symbol Message Explanation
-
The rear sensors are deactivated. No audible warnings will be provided for obstructions behind
the vehicle.
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
One or more of the system's sensors are blocked. Check and clean the sensors as soon as pos-
sible.
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
A text message can be erased by briefly pressing
the O button on the right-side steering wheel
keypad. If the message recurs, contact a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician or retailer.
Related information
•
Park Assist limitations (p. 347)
•
Park Assist* (p. 345)
•
Activating/deactivating Park Assist (p. 347)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
350
Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
The Park Assist Camera system is designed to
provide the driver with a view of the area around
the vehicle in the form of a camera image and
graphics in the center display.
PAC is a supplementary parking aid that can be
activated automatically when the gear selector is
in R or by tapping a button in the center display.
Examples of camera views (generic illustration)
Zoom: Zoom in/out
10
360° view*: activate/deactivate all cameras
PAS*: Park Assist On/Off
Lines: Guiding lines On/Off
Towbar: Guiding lines for a trailer hitch*
11
On/Off
CTA: Cross Traffic Alert* On/Off
NOTE
A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated with
the vehicle's electrical system will be taken
into account when measuring the available
space behind the vehicle.
WARNING
•
PAC is designed to be a supplementary
aid when parking the vehicle. It is not,
however, intended to replace the driver’s
attention and judgment.
•
The camera has blind spots where it can-
not detect objects or people around or
near the vehicle.
•
Pay particular attention to people or ani-
mals that are close to the vehicle.
•
Objects seen on the screen may be
closer than they appear to be.
Camera views
This function can show a 360° view as well as
separate views for the four respective cameras:
front, rear, left, right. The currently selected cam-
era will be displayed at the top of the view.
10
Guiding lines will not be displayed while zooming in.
11
Not available in all markets.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
351
360° view*
Location of the cameras and their fields of vision
This function activates all of the cameras to show
all four sides of the vehicle in the center display
to help the driver monitor objects close to the
vehicle when maneuvering at low speeds.
From the 360° view, each camera view can be
displayed separately:
•
Tap the center display in the desired "field of
vision," e.g., in front of/above the front cam-
era.
The camera view selected will be indicated at the
top of the screen.
If the vehicle is also equipped with the
Park
Assist System
*, the distance to a detected
obstruction will be illustrated in fields of different
colors.
The cameras can be activated automatically or
manually, see the article "Park Assist Camera
settings."
Backing up
Location of the rear Park Assist Camera (generic illus-
tration)
The rear camera shows a wide area behind the
vehicle and on certain models, part of the bumper
and the trailer hitch (if installed) will be visible.
Some objects on the screen may appear to “lean”
slightly, which is normal.
WARNING
People/objects/obstructions displayed on the
center console screen may be closer to the
vehicle than they appear.
Front camera
Location of the front Park Assist Camera (generic illus-
tration)
The front camera is located behind the grill and
can be useful when driving off in areas with lim-
ited visibility (hedges, bushes, etc). It is active at
speeds up to approx. 16 mph (25 km/h) and is
automatically turned off when the vehicle
exceeds this speed.
However, if the vehicle's speed does not exceed
30 mph (50 km/h) and its speed goes under
14 mph (22 km/h) within 60 seconds after the
camera has been switched off, the front camera
will reactivate.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
352
NOTE
The front camera will only reactivate automati-
cally if
Auto Camera Reverse Activation
has been selected in Settings My Car
Park Assist.
Side camera
The side cameras are located in the respective
door mirrors and show views along the sides of
the vehicle.
Related information
•
Park Assist Camera (PAC)* trajectory lines
and fields (p. 352)
•
Park Assist Camera (PAC)* limitations
(p. 355)
•
Starting the Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
(p. 354)
•
Park Assist* (p. 345)
•
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 324)
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 359)
Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
trajectory lines and fields
The Park Assist Camera system uses trajectory
lines and fields to indicate the vehicle's position
in relation to its immediate surroundings.
Trajectory lines
Sample guidelines
The trajectory lines are intended to show the
position of the vehicle's outermost dimensions
based on the current position of the steering
wheel to help simplify parallel parking, backing
into tight spaces or when attaching a trailer.
The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were a path on the ground around the vehicle
and are directly affected by the way in which the
steering wheel is turned. This enables the driver
to see path the vehicle will take, even if he/she
turns the steering wheel.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
353
These lines also indicate the outermost limits that
any object (door mirrors, corners of the body, a
trailer hitch, etc.) extends out from the vehicle,
even when it turns.
NOTE
When backing up with a trailer, the trajectory
lines show the path that the vehicle will take,
not the trailer.
Trajectory lines will not be displayed while
zooming in.
WARNING
Keep in mind that when the rear camera has
been selected, the image on the screen only
shows the area behind the vehicle. The driver
must always watch for people, animals, other
vehicles, etc., near the sides or the front of the
vehicle when turning while backing up.
The opposite is true when the front camera is
selected.
Please note that the trajectory lines show the
shortest path. Be sure that the vehicle’s sides
do not come into contact with or scrape
against any obstacle/obstruction when the
steering wheel is turned while driving forward
or that the front of the vehicle does not come
into contact with or scrape against any obsta-
cle/obstruction when backing up.
Models with the 360° panorama camera
system and Park Assist sensors*
Location of the cameras and their fields of vision
(generic illustration)
On models with the 360° panorama camera sys-
tem, trajectory lines will be shown behind, in front
of or to the sides of the vehicle, depending on its
direction.
•
When driving forward: front lines
•
When backing up: side/rear lines
When the front or rear camera is selected, trajec-
tory lines will be shown regardless of the vehi-
cle's direction.
If a side camera is selected, trajectory lines will
only be shown if the vehicle is backing up.
Trajectory lines for a trailer hitch (towbar)
Towbar: activate trajectory lines for a trailer
hitch
Zoom: zoom in/out
The camera can help make hitching a trailer eas-
ier by showing the "line" that the trailer hitch will
take toward the trailer.
1.
Tap
Towbar (1).
> The trajectory lines will be displayed and
the trajectory lines for the vehicle will dis-
appear.
2.
Tap
Zoom (2) for a close-up view.
> The camera will zoom in.
Trajectory lines for the trailer hitch and the vehi-
cle cannot be shown at the same time.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
354
Front and rear sensor fields
If the vehicle is also equipped with the optional
Park Assist system, this information will be dis-
played on the screen as colored field showing
the distance to obstacles that have been
detected.
Front and rear sensors
The screen can display colored sensor fields on the car
symbol at the right
The front and rear fields change colors (yellow-
orange-red) as the vehicle moves closer to an
object.
Front/rear field col-
ors
Distance to the object
Yellow 2.0–4.9 ft (0.6–1.5 m )
Orange 1.3–2.0 ft (0.4–0.6 m)
Red 0–1.3 ft (0–0.4 m)
Side sensors
The side fields will only be shown in orange.
Side field color Distance to the object
Orange 0–1.0 ft (0–0.3 m)
Related information
•
Park Assist Camera (PAC)* (p. 350)
•
Starting the Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
(p. 354)
Starting the Park Assist Camera
(PAC)*
PAC starts automatically when the gear selector
is moved to R or can be started manually from
the center display.
Camera view while reversing
The camera will show reverse view when R is
selected.
Views when the camera is activated
manually
PAC can be started manually
by tapping the
Camera button
in the center display's Function
view.
The screen will normally show the most recently
used camera view. However, if the engine has
been switched off and restarted and the camera
has been activated manually, any previously used
side views will be replaced by the 360° view. The
zoomed reverse view will be replaced by the nor-
mal reverse view.
Automatically deactivating the camera
Front view switches off at a speed of approx. 16
mph (25 km/h) to help avoid distracting the
driver and will reactivate if the vehicle's speed
drops below 14 mph (22 km/h) within 60 sec-
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
355
onds on the condition that the vehicle's speed
has not exceeded 31 mph (50 km/h).
Other camera views switch off at 9 mph (15
km/h) and will not reactivate automatically.
Related information
•
Park Assist Camera (PAC)* trajectory lines
and fields (p. 352)
•
Park Assist Camera (PAC)* limitations
(p. 355)
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
limitations
The Park Assist Camera system has certain limi-
tations that the driver should be aware of.
WARNING
Use extra caution when
backing up if this symbol is
displayed when a trailer is
connected to the vehicle or
if a bike carrier, etc. is in
use that is connected to the
vehicle's electrical system.
This symbol indicates that the rear park assist
sensors are deactivated and will not detect
anything or anyone behind the vehicle.
NOTE
Bicycle carriers or other accessories mounted
on the tailgate may obstruct the camera's
field of vision.
Blind sectors
Even if a fairly small section of the screen image
appears to be obstructed, this may mean that a
relatively large area is hidden and objects there
may not be detected until they are very near the
vehicle.
The "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields of vision
(generic illustration)
With 360° view selected, objects/obstacles may
not be detected at the edges of the individual
cameras' fields of vision.
Defective camera
If a camera sector is dark and
contains this symbol, this indi-
cates that the camera is not
functioning properly (see the
following illustration).
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
356
In this example, the driver's side camera is not function-
ing (generic illustration)
Dark camera sectors
A dark camera sector may also be displayed in
the following situations but without the defective
camera symbol. A sector may be dark because:
•
the door mirror is folded in
•
the door is open
•
the tailgate is open
Ambient lighting
The camera images are adjusted automatically to
the ambient light, which means the image may
vary slightly in terms of light and quality. Poor
ambient lighting may reduce the quality of the
image.
Maintenance
•
Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice and
snow. This is particularly important in poor
ambient lighting conditions.
•
Remove dirt, ice and snow carefully to avoid
scratching the lenses.
•
Clean the lens regularly with warm water and
a suitable car washing detergent.
Related information
•
Park Assist Camera (PAC)* (p. 350)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
357
Park Assist Camera (PAC)* -
symbols and messages
Park Assist Camera symbols and messages are
displayed in the instrument panel and center dis-
play.
The following table shows several examples.
Symbol Message Explanation
- The rear park assist sensors are turned off. No guide lines and audible warnings will be provided
for obstructions/objects.
- The camera is not functioning properly.
-
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning nee-
ded
One or more of the system's sensors are blocked. Check and clean the sensors as soon as pos-
sible.
-
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
A text message can be erased by briefly pressing
the O button on the right-side steering wheel
keypad. If the message recurs, contact a trained
and authorized Volvo service technician or
retailer.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
359
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)*
Park Assist Pilot (PAP) helps the driver drive into
parallel or perpendicular parking spaces and
leave parallel parking spaces.
Park Assist Pilot provides assistance when park-
ing by measuring the parking space and turning
the steering wheel to guide the vehicle into the
space.
Information about the actions required by the
driver is provided in the center display in the form
of symbols, images and text.
NOTE
While PAP is active, the driver's task is to:
•
carefully monitor the area around the
vehicle
•
follow the instructions provided in the
center display
•
select a gear (D or R) when prompted by
an audible signal
•
regulate the vehicle's speed
•
apply the brakes when necessary and
stop the vehicle
Types of parking
Parallel parking
Procedure for parallel parking
PAP helps park the vehicle as follows:
1. The system searches for and measures a
possible parking space. While this is being
done, the vehicle's speed may not exceed
approx. 20 mph ( 30 km/h). When backing
into a space, the speed may not exceed
approx. 4 mph ( 7 km/h).
2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing into
the parking space. The driver controls the
vehicle's speed.
3. The vehicle's position in the parking space is
adjusted by prompting the driver to move for-
ward and rearward while the system steers.
Perpendicular parking
Procedure for perpendicular parking
PAP helps park the vehicle as follows:
1. The system searches for and measures a
possible parking space. While this is being
done, the vehicle's speed may not exceed
approx. 4 mph ( 7 km/h).
2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing into
the parking space and its position in the
space is adjusted by prompting the driver to
select D or R while the system steers. The
driver has to control the vehicle's speed.
NOTE
PAP's Park out function cannot be used to
help a vehicle leave a parking space if the
Perpendicular parking function was used
to park the vehicle.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
360
WARNING
•
PAP does not function in all situations
and is only intended to assist the driver
during parallel or perpendicular parking.
•
As the driver, you have full responsibility
for parking the vehicle in a safe manner.
Related information
•
Using Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 360)
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 363)
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* symbols and mes-
sages (p. 365)
Using Park Assist Pilot (PAP)*
Park Assist Pilot (PAP) gives the driver instruc-
tions during the parking procedure. The function
can also assist when leaving a parking space.
NOTE
While PAP is active, the driver's task is to:
•
carefully monitor the area around the
vehicle
•
follow the instructions provided in the
center display
•
select a gear (D or R) when prompted by
an audible signal
•
regulate the vehicle's speed
•
apply the brakes when necessary and
stop the vehicle
Symbols, images and text in the center display
indicate when the various steps in the parking
procedure should be carried out.
PAP can be activated if the following conditions
are met after the engine has started:
•
The vehicle may not be towing a trailer.
•
The vehicle's speed must be below approx.
20 mph (30 km/h).
•
The distance between the vehicle and a
parking space must be between 1.6-5.0 ft
(0.5-1.5 m)
NOTE
If a trailer hitch is configured in the vehicle's
electrical system, PAP will take the trailer
hitch into consideration when determining the
necessary size of a parking space.
Parking
Procedure for parking:
1. The system searches for and measures a
possible parking space.
2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing into
the parking space.
3. The vehicle's position is adjusted in the park-
ing space by moving forward and rearward.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
361
1: Searching and measuring
Parallel parking
Perpendicular parking
PAP searches for a potential parking space and
measures it to see if there is sufficient space for
your vehicle. To start this procedure:
1. Tap the
Park In button in
the center display's Function
view.
If necessary, slow down to:
•
a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h) for parallel
parking
•
approx. 12 mph ( 20 km/h) for perpendicular
parking.
2. Keep an eye on the display and be prepared
to stop the vehicle when you are instructed
by PAP to do so.
3.
Select
Parallel parking or Perpendicular
parking and put the transmission in reverse.
4. Keep an eye on the display and be prepared
to stop the vehicle when you are instructed
by PAP to do so.
5. Stop the vehicle when instructed to do so.
NOTE
PAP normally searches for available parking
spaces along the curb on the right (passeng-
er's) side of the vehicle. However, it can also
assist in finding and parking in spaces on the
driver's side. To do so:
•
Activate the left turn signal. PAP will then
search for a parking space on the left
side of the vehicle.
2: Backing into the parking space
Parallel parking
Perpendicular parking
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
362
When the vehicle is backing up, PAP will steer it
into the parking space. Do as follows:
1. Check that the area behind the vehicle is
clear and put the gear selector in R.
2. Back up slowly without moving the steering
wheel. The vehicle's speed must be below
approximately 4 mph (7 km/h).
3. Keep an eye on the instrument panel and be
prepared to stop the vehicle when you are
instructed by PAP to do so.
NOTE
•
Release the wheel while PAP is steering
the vehicle.
•
The steering wheel must be able to turn
freely.
•
For PAP to function optimally, wait until
the steering wheel is no longer turning
before beginning the next phase of the
parking procedure.
3: Adjusting the vehicle's position
Parallel
Perpendicular
After the vehicle has backed into the parking
space, its position in the space has to be
adjusted by driving slightly forward and backing
up.
1.
Put the gear selector in D, wait until the
steering wheel has turned and drive forward
slowly.
2. Stop the vehicle when you are instructed by
PAP to do so.
3.
Put the gear selector in R, back up slowly
and stop when you are instructed by PAP to
do so.
When the parking procedure is finished (this will
be indicated by a text message and a graphic
image), PAP switches off automatically. If neces-
sary, the driver may need to make minor adjust-
ments to ensure that the vehicle is parked cor-
rectly.
CAUTION
The warning distance is shorter when PAP is
using the sensors than when Park Assist is
using them.
Leaving a parking space
This function can only be used
for a vehicle that has been par-
allel parked and is activated in
the center display's Function
view.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
363
1. Tap the
Park out button in the center display's
Function view.
2. Use the turn signal to indicate the direction in
which the vehicle should leave the parking space.
3. Follow the instructions provided in the center
display. The procedure is the same as when park-
ing the vehicle.
The steering wheel may turn back slightly when
the function is completed and the driver may
have to turn the back before leaving the parking
space.
If PAP determines that the driver can leave the
parking space without assistance, the function
will deactivate before the vehicle is completely
out of the space.
Related information
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 359)
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 363)
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* symbols and mes-
sages (p. 365)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations
The PAP function may be limited in certain situa-
tions.
The PAP parking sequence is cancelled
A parking sequence will be cancelled:
•
if the vehicle is driven too fast: above approx.
4 mph (7 km/h)
•
if the driver taps
Cancel in the center display
•
if the driver moves the steering wheel with
sufficient force.
•
if the anti-lock brakes or Electronic Stability
Control are activated (e.g., if a wheel begins
to spin or lose traction)
In such cases, a text message will explain why
the parking sequence was cancelled.
NOTE
•
PAP will not function correctly if its sen-
sors are obstructed by dirt, snow, etc.
•
In certain situations, PAP may not be able
to measure a parking space. This could
be due to external sources of sound (e.g.,
a vehicle's horn, tires on wet asphalt,
pneumatic brakes, noise from a motorcy-
cle's exhaust, etc.) emitting ultrasound
using approximately the same frequen-
cies as PAP.
Points to keep in mind
PAP is a parking aid only and the driver should
always be prepared to take control and cancel a
parking sequence. This can be due to one or
more of the following factors:
•
PAP's function is based on the way that the
vehicles are parked behind and in front of
your parking space. If they are, for example,
parked too close to the curb, there is a risk
that your vehicle's tires or wheel rims could
be damaged by the curb during the parking
procedure.
•
PAP is intended to provide parking assis-
tance on straight streets, not sections of
street with curved or irregular curbs. Be sure
that your vehicle is parallel to the curb when
PAP measures the parking space.
•
PAP may not be able to provide parking
assistance on narrow streets due to lack of
space to maneuver the vehicle. In situations
like this, it may help to drive between
1.5-5.0 ft (0.5-1.5 m) from the side of the
road where the parking space is located.
•
Use only approved tires with the correct infla-
tion pressure because this affects PAP's
capacity to provide parking assistance.
Changing to a different approved tire size
may affect PAP's parameters. Consult a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
364
•
Heavy rain or snow may inhibit PAP's
capacity to correctly measure a parking
space.
•
Do not use PAP when using snow chains
and/or a temporary spare tire.
•
Do not use PAP if there are any objects pro-
truding from the vehicle.
WARNING
•
The front end of your vehicle may turn out
toward oncoming traffic during the park-
ing procedure.
•
Objects located above the parking sen-
sors' field of vision are not included when
PAP measures a parking space. For this
reason, PAP may turn into the parking
space too soon. Avoid parking spaces of
this type.
•
The driver is always responsible for deter-
mining if PAP has selected a suitable
parking space.
Maintenance
Location of the PAP sensors
In order for PAP to function correctly, these sen-
sors must be cleaned regularly with water and a
suitable car washing detergent.
Related information
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 359)
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 363)
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* symbols and mes-
sages (p. 365)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
365
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* symbols
and messages
Park Assist Pilot uses graphics and text mes-
sages to indicate if there is a problem with the
system.
Various PAP-related combinations of graphics
and text messages are displayed in the instru-
ment panel and sometimes also include suitable
actions.
The following table provides some examples.
Message Explanation
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
One or more of the system's sensors are blocked. Check and clean the sensors as soon as possible.
A text message can be erased by briefly pressing
the O button in the center of the right-side steer-
ing wheel keypad.
Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician If a message indicating
that PAP is not functioning properly remains dis-
played or recurs.
Related information
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 359)
•
Using Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 360)
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 363)
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
368
Starting and driving
The vehicle is equipped with features that sup-
plement its basic functions, such as shifting
gears with steering wheel paddles*.
The vehicle is equipped with an automatic trans-
mission that also makes it possible to shift gears
manually.
Certain functions can also be used when the
engine is not running, depending on the ignition
mode being used.
Related information
•
Starting the engine (p. 369)
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
•
Automatic transmission (p. 374)
•
Opening/closing the fuel filler door (p. 400)
•
Parking brake (p. 391)
Ignition modes
The vehicle's ignition can be put in various
modes (levels) to make different functions availa-
ble.
The vehicle's ignition has 3 modes: 0, I, and II
that can be used to operate various functions
without starting the engine. The following table
shows examples of which functions are available
in the respective modes.
Mode Functions available
0
•
The odometer, clock and tem-
perature gauge are illuminated
•
Power seats* can be adjusted
•
The power windows can be oper-
ated
•
The 12-volt socket in the cargo
compartment can be used
•
The center display is activated
and can be used
•
The infotainment system can be
used for a limited time
In this mode, certain functions can
only be used for a limited time to help
minimize battery drain
I
•
The laminated panoramic roof*,
power seats*/windows,12-volt
sockets in the passenger com-
partment, Bluetooth, navigation
system*, climate system blower,
windshield wipers can be oper-
ated
•
The infotainment system will start
(if it was started when the ignition
was switched off)
Using electrical current will drain
the start battery in this mode.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
369
Mode Functions available
II
•
The headlights illuminate
•
Warning/indicator lights illumi-
nate for 5 seconds
•
A number of other functions will
also be activated. However, the
heated seats* and heated rear
window functions can only be
activated when the engine is run-
ning.
This mode should only be used for
very short periods to help avoid
draining the battery.
Selecting an ignition mode
Start knob in the tunnel console (generic illustration)
•
Ignition mode 0: unlock the vehicle and
keep the remote key in the passenger's com-
partment.
NOTE
To access ignition modes I or II without star-
ting the engine, the brake pedal must not be
depressed when these modes are selected.
•
Ignition mode I: Turn the start knob clock-
wise as far as possible and release it. The
knob will return automatically to its original
position.
•
Ignition mode II: Turn the start knob clock-
wise as far as possible and hold it there for
approx. 4 seconds. Release the knob.
•
Returning to ignition mode 0: To return to
mode 0 from mode II or I, turn the start knob
clockwise as far as possible and release it.
Related information
•
Starting the engine (p. 369)
•
Turning the engine off (p. 372)
Starting the engine
The engine can be started using the start knob
on the tunnel console if there is a remote key in
the passenger compartment.
Start knob in the tunnel console between the front seats
(generic illustration)
WARNING
Before starting the engine:
•
Fasten the seat belt.
•
Check that the seat, steering wheel and
mirrors are adjusted properly.
•
Make sure the brake pedal can be
depressed completely. Adjust the seat if
necessary.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
370
To start the engine.
1. A remote key must be in the passenger com-
partment. On models with the standard
Passive Start, the key has to be in the front
section of the passenger compartment. If the
vehicle is equipped the optional Passive
Entry system (keyless locking/unlocking) the
key can be anywhere in the vehicle.
2.
Press firmly on the brake pedal
1
.
3. Turn the start knob clockwise as far as possi-
ble and release it to start the engine.
> The starter motor will crank until the
engine starts or its overheating protection
is triggered.
WARNING
•
Never use more than one floor mat at a
time on the driver's floor. Before driving,
remove the original mat from the driver's
seat floor before using any other type of
floor mat. Any mat used in this position
should be securely and properly anchored
in the attaching pins. An extra mat on the
driver's floor can cause the accelerator
and/or brake pedal to catch. Check that
the movement of these pedals is not
impeded.
•
Volvo's floor mats are specially manufac-
tured for your car. They must be firmly
secured in the clips on the floor so that
they cannot slide and become trapped
under the pedals on the driver's side.
During normal starts, the electric motor is priori-
tized and the gasoline engine will not start. This
means that when the start knob has been turned
clockwise and released, the electric motor is acti-
vated ("started") and the vehicle is ready to be
driven. The warning and information symbols in
the instrument panel will go out and the chosen
theme will be displayed to indicate that the elec-
tric motor has been activated.
However, in certain situations, such as in cold
weather or if the hybrid battery is not sufficiently
charged, the gasoline engine will start instead.
The vehicle should not be started if the
charging cable is connected. However, if the
cable cannot be disconnected or if the vehicle
incorrectly detects a cable that is not connected,
the vehicle can be started using an override pro-
cedure:
1. Press the brake pedal and turn the start
knob clockwise as far as possible.
2.
Remove charge cable to start will appear
in the instrument panel.
3. Turn the start knob clockwise as far as possi-
ble again.
4.
Charge cable removed? Press start
button 7s to start will be displayed. Turn
the start knob clockwise as far as possible
again and hold it for 7 seconds to start the
vehicle.
NOTE
The vehicle cannot be started if the hybrid
battery is discharged.
1
If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to turn the start knob clockwise as far as possible to start the engine.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
371
Back-up reader in the tunnel console
If Vehicle key not found is displayed in the
instrument panel, place the remote key in the
back-up reader in the tunnel console (see the
illustration) and try again to start the engine.
NOTE
When the remote key is in the back-up
reader, be sure there are no other metallic
objects (e.g., other keys, coins, cell phones) in
the cup holder. This could affect the back-up
reader's function.
If Vehicle start System check, wait is dis-
played in the instrument panel when you try to
start the vehicle, wait until the message is no
longer displayed and try to start again.
CAUTION
If the engine does not start after the third try,
wait for approximately 3 minutes before trying
to start it again to give the battery time to
recover its starting capacity.
WARNING
•
Always remove the remote key from the
passenger compartment when leaving the
vehicle and ensure that the ignition in
mode 0.
•
On vehicles with the optional Passive
Entry, never remove the remote key from
the vehicle while it is being driven or
towed.
•
Always place the gear selector in Park
and apply the parking brake before leav-
ing the vehicle. Never leave the vehicle
unattended with the engine running.
•
Always open garage doors fully before
starting the engine inside a garage to
ensure adequate ventilation. The exhaust
gases contain carbon monoxide, which is
invisible and odorless but very poisonous.
NOTE
After a cold start, idle speed may be noticea-
bly higher than normal for a short period. This
is done to help bring components in the
emission control system to their normal oper-
ating temperature as quickly as possible,
which enables them to control emissions and
help reduce the vehicle's impact on the envi-
ronment.
CAUTION
•
When starting in cold weather, the auto-
matic transmission may shift up at slightly
higher engine speeds than normal until
the automatic transmission fluid reaches
normal operating temperature.
•
Do not race a cold engine immediately
after starting. Oil flow may not reach
some lubrication points fast enough to
prevent engine damage.
•
The engine should be idling when you
move the gear selector. Never accelerate
until after you feel the transmission
engage. Accelerating immediately after
selecting a gear will cause harsh engage-
ment and premature transmission wear.
•
Selecting P or N when idling at a stand-
still for prolonged periods of time will help
prevent overheating of the automatic
transmission fluid.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
372
Related information
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
•
Turning the engine off (p. 372)
•
Changing the remote key's battery (p. 243)
•
Jump starting (p. 372)
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 414)
•
Hybrid-related symbols and messages
(p. 426)
Turning the engine off
The engine can be turned off using the start
knob on the tunnel console.
Start knob in the tunnel console between the front seats
To turn off the engine:
–
Turn the start knob clockwise as far as possi-
ble and release it to switch the engine off.
If the gear selector is in P or if the vehicle is mov-
ing:
–
Turn the start knob clockwise as far as possi-
ble and hold it in this position until the
engine stops.
Related information
•
Starting the engine (p. 369)
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
Jump starting
Follow the instructions provided here to jump
start your vehicle or to jump start another vehi-
cle.
Jumper cable connecting terminals
NOTE
The vehicle cannot be started if the hybrid
battery is discharged.
CAUTION
The vehicle's jumper cable connecting termi-
nals may only be used to start your vehicle.
They are not intended to be used to help start
another vehicle. If they are used to start
another vehicle, a fuse may blow and the ter-
minal will not function.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
373
If a fuse blows, 12 V Battery Fuse failure
Service required will be displayed in the instru-
ment panel. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
Use the following steps when jump starting your
vehicle to help prevent short circuits or other
damage.
1.
Switch the ignition off completely (mode 0).
2. Ensure that the auxiliary battery to be used is
12-volt.
3. If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in
another vehicle, switch off that vehicle's igni-
tion and be sure that the vehicles are not
touching each other.
4. Connect one of the red jumper cable's
clamps to the auxiliary battery's positive (+)
terminal (1).
CAUTION
Connect the jumper cables carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
5. Open the cover over the positive (+) jump
start terminal (2).
6. Connect the red jumper cable's other clamp
to your vehicle's positive (+) jump start termi-
nal (2).
7. Connect one of the black jumper cable's
clamps to the auxiliary battery's negative (–)
terminal (3).
8. Connect the black jumper cable's other
clamp to your vehicle's negative (–) jump
start terminal (4).
9. Check that the jumper cables are securely
attached to help avoid sparks when the vehi-
cle is started.
10. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle and
run it for a short time at approx. 1,500 rpm.
11. Start the engine in your vehicle. If the vehicle
does not start, allow an additional
10 minutes of charging time and then try to
start the engine again.
NOTE
During normal starts, the electric motor is pri-
oritized and the gasoline engine will not start.
This means that when the start knob has
been turned clockwise as far as possible and
released, the electric motor is activated
("started") and the vehicle is ready to be
driven. The warning and information symbols
in the instrument panel will go out and the
chosen theme will be displayed to indicate
that the electric motor has been activated.
CAUTION
Do not touch the jumper cable connections
while the vehicle is being started. This could
generate sparks.
12. After the vehicle has started, carefully
remove the jumper cables in reverse order,
beginning with the black one.
Ensure that the black jumper cable's clamps
do not come in contact with the vehicle's or
the auxiliary battery's positive terminals or
the red jumper cable's clamps while it is con-
nected.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
374
WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds, chemi-
cals known to the state of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.
WARNING
•
Do not connect the jumper cable to any
part of the fuel system or to any moving
parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds.
•
Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which
is flammable and explosive.
•
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin,
fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact
occurs, flush the affected area immedi-
ately with water. Obtain medical help
immediately if eyes are affected.
•
Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark.
•
Do not smoke near the battery.
•
Failure to follow the instructions for jump
starting can lead to injury.
Related information
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
•
Starting the engine (p. 369)
•
Turning the engine off (p. 372)
•
Start battery (p. 524)
•
Opening and closing the hood (p. 515)
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 414)
Automatic transmission
The automatic transmission has 8 forward gears
and an electric motor that powers the rear
wheels. Steering wheel paddles* make it possi-
ble to shift manually. The gear indicator in the
instrument panel shows the gear currently being
used or gear shift mode.
CAUTION
The transmission’s temperature is monitored
to help prevent damage to the transmission
or other drivetrain components. If there is a
risk of overheating, the warning symbol on the
instrument panel will illuminate and a text
message will be displayed. Follow the instruc-
tions provided there.
Symbols in the instrument panel
If a problem should occur with the transmission, a
symbol and a message will be displayed in the
instrument panel.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
375
Symbol Explanation
Transmission-related information.
Follow the instructions provided.
Hot or overheated transmission.
Follow the instructions provided.
Reduced performance/Acceler-
ation performance reduced.
In the event of a temporary drive-
train problem, the "Limp home"
mode may be triggered, which low-
ers engine output to help prevent
engine damage.
Related information
•
Gear selector positions (p. 375)
•
Gear shift indicator (p. 377)
•
Shiftlock (p. 378)
•
Steering wheel paddles* (p. 378)
Gear selector positions
The shift-by-wire gear transmission shifts gears
electronically instead of mechanically for faster
and more distinct gear shifting.
Selecting gears
Select gears by moving the spring-loaded, non-
locking gear selector forward or rearward.
Gear selector positions
The following gear selector positions are shown
in the instrument panel:
P, R, N, D or B (brake).
For manual shifting, the gear indicator in the
instrument panel shows the gear currently being
used (1–8).
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
376
Park – P
Park is activated using a switch located next to
the gear selector.
Select P when the vehicle is parked or when star-
ting the engine. The vehicle must be stationary
when P is selected.
To select another gear, the ignition must be in
mode II and the brake pedal must be depressed.
Help functions:
The system will automatically shift to P:
•
If the ignition is switched off while D or R is
selected.
•
If the driver unbuckles the seat belt and
opens the door while the engine is running if
P has not already been selected.
In position P, the transmission is mechanically
locked. Always apply the parking brake when the
vehicle is parked.
NOTE
The gear selector must be in the P position
before the vehicle can be locked and the
alarm set.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when the
vehicle is parked, particularly when parking on
a hill. The transmission's P mode may not be
able to keep the vehicle stationary if it is
parked on an incline.
Reverse – R
The vehicle must be stationary before R can be
selected.
Neutral – N
No gear is selected and the engine can be
started. Always apply the parking brake if the
vehicle is not moving and the gear selector is in
the N position.
The ignition must be in mode II and the brake
pedal must be depressed before the gear selec-
tor can be moved from N.
Drive – D
D is the normal driving position and gear shifting
is fully automatic. The vehicle must be stationary
when the gear selector is moved from R to D.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
377
Brake – B
B can be selected at any time during a drive. In
this mode, the engine braking function is acti-
vated when the accelerator pedal is released,
which helps charge the hybrid battery. This
means that the hybrid battery is charged even if
the brake pedal is not depressed.
B mode in the instrument panel
With B selected, manual shifting to lower gears
is possible. The gear indicator in the instrument
panel shows the gear currently being used (1–8).
Each time the gear selector is pulled rearward,
the transmission will shift down one gear.
In order to manually shift to higher gears, the
vehicle must be equipped with steering wheel
paddles*.
•
Press the gear selector forward to return to
D mode.
For smooth shifting and engine performance, the
transmission will shift down automatically if the
vehicle's speed becomes too low for the selected
gear.
Safety function
To help avoid excessive rpm that might cause
engine damage, the transmission control module
has a down-shift protection feature that in some
situations may prevent a down-shift or kickdown.
During kickdown, the transmission may shift
down one or more gears, depending on the
engine's rpm and will shift up again when max.
rpm is reached for a specific gear.
Related information
•
Steering wheel paddles* (p. 378)
•
Shiftlock (p. 378)
•
Gear shift indicator (p. 377)
Gear shift indicator
The gear shift indicator in the instrument panel
shows the current gear (in manual shifting
mode) and will prompt the driver to shift up or
down to help get the best possible fuel econ-
omy.
The gear shift indicator shows the current gear in
the instrument panel and uses an upward arrow
to recommend shifting to a higher gear. The indi-
cator is also shown in mode B or if the steering
wheel paddles* are being used in while the trans-
mission is in mode D.
Gear shift indicator (generic illustration)
Related information
•
Gear selector positions (p. 375)
•
Steering wheel paddles* (p. 378)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
378
Shiftlock
The automatic transmission's shiftlock feature
helps prevent inadvertently moving the gear
selector between different positions.
Automatic shiftlock
From Park – P
In order to move the gear selector from the P
position, the brake pedal must be depressed and
the ignition must be in mode II.
From neutral – N
If the gear selector is in N and the vehicle has
been stationary for more than 3 seconds (regard-
less of whether or not the engine is running), the
shiftlock feature will lock the gear selector in this
position.
In order to move the gear selector from the N
position, the brake pedal must be depressed and
the ignition must be in mode II.
Messages in the instrument panel
If the gear selector is locked in position, a mes-
sage such as:
Gear lever Press brake pedal
to activate gear lever will be displayed.
There is no mechanical shiftlock function.
Related information
•
Gear selector positions (p. 375)
•
Automatic transmission (p. 374)
Steering wheel paddles*
In addition to the manual gearshift function using
the gear selector, the paddles make it possible
to manually shift gears from the steering wheel.
Activating the paddles
In order to shift gears with the paddles, they have
to first be activated. To do so:
–
Pull either paddle toward the steering wheel
and release it.
> A number in the instrument panel will indi-
cate the current gear being used.
Instrument panel when the paddles are activated
Shifting
To shift one gear:
–
Pull either paddle toward the steering wheel
and release it.
"–": Shift down one gear.
"+": Shift up one gear.
A gear shift will take place each time a paddle is
pulled if the engine speed (rpm) is within the per-
missible range for the selected gear.
The gear number shown in the instrument panel
will change after each gear shift.
Deactivating the paddles
Manual deactivation in modes D and B
–
Pull the right (+) paddle toward the steering
wheel and hold it until the number of the cur-
rent gear is no longer displayed in the instru-
ment panel.
> The transmission will revert to automatic
gear shifting in the D or B mode, depend-
ing on which mode was selected when
the paddles were activated.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
379
Automatic deactivation
In shift mode D, if the paddles are not used for a
period of time, they will deactivate automatically.
The number of the current gear will no longer be
displayed.
In mode B, the paddles will not deactivate auto-
matically.
Related information
•
Gear selector positions (p. 375)
•
Gear shift indicator (p. 377)
Driving systems
Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid vehicles are parallel
hybrids, which means that they have two sepa-
rate drive systems: an electric motor and a gaso-
line engine.
Two drive systems
Depending on the drive mode selected and the
amount of electric power available in the hybrid
battery, the two systems can be used in tandem
or separately.
The electric motor is powered by a hybrid battery
located under the tunnel console. This battery
can be charged from a wall socket or special
charging stations. The gasoline engine can also
charge the hybrid battery using a special high-
voltage generator.
The gasoline engine and electric motor both gen-
erate power directly to the wheels. A control sys-
tem coordinates both of the drive systems to help
optimize driving economy.
Hybrid battery: stores electrical current,
which is provided by connecting the charging
cable to the electricity grid, through regener-
ative braking or from the high-voltage gener-
ator. This makes it possible to drive using the
electric motor or to power the electrical air
conditioning to precondition the passenger
compartment.
Gasoline engine: starts when the charge
level in the electric motor is too low to pro-
vide the power output that the driver requires.
High voltage generator
2
: charges the hybrid
battery and starts the gasoline engine. It can
also provide the gasoline engine with extra
electrical current.
Electric motor: powers the vehicle using
electricity and can provide extra torque and
power during acceleration. It combines with
2
Combined generator and starter motor (Crank Integrated Starter Generator).
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
380
the gasoline engine to provide all-wheel drive
functionality and regenerates braking energy
into electrical current.
Related information
•
Drive modes (p. 380)
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 414)
•
General information about Twin Engine Plug-
in Hybrid vehicles (p. 53)
•
Parking climate (preconditioning) (p. 201)
Drive modes
Selecting a drive mode affects the vehicle's driv-
ing characteristics to help make driving more
enjoyable or easier in certain types of situations.
The following systems are adapted to help pro-
vide the best vehicle performance in the respec-
tive drive modes:
•
Steering
•
Engine/transmission/All Wheel Drive*
•
Brakes
•
Pneumatic suspension* and suspension con-
trol
•
Instrument panel
•
Climate system settings
Select the drive mode best suited to the current
driving conditions.
Please be aware that not all modes can be
selected in all driving situations. The selected
mode will be displayed in the instrument panel.
Selecting a drive mode
1.
Press the DRIVE MODE control in the tun-
nel console.
> A pop-up menu will open in the center
display.
2. Roll the control upward or downward to scroll
to the desired drive mode.
3. Press the control again to select it. A drive
mode can also be selected by tapping its
button on the center display.
> The selected drive mode will be displayed
in the instrument panel.
When a drive mode cannot be selected, one of
the following messages may be displayed:
•
Not possible to select due to gear in
manual
•
Not possible to select due to low battery
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
381
•
Not possible to select due to low
temperature
•
Not possible to select due to limitations
•
Not possible to select due to high
speed.
Available drive modes
WARNING
•
Keep in mind that a hybrid vehicle using
the electric motor does not emit engine
noise and may be difficult to detect for
e.g., children, pedestrians, cyclists or ani-
mals. This is particularly true at low
speeds.
•
Do not leave the vehicle in an unventila-
ted area with a drive mode activated and
the gasoline engine switched off. The
engine will start automatically if the
charge level in the hybrid battery is low
and the resulting exhaust gases can be
very harmful to people or animals.
HYBRID
This is the default mode in which the electric
motor and gasoline engine are both utilized.
The vehicle starts in
Hybrid mode. The control
system uses the electric motor and the gasoline
engine, separately or in tandem, and calculates
optimal use with respect to performance, fuel
consumption and comfort. At higher speeds,
ground clearance is lowered automatically to help
reduce wind resistance. Driving capacity on the
electric motor alone is determined by the hybrid
battery's charge level and e.g., the need for heat-
ing/cooling in the passenger compartment.
If sufficient electrical energy is available, only the
electric motor will be activated when the driver
presses the accelerator pedal up to a certain
level. Above this level, the gasoline engine will
start. Charge the hybrid battery using the charg-
ing cable or activate the vehicle's
Charge func-
tion in the center display's Top view in order to
drive using the electric motor only. See also the
article "Maintaining/increasing hybrid battery
charge while driving" for additional information.
This drive mode is adapted to help provide low
energy consumption with an optimized mix using
the electric motor and the gasoline engine with-
out affecting passenger compartment comfort or
the general driving experience. For faster acceler-
ation, the electric motor provides maximal added
output. The vehicle also determines if All Wheel
Drive is required and automatically activates this
if necessary. All Wheel Drive and added output
from the electric motor are always available,
regardless of the hybrid battery's charge level.
Information in the instrument panel
When driving in
Hybrid mode, a hybrid gauge will
be displayed in the instrument panel. The indica-
tor in the gauge will show the amount of electri-
cal current required when the driver presses the
accelerator pedal. The marker between the "light-
ning" and "oil drop" symbols indicates the
amount of energy available. See also the article
"Hybrid-related information in the instrument
panel" for additional information.
The instrument panel gauge when both the electric
motor and gasoline engine are being used
The gauge also indicates when the
battery is being recharged (regener-
ated) during light braking. See the arti-
cle "Brakes" for additional information.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
382
PURE
Driver display when only the electric motor is being used
This mode activates the electric motor only with
as low energy consumption as possible and the
lowest possible carbon dioxide emissions.
Pure maximizes the use of the hybrid battery.
Ground clearance will be lowered to help reduce
wind resistance and certain climate system func-
tions will be reduced.
Pure mode is available when the hybrid battery is
sufficiently charged. If the charge level gets too
low, the gasoline engine will start.
The gasoline engine will also start:
•
If the vehicle's speed goes above approx.
78 mph (125 km/h)
•
If the driver wants more response than the
electric motor alone can provide
•
If factors such as cold weather, etc., affect
the system or components
This drive mode is optimized for maximal driving
range using the electric motor and is primarily
intended for use in city driving. PURE is designed
to help minimize energy consumption even when
the hybrid battery is discharged. Passenger com-
partment climate system functions are reduced
(see the following section "ECO climate) and in
slippery conditions, slightly more wheel spin will
be allowed before All Wheel Drive activates.
WARNING
Please be aware that there is no sound from
the gasoline engine when the vehicle is being
powered by the electric motor and the vehicle
may be difficult to detect by children, pedes-
trians, cyclists and animals. This is especially
true at low speeds.
ECO climate
In the Pure drive mode, ECO climate in the pas-
senger compartment is activated automatically to
help reduce energy consumption.
NOTE
When the Pure drive mode is activated, set-
tings for certain climate system/electricity-
consuming functions are reduced. Some of
these settings can be reset manually but full
functionality will only be restored by leaving
the Pure drive mode or by adapting the set-
tings in the Individual drive mode to full cli-
mate system functionality.
If condensation forms on the windows, tap the
max. defroster button, which will function nor-
mally.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
383
OFF ROAD
This mode helps maximize the vehicle's capacity
to traverse difficult terrain or poor roads.
In OFF ROAD, ground clearance is maximized,
the steering is light, All Wheel Drive and Hill
Descent Control are activated and a compass will
be displayed between the speedometer and tach-
ometer in the instrument panel.
This drive mode is only available at low speeds up
to approx. 25 mph (40 km/h) (the permissible
speed range will be shown on the speedometer).
At higher speeds, OFF ROAD mode will be can-
celled and AWD will be activated.
This drive mode is optimized to help provide max-
imal control at low speeds in poor road surfaces
or in difficult driving conditions. It raises the chas-
sis (models with pneumatic suspension only),
reduces response when the accelerator pedal is
pressed and locks the drivetrain in All Wheel
Drive. Hill Descent Control helps provide stability
when driving down steep inclines.
CAUTION
OFF ROAD drive mode may not be used if
the vehicle is towing a trailer without an elec-
trical connection. This could result in damage
to the pneumatic suspension system's bel-
lows.
NOTE
•
This mode is not intended for normal
street driving.
•
Due to the increased ground clearance, if
the OFF ROAD mode was selected when
the engine was switched off, the suspen-
sion will lower when the engine is restar-
ted.
AWD
This mode offers improved traction on slippery
surfaces by using four-wheel drive. It also helps
increase directional stability at higher speeds, for
example when towing a trailer.
In this mode, both the electric motor and the gas-
oline engine are utilized, which results in higher
fuel consumption.
In the other drive modes, the vehicle automati-
cally adapts the need for All Wheel Drive accord-
ing to the road surface and may activate the elec-
tric motor or start the gasoline engine as
required.
POWER
Power mode is intended for sportier, more active
driving.
This mode maximizes the combined effects of
the electric motor and the gasoline engine and
provides power to all four wheels. Response to
pressure on the accelerator pedal is more imme-
diate and the transmission shifts up at higher
rpm. Steering response is also more immediate,
the suspension is stiffer and lower ground clear-
ance reduces body roll when cornering.
In this mode, both the electric motor and the gas-
oline engine are utilized, which results in higher
fuel consumption.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
384
INDIVIDUAL
This setting allows you to adapt a drive mode to
your personal preferences.
Select one of the other drive modes as a basis
and change the settings to provide the driving
characteristics that you prefer. These settings
can be saved in a driver profile.
INDIVIDUAL is only available if it has been acti-
vated in the center display.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
My Car Individual Drive Mode and
tap
Individual Drive Mode.
3.
Under
Presets, select: Pure, Hybrid or
Power.
The following settings can be modified:
•
Driver Display
•
Steering force
•
Powertrain Characteristics
•
Brake Characteristics
•
Pneumatic suspension and shock
absorbers
•
ECO Climate
Use of the gasoline engine
An advanced control system determines the dis-
tance that the vehicle can be driven using the
gasoline engine, electric motor or both at the
same time.
Its primary function is to use the motor/engine
and the current available in the hybrid battery as
efficiently as possible based on the characteris-
tics of the various drive modes and the power
output requested by the driver by pressing the
accelerator pedal.
In certain cases, temporary limitations in the sys-
tem or mandatory functions to help maintain a
low overall emissions level may result in greater
use of the gasoline engine.
Related information
•
Adjustable steering force* (p. 254)
•
Loading (p. 216)
•
Driver profiles (p. 174)
•
General information about Twin Engine Plug-
in Hybrid vehicles (p. 53)
•
All Wheel Drive (AWD) (p. 387)
•
Hill Descent Control (HDC) (p. 396)
•
Brakes (p. 387)
•
Hybrid-related information in the instrument
panel (p. 100)
•
Maintaining/increasing the hybrid battery's
charge while driving (p. 384)
•
When the gasoline engine starts and stops in
hybrid vehicles (p. 406)
Maintaining/increasing the hybrid
battery's charge while driving
In certain situations, it can be useful to control
the hybrid battery's charge level while the vehicle
is being driven. The hybrid battery functions
Hold and Charge while driving are available in
all drive modes.
The "Hold" and "Charge" function
buttons
These functions are activated from the center
display's Function view.
Hold
Battery level sustained for
later use.
This function saves the hybrid
battery's charge for use at a
later time such as when driving
in an urban area or residential
neighborhood.
Hold is available regardless of the
hybrid battery's charge level.
The vehicle will function as in normal hybrid driv-
ing and will use energy from e.g., regenerative
braking to support the gasoline engine.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
385
Charge
Engine charges hybrid
battery.
This function charges the hybrid battery with the
help of the gasoline engine for use at a later
time. It is not available if the hybrid battery's
charge level is already high.
After the battery has been charged up to a cer-
tain level,
Hold is activated automatically.
Symbol in the instrument panel
Hold
Charge
The symbol will appear in the instrument
panel when either of these functions is activated.
See also the article "Hybrid-related symbols and
messages" for additional information.
Related information
•
Hybrid-related symbols and messages
(p. 426)
•
Drive modes (p. 380)
•
Using the electric motor in city driving
(p. 406)
•
Driving economically (p. 404)
Leveling control* and suspension
The leveling control system adjusts the suspen-
sion and shock absorbers automatically to help
provide good comfort and control while driving.
Leveling can also be controlled manually to
make loading or getting in and out of the vehicle
easier.
Pneumatic suspension and shock
absorbers
This system is linked to the selected drive mode
and is adapted to the vehicle's speed. The pneu-
matic suspension reduces the vehicle's ground
clearance at higher speeds to reduce wind resis-
tance and increase stability. The shock absorbers
are normally set to provide the best possible
comfort and are adjusted continuously according
to the road surface, acceleration, braking and
cornering.
The instrument panel will indicate when the sus-
pension level is being adjusted.
The level cannot be adjusted if one of the side
doors or the hood is open.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
386
Suspension settings
Easy entry
The vehicle can be lowered to entering and exit-
ing easier.
In the center display's Top view:
1.
Tap
Settings.
2.
Tap
My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.
3.
Select
Easy Entry and Exit Suspension
Control.
> When the vehicle is parked and the
engine is turned off, the level is lowered.
Level adjustment will stop if a side door is
opened and will resume after a slight
delay when the door has been closed.
When the engine is started and the vehi-
cle begins to move, the level will be raised
to the height set by the selected drive
mode.
If a door has been opened and closed, there may
be a slight delay before the leveling function will
resume.
Deactivating suspension and leveling control
In certain situations, this function has to be
turned off, for example when lifting the vehicle on
a jack to help avoid problems created by the dif-
ference in levels in the pneumatic suspension
when the vehicle is raised.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension
.
3.
Select
Disable Leveling Control.
Loading mode
Use the buttons in the cargo compartment to
raise or lower the vehicle to make loading or
unloading easier or when attaching a trailer.
Parking the vehicle
When parking, be sure that there is adequate
space above and below the vehicle since its
ground clearance may vary, e.g., depending on
the ambient temperature, how the vehicle is loa-
ded, if loading mode is being used or the drive
mode selected after the engine is started.
The level may also be adjusted for a certain time
after the vehicle has been parked to compensate
for possible height adjustments due to tempera-
ture changes in the pneumatic suspension when
the vehicle has cooled.
Transport
When transporting the vehicle on a ferry, train or
a tow truck, it may only be secured (lashed)
around the tires, not using any other chassis
components. Changes in the pneumatic suspen-
sion may occur during transport that could nega-
tively affect the lashing and result in damage.
Related information
•
Drive modes (p. 380)
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 409)
•
Loading (p. 216)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
387
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
3
Your Volvo can be equipped with All Wheel
Drive, which means that power is distributed
automatically between the front and rear wheels.
The electric motor that powers the rear wheels
enables electronic all wheel drive functionality.
Under normal driving conditions, most of the
engine's power is directed to the front wheels.
However, if there is any tendency for the front
wheels to spin, an electronically controlled cou-
pling distributes power to the wheels that have
the best traction.
AWD reacts differently, depending on the drive
mode selected.
Related information
•
Drive modes (p. 380)
•
Low Speed Control (LSC) (p. 395)
Brake functions
The vehicle's standard braking features are aug-
mented by a number of auxiliary help functions.
In addition to the wheel brakes and the parking
brake, the vehicle is equipped with several auto-
matic brake assist functions. These systems help
the driver by e.g., keeping the vehicle stationary
when the brake pedal is not depressed (at a traf-
fic light or intersection), when starting up a hill or
when driving down a hill.
These systems include:
•
Auto-hold brakes
•
Hill Start Assist
•
Braking assist after a collision
•
Hill Descent Control*
4
Related information
•
Brakes (p. 387)
•
Parking brake (p. 391)
•
Hill Descent Control (HDC) (p. 396)
•
Auto-hold brake function (p. 394)
Brakes
The brake system is a hydraulic system consist-
ing of two separate brake circuits. If a problem
should occur in one of these circuits, it is still
possible to stop the vehicle with the other brake
circuit.
Brake system
If one of the brake circuits is not functioning,
more pressure will be needed on the brake pedal
(and the pedal will go down farther) for normal
braking effect.
If the brake pedal must be depressed farther
than normal and requires greater foot pressure,
the stopping distance will be longer.
Pressure on the brake pedal is enhanced by the
power braking function.
WARNING
If the vehicle does not have electrical current
and both the electric motor and gasoline
engine are switched off, the brakes cannot be
used to stop the vehicle.
When the Hill Start Assist function is being used,
it will take slightly longer for the brake pedal to
return to its normal position if the vehicle is
parked on an incline or uneven surface.
3
Standard equipment on certain models.
4
Not available on all models.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
388
When driving in very hilly areas or if the vehicle is
carrying a heavy load, use brake mode B to aug-
ment the brakes.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
The ABS system helps to improve vehicle control
(stopping and steering) during severe braking
conditions by limiting brake lockup.
When ABS is operating, there may be some
vibration in the brake pedal, which is normal.
The system performs a brief self-diagnostic test
when the engine has been started and driver
releases the brake pedal. Another automatic test
may be performed when the vehicle first reaches
a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). The
brake pedal will pulsate several times and a
sound may be audible from the ABS control
module, which is normal.
Light braking charges the hybrid battery
When the brakes are applied lightly, the electric
motor's braking function is used, which converts
kinetic energy into electricity that is used to
charge the hybrid battery. This is indicated in the
instrument panel, see also the article "General
information about Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid
vehicles".
Battery charging gauge in the instrument panel
This function is active at speeds from approx.
90 mph (150 km/h) down to 3 mph (5 km/h).
When braking at speeds outside of this range or
during harder braking, the hydraulic brake system
is used.
Cleaning the brake discs
Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs
may result in delayed brake function. This delay is
minimized by cleaning the brake linings.
Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet
weather, prior to long-term parking, and after the
vehicle has been washed. Do this by braking gen-
tly for a short period while the vehicle is moving.
Driving on wet or salted roads
Prolonged driving on wet or salted roads can
affect brake function and increase stopping dis-
tance. Be sure to keep a safe distance to the
vehicle ahead when driving under these condi-
tions.
Brake pad inspection
On vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condition
of the brake pads can be checked by raising the
vehicle and performing a visual inspection of the
brake pads.
WARNING
•
If the vehicle has been driven immediately
prior to a brake pad inspection, the wheel
hub, brake components, etc., will be very
hot. Allow time for these components to
cool before carrying out the inspection.
•
Apply the parking brake and put the gear
selector in the Park (P) position.
•
Block the wheels standing on the ground,
use rigid wooden blocks or large stones.
STARTING AND DRIVING
389
WARNING
•
Use the jack intended for the vehicle
when changing a tire. For any other job,
use stands to support the vehicle.
•
The jack should be kept well-greased and
clean, and should not be damaged.
•
Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non-
slippery surface.
•
No objects should be placed between the
base of jack and the ground, or between
the jack and the attachment bar on the
vehicle.
•
The jack must correctly engage the jack
attachment.
•
Never allow any part of your body to be
extended under a vehicle supported by a
jack.
Instrument panel symbols
Symbol Explanation
A
B
Red symbol: Check the brake fluid
level. If the level is low, top up and
have the system inspected to
determine the cause of the loss of
fluid.
Yellow symbol: there is a fault in
the brake pedal sensor.
A
B
Steady glow for more than
2 seconds: there is a fault in the
ABS system. The normal brake
system will still function but with-
out ABS brake modulation.
If Brake pedalCharacteristics
changed Service required is
displayed, the Brake-by-Wire sys-
tem is not functioning properly.
The brake pedal must be pressed
farther down and with more pres-
sure for braking effect.
A
US models
B
Canadian models
WARNING
If both symbols illuminate at the same time
and the brake level is below the MIN mark in
the reservoir or if a brake system-related mes-
sage is shown in the instrument panel: DO
NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
and have the brake system inspected.
If both symbols illuminate at the same time
and the brake level is normal (not below the
MIN mark in the reservoir) or if a brake sys-
tem-related message is shown in the instru-
ment panel: drive the vehicle carefully to an
authorized Volvo workshop and have the
brake system inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
Related information
•
Brake functions (p. 387)
•
Brake assist system (p. 390)
•
Emergency brake lights (p. 390)
•
General information about Twin Engine Plug-
in Hybrid vehicles (p. 53)
STARTING AND DRIVING
390
Emergency brake lights
The emergency brake lights activate in the event
of hard braking/rapid deceleration at most nor-
mal driving speeds or if the ABS system is acti-
vated. This function causes an additional taillight
on each side of the vehicle to illuminate to help
alert vehicles traveling behind.
Once the emergency brake lights have been acti-
vated, if the driver releases the brake pedal, the
brake lights will return to their normal function.
Related information
•
Brakes (p. 387)
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 146)
•
Brake lights (p. 146)
Brake assist system
The Brake Assist System (BAS) increases brak-
ing force, thereby helping reduce braking dis-
tance.
The system monitors the driver's braking habits
and increases braking force when necessary.
Brake force can be increased up to the point at
which the ABS system is activated. The function
is deactivated when pressure on the brake pedal
decreases.
Related information
•
Brakes (p. 387)
Braking effect after a collision
In certain types of collisions, the vehicle's brakes
are applied to help prevent or mitigate a secon-
dary collision.
Maintaining control of the vehicle after a collision
may be difficult. To help avoid or mitigate the
effect of a secondary collision, the brakes are
applied automatically to help bring the vehicle to
a stop.
The brake lights and hazard warning flashers will
be activated and the flashers will remain on after
the vehicle has come to a standstill. The parking
brake will then be applied automatically.
In a situation where stopping the vehicle may not
be desirable, the driver can override this system
by pressing the accelerator pedal.
This feature can only function if the brake system
is intact after the collision.
Related information
•
Brake functions (p. 387)
•
Airbag system (p. 71)
•
Rear Collision Warning (RCW) (p. 321)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
391
Parking brake
The electric parking brake helps to keep the
vehicle stationary when it is parked.
Parking brake control in the tunnel console between the
front seats
NOTE
•
A faint sound from the parking brake's
electric motor can be heard when the
parking brake is being applied. This
sound can also be heard during the auto-
matic function check of the parking
brake.
•
The brake pedal will move slightly when
the electric parking brake is applied or
released.
If the vehicle is not moving when the parking
brake is applied, only the rear wheels are affec-
ted. If it is applied while the vehicle is moving, the
normal brakes are used on all four wheels. The
brakes will only be applied on the rear wheels
once the vehicle has stopped.
Related information
•
Brake functions (p. 387)
•
Using the parking brake (p. 391)
•
Parking brake malfunctions (p. 393)
Using the parking brake
The electric parking brake helps to keep the
vehicle stationary when it is parked.
Applying the parking brake
1. Pull up the control.
> The symbol in the instrument panel will
illuminate when the parking brake has
been fully applied.
2. Ensure that the vehicle is stationary.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
392
Symbol in the instrument panel
Symbol Explanation
A
B
The symbol flashes while the park-
ing brake is being applied.
If the symbol flashes at any other
time, this indicates a fault. See the
message in the instrument panel.
A
US models
B
Canadian models
Automatic function
The parking brake is applied automatically:
•
If the Auto Hold function is activated and the
vehicle has been stationary for approx.
5 minutes.
•
If the gear selector is moved to P on a steep
hill.
•
When the engine is turned off (this function
can be selected, see "Parking brake set-
tings" below).
Emergency braking
In an emergency, the parking brake can be
applied when the vehicle is moving by pressing
and holding up the control. Braking will be inter-
rupted when the control is released.
An audible signal will sound during this proce-
dure if the vehicle is moving at higher speeds.
Releasing the parking brake
Releasing manually
1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
2. Press the control.
> This releases the parking brake and the
symbol in the instrument panel will go out.
Releasing automatically
1. Fasten the driver's seat belt.
2. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
3. Start the engine.
4.
Move the gear selector to D or R and press
the accelerator pedal.
> This releases the parking brake and the
symbol in the instrument panel will go out.
NOTE
•
In order to perform an automatic release
when the engine is initially started, the
driver’s seat belt does not need to be fas-
tened.
•
The electric parking brake will be
released immediately when the accelera-
tor pedal is pressed and the gear selector
is in position D or R.
Parking on a hill
Put the gear selector in P.
•
If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front
wheels so that they point away from the curb.
•
If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the
front wheels so that they point toward the
curb.
The parking brake should also be applied.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking
on hills or uneven surfaces.
STARTING AND DRIVING
393
Heavy load uphill
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the
vehicle to roll backward when the parking brake
is released automatically on a steep incline. To
help avoid this:
1. Keep the electric parking brake control
pushed in.
2. While pressing the accelerator pedal to pull
away, release the parking brake control only
after the vehicle begins to move.
Parking brake settings
Automatically setting the parking brake can be
turned on or off in the center display's Top view.
1.
Tap
Settings in Top view.
2.
Tap
My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension
and deselect Auto Activate
Parking Brake
.
Related information
•
Parking brake (p. 391)
•
Parking brake malfunctions (p. 393)
•
Auto-hold brake function (p. 394)
Parking brake malfunctions
If it has not been possible to apply or release the
parking brake after several attempts, consult a
trained and authorized Volvo service technician
or retailer.
An audible signal will sound if the parking brake
is applied when the vehicle is being driven. If the
vehicle must be parked while the parking brake is
not functioning properly:
•
Put the gear selector in P.
•
If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front
wheels so that they point away from the curb.
•
If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the
front wheels so that they point toward the
curb.
•
Put the gear selector in P.
Low battery charge level
If the battery is discharged, the parking brake
cannot be operated. Connect an auxiliary battery
to the vehicle.
Replacing brake pads
The rear brake pads have to be replaced by a
trained and authorized Volvo service technician
due to the design of the electric parking brake.
Symbols in the instrument panel
Symbol Explanation
A
B
If the symbol flashes, a parking
brake fault has been detected.
See the message in the instru-
ment panel.
A
B
Fault in the brake system.
A
US models
B
Canadian models
Related information
•
Using the parking brake (p. 391)
•
Using the parking brake (p. 391)
•
Brake functions (p. 387)
•
Jump starting (p. 372)
STARTING AND DRIVING
394
Hill Start Assist
Hill Start Assist (HSA) helps prevent the vehicle
from rolling backwards when starting up a hill. If
you are backing up a hill, HSA helps prevent the
vehicle from rolling forward.
HSA makes it easier to start or back up on a hill
by retaining pressure on the brake pedal for sev-
eral seconds after the pedal has been released in
order to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
The brakes will be released after several seconds
or when the driver presses the accelerator pedal.
HSA is available even if the Auto-hold braking
function is turned off.
Related information
•
Brake functions (p. 387)
•
Auto-hold brake function (p. 394)
Auto-hold brake function
With the Auto-hold brake function, the driver can
release the brake pedal and the brakes will
remain applied, for example, when the vehicle
has stopped at a traffic light or intersection.
When the vehicle is no longer moving forward,
Auto-hold applies the brakes automatically, either
using the normal brakes or the parking brake.
The brakes will be released when the accelerator
pedal is depressed.
If the driver's door is opened or the engine is
turned off, the parking brake will be applied auto-
matically.
Auto-hold is deactivated when the transmission is
in neutral or if the driver's door is open and the
seat belt is unbuckled.
Auto-hold control
Auto-hold control and indicator light
Turn Auto-hold on or off by pressing the control
in the tunnel console. The indicator light illumi-
nates when the function is on.
When Auto-hold is off, Hill Start Assist (HSA) will
be activated to help prevent the vehicle from roll-
ing backwards when starting up a hill.
Instrument panel symbol
Symbol Explanation
The symbol in the instrument
panel illuminates when this func-
tion is using the normal brakes to
keep the vehicle stationary.
A
B
This symbol in the instrument
panel illuminates when Auto-hold
is using the parking brake to keep
the vehicle stationary
A
US models
B
Canadian models
Related information
•
Hill Start Assist (p. 394)
•
Brake functions (p. 387)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
395
Low Speed Control (LSC)
5
Low Speed Control (LSC) helps make off-road
driving easier on slippery surfaces when towing
a trailer on grass, etc. This feature is part of the
Off Road drive mode.
When driving at low speeds, LSC prioritizes low
gears and all wheel drive to help avoid wheel
spin and to improve traction on slippery surfa-
ces. The accelerator pedal and engine react dif-
ferently to make low-speed driving easier.
LSC is activated along with the Off Road drive
mode.
It is activated along with Hill Descent Control
(HDC), which increases engine braking to help
keep vehicle speed low and smooth, even driving
down steep hills.
Activating LSC
Using the drive mode control*
Select the Off Road drive mode to activate the
function.
Select any other drive mode to turn it off.
Select the Off Road drive mode to activate the
function.
Select the
AWD drive mode to activate the func-
tion.
Select any other drive mode to turn it off.
NOTE
When LSC with HDC is activated by the Off
Road drive mode, the feel of the accelerator
pedal and engine response will change.
The
Off Road drive mode is not intended to
be used on normal roads.
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at
lower speeds if so desired.
Related information
•
Brake functions (p. 387)
•
Hill Descent Control (HDC) (p. 396)
•
Drive modes (p. 380)
5
Not available in all models
STARTING AND DRIVING
396
Hill Descent Control (HDC)
HDC is a type of low-speed automatic engine
brake and makes it possible to increase or
decrease the vehicle's speed on steep downhill
gradients using only the accelerator pedal, with-
out applying the brakes.
HDC is integrated into the
Off Road drive
mode.
HDC is particularly useful when driving down
steep hills with rough surfaces, and where the
road may have slippery patches.
WARNING
HDC does not function in all situations, and is
a supplementary braking aid. The driver has
full responsibility for driving in a safe manner.
Function
HDC allows the vehicle to roll forward or in
reverse at very low speed with enhanced engine
braking. However, speed can be adjusted to a
higher level with the accelerator pedal. When the
accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to very low speed regardless of the steep-
ness of the hill and without applying the brakes.
The brake lights illuminate when HDC is func-
tioning.
The driver can use the brakes to slow or stop the
vehicle at any time.
HDC is activated along with Low Speed Control
(LSC), which together make driving on slippery
surfaces at low speeds easier.
When HDC and LSC are activated, this changes
the response from the accelerator pedal and
engine.
Activating HDC
This function can be activated in different ways,
depending on how the vehicle is equipped.
Select the Off Road drive mode to activate the
function.
Select a different drive mode to turn HDC off. If
this is done while the vehicle is on a steep down-
grade, engine braking will decrease gradually.
Related information
•
Brake functions (p. 387)
•
Low Speed Control (LSC) (p. 395)
•
Drive modes (p. 380)
STARTING AND DRIVING
397
Driving through standing water
The vehicle should be driven with extreme cau-
tion if it is necessary to drive through standing
water.
The vehicle can be driven through water up to a
depth approximately level with the floor at walk-
ing speed to help prevent water from entering
the differential and/or the transmission or dam-
aging electrical components.
•
If possible, check the depth of the water at
its deepest point before driving through it.
Take particular care when driving through
flowing water.
•
Before driving through water, always select
the
Off Road drive mode to ensure that the
gasoline engine is running and to maximize
ground clearance.
•
After driving through water, apply the brakes
and check that they are functioning correctly.
•
Clean the electrical connections for trailer
wiring after driving in mud or water.
•
When driving through water, maintain low
speed and do not stop in the water.
CAUTION
•
Damage may occur to the engine, trans-
mission, electrical components, etc. if the
vehicle is driven through water higher
than its floor level. Be aware that waves
created by other vehicles could cause the
level to temporarily be above the vehicle's
floor level.
•
Damage to any components due to water
above the floor level, vapor lock or insuffi-
cient oil is not covered under warranty.
•
If the engine has been stopped while the
vehicle is in water, do not attempt to
restart it. Have the vehicle towed out of
the water and inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
WARNING
•
Avoid driving through standing or rushing
water. Doing so can be dangerous and it
may also be difficult to determine the
actual depth of the water.
•
If water cannot be avoided, after driving
through the water, press lightly on the
brake pedal to ensure that the brakes are
functioning normally. Water or mud can
make the brake linings slippery, resulting
in delayed braking effect.
Related information
•
Towing recommendations (p. 413)
STARTING AND DRIVING
398
Overheating the engine and
transmission
In demanding driving conditions, such as when
transporting heavy loads, driving in mountainous
areas or in very hot weather there is a risk of
overheating the engine or transmission.
•
The engine's output may be slightly limited if
there is a risk of overheating.
•
Remove e.g., auxiliary lights mounted in front
of the grille in hot weather.
•
If the temperature of the engine coolant
becomes too high, the warning symbol will
illuminate and the message
Engine
temperature/Stop safely will be displayed.
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in a
safe place and let the engine idle for several
minutes.
•
If the message
Engine temperature/High
temperature Turn off engine or Engine
coolant/Stop safely is displayed, stop
safely and turn off the engine.
•
If the transmission begins to overheat, an
alternative gear shifting program will be
selected. An integrated protective function
will also by activated, the warning symbol will
illuminate and the message
Transmission
warmHigh temperature Reduce speed
or Transmission warmStop safely, wait
for cooling will be displayed in the instru-
ment panel.
•
The air conditioning may be switched off
temporarily.
•
After a prolonged period of driving, do not
turn off the engine immediately after stop-
ping.
•
The engine cooling fan commonly continues
to run for several minutes after the engine
has been turned off.
WARNING
The cooling fan (located at the front of the
engine compartment, behind the radiator) may
start or continue to operate (for up to
6 minutes) after the engine has been
switched off.
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 409)
•
Before a long distance trip (p. 399)
Battery drain
Your vehicle's electrical functions drain the bat-
tery to varying extents.
Avoid using ignition mode II as much as posssi-
ble, or electrical functions that require a great
deal of electrical current when the engine is not
running.
Using ignition mode I whenever possible con-
sumes less electrical current.
Functions that require a great deal of electrical
current include:
•
the climate system blower
•
headlights
•
wipers
•
infotainment system (especially at high vol-
ume).
If the battery's charge level is low, a text message
will appear in the instrument panel. The vehicle's
energy-saving function will then turn off or
reduce certain functions that are currently con-
suming electrical current.
If the battery needs to be recharged, start the
engine and let it idle for at least 15 minutes or
drive the vehicle (driving charges the battery
faster than letting the engine idle).
Related information
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
399
Before a long distance trip
It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle
checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician before driving long distances. Your
retailer will also be able to supply you with bulbs,
fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades for your use
in the event that problems occur.
As a minimum, the following items should be
checked before any long trip:
•
Check that engine runs smoothly and that
fuel consumption and the oil level are normal.
•
Before leaving on a trip, fill the fuel tank and
make sure the hybrid battery is fully charged.
During the trip, make a habit of refueling reg-
ularly.
•
Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage.
•
Check condition of drive belts.
•
Check state of the battery's charge.
•
Examine tires carefully (including the spare
tire where applicable), and replace those that
are worn. Also, check tire inflation pressure.
•
The brakes, front wheel alignment, and steer-
ing gear should be checked by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician only.
•
Check all lights, including high beams.
•
Reflective warning triangles are legally
required in some states/provinces.
•
Have a word with a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician if you intend to drive
in countries where it may be difficult to
obtain the correct fuel.
•
Consider your destination. If you will be driv-
ing through an area where snow or ice are
likely to occur, consider using snow tires.
Winter driving
Check your vehicle before the approach of cold
weather.
The following advice is worth noting:
•
Make sure that the engine coolant contains
50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture will
reduce freeze protection. This gives protec-
tion against freezing down to –31 °F
(–35 °C). The use of "recycled" antifreeze is
not approved by Volvo. Different types of
antifreeze must not be mixed.
•
Volvo recommends using only genuine Volvo
antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.
•
Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this
helps prevent the formation of condensation
in the tank. In addition, in extremely cold
weather conditions it is worthwhile to add
fuel line de-icer before refueling.
•
The viscosity of the engine oil is important.
Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves
cold-weather starting as well as decreasing
fuel consumption while the engine is warm-
ing up. Full synthetic 0W-30 oil is recom-
mended for driving in areas with sustained
low temperatures.
•
The load placed on the battery is greater dur-
ing the winter since the windshield wipers,
lighting, etc., are used more often. Moreover,
the capacity of the battery decreases as the
temperature drops. In very cold weather, a
poorly charged battery can freeze and be
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
400
damaged. It is therefore advisable to check
the state of charge more frequently and
spray an anti-rust oil on the battery posts.
•
Volvo recommends the use of snow tires on
all four wheels for winter driving.
•
To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from
freezing, add washer solvents containing
antifreeze. This is important since dirt is often
splashed on the windshield during winter
driving, requiring the frequent use of the
washers and wipers. Volvo Washer Solvent
should be diluted as follows: Down to 14 °F
(–10 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 4 parts
water Down to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part washer
solvent and 3 parts water Down to 0 °F
(–18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 2 parts
water Down to –18 °F (–28 °C): 1 part
washer solvent and 1 part water.
•
Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.
•
Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can
cause damage to the locks.
Related information
•
Snow tires and chains (p. 497)
Opening/closing the fuel filler door
The fuel tank has a filling system that does not
have a cover.
Opening/closing the fuel filler door
An arrow next to the fuel pump
symbol in the instrument panel
indicates the side of the vehicle
where the fuel filler door is
located.
1. Press the button on the lighting panel.
> Pressure equalization in the fuel tank cau-
ses a slight delay before the fuel filler
door opens.
Fuel tank Fuel lid is
opening will be displayed in the instru-
ment panel, followed by Fuel tank Ready
for refueling.
2. After refueling, close the fuel filler door by
pressing lightly.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
401
Refueling from a service station pump
To refuel:
1. Open the fuel filler door. Do not refuel with
the engine running
6
2. Insert the pump's nozzle into the fuel filler
pipe's opening as far as possible (see the
illustration).
3. Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not press
the handle on the filler nozzle after it has
stopped pumping. Too much fuel in the tank
in hot weather conditions can cause the fuel
to overflow. Overfilling could also cause dam-
age to the emission control systems.
CAUTION
Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. In
addition to causing damage to the environ-
ment, gasolines containing alcohol can cause
damage to painted surfaces, which may not
be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Related information
•
Fuel (p. 401)
•
Octane rating (p. 402)
Fuel
Volvo recommends the use of detergent gaso-
line to control engine deposits.
Deposit control gasoline (detergent
additives)
Detergent gasoline is effective in keeping injec-
tors and intake valves clean. Consistent use of
deposit control gasolines will help ensure good
drivability and fuel economy. If you are not sure
whether the gasoline contains deposit control
additives, check with the service station operator.
NOTE
Volvo does not recommend the use of exter-
nal fuel injector cleaning systems.
Unleaded fuel
Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter
and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and
Canadian regulations require that pumps deliver-
ing unleaded gasoline be labeled "UNLEADED".
Only these pumps have nozzles which fit your
vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dispense lea-
ded fuel into a vehicle labeled "unleaded gaso-
line only". Leaded gasoline damages the three-
way catalytic converter and the heated oxygen
sensor system. Repeated use of leaded gasoline
will lessen the effectiveness of the emission con-
6
If the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's performance will not be affected.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
402
trol system and could result in loss of emission
warranty coverage. State and local vehicle
inspection programs will make detection of mis-
fueling easier, possibly resulting in emission test
failure for misfueled vehicles.
NOTE
Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain an
octane enhancing additive called methyl-
cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission
Control System performance may be affected,
and the Check Engine Light (malfunction
indicator light) located on your instrument
panel may light. If this occurs, please return
your vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician for service.
Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers,
"Oxygenated fuels"
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing
"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or
ethers. In some areas, state or local laws require
that the service pump be marked indicating use
of alcohols or ethers. However, there are areas in
which the pumps are unmarked. If you are not
sure whether there is alcohol or ethers in the
gasoline you buy, check with the service station
operator. To meet seasonal air quality standards,
some areas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel.
Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygen-
ated" fuels; however, the octane ratings listed
must still be met.
Alcohol – Ethanol
Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume
may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to as
Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol".
Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to
15% MTBE may be used.
Methanol
Do not use gasolines containing methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice can
result in vehicle performance deterioration and
can damage critical parts in the fuel system. Such
damage may not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Related information
•
Octane rating (p. 402)
•
Opening/closing the fuel filler door (p. 400)
Octane rating
Volvo requires premium fuel (91 octane or
above) for best performance.
Minimum octane
Sample fuel pump octane label
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
Volvo endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline” where available to help maintain engine
performance and reliability. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new standard jointly estab-
lished by leading automotive manufactures to
meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.
Qualifying gasoline retailers (stations) will, in
most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
the “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
403
NOTE
Information about TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line is available at www.toptiergas.com.
NOTE
When switching to higher octane fuel or
changing gasoline brands, it may be neces-
sary to fill the tank more than once before a
difference in engine operation is noticeable.
Fuel Formulations
Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a
knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives.
Besides damaging the exhaust emission control
systems on your vehicle, lead has been strongly
linked to certain forms of cancer.
Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.
Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to
certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area
where you must fill your own gas tank, take pre-
cautions. These may include:
•
standing upwind away from the filler nozzle
while refueling.
•
refueling only at gas stations with vapor
recovery systems that fully seal the mouth of
the filler neck during refueling.
•
wearing neoprene gloves while handling a
fuel filler nozzle.
Use of Additives
With the exception of gas line antifreeze during
winter months, do not add solvents, thickeners, or
other store-bought additives to your vehicle's
fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. Overuse may
damage your engine, and some of these additives
contain organically volatile chemicals. Do not
needlessly expose yourself to these chemicals.
WARNING
Never carry a cell phone that is switched on
while refueling your vehicle. If the phone rings,
this may cause a spark that could ignite gaso-
line fumes, resulting in fire and injury.
WARNING
Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless,
and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust
gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes inside
the vehicle, make sure the passenger com-
partment is ventilated, and immediately return
the vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician for correction.
Related information
•
Fuel (p. 401)
Emission controls
Three-way catalytic converter
•
Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain
engine malfunctions, particularly involving the
electrical, fuel or distributor ignition systems,
may cause unusually high three-way catalytic
converter temperatures. Do not continue to
operate your vehicle if you detect engine
misfire, noticeable loss of power or other
unusual operating conditions, such as engine
overheating or backfiring. A properly tuned
engine will help avoid malfunctions that
could damage the three-way catalytic con-
verter.
•
Do not park your vehicle over combustible
materials, such as grass or leaves, which can
come into contact with the hot exhaust sys-
tem and cause such materials to ignite under
certain wind and weather conditions.
•
Excessive starter cranking (in excess of one
minute), or an intermittently firing or flooded
engine can cause three-way catalytic con-
verter or exhaust system overheating.
•
Remember that tampering or unauthorized
modifications to the engine, the Engine Con-
trol Module, or the vehicle may be illegal and
can cause three-way catalytic converter or
exhaust system overheating. This includes:
altering fuel injection settings or compo-
nents, altering emission system components
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
404
or location or removing components, and/or
repeated use of leaded fuel.
NOTE
Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with
three-way catalytic converters.
Heated oxygen sensors
The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxygen
content of the exhaust gases. Readings are fed
into a control module that continuously monitors
engine functions and controls fuel injection. The
ratio of fuel to air into the engine is continuously
adjusted for efficient combustion to help reduce
harmful emissions.
Related information
•
Octane rating (p. 402)
Driving economically
Better driving economy can be obtained by
thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops
and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to imme-
diate traffic conditions.
Driving economically with Twin Engine
Plug-in Hybrid vehicles
Plan your driving in order to utilize the electric
motor as much as possible.
An energy-conserving driving style lowers current
consumption from the hybrid battery and helps
increase electric driving range.
Charging
•
Charge the hybrid battery as often as possi-
ble from the electricity grid using the charg-
ing cable. Whenever possible, begin a drive
with a fully charged battery.
•
Check the location of charging points.
•
Where possible, choose parking spaces with
charging points.
Preconditioning
•
If possible, precondition the vehicle with the
charging cable before driving.
•
Avoid parking the vehicle so that the passen-
ger compartment becomes too hot or cold.
Park, if possible, in a climate controlled park-
ing garage.
•
For short drives after using the precondition-
ing function, turn off the climate system
blower if possible.
•
If preconditioning is not possible in cold
weather, use the seat and steering wheel
heating primarily. Avoid heating the entire
passenger compartment, which reduces the
hybrid battery's charge level.
STARTING AND DRIVING
405
Driving
•
Choose the
Pure drive mode to help mini-
mize electric power consumption.
•
Maintain a constant speed and an adequate
distance to the vehicle ahead to minimize
use of the brakes.
•
Balance energy requirements using the
accelerator pedal and utilize the gauge on
the instrument panel to see the amount of
power available from the electric motor. This
helps avoid starting the gasoline engine
unnecessarily. The electric motor is more
energy-efficient than the gasoline engine,
especially at lower speeds. See also the arti-
cle "Hybrid-related symbols and messages".
•
Brake as gently as possible; doing so
charges the hybrid battery. There is a regen-
erative function in the brake pedal which can
be augmented by the electric motor's braking
capacity when the gear selector is in mode
B.
•
Higher speeds increase energy consumption
and the vehicle's wind resistance increases
along with speed. Do not exceed posted
speed limits.
•
In hilly terrain, put the gear selector in mode
B to utilize the electric motor's braking func-
tion when the accelerator pedal is released.
This helps charge the hybrid battery.
•
Use the
Hold function at highway speeds
when traveling farther than is possible using
the hybrid battery's capacity.
•
Whenever possible, avoid using the
Charge
function to charge the hybrid battery. Charg-
ing the battery using the gasoline engine
increases fuel consumption and carbon diox-
ide emissions.
•
Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra load)
in the vehicle.
•
Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire
pressure regularly (when the tires are cold).
•
Use tires recommended by Volvo for your
vehicle.
•
Remove snow tires when threat of snow or
ice has ended.
•
Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc, increase
air resistance and also energy consumption.
•
Avoid driving with open windows.
Handling and roadholding
•
Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pres-
sure all affect vehicle handling. Therefore,
check that the tires are inflated to the rec-
ommended pressure according to the vehicle
load. Loads should be distributed so that
capacity weight or maximum permissible axle
loads are not exceeded.
•
At the specified curb weight your vehicle has
a tendency to understeer, which means that
the steering wheel has to be turned more
than might seem appropriate for the curva-
ture of a bend. This ensures good stability
and reduces the risk of rear wheel skid.
Remember that these properties can alter
with the vehicle load. The heavier the load in
the cargo compartment, the less the ten-
dency to understeer.
Related information
•
Hybrid-related information in the instrument
panel (p. 100)
•
Parking climate (preconditioning) (p. 201)
•
Tire inflation pressure table (p. 563)
•
Volvo and the environment (p. 26)
•
Hybrid-related symbols and messages
(p. 426)
•
Gear selector positions (p. 375)
•
Using the electric motor in city driving
(p. 406)
STARTING AND DRIVING
406
When the gasoline engine starts
and stops in hybrid vehicles
An advanced control system determines if your
vehicle is powered by the gasoline engine, the
electric motor or both at the same time. While
the electric motor is being used, the gasoline
engine may start automatically due to external
factors such as low ambient temperatures,
which is normal. In addition, the gasoline engine
will always start when the hybrid battery's charge
level is very low.
Climate system settings for cold
weather
The gasoline engine may start automatically at
low ambient temperatures to help warm the pas-
senger compartment to the desired temperature.
To help minimize the need to use the gasoline
engine:
•
Set a lower passenger compartment tem-
perature
•
Lower the blower speed
•
Activate the
Pure hybrid drive mode
The electric motor in hot or cold
weather
In sustained hot or cold ambient temperatures,
the electric motor's range and capacity may be
reduced, which affects how often the gasoline
engine will start automatically.
Emission controls
In order to help ensure that the gasoline engine's
emission controls function optimally, this engine
will run for several minutes after it has started.
The length of time that the engine needs to run
varies depending on the temperature of the
three-way catalytic converter.
Related information
•
Driving economically (p. 404)
•
Drive modes (p. 380)
•
Using the electric motor in city driving
(p. 406)
Using the electric motor in city
driving
A number of factors affect the electric motor's
driving range.
The driver can affect some of these factors while
others depend on outside conditions such as
temperature, road surface, etc.
The certified value for the distance that can be
driven on using the electric motor should not be
considered to be an expected distance. The
actual range is affected by a number of factors.
STARTING AND DRIVING
407
Factors that determine the electric
motor's driving range
Factors outside of the driver's control
The following are examples of factors that the
driver cannot control:
•
The current traffic situation
•
Driving short distances
•
Topography
•
Ambient temperature and headwinds
•
Road conditions/road surface
The following table shows the approximate rela-
tionship between ambient temperature and driv-
ing range using the electric motor with reduced
climate system (ECO) functionality. Up to a cer-
tain limit, warmer temperatures increase the elec-
tric motor's driving range.
Ambient tempera-
ture
ECO cli-
mate sys-
tem set-
tings
Normal cli-
mate sys-
tem set-
tings
86°F(30°C)
95% 80%
68°F (20°C)
100% 90%
50°F (10°C
90% 80%
32°F (0°C)
80% 60%
14°F (-10°C)
70% 40%
Factors in the driver's control
The driver should be aware of the following fac-
tors in order to utilize the vehicle's electric motor
most efficiently:
•
Charge the hybrid battery regularly
•
Preconditioning
•
The
Pure drive mode
•
Climate system settings
•
Speed and acceleration
•
The
Hold function
•
Tires and inflation pressure
The following table shows the approximate rela-
tionship between constant speed and driving
range where driving at a lower constant speed
helps increase the electric motor's driving range.
Constant speed
62 mph (100 km/h) 50%
50 mph(80 km/h) 70%
37 mph (60 km/h) 90%
31 mph(50 km/h) 100%
NOTE
•
The figures in the preceding tables per-
tain to a new vehicle.
•
None of the figures are absolute and are
affected by e.g., driving style, weather,
traffic conditions, etc.
Driving with the electric motor
Use the Pure drive mode for the most energy-
efficient driving to help maximize driving range
using the electric motor only.
Use the button in the center display to activate
the Hold function at highway speeds when trav-
eling farther than is possible using the hybrid bat-
tery's capacity.
Related information
•
Driving economically (p. 404)
•
Drive modes (p. 380)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
408
Detachable trailer hitch*
Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer
hitches that are specially designed for the vehi-
cle.
NOTE
The optional detachable trailer hitch may not
be available in all markets or on all models.
Consult your Volvo retailer.
Ball holder
Cotter pin
Hitch assembly
Locking bolt
Safety wire attachment bracket
Installing the ball holder
1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from the
locking bolt and slide the locking bolt out of
the hitch assembly.
2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assembly.
3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the one
in the hitch assembly.
4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch
assembly/ball holder.
5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end of
the locking bolt.
WARNING
•
Be sure the towbar is securely locked in
position before attaching anything to it.
•
Always attach the trailer's safety wire
securely to the towbar's safety wire
attachment bracket.
Removing the ball holder
1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt
and slide the locking bolt out of the ball
holder/hitch assembly.
2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assembly.
NOTE
A cover for the hitch assembly is also
included in the kit.
Stowing the ball holder
WARNING
When not in use, the detachable trailer hitch
should always be properly stowed under the
cargo compartment floor.
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 409)
•
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) (p. 411)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
409
Driving with a trailer
When towing a trailer, always observe the legal
requirements of the state/province.
•
All Volvo models are equipped with energy-
absorbing shock-mounted bumpers. Trailer
hitch installation should not interfere with the
proper operation of this bumper system.
Trailer towing does not normally present any par-
ticular problems, but take into consideration:
•
Increase tire pressure to recommended full
pressure.
•
When your vehicle is new, avoid towing heavy
trailers during the first 620 miles (1,000 km).
•
Maximum speed when towing a trailer:
50 mph (80 km/h).
•
Engine and transmission are subject to
increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant
temperature should be closely watched when
driving in hot climates or hilly terrain. Use a
lower gear and turn off the air conditioner if
the temperature gauge needle enters the red
range.
•
If the automatic transmission begins to over-
heat, a message will be displayed in the text
window.
•
Avoid overload and other abusive operation.
•
Hauling a trailer affects handling, durability,
and economy.
•
It is necessary to balance trailer brakes with
the towing vehicle brakes to provide a safe
stop (check and observe state/local regula-
tions).
•
Do not connect the trailer's brake system
directly to the vehicle's brake system.
•
More frequent vehicle maintenance is
required.
•
Remove the ball holder when the hitch is not
being used.
NOTE
•
When parking the vehicle with a trailer on
a hill, apply the parking brake before put-
ting the gear selector in P. Always follow
the trailer manufacturer's recommenda-
tions for wheel chocking.
•
When starting on a hill, put the gear
selector in D before releasing the parking
brake.
•
If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift
positions while towing a trailer, make sure
the gear you select does not put too
much strain on the engine (using too
high a gear).
•
The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch may
be rated for trailers heavier than the vehi-
cle is designed to tow. Please adhere to
Volvo's recommended trailer weights.
•
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 15%.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
410
CAUTION
The maximum trailer weights listed are only
applicable for altitudes up to 3,280 ft
(1000 m) above sea level. With increasing
altitude the engine power and therefore the
car's climbing ability are impaired because of
the reduced air density, so the maximum
trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly.
The weight of the vehicle and trailer must be
reduced by 10% for every further 3,280 ft
(1,000 m) (or part thereof). When towing
5,000 lbs (2,250 kg) hill inclination is restric-
ted to 14%.
WARNING
•
Bumper-attached trailer hitches must not
be used on Volvos, nor should safety
chains be attached to the bumper.
•
Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle
rear axle must not be used.
•
Never connect a trailer's hydraulic brake
system directly to the vehicle brake sys-
tem, nor a trailer's lighting system directly
to the vehicle lighting system. Consult
your nearest authorized Volvo retailer for
correct installation.
•
When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety
chains or wire must be correctly fastened
to the attachment points provided in the
trailer hitch on the vehicle. The safety
chain or wire must never be fastened to
or wound around the towing ball.
Trailer turn signals and brake lights
If one (or more) of the bulbs on a trailer is defec-
tive, a symbol and a message will be displayed in
the instrument panel.
The other lights on the trailer must be checked
manually by the driver before the vehicle is driven.
See the subsection "Manual check" in the follow-
ing section "Trailer lamp check".
Symbol Message
•
Trailer turn indicator Right
turn indicator malfunction
•
Trailer turn indicator Left
turn indicator malfunction
•
Trailer brake light Malfunc-
tion
If one of the trailer's turn signal bulbs is defective,
the turn signal symbol in the instrument panel for
the respective sides of the vehicle will also flash
faster than normal.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
411
Trailer lamp check*
Automatic check
When the trailer has been connected to the vehi-
cle's electrical system, its lamps can be checked
by automatically activating them. This helps the
driver to ensure that the trailer's lamps are func-
tioning correctly before starting to drive.
In order to perform this check, the engine must
not be running.
1. When a trailer is connected to a trailer hitch
or towbar,
Automatic Trailer Lamp Check
will appear in the instrument panel.
2.
Confirm this message by pressing the O but-
ton on the right-side steering wheel keypad.
> The lamp check will begin.
3. Leave the vehicle to perform the trailer lamp
check.
> All of the trailer's lamps will begin to flash
and then each lamp will illuminate one at
a time.
4. Visually check that all of the trailer's lamps
are functioning correctly.
5. After a short time, all of the trailer's lamps
will begin to flash again.
> The lamp check is completed.
Disabling the automatic check
The automatic lamp check function can be disa-
bled in the center display.
1.
Tap
Settings in Top view.
2.
Tap
My Car Lights and Lighting.
3.
Deselect
Automatic Trailer Lamp Check.
Manual check
If the automatic lamp check has been disabled,
the function can be started manually.
1.
Tap
Settings in Top view.
2.
Tap
My Car Lights and Lighting.
3.
Select
Manual Trailer Lamp Check.
> The lamp check will begin. Leave the vehi-
cle to perform the trailer lamp check as
described in the section "Automatic
check" above.
Self-leveling suspension*
The self-leveling system attempts to keep the
vehicle at a constant level, regardless of the load
(up to the max. permissible load). When the
engine is not running, the rear of the vehicle
sinks down slightly, which is normal.
Related information
•
Detachable trailer hitch* (p. 408)
•
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) (p. 411)
•
Weights (p. 557)
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)
Trailer Stability Assist is a system designed to
help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer
when the vehicle and trailer have begun to sway
and is part of the Electronic Stability Control sys-
tem.
Function
A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway for
various reasons. Normally this only occurs at high
speeds but, for example, if the trailer is overloa-
ded or if the load is unevenly distributed in the
trailer, there is risk of swaying.
Swaying may be caused by factors such as:
•
The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sudden,
strong crosswind
•
The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an
uneven road surface or drive over a bump
•
Sudden movements of the steering wheel
Facts about TSA
•
The stability system symbol in the instrument
panel will flash when TSA is working
•
If the driver switches off the stability system's
Spin Control function, TSA will also be
switched off (but will be on again the next
time the engine is started)
•
TSA may not intervene when the vehicle and
trailer begin to sway if the driver tries to com-
pensate for the swaying motion by moving
the steering wheel rapidly
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
412
How TSA works
Once swaying has begun, it can be very difficult
to stop, which makes it difficult to control the
vehicle and trailer.
The TSA system continuously monitors the vehi-
cle's movements, particularly lateral movement. If
the system detects a tendency to sway, the
brakes are applied individually on the front
wheels, which has a stabilizing effect on the vehi-
cle and trailer. This is often enough to enable the
driver to regain control of the vehicle.
If this is not adequate to stop the swaying motion,
the brakes are applied to all of the wheels on the
vehicle and on the trailer if it is equipped with
brakes, and engine power is temporarily reduced.
As the swaying motion begins to decrease and
the vehicle-trailer have once again become sta-
ble, TSA will now stop regulating the brakes/
engine power and the driver regains control of
the vehicle.
TSA is deactivated if the driver deactivates
ESC
in the center display's menu system.
When the ESC symbol in the
instrument panel flashes, TSA
is active.
Related information
•
Detachable trailer hitch* (p. 408)
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 409)
•
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (p. 255)
Towing eyelet
When used, the towing eyelet should always be
securely attached in the opening on the right
side of the rear bumper. There is a cover over
the attachment point.
Using the towing eyelet
1.
Take out the towing eyelet, which is stored
under the floor in the cargo compartment.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
413
Rear bumper: Remove the cover by pressing
the mark with a finger and folding out the
opposite side with a coin, etc.
> The cover turns along its center line and
then be removed.
3. Screw the towing eyelet into place, first by
hand and then using the tire iron, etc. until it
has been screwed into place as far as pos-
sible.
After use, the eyelet should be removed and
returned to its storage location.
Reinsert the cover into the bumper.
Related information
•
Towing recommendations (p. 413)
Towing recommendations
Always check with state and local authorities
before attempting to tow another vehicle
because this type of towing is subject to regula-
tions regarding maximum towing speed, length
and type of towing device, lighting, etc.
Towing your vehicle behind another
vehicle
Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid vehicles may not be
towed behind another vehicle. Doing so would
damage the electric motor and the three-way cat-
alytic converter. If the vehicle cannot be driven
and must be moved, it must be lifted onto a flat-
bed tow truck.
If a Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid vehicle is used to
tow (pull) another vehicle, select the
AWD drive
mode. This helps charge the hybrid battery and
improves the vehicle's road holding characteris-
tics.
Tow trucks
CAUTION
In certain conditions, the towing eyelet
may be used to pull the vehicle onto a
flatbed tow truck.
•
The vehicle's position and ground clear-
ance determine if it can be pulled up onto
a flatbed tow truck using the towing eye-
let.
•
If the angle of the tow truck’s ramp is too
steep or the ground clearance under the
vehicle is insufficient, damage could
occur by attempting to pull the vehicle
using the towing eyelet.
•
If necessary, lift the vehicle using the tow
truck’s lifting device.
WARNING
No person or object should be behind the tow
truck while the vehicle is being pulled up onto
the flatbed.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
414
Vehicle with pneumatic suspension*
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional pneu-
matic suspension, this feature must be deacti-
vated before the vehicle is lifted onto a tow truck.
To do so:
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
My Car Suspension .
3.
Select
Disable Leveling Control.
Jump starting
Do not attempt to start the engine by towing the
vehicle. This could result in damage to the three-
way catalytic converter and the electric motor.
Use a 12-volt auxiliary battery or one in another
vehicle.
WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds, chemi-
cals known to the state of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION
Connect the jumper cables carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
WARNING
•
Do not connect the jumper cable to any
part of the fuel system or to any moving
parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds.
•
Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which
is flammable and explosive.
•
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin,
fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact
occurs, flush the affected area immedi-
ately with water. Obtain medical help
immediately if eyes are affected.
•
Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark.
•
Do not smoke near the battery.
•
Failure to follow the instructions for jump
starting can lead to injury.
Related information
•
Towing eyelet (p. 412)
•
Jump starting (p. 372)
•
Parking brake (p. 391)
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
Charging the hybrid battery
In addition to the conventional fuel tank, Twin
Engine Plug-in Hybrid vehicles are also equip-
ped with a rechargeable lithium-ion hybrid bat-
tery.
The hybrid battery is recharged using a charging
cable located in a storage compartment under
the floor of the cargo compartment. See also the
article "Charging cable."
WARNING
The hybrid electrical system in your vehicle
uses high voltage electrical current. Any dam-
age to this system or to the hybrid battery
may result in the danger of overheating, fire,
or serious injury. If the vehicle is involved in a
collision or is subjected to flooding, fires, etc.,
have it inspected by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician. Prior to this inspec-
tion, the vehicle should be parked outdoors at
a safe distance from any building or poten-
tially flammable materials.
The hybrid battery's charging time depends on
the charging current used.
STARTING AND DRIVING
415
NOTE
The capacity of the hybrid battery diminishes
somewhat with age and use, which could
result in increased use of the gasoline engine
and consequently, slightly higher fuel con-
sumption.
Charging is indicated in three ways:
•
Charge module (the unit that is plugged into
the wall socket): The blue indicator light on
the cable's charge module will flash red sev-
eral times when the unit is plugged into a
wall socket while a safety check is being per-
formed and will then glow steadily blue to
indicate that the charger is ready to use.
•
A green indicator light in the vehicle's charg-
ing socket will flash green while the battery
is charging and will glow steadily green when
the hybrid battery is fully charged. The blue
indicator light in the charge module will also
flash while charging is underway and will
glow steadily blue when charging is comple-
ted.
•
A gauge in the instrument panel will also
indicate the battery's charge level.
The hybrid battery charging process also charges
the vehicle's start battery.
If the hybrid battery's temperature is below –
13 ºF (–10 ºC) or above +104 ºF (+40 ºC), some
of the vehicle's functions may be reduced or not
be available at all (e.g., drive mode may not be
available).
The electric motor cannot be used if the hybrid
battery's temperature is too low or too high. If the
PURE drive mode is selected, the gasoline
engine will be used.
Temperature control
During charging, if the temperature in the charg-
ing cable becomes too high and reaches a critical
limit, charging will be interrupted.
CAUTION
If charging is interrupted repeatedly, have the
charging cable and the vehicle's charging
system inspected by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
Charging using the gasoline engine
Current is generated to charge the hybrid battery, such
as light braking and when engine braking on down-
slopes
Using the B gear mode when driving on down-
slopes will also recharge the hybrid battery.
The hybrid battery can also be charged by the
gasoline engine. During light braking, the battery
is recharged.
Related information
•
Drive modes (p. 380)
•
General information about Twin Engine Plug-
in Hybrid vehicles (p. 53)
•
Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 416)
•
Gear selector positions (p. 375)
STARTING AND DRIVING
416
Hybrid battery charging current
Charging current is used to charge the hybrid
battery and to precondition the vehicle. Charging
is done through a cable connected between the
vehicle's charging socket and a
120-/240-volt socket.
When charging is in progress, an indicator light in
the charging socket illuminates to indicate the
charging status. Charging current is primarily
used to recharge the hybrid battery and to pre-
condition the vehicle but is also used to recharge
the vehicle's start battery.
CAUTION
Never disconnect the charging cable from the
120-/240-volt socket while charging is in
progress. This could damage the socket.
Always stop the charging process (by unlock-
ing the vehicle) and disconnect the charging
cable from the vehicle's charging socket
before disconnecting the other end from the
120-/240-volt socket being used.
NOTE
•
At very low or high temperatures, some of
the charging current is used to heat or
cool the hybrid battery and the passenger
compartment, which means that charging
may take longer.
•
Charging time is longer if preconditioning
has been selected. This time is primarily
affected by the ambient temperature.
Charging coupler and charging socket
There are normally several 120-/240-volt power
consumers in a fuse circuit, which means that
more than one power consumer (lighting, vacuum
cleaner, electric drill, etc.) may use the same fuse.
Hybrid battery charging cable
The charging cable is used to recharge your
vehicle's hybrid battery. Only use the cable provi-
ded with your vehicle or one purchased from a
Volvo retailer.
The charging cable is stowed in a storage compartment
under the cargo compartment floor
WARNING
Only use the charging cable provided with
your vehicle or a replacement cable pur-
chased from a Volvo retailer.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
417
Charging cable specifications
Compliance SAE J1772
Permitted ambient tem-
peratures for use
–25 ºF to +122 ºF
(–32 ºC to +50 ºC)
WARNING
•
The charging cable must be grounded
when in use. It is equipped with a cord
with a grounding conductor and a
grounding plug. The plug must be
inserted into an appropriate outlet that is
properly installed and grounded in
accordance with all local codes and ordi-
nances and is not damaged in any way
•
Children should be supervised when in
the vicinity of the charging cable when it
is plugged in
•
High voltage is present in your electric
meter housing and power distribution
service panel. Contact with high voltage
can cause death or serious personal
injury
•
Do not use the charging cable if it is
damaged in any way
•
Always position the charging cable so
that it will not be driven over, stepped on,
tripped over or otherwise damaged, or
cause personal injury
•
Disconnect the charger from the wall out-
let before cleaning it
•
Never connect the charging cable to an
extension cord or a multiple plug socket
•
If the hybrid battery needs to be replaced,
this may only be done by Volvo retailer or
authorized Volvo workshop
Also, refer to the manufacturer's instructions
for using the charging cable and its compo-
nents.
CAUTION
•
Never unplug the charging cable from a
120-/240-volt socket while the hybrid
battery is being recharged. This could
result in damage to the socket. Always
stop the charging process before unplug-
ging the charging cable
•
To clean the charging cable, wipe it with
a clean cloth dampened with water or a
mild detergent solution suitable for use
on automobile paint. Do not use chemi-
cals or solvents. Do not submerge the
charging cable
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
418
Charging cable components
Charge module
240-volt adapter clip
240-volt adapter
Charge coupler
Release button
Related information
•
Charger status indicators (p. 428)
•
Hybrid battery charge status (p. 422)
•
Preparations for charging the hybrid battery
(p. 419)
Hybrid charging cable circuit
breaker
The charging cable has a circuit breaker that
helps protect against current overloads and
electrical shocks.
If the charging cable's residual current breaker is
triggered, the blue indicator light in the charge
coupler will not illuminate when the cable is plug-
ged into a 120-/240-volt socket or the red indi-
cator light will glow steadily. Have the socket
checked by a licensed electrician or try using
another 120-/240-volt wall socket.
WARNING
•
Charging the hybrid battery may only be
done from approved, grounded 120-/
240-volt sockets. If the electrical circuit
or electrical socket's capacity is not
known, let a licensed electrician inspect
the electrical circuit's capacity. Using a
charge level that exceeds the electrical
circuit's or electrical outlet's capacity may
start a fire or damage the electrical cir-
cuit.
•
The charging cable's residual current
breaker helps protect the vehicle's charg-
ing system but cannot ensure that an cur-
rent overload will never occur.
•
Never use visibly worn or damaged elec-
trical sockets. Doing so could lead to fires
or serious injury.
•
Never connect the charging cable to an
extension cord.
•
Maintenance or replacement of the hybrid
battery may only be performed by a
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian.
STARTING AND DRIVING
419
Preparations for charging the hybrid
battery
Several preparatory steps should be taken
before starting to charge the hybrid battery.
WARNING
•
The charging cable must be grounded
when in use. It is equipped with a cord
with a grounding conductor and a
grounding plug. The plug must be
inserted into an appropriate outlet that is
properly installed and grounded in
accordance with all local codes and ordi-
nances and is not damaged in any way
•
Children should be supervised when in
the vicinity of the charging cable when it
is plugged in
•
High voltage is present in your electric
meter housing and power distribution
service panel. Contact with high voltage
can cause death or serious personal
injury
•
Do not use the charging cable if it is
damaged in any way
•
Always position the charging cable so
that it will not be driven over, stepped on,
tripped over or otherwise damaged, or
cause personal injury
•
Disconnect the charger from the wall out-
let before cleaning it
•
Never connect the charging cable to an
extension cord or a multiple plug socket
•
If the hybrid battery needs to be replaced,
this may only be done by Volvo retailer or
authorized Volvo workshop
Also, refer to the manufacturer's instructions
for using the charging cable and its compo-
nents.
Prior to charging
The charging cable and any of its components
should not be wet or submerged in any liquid.
The charge module or its plug should not be
exposed to direct sunlight. This could cause the
unit's overheating protector to reduce or stop the
hybrid battery charging process.
Be sure the 120-/240-volt socket used has ade-
quate current for charging electrically powered
vehicles. Have the socket checked by an licensed
electrician if you are uncertain.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
420
Opening/closing the charger door
Press in the rear section of the door and
release it.
Open the door.
Pull off the charging socket's protective
cover. Press the charging cable's charge
coupler as far into the charging socket as
possible.
CAUTION
Place the charging socket's protective cover
so it does not damage the paint (in e.g., windy
conditions).
When charging is complete, put the cover back in
position and close the door in reverse order.
Related information
•
Stopping hybrid battery charging (p. 424)
Initiating hybrid battery charging
The hybrid battery is charged using a charging
cable connected to a 120-/240-volt socket.
Only use the cable provided with your vehicle or
one purchased from a Volvo retailer.
CAUTION
Never connect the charging cable if there is a
risk of thunderstorms/lightning.
Take out the charging cable, which is stored in
the compartment under the floor of the cargo
compartment.
The ignition must be switched completely off
before charging the battery.
Connect the charging cable to a
120-/240-volt socket. Never use an exten-
sion cord.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
421
Open the charging door. Connect the charg-
ing cable's charge coupler. Press the coupler
as far onto the socket as possible.
CAUTION
Place the charging socket's protective cover
so it does not damage the paint (in e.g., windy
conditions).
4. The charging cable's coupler will lock onto
the charging socket and charging will begin
within approx. 5 seconds. A green light in the
socket will begin to flash to indicate that
charging has begun. The approximate
remaining charging time and charging status
will be displayed in the instrument panel. See
also the article "Hybrid battery charge sta-
tus."
Charging will be temporarily interrupted if the
vehicle is unlocked:
•
If a door is opened, charging will restart
within 2 minutes.
•
if no door is opened, the vehicle will auto-
matically relock and charging will restart
after 1 minute.
NOTE
Charging status is shown in the instrument
panel, which goes dark after a period of time.
Reactivate the instrument panel by:
•
pressing the brake pedal
•
opening one of the doors
•
putting the ignition in mode I: turn the start
knob clockwise as far as possible and
release it.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
422
CAUTION
Never disconnect the charging cable from the
120-/240-volt socket while charging is in
progress. This could damage the socket.
Always stop the charging process (by unlock-
ing the vehicle) and disconnect the charging
cable from the vehicle's charging socket
before disconnecting the other end from the
120-/240-volt socket being used.
During the charging process, condensation may
form under the vehicle, which is normal and is
caused by cooling the hybrid battery.
Related information
•
Hybrid battery charge status (p. 422)
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 414)
•
Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 416)
•
Stopping hybrid battery charging (p. 424)
Hybrid battery charge status
The hybrid battery's charge status (level) is indi-
cated by an LED light in the vehicle's charging
socket and in the instrument panel.
Indicator LED in the vehicle's charging
socket
The LED indicator light shows the current charge
status while charging is underway. White, red, yel-
low or yellow lights are activated when the pas-
senger compartment lighting illuminates and
remain on for a short time after the passenger
compartment lighting has gone out.
LEDindica-
tor light's
color
Explanation
White Courtesy light
Yellow Standby mode (e.g., after a door
has been opened or if the
charger coupling is not locked
in position in the charging
socket): waiting for charging to
begin
Flashing
green
Charging is in progress (the
slower the light flashes, the
closer the battery is to being
fully charged)
LEDindica-
tor light's
color
Explanation
Green Charging completed (the light
will go out after a short time)
Red A fault has occurred
Charge status in the instrument panel
Charging status is indicated in the instrument
panel using graphics and text. This information is
displayed for as long as the instrument panel is
active.
If the instrument panel is not used for a short
period, it will switch off to help save electrical cur-
rent and can be reactivated by:
•
Pressing the brake pedal
•
Opening one of the doors
•
Turning the start knob clockwise to ignition
mode I
STARTING AND DRIVING
423
Graphic Message Explanation
Fully
charged
at:
[Time] is
displayed
with an
animated
blue puls-
ing light
through
the
charging
cable.
Charging is in pro-
gress and the approx-
imate time when the
battery will be fully
charged will be dis-
played.
Graphic Message Explanation
Charg-
ing com-
plete is
displayed.
An image
will be
superim-
posed
over the
graphic of
the vehi-
cle with a
greenLED
indicator
light in
the
charging
socket.
The battery is fully
charged.
Charg-
ing error
will be
displayed
and the
LED indi-
cator light
in the
charging
socket
will be
red.
A fault has occurred.
Check that the charg-
ing cable is correctly
connected to the
vehicle's charging
socket and the
120-/240-volt socket.
Related information
•
Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 416)
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 414)
•
Preparations for charging the hybrid battery
(p. 419)
•
Stopping hybrid battery charging (p. 424)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
424
Stopping hybrid battery charging
Stop hybrid battery charging by unlocking the
vehicle, disconnecting the charging cable from
the vehicle's charging socket and then unplug-
ging the cable from the 120-/240-volt socket.
NOTE
Always unlock the vehicle to stop the charg-
ing process before disconnecting the charg-
ing cable from the vehicle's charging socket
and then unplugging it from the
120-/240-volt socket.
The cable must be disconnected from the
vehicle's charging socket before it is
unplugged from the 120-/240-volt socket
to help prevent damage to the charging
system.
Unlock the vehicle with the remote key.
Press the release button on the charge cou-
pler to release it and disconnect the coupler
from the vehicle's charging socket. Remove
the cable from the vehicle and close the
charger door.
Disconnect the cable from the
120-/240-volt socket.
Stow the cable in the storage compartment
under the cargo compartment floor.
Charging cable locks automatically
If the charging cable is not removed from the
charging socket, it will automatically relock to the
socket after a short time to help maximize the
charge level and driving range using the electric
motor. The cable can be removed again if the
vehicle is unlocked with the remote key or by
opening the door on models equipped with the
Passive Entry* system.
Related information
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 414)
•
Hybrid battery charge status (p. 422)
•
Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 416)
STARTING AND DRIVING
425
Long-term storage of a vehicle with
a hybrid battery
To help keep the hybrid battery from degrading if
the vehicle is not driven for a prolonged period
(longer than 1 month), the hybrid battery charge
level should be kept at approx. 25% according
to the gauge in the instrument panel.
Do as follows:
1. If the hybrid battery charge level is high, drive
the vehicle until approx. 25% of the charge
remains. If the charge level is low, charge the
battery until the level is approx. 25%.
2. If the vehicle has not been driven for at least
6 months or the charge level is noticeably
below the 25% level, charge the battery up
to 25% again to help compensate for natural
battery discharge. Check the charge level
regularly using the gauge in the instrument
panel.
See the article "Jump starting" for information
about charging the start battery.
NOTE
•
If the vehicle will not be driven for an
extended period, park it in as cool a loca-
tion as possible to help minimize hybrid
battery aging. Park the vehicle indoors or
in a shady location in the summer, which-
ever is coolest.
Related information
•
Jump starting (p. 372)
•
Initiating hybrid battery charging (p. 420)
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 414)
STARTING AND DRIVING
426
Hybrid-related symbols and
messages
A number of symbols and messages relating to
Twin Engine Plug-in Hybrid vehicles may appear
in the instrument panel. They may also be dis-
played in combination with general indicator and
warning symbols and will go out when the nec-
essary action has been taken.
Symbol Message Explanation
12 V Battery
Charging fault, service urgent. Drive
to workshop
Battery fault. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as
possible.
12 V Battery
Charging fault Stop safely
Battery fault. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
12 V Battery
Low charge, temporarily reduced
functionality
The hybrid battery's charge level is too low for optimal driving. Charge the battery as soon as possi-
ble.
12 V Battery
Charging fault, low battery. Stop
safely
The hybrid battery is not sufficiently charged. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and charge the
battery.
12 V Battery
Fuse failure Service required
Battery failure. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as
possible to have the system checked.
Hybrid battery
Overheated, stop safely
Battery temperature too high/too low. Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine. If the message
remains after the engine has been restarted, contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
STARTING AND DRIVING
427
Symbol Message Explanation
Reduced performance
Max vehicle speed limited
The hybrid battery is not sufficiently charged for higher speeds. Charge the battery as soon as pos-
sible.
Hybrid system
Harsh behavior at low speed, vehicle
ok to use
The hybrid system is not functioning completely properly. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible to have the system checked.
Hybrid system failure
Service required
The hybrid system is out of order. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician as soon as possible to have the system checked.
Charge cable
Remove before start
The charging cable has not been disconnected and the driver has attempted to start the engine.
Disconnect the cable from the vehicle, put the cover back in place and close the charger door.
Charge cable
Removed? Turn and hold start knob
7s
The driver has already attempted to start the engine with the charging cable still connected. Be
sure the cable is completely disconnected, the cover is in place and the charger door is closed.
Related information
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 414)
•
Charger status indicators (p. 428)
•
Hybrid battery charge status (p. 422)
STARTING AND DRIVING
428
Charger status indicators
The red and blue lights in the charging cable's
charge module give an indication of the charge
status.
Charge module: 1. red warning light, 2. blue status indi-
cator
Red warning light
•
When the charge module is initially plugged
into a wall socket, the red warning light will
flash once to indicate that a startup safety
check has been performed. When the safety
check has been completed, the blue status
indicator will glow steadily and the red warn-
ing light will be off.
•
If the red warning light continues to flash or
glows steadily, a fault has been detected and
the charger will not deliver power to the vehi-
cle. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
Blue status indicator
•
When the charge module is plugged into a
wall socket, the blue status indicator illumi-
nates and glows steadily to show that the
charger is ready to use.
•
When the charge coupler (the plug on the
other end of the charging cable) has been
plugged into the vehicle's charging socket,
the blue status indicator will flash once.
•
The blue status indicator will then flash
approximately every two seconds to indicate
that charging is taking place.
•
When the indicator light glows steadily, this
indicates that charging has been completed.
This will also be indicated by the charging
gauge on the instrument panel.
When charging is completed, press the release
button on the charge coupler and disconnect it
from the vehicle.
Unplug the charge module from the wall socket.
Related information
•
Hybrid battery charging cable (p. 416)
•
Hybrid battery charge status (p. 422)
•
Hybrid charging cable circuit breaker
(p. 418)
•
Hybrid-related symbols and messages
(p. 426)
INFOTAINMENT
INFOTAINMENT
430
The infotainment system
The infotainment system consists of a radio,
media player and has the capacity to communi-
cate with a Bluetooth-connected cell phone. It is
also possible to connect to the Internet to e.g.,
stream audio content via apps.
The system's functions can be controlled from
the right-side steering wheel keypad, the center
display or by using voice commands.
Infotainment overview
Infotainment system overview
System updates
The infotainment system is constantly being
developed and improved. For optimal functional-
ity, updates can be downloaded when the vehicle
is connected to the Internet. See the article "Sys-
tem updates" and the support site
support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
Media player (p. 446)
•
Radio (p. 432)
•
Phone (p. 459)
•
Internet connected vehicle (p. 466)
•
Apps (applications) (p. 430)
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
•
Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 43)
•
Voice control (p. 121)
•
Infotainment system license information
(p. 472)
•
System updates (p. 511)
Apps (applications)
Apps (applications) are programs used to con-
trol some of the vehicle's features and functions.
The center display's App view (generic illustration)
Several basic apps are always available and oth-
ers can be downloaded. Downloadable apps
include navigation services, web radio, streaming
music services, retailer contact and software
downloads.
INFOTAINMENT
431
Some apps are only available if the vehicle is
connected to the Internet.
–
In the center display's App view, tap an app
to start it.
Related information
•
Internet connected vehicle (p. 466)
•
Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 471)
•
Changing settings in different types of apps
(p. 52)
Sound settings
The infotainment system is precalibrated for opti-
mal sound reproduction but these settings can
be changed to suit your personal preferences.
The system's volume is normally adjusted using
the right-side steering wheel keypad or the vol-
ume control below the center display.
Optimal sound reproduction settings
The audio system is precalibrated for optimal
sound reproduction using digital signal process-
ing. This calibration takes into account the speak-
ers, amplifier, cabin acoustics, listener position,
etc., for each combination of vehicle and infotain-
ment system.
Dynamic calibration is also available, which moni-
tors the setting of the volume control, radio
reception and the vehicle's speed.
Specific sound settings are described in the
respective articles/sections of this owner's infor-
mation.
To change a setting, pull down the center dis-
play's Top view and tap
Settings Sound.
Active noise suppression
1
The vehicle can be equipped with an active noise
suppression function that reduces engine noise
in the passenger compartment by utilizing the
infotainment system. The microphone(s) in the
ceiling liner react to engine noise and the info-
tainment system produces signals (white noise)
to counteract this.
Microphone in the ceiling liner. The number and position
vary, depending on the vehicle
NOTE
Avoid covering or obstructing the noise sup-
pression speakers because doing so could
result in a rumbling noise.
Related information
•
Media sound settings (p. 453)
•
Voice control settings (p. 123)
•
Phone settings (p. 465)
1
Certain models only.
INFOTAINMENT
* Option/accessory.
432
Radio
Your vehicle's radio offers FM with HD Radio ™
Technology and SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio*.
The radio can be controlled
using the right-side steering
wheel keypad, the center dis-
play or by using voice com-
mands.
Related information
•
Changing and searching for radio stations
(p. 432)
•
Radio settings (p. 446)
•
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* (p. 437)
•
HD Radio™reception (p. 434)
•
Changing and searching for radio stations
(p. 432)
Changing and searching for radio
stations
The radio automatically compiles a list of the
strongest stations that it is currently receiving.
Turning the radio on
1. Open the desired waveband (e.g., FM) from
the center display's App view.
2. Select a station.
Changing a list in a waveband
Generic illustration
1.
Tap
Library.
2.
Sect from
Stations, Favorites or Genres.
3. Tap the desired station in the list.
Favorites: only plays stations from the list of
favorites (see "Favorites" below).
Genres: only plays stations broadcasting the
selected genre or program type, e.g., pop, classi-
cal, etc.
Changing stations in a selected list
–
Tap or under the center display or
on the right-side steering wheel keypad.
> Move step-by-step through the selected
list.
The center display can also be used to change
stations.
Favorites
If a favorite station from a list is currently availa-
ble, the radio will automatically tune to that sta-
tion.
See "Changing a list in a waveband" above for
information about selecting favorites on a wave-
band. See "Radio favorites" below for information
about selecting a station among all of your favor-
ites.
–
Tap to add or remove a station for the
waveband's list of favorites or Radio favorites.
INFOTAINMENT
* Option/accessory.
433
Radio favorites
Radio favorites shows all of the
favorite stations that have been
saved for e.g., FM.
1.
Open the
Radio favorites app in App view.
2. Tap the desired station to listen.
When a station is removed, it will also be
removed from the respective waveband's list of
favorites.
Changing wavebands
2
–
Go to App view again and tap the desired
waveband e.g.,
FM or open the app menu
from the right-side steering wheel keypad to
select.
Searching for a radio station
Generic illustration
Searching is done differently, depending on the
waveband selected.
•
AM: stations and frequencies.
•
FM: stations, genres and frequencies.
•
SiriusXM®: program types, genres, stations.
1.
Tap
Library.
2.
Tap
.
> The search view with a keyboard will open.
3. Enter a search word(s).
> The search will start and change as char-
acters are entered and the search results
will be categorized.
Searching for a station manually
Generic illustration
Searching manually makes it possible to find and
tune to stations that are not on the automatically
compiled list of the strongest stations in the area.
–
Tap Manual tuning, drag the control or tap
or . Press and hold to tune to the
next available station in the waveband or use
the right-side steering wheel keypad.
Related information
•
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* (p. 437)
•
HD Radio™reception (p. 434)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 124)
2
The AM waveband is not available in hybrid models.
INFOTAINMENT
434
RBDS radio
RBDS radio
RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) enables
certain functionality
3
, such as:
•
Searches for program types or new broad-
casts
•
Text information about currently broadcast
programs
Related information
•
Radio (p. 432)
•
Radio settings (p. 446)
HD Radio™reception
HD Radio is a brand name registered by DTS,
Inc.
4
. They are the developer of a broadcasting
technology called IBOC or In Band On Chan-
nel, which refers to the method of transmitting a
digital radio broadcast signal centered on the
same frequency as the FM station's present fre-
quency.
Introduction
Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio broad-
cast (generic illustration)
NOTE
HD Radio volume may fade in and out at
times due to coverage limitations.
The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid"
since it is both analogue and digital. During
hybrid operation, receivers still continue to
receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD
Radio receivers incorporate both modes of
reception, where the receiver will automatically
switch to the analogue signal if the digital signal
cannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver.
When you have tuned to an HD Radio station, the
symbol will appear in the infotainment sys-
tem display. The symbol will be displayed in dif-
ferent colors:
•
Grayed-out symbol: NoHD Radio broadcast
reception
•
White symbol: the radio is actively receiving
an HD broadcast
•
Orange symbol: the radio is receiving an
HD broadcast with digital sound
More information about HD Radio and IBOC can
be found on DTS, Inc.'s website, www.dts.com.
Artist Experience™
A radio station's logo and album art can be dis-
played. If a station opts to provide this informa-
tion, it is broadcast once every 12 minutes, which
means that there may be a delay before the
logo/album art appear on the screen. The radio
can store 100 station logos so the next time the
radio is tuned to the same station, the logo will
3
Certain stations only.
4
HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of DTS, Inc.
INFOTAINMENT
}}
435
be displayed immediately. Album art is synched
with the artist that you are currently listening to.
Ball game mode
This feature means that a main FM station (HD1)
will broadcast live events, where the content of
the programming is more important than sound
quality, in analog mode only to help prevent the
delay between analog and digital broadcasting.
The HD Radio symbol will be white during live
broadcasts and "Live" will be displayed next to
the symbol.
Benefits of digital broadcasting
•
Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality).
•
Some FM frequencies offer a greater num-
ber of listening choices through “multicast-
ing” (consisting of a frequency's main chan-
nel and any sub-channels that may also be
available on that particular frequency.)
•
When receiving a digital signal there is no
multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/crack-
ling due to outside influences.
How HD Radio ™ Technology
broadcasting works
HD Radio works similarly to conventional radio
and broadcasts of this type are available in many
areas of the United States. However, there are a
few key differences:
•
Instead of transmitting one analogue signal,
stations send out a bundled signal – both
analogue and digital.
•
An HD Radio receiver can receive both digi-
tal and analogue broadcasts. Depending on
the terrain and location of the vehicle (which
will influence the signal strength), the
receiver will determine which signal to
receive.
Related information
•
Switching HD Radio on and off (p. 435)
•
HD Radio sub-channels (p. 436)
•
HD Radio limitations (p. 437)
•
Radio (p. 432)
•
Changing and searching for radio stations
(p. 432)
Switching HD Radio on and off
The factory setting for HD Radio is off.
Switching HD on or off
When listening to an HD Radio station and driv-
ing through areas with weak HD signals (fringe
areas), you may experience that the radio repeat-
edly switches between analogue/digital and digi-
tal/analogue reception. If this happens, it may be
desirable to switch HD off.
To do so:
1. Be sure the infotainment system is switched
on and in FM mode.
2. To access the settings menu from the center
display's Home view, pull down Top view and
tap
FM radio.
Go to Adjust settings for media.
3.
Tap the or
FM HD Radio box to select/
deselect this function.
This will disable the radio's capability to receive
digital broadcasts but it will continue to function
as a conventional (analogue) FM receiver. Please
note that when HD is switched off, it will not be
possible to tune to sub-channels (see the article
"HD Radio subchannels" for a more detailed
explanation of sub-channels).
Please note that this will only switch HD Radio
on or off (selecting or deselecting the function)
only affects the selected waveband.
||
INFOTAINMENT
* Option/accessory.
436
Related information
•
HD Radio™reception (p. 434)
•
HD Radio sub-channels (p. 436)
•
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* settings (p. 440)
HD Radio sub-channels
In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM
wavebands only) will also have sub-channels
offering additional types of programming or
music.
Sub-channels
Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels
If any sub-channels are available, they will listed
below the main channel on the screen. In this
example, "WRIF-FM HD2" is a sub-channel.
Selecting sub-channels
To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), tap the
station on the screen or press the forward/back
arrow keys on the right-side steering wheel key-
pad or below the screen.
Sub-channels can also be stored as favorites, see
the article "Changing and searching for radio sta-
tions".
If you tap a sub-channel favorite, it may take up
to 6 seconds before the channel becomes audi-
ble. If you tap a station while you are out of digital
range of the transmitter,
No reception will be
displayed.
Related information
•
HD Radio™reception (p. 434)
•
Switching HD Radio on and off (p. 435)
•
Changing and searching for radio stations
(p. 432)
INFOTAINMENT
}}
* Option/accessory.
437
HD Radio limitations
Limitations
•
Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM only):
The main channel is the only channel that
can receive in hybrid mode (both digital and
analogue). If a frequency has sub-channels,
they are broadcast in digital mode only. The
main FM channel will be displayed as, for
example, "WRIF-FM HD1". The sub-FM
channels will be displayed as"WRIF-FM
HD2", "WRIF-FM HD3", etc.
•
Reception coverage area: Due to current
IBOC transmitter power limitations, the
reception coverage area in digital mode is
somewhat more limited than the station's
analogue coverage area. Please be aware
that as with any radio broadcast technology,
terrain, time of day, foliage level and building
location can have positive or negative effects
on radio reception.
•
Analogue to digital/digital to analogue
blending: Analogue to digital blending will
occur as the signal strength reaches a preset
threshold in the receiver. This will be noticea-
ble in fringe areas (areas with weak recep-
tion) and is normal.
NOTE
There may be a noticeable difference in
sound quality when a change from analogue
to digital or digital to analogue occurs, such
as:
•
Volume increase or decrease
•
Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Midrange/
Treble cut or boost
•
Time alignment (Digital program material
in extreme cases can be as much as 8
seconds behind the analogue). This will
noticeable as a "stuttering" effect.
The above items are dependant on the
broadcaster's equipment settings and do
not indicate a fault in the vehicle's radio
receiver or antenna systems.
Related information
•
HD Radio sub-channels (p. 436)
•
HD Radio™reception (p. 434)
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio*
The SiriusXM
®
Satellite system broadcasts from
of a number of high elevation satellites in geo-
synchronous orbit.
Listening to satellite radio
The digital signals from the satellites are line-of-
sight, which means that physical obstructions
such as bridges, tunnels, etc, may temporarily
interfere with signal reception.
Avoid any obstructions, such as metallic objects
transported on roof racks or in a ski box, or other
antennas that may impede signals from the
SiriusXM
®
satellites.
Selecting SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio
mode
1. From the center display's Home view, swipe
from right to left to come to App view.
2.
Tap the SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio icon.
||
INFOTAINMENT
* Option/accessory.
438
Home view with SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio activated
If there is no subscription activated, tap channel
1, where you will be prompted on the screen to
phone SiriusXM
®
.
If a cell phone is paired and connected to the
vehicle, you can also subscribe by:
1. From Home view, pull down the Settings
menu.
2.
Open the settings menu for SiriusXM
®
Satel-
lite radio.
3.
Tap
Unsubscribed Services
4.
Tap the phone number to call SiriusXM
®
,
who will activate the subscription of your
choice. This may take several minutes.
When the subscription has been activated, tap
the SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio icon to start the
function and display the channel list included in
your subscription.
Related information
•
Using SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* (p. 438)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link* (p. 441)
Using SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio*
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio offers several features
for finding and listening to music, news, sporting
events, etc. being broadcast on satellite radio
stations.
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio functions
With SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio activated, tap
Library to display a screen offering the following
functions:
•
Search (the magnifying glass icon)
•
Channels
•
Favorites
•
Categories
If you have used this view previously, you will be
returned to the most recently used one.
INFOTAINMENT
* Option/accessory.
439
Search
Tap the magnifying glass to display a screen
where you can enter text using the center dis-
play's keyboard or by writing in the free-text field
to search for e.g., a station number, an artist,
song title, etc.
Channels
Tap to display a complete list of the channels
included in your subscription. Tap a channel
name to listen. If a subscription to a channel has
expired, its name will be grayed-out on the
screen.
For quick access to a channel that you often lis-
ten to, tap the star to the right of the channel's
name to add it to the list of favorites.
Favorites
Tap to display the channels that you have added
to this list. Tap a channel name to listen.
Categories/Genres
Tap to display the categories available. Tap a cat-
egory or genre name to display the channels that
it contains and then tap a channel to listen.
If an alert has been set (see the section "Alerts"
below) and an alert is active for an artist, song or
team, virtual categories will also be temporary
created and displayed. The channels currently
broadcasting the song, artist or broadcasting a
program with the selected team will be listed in a
virtual category.
EPG (Electronic Program Guide)
On the center display's Home screen, tap EPG
for information about e.g., when a program is
being broadcast and its name, description, artist,
etc. If no information is currently available,
No
information will be displayed.
Alerts
If this feature has been selected under SiriusXM
Settings, the Alerts button will be displayed on
the Home screen.
To add e.g., an artist's name, song title or a sports
team to the list of alerts:
1. Tune to any channel that is broadcasting a
song, game, etc., of your choice.
2.
Press the
Alerts button.
3. A pop-up window will be displayed showing a
list of alerts (nothing will be displayed if the
selected channel does not support the alert
function).
4. Select one of the alternatives in list (only one
can be selected at a time).
5. The song/artist/team will now be added to
the list of alerts. Favorite sports teams can
also be added to the list using the "Game
Alert" setting as described in the article "Sir-
iusXM satellite radio settings."
> When your choice is being broadcast on a
channel, you will be informed by a pop-up.
iTunes tagging
From the center display's Top view, tap SiriusXM
Settings. Tap the iTunes Tagging menu. Tap
the iTunes Tagging box to activate/deactivate
this function and tap Close to return to Home
view. Tap Tags List to display a list of all tagged
songs.
If the function is activated, the
iTunes tag button
will be displayed in Home view. If a song is played
that you would like to buy in the iTunes store, tap
this button while the song is playing to tag it. If a
song with
iTunes Tagging information is availa-
ble, the button will be selectable. Tap the button
to tag the song. If you would like to buy a tagged
song via iTunes, Tap the iTunes tag button.
To buy a song in iTunes, begin by connecting an
iPhone/iPod/iPad to the USB socket in the tun-
nel console. The iTunes tagging list will automati-
cally be transferred to the device and removed
from the list in the vehicle. If the device is con-
nected when a song is tagged, the data will auto-
matically be saved in the device. To purchase the
song, consult the iTunes support page.
Related information
•
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* (p. 437)
•
Using the center display keyboard (p. 47)
•
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* settings (p. 440)
•
Connecting a device via the USB socket
(p. 452)
INFOTAINMENT
* Option/accessory.
440
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* settings
There are numerous settings that can be made
to enhance your SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio listen-
ing experience.
Settings
To access the settings menu from the center dis-
play's Home view, pull down Top view and tap
SiriusXM Settings. The following alternatives
will be displayed:
Traffic Jump
Tap to display a list of cities from which you can
choose to get traffic/weather information (or
Traffic jump off to deactivate the feature). Tap
to select a city (
JUMP will be displayed on the
Home screen next to Library). Tap Back to
return to the list of settings or Close to return to
the Home screen.
From the Home screen, tap
JUMP to activate the
function. When traffic/weather information is
available from the selected city, the radio will
automatically tune to the channel providing the
information. When the information/announce-
ment is finished, the radio will automatically
return to the channel that you were previously lis-
tening to.
During an announcement, tap
JUMP to interrupt
the message and return to the station that you
were currently listening to.
Alert notifications
Tap the box to activate/deactivate. When acti-
vated, you will be notified if a song, artist, etc. that
you have selected is playing. You will be asked if
you want to listen.
Alert notifications sound
Opt to receive an audible alert when one of your
selected choices is being played.
iTunes tagging
Tap to display a menu with the options: iTunes
Tagging and Tags List. With this feature acti-
vated, songs can be tagged for later purchase
from the iTunes store.
Game Alerts
Tap to display a list of sports.
Tap a sport to display a list of teams and tap a
box on the right side of the screen to select a
team as a favorite. An alert will then be provided
when information about the team is being broad-
cast.
Tap Confirm below the list to return to the list of
sports.
Tap
Back to return to the list of settings or
Close to return to the main screen.
Unsubscribed services
If you have a SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio subscrip-
tion, any channels not included in the subscrip-
tion will be listed here. Call SiriusXM™ to sub-
scribe. The phone number will be shown on the
screen. If a cell phone is paired and connected to
the vehicle, tap the phone number to make the
call.
Skipped stations
Tap to display a list of channels that you would
like to skip (hide). Hide channels from the chan-
nel list by tapping the boxes to the right of the
screen. Skipped (hidden) channels will not be
shown in the channel list. However, a channel
previously selected as a favorite will still be dis-
played in the list of favorites, even it has been
added to the skip list.
Skipped categories
Tap to display a list of categories. Tap a category
to skip (hide) it. It will not be displayed in the list
of categories.
Related information
•
Using SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* (p. 438)
•
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* (p. 437)
INFOTAINMENT
}}
* Option/accessory.
441
SiriusXM Travel Link*
SiriusXM Travel Link is a feature offered by
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* that can provide infor-
mation about e.g., weather forecasts, weather
alerts, service stations, sports, etc. in the vicinity
of the vehicle.
Starting SiriusXM Travel Link
NOTE
SiriusXM Travel Link services are only availa-
ble in vehicles equipped with the Sensus
Navigation system.
From the center display’s App view, tap SiriusXM
Travel Link to activate the feature. A disclaimer
text will be displayed. Tap OK to display a list of
SiriusXM Travel Link services:
•
Alerts
•
Fuel
•
Sports
•
Weather
•
Favorites
In order to use one or more of these services, the
user has to subscribe to the ones desired.
To subscribe to a SiriusXM Travel Link service:
1. Open the center display's Top view.
2.
Tap
SiriusXM Travel Link .
3.
Tap
Subscription Status.
> To subscribe, call the phone number listed
on the screen.
Any services not subscribed will be grayed out
and contain the text
Service not subscribed.
When the services have been activated (subscri-
bed), tap the one of your choice to start it.
The following applies for all of the SiriusXM
Travel Link services:
•
Pressing the Back button will take you back
to the previous screen
•
Pressing the Close button will take you to
the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen.
NOTE
If the Close button is used to return to
SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, the follow-
ing applies (the
Weather service is used here
as an example):
•
If you have already used the
Weather
function, tapping Weather again in the
SiriusXM Travel Link home screen
before using any other SiriusXM
Travel Link service will return you to the
point where you left the
Weather service
•
If another SiriusXM Travel Link service is
used (e.g., Fuel, Sports, etc.) before you
return to the
Weather service, you will be
returned to the default Weather view (in
this case, Local)
The same principle applies to all of the
SiriusXM Travel Link services.
Favorites
Many SiriusXM Travel Link selections can be
saved for easy access as favorites by tapping the
"star" icon next to the selection where applicable.
To display a list of your favorites, tap the Favorite
application in the SiriusXM Travel Link home
screen.
Related information
•
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* (p. 437)
•
Center display overview (p. 32)
INFOTAINMENT
442
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 38)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link - Weather (p. 442)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link - Sports (p. 445)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link - Alerts (p. 443)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link - Fuel (p. 444)
SiriusXM Travel Link - Weather
This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides
weather-related information near the vehicle, at a
local ski resort, etc.
From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, to
display weather-related information:
–
Tap the Weather button to display this
screen.
At the top of the screen, the following categories
will be displayed:
•
Search (the magnifying glass icon)
•
Local
•
Ski condition
•
Areas
•
Favorites
Tap the category of your choice.
Search
Tap the magnifying glass icon. If the function is
supported in the current context, a keyboard will
appear on the screen. Enter the text of your
choice and tap
Search for detailed information
from the SiriusXM Travel Link database.
Local
5
Information from the closest weather station will
be displayed and the following alternatives are
available:
•
Map view
•
Today
•
5 days
Map view
Tap the map to display it full-screen. Tap Back to
return to the original map view.
Tap
Map options to display the following alter-
natives.
•
Weather radar
•
Storm attributes
•
Surface features
•
Tropical storm tracks
•
Winds
Tap the respective boxes to the right of the alter-
natives to select/deselect. Tap
Done to confirm
and return to the previous screen or Cancel.
Today
Tap to see the current temperature, or the tem-
perature in 3/6 hours.
Tap
Back to return to the Local screen or Close
to return to the SiriusXM Travel Link home
screen.
5
This is the weather default unless another alternative has been selected.
INFOTAINMENT
}}
* Option/accessory.
443
5 days
Tap to see weather information for the coming 5
days.
Tap Back to return to the Local screen or Close
to return to the SiriusXM Travel Link home
screen.
Ski location
Tap to display a list of ski areas in the vicinity of
the vehicle. Tap a name in the list for information
such as if the ski area is open/closed, tempera-
ture, wind conditions, snow conditions, the num-
ber of lifts that are in operation, etc.
•
Weather locations
•
Ski locations
Tap Map view to display a map and a weather
legend.
Tap
Map options to display the following alter-
natives.
•
Weather radar
•
Storm attributes
•
Surface features
•
Tropical storm tracks
•
Winds
Tap the respective boxes to the right of the alter-
natives to select/deselect. Tap
Done to confirm
and return to the previous screen or Cancel.
Areas
Tap Areas to display a list of areas/locations in
states from the SiriusXM Travel Link database.
Scroll to a state and tap to display:
•
Weather locations: tap arrow to the right to
display a list of towns. Scroll to desired town
and tap for detailed weather information. You
can choose Map view, today, 5 days or Favor-
ites (star)
•
Ski locations: tap arrow at right to display
local ski areas. Tap an area for detailed info.
See also "Ski locations" above.
For information about storing a location, state,
town, etc. as a favorite, see the heading "Favor-
ites" in the article "SiriusXM Travel Link."
Related information
•
SiriusXM Travel Link* (p. 441)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link - Alerts (p. 443)
SiriusXM Travel Link - Alerts
This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides alerts
for potential weather problems or other emer-
gency situations in the vicinity of the vehicle.
From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, to
display alerts:
–
Tap the Alerts button to display the this
screen.
•
If any alerts are currently available, a notifica-
tion will appear at the top of the screen. They
can also be listed from the
Settings menu in
the center display's Top view.
•
If no alerts are available,
No active alerts
will be displayed.
Types of alerts
To select the types of alerts to be displayed:
1.
From the
Alerts screen, tap the Select
alerts button at the bottom of the screen.
2. This displays the types of alerts that can be
displayed. Tap the box to the right of each
type of alert to select/deselect it.
3.
Tap
Done when you have made your selec-
tions to return to the Alerts screen.
||
INFOTAINMENT
* Option/accessory.
444
Information about an alert
If any alerts have been displayed on the screen,
tap one for more detailed information (i.e., the
location of the weather problem on a map and a
description of the situation).
If a phone number is available in an alert, a Call
button will be displayed. Tap this button for addi-
tional information.
Related information
•
SiriusXM Travel Link* (p. 441)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link - Weather (p. 442)
SiriusXM Travel Link - Fuel
6
This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides infor-
mation and guidance to service stations near the
vehicle providing the type of fuel that you prefer/
require for your vehicle.
From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, to
display fuel information:
–
Tap the Fuel button to display main fuel
screen.
The following
Fuel categories will be listed:
•
Search (the magnifying glass icon)
•
Nearby
•
Recommended
•
Favorites
•
Brands
Tap one of the alternatives to display its screen.
NOTE
In each of the Fuel categories listed, tapping
the Select fuel type button near the bottom
of the screen opens a sub-view where you
can specify the type of fuel preferred/
required (regular, premium, diesel, 120V, etc.).
Tap
Done to return to the previous screen.
Search
Tap the magnifying glass icon. If the function is
supported in the current context, a keyboard will
appear on the screen. Enter the text of your
choice and tap
Search for detailed information if
available.
Nearby
Tap for a list of service stations in the vicinity of
the vehicle, with the nearest station at the top of
the list.
The following information will be provided where
available:
•
For vehicles using gasoline, the price infor-
mation for regular gasoline (unless another
grade/type of fuel has been selected in
Select fuel type)
•
For electric vehicles/hybrids, information
about charging stations, showing the total
number of charging ports and the number of
ports currently not in use
•
the distance to the station
•
a star icon to set the service station as a
favorite
Tap the name of a service station to display more
detailed information.
For guidance to the service station, tap the
Start
navigation or Add as waypoint buttons. See
6
This service is not available in Canada.
INFOTAINMENT
}}
* Option/accessory.
445
the Sensus Navigation supplement for additional
information about using the navigation system.
Recommended
Tap for a list of service stations near the vehicle,
displayed according to the price of regular gaso-
line (unless another grade/type of fuel has been
selected in
Select fuel type) or of stations
offering the greatest number of available charg-
ing ports for electric vehicles/hybrids. The station
offering the lowest price/most available charging
ports will be displayed at the top of the list. Tap
the name of a service station to display more
detailed information.
Favorites
Tap for a list of service stations that have been
stored as favorites. See also the heading
Favorites in the article "SiriusXM Travel Link" for
information explaining how to create favorites.
Tap the name of a service station to display more
detailed information.
In addition to the
Select fuel type button at the
bottom of the screen, tap the Edit button to
delete individual stations from the list or tap
Delete all to clear the list. Tap Done to return to
the previous screen.
Brands
1.
Tap
Brands to display a list of service sta-
tion brands in the area.
2. Tap a brand to display a list of service sta-
tions affiliated with that brand (e.g., BP,
Exxon, etc.).
3. Tap the name of a service station to display
detailed information.
In addition to the
Select fuel type button at the
bottom of the screen, tap the Sort button to
arrange the list according to Nearest or
Recommended. Tap Done to return to the pre-
vious screen.
Related information
•
SiriusXM Travel Link* (p. 441)
•
Octane rating (p. 402)
•
Opening/closing the fuel filler door (p. 400)
•
Fuel (p. 401)
SiriusXM Travel Link - Sports
This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides infor-
mation about sporting events, tournaments,
teams, leagues, etc.
From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, to
display sports information:
–
Tap the Sports button to display the main
sports screen.
A number of
Sports categories will be listed
(Football, Baseball, Basketball, etc.)
Tap a sport to select a league in that sport (NFL,
MLB, etc.) or a sport organization (PGA, LPGA,
etc.).
The following is an example of the result of
tapping Baseball:
1. MLB (Major League Baseball) will be dis-
played.
2. Tap MLB to display the two leagues in Major
League Baseball (American League or
National League).
3. Tap one of the league names to display the
divisions in the league.
||
INFOTAINMENT
* Option/accessory.
446
4. Tap one of the divisions to display:
•
In progress: play-by-play information
about a match/game/tournament cur-
rently in progress. Continue tapping to
display. In the detailed view, you can also
select a radio station that is currently
broadcasting an ongoing sporting event
•
Headlines for MLB: Tap to display brief
headline information
•
Scheduled: schedules for coming
matches, games, etc.
•
Scores: match/game results
The same principle applies to all sports.
Related information
•
Using SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* (p. 438)
Radio settings
The following information lists the settings that
can be made for the various wavebands.
Pull down the center display's Top view and
select
Settings Media for the desired wave-
band. Tap to activate/deactivate.
FM
•
Show Broadcast Information: displays
information about program content, artists,
etc.
•
Freeze Program Name: select to stop
excessive scrolling to freeze after
20 seconds.
•
FM HD Radio: - Enables HD Radio™
Technology for audio comparable to CD
quality. See the article "HD Radio" for
detailed information.
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio
With SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio activated, pull
down the center display's Top view and tap
SiriusXM Settings to display a list of available
alternatives. See the article "SiriusXM Satellite
radio settings" for detailed information.
Related information
•
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* settings (p. 440)
•
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* (p. 437)
•
Radio (p. 432)
•
HD Radio™reception (p. 434)
Media player
The media player can play audio from a CD
player*, from external media devices connected
to the USB socket or it can stream audio from
an external device connected to the infotainment
system through a Bluetooth connection.
Video can also be viewed from devices con-
nected to the USB socket.
If the vehicle is connected to the Internet, it may
also be possible to listen to web radio, audio
books and to use various music services through
apps.
The radio is also controlled from the media
player. See the articles relating to the radio.
INFOTAINMENT
}}
* Option/accessory.
447
The media player is controlled
from the center display but cer-
tain functions can also be con-
trolled from the right-side
steering wheel keypad or by
using voice commands.
Related information
•
Playing media (p. 447)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 124)
•
Radio (p. 432)
•
Apps (applications) (p. 430)
•
CD (media) player* (p. 451)
•
Playing media through the USB socket
(p. 452)
Playing media
The media player can controlled from the right-
side steering wheel keypad, the center display or
by using voice commands.
The radio is also controlled from the media
player. See the articles relating to the radio.
Starting a media source
Generic illustration
CD*
1. Insert a CD.
2.
Open the
CD app in the center display's App
view.
3. Select a track.
> Playback will begin.
USB flash drive
1. Insert the flash drive in the USB socket.
2.
Open the
USB app in the center display's
App view.
3. Select a track.
> Playback will begin.
Mp3 player and iPod
®
NOTE
Use the iPod app ( not the USB app) to start
playback.
When an iPod is the media source, the info-
tainment system will use a menu structure
similar to the iPod's own menu structure.
1. Connect the device.
2. Start playback in the connected device.
3.
Open the
iPod or USB app in the center
display's App view.
> Playback will begin.
||
INFOTAINMENT
448
Bluetooth-connected device
1. Connect the device.
2. Activate Bluetooth in the device.
3. Start playback from the connected device.
4.
Open the
Bluetooth app in the center dis-
play's App view.
> Playback will begin.
Internet media
1. Connect the vehicle to the Internet.
2. Open the app in the center display's App
view.
> Playback will begin.
Video
1. Connect the device.
2.
Open the
USB app in the center display's
App view.
3. Tap the title of the video content to be
played.
> Playback will begin.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay is described in a separate article.
Controlling and changing media
The media player can be con-
trolled using voice commands,
the right-side steering wheel
keypad or the center display.
Volume: use the buttons on the right-side
steering wheel keypad or turn the control under
the center display to raise or lower the volume.
Play/pause: tap the track's image, press the
symbol on the keypad or press the button under
the center display.
Change tracks: tap the desired track on the cen-
ter display, press the
or buttons under
the center display or on the right-side steering
wheel keypad.
Fast forward/reverse, move within a track: press
the time axis on the center display and drag from
side to side, press and hold the
buttons
under the center display or on the right-side
steering wheel keypad.
Change media source: Tap a media source under
Recents, tap the desired app in the center dis-
play's App view or use the
button on the
right-side steering wheel keypad.
Library: tap to play a track from
the library.
Shuffle: tap to play tracks in
random order.
Similar: tap to use Gracenote
to search for similar music on
the USB device and create a
playlist based on the results.
The playlist can contain up to
50 tracks.
INFOTAINMENT
}}
* Option/accessory.
449
Change device: tap to toggle
between USB devices if more
than one is connected.
Video settings
The following can be adjusted with the video
player in full screen or by opening the center dis-
play's Top view and tapping
Settings Video:
Audio Language, Off and Subtitle Language.
Play DivX
®
This DivX device must be registered in order to
play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD)
movies.
1. Open the center display's Top view and tap
Settings Video DivX® VOD to get a
registration code.
2. Go to vod.divx.com for additional information
and to complete the registration process.
Related information
•
CD (media) player* (p. 451)
•
Media player (p. 446)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 124)
•
Apps (applications) (p. 430)
•
Connecting a Bluetooth
®
device (p. 451)
•
Connecting a device via the USB socket
(p. 452)
•
Gracenote (p. 449)
•
Connecting to the Internet (p. 467)
•
Media searches (p. 450)
•
Video (p. 452)
•
Apple CarPlay (p. 453)
•
Android auto* (p. 456)
Gracenote
Gracenote identifies artists, albums, tracks and
any associated images that can be displayed
during playback.
Gracenote MusicID
®
is a standard for music rec-
ognition.
Activating/deactivating Gracenote
When activated, Gracenote data will replace origi-
nal data.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
Media Gracenote®.
3. Select among the following Gracenote alter-
natives:
•
Gracenote® Online Search: Gracenote
will search through its online database for
information about the currently playing
media.
•
Gracenote® Multiple Results: select how
Gracenote data is to be displayed if there are
several search results.
1: the file's original data will be used.
2: Gracenote data will be used.
3: Gracenote or original data can be
selected.
•
None: no results will be shown.
||
INFOTAINMENT
450
Updating Gracenote
Gracenote's contents are updated continuously.
For optimal functionality, always use the latest
version. See support.volvocars.com for informa-
tion and downloads.
Related information
•
Infotainment system license information
(p. 472)
•
Playing media (p. 447)
Media searches
Searches can be made for information such as
artists, composers, song titles, albums, video,
audio books, playlists and podcasts (digital
media on the Internet).
1.
Tap
.
> The center display's Search view opens
and the keyboard will be displayed.
2. Enter a search word/phrase.
3.
Tap
Search.
> The infotainment system will search
through all connected devices and any
results will be displayed by category.
Swipe the screen horizontally to display each cat-
egory separately.
Related information
•
Media player (p. 446)
•
Playing media (p. 447)
•
Using the center display keyboard (p. 47)
INFOTAINMENT
* Option/accessory.
451
CD (media) player*
The CD (media) player can play commercially
purchased discs as well as ones that you have
burned yourself. See the article "Media player
technical data" for information about compatible
file formats.
Location of the CD player in the tunnel console
Disc slot
Eject button
Related information
•
Media player technical data (p. 458)
Streaming media through a
Bluetooth connection
The media player is equipped with Bluetooth
®
for streaming audio files from external
Bluetooth
®
-enabled devices.
Related information
•
Connecting a Bluetooth
®
device (p. 451)
•
Playing media (p. 447)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 124)
•
Media player (p. 446)
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
•
Media player technical data (p. 458)
Connecting a Bluetooth
®
device
Bluetooth
®
-enabled devices can be paired and
connected to the infotainment system to stream
media and in some cases connect to the Inter-
net.
Many cell phones and other devices currently on
the market offer wireless Bluetooth
®
technology.
Consult your Volvo retailer or go to
support.volvocars.com for any questions regar-
ding a device's compatibility with the vehicle's
infotainment system.
The procedure for pairing and connecting a
Bluetooth
®
-enabled device is the same as for a
cell phone. See the articles "Pairing a cell phone"
and "Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone" for
details.
Related information
•
Pairing a cell phone (p. 460)
•
Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone
(p. 461)
INFOTAINMENT
* Option/accessory.
452
Playing media through the USB
socket
An external media device, such as an iPod® or
an mp-3 player can be connected to the infotain-
ment system.
A device with rechargeable batteries can be
recharged when it is connected to the USB
socket (if the ignition is on or the engine is run-
ning).
To help the system index the contents of a USB
flash drive faster, it is advisable to only store files
with compatible file formats on it. It will take con-
siderably longer for the system to index the files
on the drive if it contains anything other than
compatible files.
In addition to audio, the vehicle's media player
also supports video playback when the external
device is connected to the USB socket.
Certain mp-3 players have proprietary file formats
that are not supported by the infotainment sys-
tem.
Related information
•
Connecting a device via the USB socket
(p. 452)
Connecting a device via the USB
socket
External audio sources such as an iPod
®
or mp3
player can be connected to the infotainment sys-
tem via the USB socket in the tunnel console.
Route the cable out under the front edge to help
avoid pinching it when the cover is closed.
If there are two USB sockets, the one with a
white frame should be used to connect a cell
phone to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto*.
USB socket in the tunnel console
Related information
•
Apple CarPlay (p. 453)
•
Playing media (p. 447)
•
Media player technical data (p. 458)
•
Media player (p. 446)
Video
The media player can play video from USB-con-
nected devices.
No video will be available when the vehicle is
moving. Video will resume playing when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
See the article "Media player technical data" for a
list of video formats supported by the media
player.
Related information
•
Playing media (p. 447)
•
Media player (p. 446)
•
Media player technical data (p. 458)
INFOTAINMENT
}}
453
Media sound settings
Sound settings for the media player can be per-
sonalized.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
Sound and select among the following
settings:
•
Tone: personal settings for bass, treble,
equalizer, etc.
•
Balance: adjust the front/rear and left/right
sound settings in the passenger compart-
ment.
•
System Volumes: use this function to set
the volume for various features in the vehicle
such as Voice Control, Park Assist and
Phone Ringtone.
Sound experience
Concert hall sound setting
Use the Sound Experience app to adapt sound
settings to replicate e.g., a concert hall or a
recording studio. These settings override any of
the ones above that may have been adjusted.
Related information
•
Playing media (p. 447)
•
Sound settings (p. 431)
•
Media player (p. 446)
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay helps make it possible to listen to
music, make phone calls, get directions to a
destination, send/receive text messages and use
Siri while focusing on driving. Apple CarPlay
functions with certain Apple devices.
If the vehicle is not already equipped with
Apple CarPlay, it can be retro-fitted. Contact a
Volvo retailer.
Information about the apps supported and com-
patible cell phones is available from Apple at:
www.apple.com/ios/carplay/.
||
INFOTAINMENT
* Option/accessory.
454
NOTE
•
Using apps that are not compatible with
Apple CarPlay may sometimes result in a
broken connection between an iPhone
and the vehicle.
•
Please be aware that Volvo has no con-
trol over the content of the Apple CarPlay
app.
•
Apple CarPlay can only be used if
Bluetooth is disabled. Therefore, a cell
phone or a media player connected via
Bluetooth will not be accessible while
Apple CarPlay is active.
•
To connect the vehicle to the Internet
while Apple CarPlay is active, use Wi-Fi
or the vehicle's integrated modem.
If navigation guidance is being provided by
Apple CarPlay, this will only be shown on the
center display (not on the head-up display* or the
instrument panel).
The Apple CarPlay apps can be controlled from
the center display or voice-controlled using Siri
(the same as for a cell phone). Certain functions
can also be controlled from the right-side steer-
ing wheel keypad. Press and hold the
button
to activate Siri. If Siri cuts off too soon, press and
hold the
button.
By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge
the following: Apple CarPlay is a service
provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and
conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not
responsible for Apple CarPlay or its
features/applications. When using Apple
CarPlay, certain information from your car
(including its position) is transferred to your
iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you are
fully responsible for your and any others
person’s use of Apple CarPlay.
Starting Apple CarPlay
Voice control using Siri must be activated in the
currently connected cell phone before using
Apple CarPlay. The iPhone also needs to have an
Internet connection via Wi-Fi or cellular network.
From an iPhone that is connected for the
first time
1. Connect the iPhone to the USB socket in
the tunnel console. If there are two USB
sockets, connect to the one with the white
frame.
2. Read the information in the pop-up window
that appears and tap
OK.
3. Tap Apple CarPlay in the center display's
App view.
4.
Read the conditions and tap
Accept to con-
nect.
> The Apple CarPlay sub-view will open and
compatible apps will be displayed.
5. Tap the desired app.
> The app will start.
From a previously connected iPhone
1. Connect the iPhone to the USB socket in
the tunnel console. If there are two USB
sockets, connect to the one with the white
frame.
>
If the automatic start setting has been
activated, the Apple CarPlay sub-view will
open and compatible apps will be dis-
played.
2.
If the automatic start setting has not been
activated, open the
Apple CarPlay app from
the center display's App view.
> The Apple CarPlay sub-view will open and
compatible apps will be displayed.
3. Tap the desired app.
> The app will start.
Apple CarPlay will run in the background if
another app is started in the same sub-view. To
return to Apple CarPlay, tap the Apple CarPlay
icon in App view.
INFOTAINMENT
455
Toggling between Apple CarPlay and
iPod
Apple CarPlay to iPod
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
Communication Apple CarPlay.
3. Deselect the Apple device's box that will no
longer start Apple CarPlay when it is con-
nected.
4. Disconnect and reconnect the Apple device
to the USB socket.
5.
Open the
iPod app from App view.
iPod to Apple CarPlay
1.
Tap
Apple CarPlay in the center display's
App view.
2. Read the conditions in the pop-up window
that appears and tap OK.
3. Disconnect and reconnect the Apple device
to the USB socket.
> The Apple CarPlay sub-view will open.
Related information
•
Media player (p. 446)
•
Playing media (p. 447)
•
Connecting a device via the USB socket
(p. 452)
•
Apple CarPlay settings (p. 455)
Apple CarPlay settings
This article explains settings for a cell phone
connected through Apple CarPlay.
Automatic start
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap Communication Apple CarPlay and
select the following settings:
•
Select the Apple CarPlay box for auto-
matic start when the device's USB cable
is connected.
•
Deselect the Apple CarPlay box to disa-
ble automatic start when the device's
USB cable is connected.
A maximum of 20 Apple devices can be stored in
the list. When the list is full, the first (oldest)
device stored will be deleted.
To erase the entire list, a factory reset has to be
performed. See the article "Resetting the set-
tings view."
System volume levels
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
Sound System Volumes and select
the following settings:
•
Voice Control
•
Navi Voice Guidance
•
Phone Ringtone
Related information
•
Apple CarPlay (p. 453)
•
Resetting the settings view (p. 174)
INFOTAINMENT
* Option/accessory.
456
Android auto*
Android Auto makes it possible to get voice
guidance from the navigation system, listen to
music, make calls and to use apps from an
Android device, all through a interface integrated
into the center display. Android Auto can also be
controlled using the buttons on the right-side
steering wheel keypad or by giving voice com-
mands while focusing on driving. Android Auto
is started from the center display's App view.
After Android Auto has been started once, it will
then start automatically the next time the device
is connected. The automatic start feature can be
deactivated in Settings. Android Auto functions
with selected Android devices.
Information about the apps that are supported
and the cell phones that are compatible can be
found at: www.android.com/auto/. In the case of
third-party apps, see Google Play.
NOTE
•
Please be aware that Volvo has no con-
trol over the content of the Android Auto
app.
•
If a cell phone is connected to
Android Auto, another Bluetooth-enabled
device can be used to stream media.
Bluetooth is active while Android Auto is
being used.
If navigation guidance is being provided by
Android Auto, this will only be shown on the cen-
ter display (not on the head-up display* or the
instrument panel).
The Android Auto apps can be controlled from
the center display, the right-side steering wheel
keypad or voice-controlled. Press and hold the
button to activate voice control. Press briefly
to deactivate.
By using Android Auto, you acknowledge
the following: Android Auto is a service
provided by Google Inc. under its terms and
conditions. Volvo Cars is not responsible for
Android Auto or its features or applications.
When you use Android Auto, your car
transfers certain information (including its
location) to your connected Android phone.
You are fully responsible for your and any
other person’s use of Android Auto.
Starting Android Auto
Connecting an Android device for the first
time
1. Connect the Android device to the USB
socket in the tunnel console. If there are two
USB sockets, connect to the one with the
white frame.
2. Read the information in the pop-up window
that appears and tap
OK.
3.
Tap
Android Auto in the center display's
App view.
4.
Read the conditions and tap
Accept to con-
nect.
> The Android Auto sub-view will open and
compatible apps will be displayed.
5. Tap the desired app.
> The app will start.
INFOTAINMENT
* Option/accessory.
457
From a previously connected Android device
1. Connect the phone to the USB socket in the
tunnel console. If there are two USB sockets,
connect to the one with the white frame.
>
If the automatic start setting has been
activated, the Android Auto sub-view will
open and compatible apps will be dis-
played.
2.
If the automatic start setting has not been
activated, open the
Android Auto app from
the center display's App view.
> The Android Auto sub-view will open and
compatible apps will be displayed.
3. Tap the desired app.
> The app will start.
Android Auto will run in the background if
another app is started in the same sub-view. To
return to Android Auto, tap the Android Auto icon
in App view.
Related information
•
Media player (p. 446)
•
Playing media (p. 447)
•
Connecting a device via the USB socket
(p. 452)
•
Connecting to the Internet (p. 467)
•
Android Auto* settings (p. 457)
Android Auto* settings
The following settings can be made for
Android Auto.
Automatic start
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
Communication Android Auto and
select the following settings:
•
Select the Android Auto box for automatic
start when the device's USB cable is con-
nected.
•
Deselect the Android Auto box to disable
automatic start when the device's USB
cable is connected.
A maximum of 20 Android devices can be stored
in the list. When the list is full, the first (oldest)
device stored will be deleted.
To erase the entire list, a factory reset has to be
performed. See the article "Resetting the set-
tings view."
System volume levels
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
Sound System Volumes and select
the following settings:
•
Voice Control
•
Navi Voice Guidance
•
Phone Ringtone
Related information
•
Android auto* (p. 456)
•
Resetting the settings view (p. 174)
INFOTAINMENT
458
Media player technical data
The following tables list compatible file formats
and other technical specifications for the media
player.
Audio files
For-
mat
File extension Codec
MP3 .mp3 MPEG1 Layer III,
MPEG2 Layer III,
MP3 Pro (mp3
compatible),
MP3 HD (mp3
compatible)
AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC (MPEG-4
part III Audio),
HE-AAC (aacPlus
v1/v2)
WMA .wma WMA8/9,
WMA9/10 Pro
WAV .wav LPCM
FLAC .flac FLAC
Video files
Format File extension
MP4 .mp4, .m4v
MPEG-PS .mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v
Format File extension
AVI .avi
AVI (DivX) .avi, .divx
ASF .asf, .wmv
MKV .mkv
Subtitles
Format File extension
SubViewer .sub
SubRip .srt
SSA .ssa
DivX
®
DivX Certified devices have been tested for high
quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. When you
see the DivX logo, you have the freedom to play
your favorite DivX movies.
Profile DivX Home Theater
Video codec DivX, MPEG-4
Resolution 720x576
Audio speed
(bit rate)
4.8Mbps
Frame per sec-
ond
30 fps
File extension .divx, .avi
Max. file size 4 GB
Audio codec MP3, AC3
Subtitles XSUB
Special func-
tions
Multiple subtitles, multiple
audio, resume play
Reference Meets all requirements of
the DivX
®
Home Theater
profile. Visit divx.com for
more information and soft-
ware tools to convert your
files into DivX
®
Home
Theater. video.
Storing information on a USB device
In order for the system to read data stored on a
USB device, the following specifications must be
met. Any folder structures will not be shown in
the center display during playback.
Max. number
Files 15,000
Folders 1,000
Folder levels 8
Playlists 100
INFOTAINMENT
}}
* Option/accessory.
459
Max. number
Tracks in a playlist 1,000
Subfolders No limit
USB socket
•
Type A socket
•
Version 2.0
•
Voltage 5 V
•
Max. current 2.1 A
Related information
•
CD (media) player* (p. 451)
Phone
A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone can be paired
and connected to the vehicle's integrated hands-
free system.
The infotainment system offers hands-free func-
tionality for remote-controlling a number of a cell
phone's features. The phone's integrated controls
can also be used, even when it is connected to
the vehicle.
When the phone has been paired and connected
to the infotainment system, it can be used to
make or receive calls, send or receive text mes-
sages, to stream music, etc., or as an Internet
connection.
The phone is controlled from
the center display but the App
menu (accessed using the
right-side steering wheel key-
pad) and voice commands can
also be used to control certain
functions.
Overview
Microphone
Cell phone
Center display
Keypad for controlling phone functions
shown in the center display and voice com-
mands
Instrument panel
Related information
•
Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone
(p. 461)
•
Handling phone calls (p. 462)
•
Handling text messages (p. 463)
•
Pairing a cell phone (p. 460)
INFOTAINMENT
460
•
Phone settings (p. 465)
•
Text message settings (p. 465)
Pairing a cell phone
A Bluetooth
®
-enabled cell phone or other device
can be paired and wirelessly connected to the
infotainment system.
When a cell phone or other device is connected,
audio can be streamed to the infotainment sys-
tem. Toggle between the devices by pressing the
TEL and MEDIA buttons to access the respective
sources' functions.
Before a Bluetooth device can be used with
the infotainment system, it has to be paired
("registered").
This procedure only needs to be done once for
each device (a maximum of 20 Bluetooth devices
can be paired to the system). Once a device has
been paired and its Bluetooth function is acti-
vated, it can then be selected for use (wirelessly
connected) to the vehicle's infotainment system.
Two Bluetooth devices can be connected at the
same time. However, if two cell phones are con-
nected, only the most recently connected one
can be used as a phone. The other one can be
used to e.g., to stream audio or video. To change
what the phone will be used for, see the article
"Bluetooth settings."
A paired and connected cell phone can also be
used to connect the vehicle to the Internet. To do
so, its tethering/personal hotspot function must
be activated.
There are two ways of pairing a Bluetooth device
to the infotainment system:
•
Searching for the phone (or other device)
from the vehicle
•
Searching for the vehicle from the phone (or
other device)
The following instructions assume that a cell
phone is to be paired to the infotainment system
but the procedure is the same for any Bluetooth
device.
Alternative 1: searching for the phone
from the vehicle
1. Make the phone discoverable/visible using
its Bluetooth function. Refer to the phone's
user guide if necessary.
2.
Open the Phone view on the center display.
>
•
If no phones have been paired to the
vehicle, tap
Add phone.
•
If a list of phones is displayed, tap
Change and tap Add phone in
the pop-up window.
3. Tap the name of the phone to be connected.
4. Check that the code displayed in the vehicle
is the same as the one in the phone. Confirm
in both places.
INFOTAINMENT
}}
461
5. For the phone selected, accept or cancel the
alternatives for the phone book (list of con-
tacts), text messages, etc. Full functionality
may not be available in all cell phones.
6. To connect the vehicle to the Internet via the
phone's Bluetooth function, activate the
phone's function for tethering/personal hot-
spot, etc.
Alternative 2: searching for the vehicle
from the phone
1. Open the center display's Phone view.
•
If no phones have been paired to the vehi-
cle, tap
Add phone Make vehicle
discoverable
.
•
If a phone has previously been paired to
the vehicle, tap
Change and tap Add
phone
Make vehicle discoverable in
the pop-up window.
2. Activate the phone's Bluetooth function.
3. Search in the phone for Bluetooth devices.
> A list of Bluetooth devices will be dis-
played.
4. Select the vehicle's name in the list.
5. Check that the code displayed in the phone
is the same as the one in the vehicle. Con-
firm in both places.
6. For the phone selected, accept or cancel the
alternatives for the phone book (list of con-
tacts), text messages, etc. Full functionality
may not be available in all cell phones.
7. To connect the vehicle to the Internet via the
phone's Bluetooth function, activate the
phone's function for tethering/personal hot-
spot, etc.
NOTE
If your cell phone's operating system is upda-
ted, this may break the connection between
the phone and the vehicle. If this happens,
delete the phone from the list of paired
phones and repeat the pairing procedure
described in this article.
Compatible cell phones
Many of the cell phones available today have
Bluetooth functionality but not all of them are
fully compatible with the vehicle. Go to
www.volvocars.com for a list of compatible
phones or contact your Volvo retailer.
Related information
•
Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone
(p. 461)
•
Handling phone calls (p. 462)
•
Handling text messages (p. 463)
•
Phone settings (p. 465)
•
Bluetooth settings (p. 466)
Connecting/disconnecting a cell
phone
Once a cell phone or other Bluetooth device has
been paired to the infotainment system, it can be
connected, disconnected or removed from the
list of available devices.
Connecting automatically
Only the 2 most recently connected cell phones
can be connected automatically.
1. Before switching on the vehicle's ignition, be
sure that the phone's Bluetooth function is
activated.
To connect to the Internet, the phone's per-
sonal hotspot (tethering) function must also
be activated.
2. Switch on the ignition.
> The phone will be connected to the sys-
tem and can be used wirelessly.
Connecting manually
1. Be sure that the phone's Bluetooth and per-
sonal hotspot (tethering) functions are acti-
vated.
2. In the center display, open Phone view and
tap
Change phone.
> A list of available Bluetooth devices (ones
that have already been paired to the info-
tainment system) will be displayed.
||
INFOTAINMENT
462
3. Tap the name of the phone or other device
to be connected.
> The phone (or other device) will be con-
nected.
Disconnecting a phone
–
Deactivate the phone's Bluetooth function.
If a phone is carried out of range of the vehicle, it
will automatically be disconnected.
If a call in progress when this is done, the call will
be transferred from the vehicle's speakers/micro-
phone to the cell phone.
Changing phones
1. In the center display, open Phone view.
2.
Tap
Change .
> A list of available Bluetooth devices (ones
that have already been paired to the info-
tainment system) will be displayed.
3. Tap the name of the phone (or other device)
to be connected.
Removing a phone (or other device)
from the list
1. In the center display, open Phone view.
2.
Tap
Settings Communication
Bluetooth Devices.
> A list of available Bluetooth devices (ones
that have already been paired to the info-
tainment system) will be displayed.
3. Tap the name of the phone to be deleted
from the list.
4.
Tap
Remove device and confirm.
> The phone or other device is no longer
paired to the vehicle. Before this device
can be used again, the pairing procedure
will have to be repeated.
Related information
•
Pairing a cell phone (p. 460)
Handling phone calls
Calls can be made to one or more parties.
Generic illustration
Making calls
1. In the center display, open Phone sub-view.
2. Initiate a call from: recently made calls, the
phone book (list of contacts) or enter a num-
ber. Search for or scroll to a contact in the
phone book. Tap
in the phone book to
add a contact to your list of
Favorites.
3.
Tap
Call or .
4.
Tap
End call to end a phone call.
Calls can also be made from the list of recent
calls using the App menu, which can be opened
using the right-side steering wheel keypad's
symbol.
INFOTAINMENT
}}
463
Making multiple calls
While a call is in progress:
1.
Tap
Add call.
2. Select from the list of recent calls or from
the phone book.
3.
Tap a line in the list of recent calls or
to
call a contact in the phone book.
4.
Tap
Swap call to toggle between calls.
5.
Tap
End call to end a phone call.
Group (conference) calls
While multiple calls are in progress:
1.
Tap
Join calls to merge ongoing calls.
2.
Tap
End call to end a phone call.
Incoming calls
Information about incoming calls is displayed in
the instrument panel and the center display. Han-
dle the calls using the right-side steering wheel
keypad or the center display.
1.
Tap
Answer/Reject.
2.
Tap
End call to end a phone call.
Incoming calls while another call is in
progress
1.
Tap
Answer/Reject.
2.
Tap
End call to end a phone call.
Privacy
While a call is in progress:
–
Tap Privacy.
> The vehicle's integrated microphone will
be turned off.
•
Switch to mobile phone: the hands-free
function will be disconnected and the call will
continue in the cell phone.
•
Driver focused: the microphone in the ceil-
ing liner on the passenger's side will be
muted and the call will continue using vehi-
cle's the hands-free function on the driver's
side.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 459)
•
Voice control for cell phones (p. 123)
•
Using the center display (p. 34)
•
Using the center display keyboard (p. 47)
•
Phone settings (p. 465)
Handling text messages
Text messages can be received and sent from a
Bluetooth-connected cell phone
7
.
Text message functionality has to be activated in
certain cell phones and not all phones offer full
compatibility/functionality. Go to
support.volvocars.com for additional information.
Handling text messages in the center
display
If this setting has been selected, text messages
will only be shown in the center display. See also
the article "Text message settings" for additional
information.
From the center display's App
view, tap
Messages to handle
text messages from the center
display.
7
iPhones do not support sending text messages via the vehicle.
||
INFOTAINMENT
464
NOTE
While the vehicle is moving:
•
Text messages will be truncated to one
line. Tap the
Read out button to have
the entire text read aloud.
•
The center display's keyboard cannot be
used.
Reading aloud text messages in the center
display
–
Tap Read out to have the message read
aloud or tap the message to be displayed or
tap the message to be read.
Sending text messages from the center
display
1. Messages can be answered or created from
the center display.
•
Answering a text message: Tap the name
of the contact who sent the message and
then tap
Answer.
•
Creating a text message: Tap
Create
new and then tap +. Select a contact or
enter a phone number.
2. Write the message.
3.
Tap
Send.
Handling text messages in the
instrument panel
Text messages are only displayed in the instru-
ment panel if this setting has been selected. See
also the article "Text message settings" for addi-
tional information.
Reading aloud new text messages in the
instrument panel
–
To have a message read aloud, select Read
out using the steering wheel keypad.
Dictating an answer from the instrument
panel
After a text message has been read aloud, an
answer can be dictated.
–
Tap Answer using the steering wheel key-
pad to initiate a dictation dialog.
Message notification
See the article "Text message settings" for a list
of possible notification settings.
Related information
•
Text message settings (p. 465)
•
Phone (p. 459)
•
Phone settings (p. 465)
•
Voice control for cell phones (p. 123)
•
Using the center display keyboard (p. 47)
Managing the phone book
The following is information about keeping track
of contacts in your Bluetooth-connected cell
phone's phone book.
Favorites: tap to add or remove a con-
tact from the list of favorites.
Search contacts: tap to search for a
phone number or a name in the phone book
(list of contacts).
To make navigating in the list easier, a quick-
select function provides names that match
the letters as they entered.
The vehicle can store up to 3,000 contacts from
a Bluetooth-connected cell phone. Only contacts
from the currently connected phone are accessi-
ble.
INFOTAINMENT
* Option/accessory.
465
Sorting
The phone book is sorted in alphabetical order
and you can choose to sort by first or last names
(see the article "Phone settings" for additional
information). Any special characters in the list of
contacts in the phone book will be listed
under ”#”.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 459)
•
Voice control for cell phones (p. 123)
•
Phone settings (p. 465)
•
Changing settings in apps (p. 178)
•
Using the center display keyboard (p. 47)
Phone settings
The following settings can be made for a paired
and connected cell phone.
Cell phones
–
Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap
Settings Communication Phone
and choose among the following settings:
•
Ringtones: select a ring tone (tones from
the cell phone or the vehicle can be
used). Not all cell phones are fully com-
patible and it may not be possible to use
their ring tones in the vehicle. Go to
www.volvocars.com for additional informa-
tion.
•
Sort order for contacts: select sort cri-
teria for the phone book (list of contacts).
To show call notifications in the head-up dis-
play*, see the article "Head-up display."
Related information
•
Text message settings (p. 465)
•
Bluetooth settings (p. 466)
•
Phone (p. 459)
•
Handling phone calls (p. 462)
•
Head-up display (HUD)* (p. 118)
Text message settings
The following settings can be made for text mes-
sages received through a paired and connected
cell phone.
Text message settings
–
Pull down the center display's Top view and
tap
Settings Communication Text
Messages
and choose among the following
settings:
•
Notification in center display: shows
text messages in the center display's sta-
tus bar.
•
Notification in driver display: shows
text messages in the instrument panel.
With this alternative active, incoming mes-
sages can be handled from the right-side
steering wheel keypad.
•
Text message tone: select an audible
signal for incoming text messages.
Related information
•
Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone
(p. 461)
•
Pairing a cell phone (p. 460)
•
Handling text messages (p. 463)
INFOTAINMENT
466
Bluetooth settings
The following settings apply to a Bluetooth-con-
nected cell phone or other device.
Bluetooth
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap Communication Bluetooth
Devices
and select among the following set-
tings:
•
Previously paired devices: lists the
devices that are paired and connected to
the vehicle.
•
Internet connection: select to connect
to the Internet using the device's
Bluetooth connection.
•
Add device: begin the procedure to pair
a new device.
•
Remove device: remove a paired device.
•
Allowed services for this device: select
what the device will be used for: make
calls, send/receive messages, stream
media, Internet connection.
Bluetooth compliance
United States
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the equip-
ment. This transmitter must not be co-located or
operated in conjunction with any other antenna
or transmitter.
Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Related information
•
Internet connected vehicle (p. 466)
•
Pairing a cell phone (p. 460)
•
Phone (p. 459)
•
Media player (p. 446)
•
Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone
(p. 461)
Internet connected vehicle
Connecting to the Internet makes it possible to
e.g., use certain navigation services, listen to
web radio, stream music using apps, contact a
retailer and download software.
The vehicle can connect to the Internet using
Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or via the integrated modem.
INFOTAINMENT
}}
467
When connected, it is possible to share (tether) a
Wi-Fi-hotspot to allow other devices to use the
connection
8
.
Connection status is shown in the center dis-
play's status bar.
Related information
•
Connecting to the Internet (p. 467)
•
Apps (applications) (p. 430)
•
Booking service and repairs (p. 508)
•
System updates (p. 511)
•
Volvo ID (p. 25)
•
Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 43)
•
Tethering (Wi-Fi sharing) (p. 468)
Connecting to the Internet
Connect the vehicle to the Internet using
Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or via the vehicle's integrated
modem.
The cell phone and the network service provider
must support Internet sharing (tethering) and the
subscription must included data transfer.
See the terms and confidentiality information at
support.volvocars.com before connecting to the
Internet.
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay or Android Auto,
an Internet connection can only be estab-
lished by using Wi-Fi or the vehicle's inte-
grated modem.
Connect using Bluetooth
See the article "Pairing a cell phone."
Connect using Wi-Fi
1. Activate tethering/personal hotspot in the
cell phone.
2.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
3.
Tap
Communication Wi-Fi.
4. Tap Wi-Fi to activate/deactivate.
5. Tap the name of the network to be used.
6. Enter the network password.
7. If a different connection was used previously,
confirm the connection change.
> The vehicle will connect to the network.
Please be aware that certain cell phones disable
tethering when the connection to the vehicle has
been broken, e.g., when the phone has been
removed from the vehicle. In such cases, the
phone's tethering function will have to be reacti-
vated the next time the phone is used to connect
to the Internet.
When a phone is connected to the vehicle, it is
saved for future use. When a max. number of 50
have been saved, the first one connected will be
deleted. To show the list of saved networks or to
manually delete a network, tap
Settings Wi-Fi
Saved networks.
See the article "Wi-Fi technology and security"
for network connection requirements.
8
This does not apply to Wi-Fi connections.
||
INFOTAINMENT
468
Connect using the vehicle's integrated
modem
When the vehicle is connected using the modem,
Volvo On Call services will use the connection.
1. Insert a personal SIM card in the holder near
the floor on the passenger's side.
2.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
3.
Tap
Communication Vehicle modem
Internet
.
4.
Tap
Vehicle modem Internet to activate/
deactivate.
5. If a different connection was used previously,
confirm the connection change.
6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code.
> The vehicle will connect to the network.
Related information
•
Pairing a cell phone (p. 460)
•
Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone
(p. 461)
•
Connecting a device via the USB socket
(p. 452)
•
Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 470)
•
Apple CarPlay (p. 453)
Tethering (Wi-Fi sharing)
When the vehicle is connected to the Internet,
this connection can be shared (tethered) with
other devices
9
.
The network service provider (the SIM card) must
support tethering.
1. Open the center display's Top view.
2.
Tap
Settings Communication
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot.
INFOTAINMENT
469
3.
Tap
Network name and assign a name to
the hotspot.
4.
Tap
Password and create a password to be
used by devices trying to connect (tether) to
the hotspot.
5.
Tap
Frequency band and select a fre-
quency that the hotspot will use to transmit
data. This may not be possible in all markets.
6.
Activate/deactivate by tapping the
Vehicle
Wi-Fi Hotspot box.
7. If another connection has been used previ-
ously, confirm the change of connections.
> It is now possible for external devices to
connect to the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot.
Connection status will be indicated in a symbol in
the center display's status bar.
Tap
Connected devices to see a list of con-
nected devices.
Related information
•
Internet connected vehicle (p. 466)
•
Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 470)
•
Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 43)
•
Internet connection troubleshooting (p. 469)
Internet connection troubleshooting
The following are factors that may affect the
vehicle's Internet connection.
The amount of data being transmitted depends
on the services or apps that are currently in use.
For example, streaming audio requires a great
deal of data to be transmitted, which requires a
good connection and a strong signal.
Cell phone to the vehicle
Connection speed may vary depending on the
location of the cell phone in the vehicle. Move the
phone closer to the center display to increase
signal strength. Be sure that there are no
obstructing/screening objects between the
phone and the screen.
Cell phone to the network operator
The speed of the mobile network may vary
depending on coverage/reception in the vehicle's
location. Reception is generally poorer in tunnels,
in mountainous areas, in deep valleys or indoors.
Connection speed may also depend on the type
of subscription that you have with the service
provider.
Contact your service provider in the event of data
transmission problems.
Restarting the phone
If you experience problems making a connection,
it may help to restart the phone.
Related information
•
Internet connected vehicle (p. 466)
•
Connecting to the Internet (p. 467)
9
Does not apply for a Wi-Fi connection.
INFOTAINMENT
470
Deleting Wi-Fi networks
Networks that are not used can be deleted.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap Communication Wi-Fi Saved
networks
.
3.
Tap
Forget to remove the network.
4. Confirm the selection.
> The vehicle will no longer connect to the
deleted network.
Deleting all networks
All networks can be deleted at the same time by
returning (resetting) to factory settings.
If this is done, all user data and settings will be
reset to their default settings.
Related information
•
Internet connected vehicle (p. 466)
•
Connecting to the Internet (p. 467)
Wi-Fi technology and security
The following are types of networks can be con-
nect to.
It is possible to connect to the following types of
networks:
•
Frequency: 2.4 or 5 GHz
10
.
•
Standards: 802.11 a/b/g/n.
•
Security type: WPA2-AES-CCMP.
The vehicle's Wi-Fi system is designed to man-
age Wi-Fi devices in the vehicle.
If several devices are using a frequency at the
same time, this may result in poorer performance.
Related information
•
Internet connected vehicle (p. 466)
•
Connecting to the Internet (p. 467)
•
Tethering (Wi-Fi sharing) (p. 468)
•
Internet connection troubleshooting (p. 469)
Vehicle modem settings
The vehicle is equipped with a modem that can
be used to connect the vehicle to the Internet. It
is also possible to share (tether) this connection
via Wi-Fi.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
Communication Vehicle Modem
Internet
and choose among the following
settings:
•
Vehicle modem Internet: select to use the
vehicle's modem to connect to the Internet.
•
Data usage: %s: Tap Reset to restart
(reset) the counter for the amount of data
sent/received.
•
Network
Select carrier
: select a service provider
automatically or manually.
Data roaming: select to allow the vehicle to
connect to another network if the standard
network is not available (e.g., if you are driv-
ing in another country). This could entail
additional charges, consult your service pro-
vider.
•
SIM card PIN
10
Selecting a frequency is not possible in all markets.
INFOTAINMENT
}}
471
Change PIN: enter max. 4 digits.
Disable PIN: Allow access to the SIM card
without requiring a PIN code.
•
Send request code: this is used to down-
load the balance remaining on a SIM card.
This is specific to your service provider.
Related information
•
Internet connected vehicle (p. 466)
•
Connecting to the Internet (p. 467)
Downloading, updating and
uninstalling apps
When the vehicle is connected to the Internet,
apps can be added (downloaded), kept up-to-
date or deleted.
NOTE
Downloading data may affect other services
that transfer data such as web radio, stream-
ing music, etc. If this occurs, a download in
progress can be cancelled or the other serv-
ice can be temporarily turned off.
Apps are managed via the
Download Center in the cen-
ter display's App view.
To download, update or delete
apps, the vehicle must be con-
nected to the Internet.
Downloading an app
1.
Open the
Download Center app.
2.
Select
New apps to open a list of apps that
are available but which are not installed in
the vehicle. Tap anywhere in a line for an app
to expand the list for additional information.
3.
Select
Install to start downloading the app. It
will remain in the list and a new download
can be initiated if necessary.
> Download status will be indicated while it
is in progress.
A message will be displayed if a download
cannot be started immediately. The app
will remain in the list and a new download
can be initiated if necessary.
Cancelling (aborting) a download
–
Tap Abort to cancel a download that is cur-
rently underway.
Only a download can be cancelled. If the installa-
tion phase has begun, it cannot be interrupted.
Updating apps
If an app is being used while an update is in pro-
gress, it will be restarted to complete the update.
Update (install) all
1.
Open the
Download Center app.
2.
Select
Install all.
> The update will begin.
Updating certain apps
1.
Open the
Download Center app.
2.
Select
Application updates to open a list
of available updates.
3.
Find the desired app and select
Install.
> The update will begin.
||
INFOTAINMENT
472
Uninstalling an app
An app being used must be closed before it can
be uninstalled.
1.
Open the
Download Center app.
2.
Select
Application updates to open a list
of apps that have been installed.
3.
Find the desired app and select
Uninstall to
begin uninstalling the app.
> When the app has been uninstalled, it will
be removed from the list.
Related information
•
Internet connected vehicle (p. 466)
•
Media player (p. 446)
•
System updates (p. 511)
Infotainment system license
information
The following license information pertains to Vol-
vo's agreements with certain manufacturers/
developers.
Bowers & Wilkins
Bowers & Wilkins and B&W are trademarks of
the B&W Group Ltd. Nautilus is a trademark of
B&W Group Ltd. Kevlar is a registered trademark
of DuPont.
Dirac Live
Dirac Live technology has been used in the
development and tuning of the sound in order to
ensure a world-class sound experience. Dirac
Live and the D-symbol are registered trademarks
of Dirac Research AB.
DivX
®
DivX
®
, DivX Certified
®
and associated logos are
trademarks of DivX, LLC and are used under
license.
About DIVX VIDEO:This DivX Certified
®
device
can play DivX
®
Home Theater video files up to
576p (including .avi, .divx). Download free soft-
ware at www.divx.com to create, play and stream
digital video.
About DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified
®
device must be registered in order to
play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD)
movies. To obtain your registration code, locate
the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu.
INFOTAINMENT
}}
473
Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how
to complete your registration.
Patent number
Covered by one or more of the following U.S. pat-
ents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052."
Gracenote
®
Gracenote, Gracenote logo and logotype,
"Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote MusicID
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Gracenote, Inc in the United States and/or other
countries.
Gracenote
®
End User License Agreement
This application or device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Grace-
note”). The software from Gracenote (the “Grace-
note Software”) enables this application to per-
form disc and/or file identification and obtain
music-related information, including name, artist,
track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”)
from online servers or embedded databases (col-
lectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote Data
only by means of the intended End-User func-
tions of this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for
your own personal non-commercial use only. You
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to
any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACE-
NOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use
the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate
these restrictions. If your license terminates, you
agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Grace-
note Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights.
Under no circumstances will Gracenote become
liable for any payment to you for any information
that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc.
may enforce its rights under this Agreement
against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to
track queries for statistical purposes. The pur-
pose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is
to allow the Gracenote service to count queries
without knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote serv-
ice.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Grace-
note Data are licensed to you “AS IS.” Gracenote
makes no representations or warranties, express
or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Grace-
note Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Grace-
note reserves the right to delete data from the
Gracenote Servers or to change data categories
for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient.
No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software
or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that func-
tioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not
obligated to provide you with new enhanced or
additional data types or categories that Grace-
note may provide in the future and is free to dis-
continue its services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-
CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE
RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR
USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSE-
QUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR
FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
||
INFOTAINMENT
474
© Gracenote, Inc. 2009
Sensus software
This software uses parts of sources from clib2
and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source
(Copyright ©) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994),
and Quercus Robusta (Copyright ©) 1990,
1993), The Regents of the University of
California. All or some portions are derived from
material licensed to the University of California by
American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix
System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced
herein with the permission of UNIX System
Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in
source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met: Redistributions of
source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution. Neither the name of the
<ORGANIZATION> nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission. THIS
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
This software uses parts of sources from
"libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample
Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January
26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The
Original Code is Copyright ©) 1991-2000 Silicon
Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created
by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright ©) [1991-2000]
Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions: The above copyright notice including
the dates of first publication and either this
permission notice or a reference to http://
oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice,
the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be
used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
sale, use or other dealings in this Software
without prior written authorization from Silicon
Graphics, Inc.
This software is based in parts on the work of the
FreeType Team.
INFOTAINMENT
}}
475
This software uses parts of SSLeay Library:
Copyright ©) 1995-1998 Eric Young
([email protected]). All rights reserved
Linux software
This product contains software licensed under
GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU
Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc.
You have the right of acquisition, modification,
and distribution of the source code of the GPL/
LGPL software.
You may download Source Code from the
following website at no charge: http://
www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/
download/TVM_8351_013
The website provides the Source Code "As Is"
and without warranty of any kind.
By downloading Source Code, you expressly
assume all risk and liability associated with
downloading and using the Source Code and
complying with the user agreements that
accompany each Source Code.
Please note that we cannot respond to any
inquiries regarding the source code.
camellia:1.2.0
Copyright ©) 2006, 2007
NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone
Corporation). All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer as
the first lines of this file unmodified.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
Unicode: 5.1.0
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights
reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in
http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data
files and any associated documentation (the
"Data Files") or Unicode software and any
associated documentation (the "Software") to
deal in the Data Files or Software without
restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or
Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a)
the above copyright notice(s) and this permission
notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or
Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s)
and this permission notice appear in associated
documentation, and ©) there is clear notice in
each modified Data File or in the Software as
well as in the documentation associated with the
Data File(s) or Software that the data or software
has been modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE
PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
||
INFOTAINMENT
476
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS
INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
copyright holder shall not be used in advertising
or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
dealings in these Data Files or Software without
prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
Bluetooth
®
declaration of conformity
United States
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the equip-
ment. This transmitter must not be co-located or
operated in conjunction with any other antenna
or transmitter.
Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Terms, conditions and
confidentiality
See terms and conditions for services and cus-
tomer privacy policy at support.volvocars.com.
Terms & Conditions for Services
Volvo offers the best possible services to make
owning and operating a Volvo safe, convenient,
comfortable and enjoyable. Volvo offers a wide
array of services, ranging from emergency assis-
tance to navigation and infotainment.
Customer privacy policy
This policy applies to the way in which customer-
related and personal information are handled. Its
purpose is to provide our present, previous and
future customers a general understanding of:
•
The circumstances under which we gather
and process your personal information.
•
The types of personal information gathered.
•
The reasons for gathering your personal
information.
•
How we deal with your personal information.
This policy can be read in its entirety at
support.volvocars.com.
WHEELS AND TIRES
WHEELS AND TIRES
478
Tires
Your vehicle is equipped with tires according to
the vehicle's tire information placard on the B-
pillar (the structural member at the side of the
vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening).
CAUTION
Some Volvo models are equipped with an
Ultra High Performance tire and wheel com-
bination designed to provide maximum dry
pavement performance with consideration for
hydroplaning resistance. They may be more
susceptible to road hazard damage and,
depending on driving conditions, may achieve
a tread life of less than 20,000 miles (30,000
km). Even if this vehicle is equipped with Vol-
vo’s advanced AWD or stability system, these
tires are not designed for winter driving, and
should be replaced with winter tires when
weather conditions dictate.
The tires have good road holding characteristics
and offer good handling on dry and wet surfaces.
It should be noted however that the tires have
been developed to give these features on snow/
ice-free surfaces.
Most models are equipped with "all-season" tires,
which provide a somewhat higher degree of road
holding on slippery surfaces than tires without
the "all-season" rating. However, for optimum
road holding on icy or snow-covered roads, we
recommend suitable winter tires on all four
wheels.
When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires
are the same size designation, type (radial) and
preferably from the same manufacturer, on all
four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering
the car's roadholding and handling characteris-
tics.
Recommended tires
Your vehicle is factory-equipped with Volvo origi-
nal tires that are marked VOL
1
on the sidewall.
These tires have been carefully adapted to your
vehicle. When replacing tires, it is important that
the new ones also have the VOL designation in
order to help maintain the vehicle's driving and
handling characteristics.
New tires
Remember that tires are perishable goods. As of
2000, the manufacturing week and year (Depart-
ment of Transportation (DOT) stamp) will be indi-
cated with 4 digits (e.g., 0715 means that the tire
illustrated was manufactured during week 7 of
2015).
Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even when they are not
being used. It is recommended that tires gener-
ally be replaced after 6 years of normal service.
Heat caused by hot climates, frequent high load-
ing conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.) exposure can
accelerate the aging process. The temporary
spare
2
should also be replaced at 6-year inter-
vals, even if it has never been used. A tire's age
can be determined by the DOT stamp on the
1
There may be certain exceptions depending on the tire's dimensions.
2
Not available in all models.
WHEELS AND TIRES
479
sidewall (see the illustration). A tire with e.g., visi-
ble cracks or discoloration should be replaced
immediately.
Tire economy
•
Maintain correct tire pressure.
•
Avoid fast starts, hard braking and tire
screeching.
•
Tire wear increases with speed.
•
Correct front wheel alignment is very impor-
tant.
•
Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy and
driving comfort.
•
Tires must maintain the same direction of
rotation throughout their lifetime.
•
When replacing tires, the tires with the most
tread should be mounted on the rear wheels
to reduce the chance of oversteer during
hard braking.
•
Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the
tires and/or wheels permanently.
Tire rotation
Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tire
wear is affected by a number of factors such as
tire inflation, ambient temperature, driving style,
etc.
NOTE
•
If the tires are rotated, they should only
be moved from front to rear or vice versa.
They should never be rotated left to
right/right to left.
•
Ideally, tire rotation should be done the
first time after approximately 3,000 miles
(5,000 km) and thereafter at 6,000-mile
(10,000-km) intervals. Some customers
find that tire rotation may help to get
extra mileage from tire life.
•
Tire rotation should only be performed if
front/rear tire wear is fairly even and
tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm).
Storing wheels and tires
When storing complete wheels (tires mounted on
rims), they should be suspended off the floor or
placed on their sides on the floor.
Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on
their sides or standing upright, but should not be
suspended.
CAUTION
Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,
dry, dark place, and should never be stored in
close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils, etc.
WARNING
•
The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo
are specified to meet stringent stability
and handling requirements. Unapproved
wheel/tire size combinations can nega-
tively affect your vehicle's stability and
handling.
•
Any damage caused by installation of
unapproved wheel/tire size combinations
will not be covered by your new vehicle
warranty. Volvo assumes no responsibility
for death, injury, or expenses that may
result from such installations.
Related information
•
Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 481)
•
Tread wear indicator (p. 480)
WHEELS AND TIRES
480
Tire direction of rotation
Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's braking
properties and ability to force aside rain, snow
and slush.
The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the tire
•
The tires with the most tread should always
be on the rear axle (to help reduce the risk of
skidding).
•
When switching between summer and winter
tires, mark the tires to indicate where they
were mounted on the car, e.g., LF = left front,
RR = right rear
•
Tires with tread designed to roll in only one
direction are marked with an arrow on the
sidewall.
•
Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician if you are unsure about the tread
depth.
Related information
•
Tires (p. 478)
Tread wear indicator
The tires have wear indicator strips running
across or parallel to the tread.
The letters TWI are printed on the side of the tire.
When approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on
the tread, these strips become visible and indi-
cate that the tire should be replaced. Tires with
less than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor
traction.
When replacing worn tires, it is recommended
that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size
as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the
same make (manufacturer) will help prevent
alteration of the driving characteristics of the
vehicle.
Related information
•
Tire direction of rotation (p. 480)
•
Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 481)
WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
481
Checking tire inflation pressure
Correct tire inflation pressure helps improve driv-
ing stability, save fuel and increase the service
life of the tires.
WARNING
•
Under-inflation is the most common
cause of tire failure and may result in
severe tire cracking, tread separation, or
"blow-out," with unexpected loss of vehi-
cle control and increased risk of injury.
•
Under-inflated tires reduce the load car-
rying capacity of your vehicle.
Cold tires
Inflation pressure should be checked when the
tires are cold.
The tires are considered to be cold when
they have the same temperature as the sur-
rounding (ambient) air.
This temperature is normally reached after the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.
After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile
(1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. If you
have to drive farther than this distance to pump
your tire(s), check and record the tire pressure
first and add the appropriate air pressure when
you get to the pump.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire
inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree
temperature drop causes a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your
tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the
proper pressure, which can be found on the vehi-
cle's tire information placard or certification label.
If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot,
never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires
are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures
to increase above recommended cold pressures.
A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation
pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
Recommended inflation pressures
Tire inflation placard
A tire inflation pressure placard is located on the
driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the
side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door
opening). This placard indicates the designation
of the factory-mounted tires on your vehicle, as
well as load limits and inflation pressure.
NOTE
•
The placard shown indicates inflation
pressure for the tires installed on the
vehicle at the factory only.
•
A certain amount of air seepage from the
tires occurs naturally and tire pressure
fluctuates with seasonal changes in tem-
perature. Always check tire pressure reg-
ularly.
•
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation
pressure, including the spare
3
, at least once
a month and before long trips. You are
strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure
gauge, as automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate.
•
Use the recommended cold inflation pres-
sure for optimum tire performance and wear.
•
Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
3
Not available in all models.
||
WHEELS AND TIRES
482
Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire,
then firmly press the tire gauge onto the
valve.
2. Add air to reach the recommended air pres-
sure.
3. Replace the valve cap.
CAUTION
•
After inflating the tires, always reinstall the
valve cap to help avoid damage to the
valve from dirt, gravel, etc.
•
Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.
4. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there
are no nails or other objects embedded that
could puncture the tire and cause an air leak.
5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are
no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregulari-
ties.
6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including
the spare.
NOTE
•
If you overfill the tire, release air by push-
ing on the metal stem in the center of the
valve. Then recheck the pressure with
your tire gauge.
•
Some spare tires require higher inflation
pressure than the other tires. Consult the
tire inflation pressure table or the inflation
pressure placard.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
TPMS provides a warning if inflation pressure in
one or more tires is too low. It also uses a sym-
bol (called a telltale) that will flash for
60 seconds and then glow steadily if there is a
system malfunction.
TPMS uses the rotational speed of the tires in
combination with signal analysis of the ABS sen-
sor signals to determine if they are properly infla-
ted. When a tire is under-inflated, its diameter
(and consequently also its rotational speed)
changes. By comparing the individual tires with
each other it is possible to determine if one or
more tires are under inflated. If inflation pressure
is too low, an indicator symbol will illuminate in
the instrument panel and a text message will be
displayed.
Symbol Explanation
The symbol illuminates to indicate
low tire inflation pressure.
If a malfunction occurs in the sys-
tem, the tire pressure warning sym-
bol will flash for approximately
1 minute and then remain illumi-
nated.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
WHEELS AND TIRES
483
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pres-
sure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire cau-
ses the tire to overheat and can lead to tire fail-
ure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability. Please note that
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire main-
tenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-infla-
tion has not reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the tell-
tale will flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement
or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to con-
tinue to function properly.
Messages in the instrument panel
When the TPMS symbol illuminates, the following
text messages may also be displayed:
•
Tire pressure low Check tires, calibrate
after fill
•
Tire pressure system Temporarily
unavailable
•
Tire pressure system Service required
If TPMS cannot determine which tire(s) have low
inflation pressure:
•
All four tires will be shown as affected in the
center display
After changing wheels, always calibrate the sys-
tem to avoid false warnings.
TPMS does not replace the need for regular tire
inspection and maintenance.
NOTE
If you change to tires with a different dimen-
sion than the factory-installed ones, the
TPMS system must be calibrated for these
tires.
TPMS cannot be turned off.
WARNING
Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire
failure, resulting in a loss of control of the
vehicle.
Related information
•
Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 484)
•
Reinflating tires equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(p. 485)
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
WHEELS AND TIRES
484
Checking tire inflation pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
makes it possible to view the current inflation
pressure status of all four tires.
Checking inflation pressure
1.
Open the
Car status app in the center dis-
play's Application view.
2.
Tap
TPMS to see the tires' current inflation
pressure status.
The on-screen graphic displays the inflation pres-
sure status.
Status view. The illustration is generic and may vary from
model to model or after a software update
Color indications:
Green: tire pressure is above the threshold for a
low inflation pressure warning.
Yellow: low tire pressure.
•
One yellow wheel: the tire indicated is under-
inflated.
•
All wheels yellow: two or more tires are
under-inflated.
Stop safely and check/re-inflate the tire(s) as
soon as possible. Calibrate TPMS after re-inflat-
ing the tire(s).
All wheels gray:
•
Calibration is underway
•
Inflation pressure status is not known
It might be necessary to drive at a speed of at
least 22 mph (35 km/h) for several minutes for
the system to become operational.
All wheels gray combined with the message
Tire pressure system Temporarily
unavailable and the TPMS symbol in the
instrument panel (
) remains illuminated
after flashing for 1 minute: the system is tem-
porarily unavailable. It should become operational
again shortly.
All wheels gray combined with the message
Tire pressure system Service required and
the TPMS symbol in the instrument panel
(
) remains illuminated after flashing for
1 minute: the system is not functioning correctly.
Have it checked by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
Related information
•
Calibrating the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (p. 486)
•
Reinflating tires equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(p. 485)
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(p. 482)
WHEELS AND TIRES
485
Reinflating tires equipped with the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
When low tire pressure has been detected, a
message will be displayed in the instrument
panel and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
symbol will illuminate.
Symbol Explanation
When the TPMS symbol illuminates
and a message is displayed, check,
reinflate the tire(s) and calibrate
TPMS.
1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the infla-
tion pressure of all four tires.
2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure.
Consult the tire pressure decal located on
the driver's side B-pillar (the structural mem-
ber at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of
the driver's door opening) or the inflation
pressure table in your printed owner's man-
ual supplement.
3. Calibrate the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System, see the article "Calibrating the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System".
4. Drive the vehicle at a speed of at least
22 mph (35 km/h). Please be aware that the
TPMS telltale warning will not go out until
the low tire pressure has been corrected and
calibration has been carried out.
NOTE
To help avoid incorrect tire inflation pressure,
if possible only inflate the tires when they are
cold. The tires are considered to be cold
when they have the same temperature as the
surrounding (ambient) air. This temperature is
normally reached after the vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours. After driving a dis-
tance of approximately 1 mile (1.6 km), the
tires are considered to be warm.
CAUTION
When inflating tires, press the pump's mouth-
piece straight onto the valve to help avoid
bending or otherwise damaging the valve.
CAUTION
•
After inflating the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to the
valve from dirt, gravel, etc.
•
Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.
WARNING
•
Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to
tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of
the vehicle.
•
Tire monitoring systems cannot indicate
sudden tire damage caused by external
factors (e.g., a blowout) in advance.
Related information
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(p. 482)
•
Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 484)
•
Calibrating the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (p. 486)
WHEELS AND TIRES
486
Calibrating the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
In order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
to work properly, tire pressure reference values
must be set correctly. This must be done each
time wheels are changed or tire inflation pres-
sures are modified.
Calibrating TPMS
To calibrate the system:
1. Switch off the engine. The vehicle must be at
a standstill when calibration is started.
2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure.
Consult the tire pressure placard located on
the driver's side B-pillar (the structural mem-
ber at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of
the driver's door opening) or the inflation
pressure table in your printed owner's manual
supplement.
Tire inflation placard
3. Start the engine.
4.
Open the
Car status app in the center dis-
play's App view.
5.
Tap
TPMS to access Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.
6.
Tap
Calibrate.
7.
Tap
OK to confirm that the tire inflation pres-
sure has been checked and adjusted in all
four tires.
8. Drive the vehicle.
> Calibration is performed when the vehicle
is driven at a speed of at least 22 mph
(35 km/h) and will be interrupted if the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
switched off. Calibration continues auto-
matically in the background when driving
resumes.
When enough data has been collected to detect
a low tire pressure situation, the tires' color in the
center display will change to green. The system
will not give any text confirmation when calibra-
tion is finished although it will state if calibration
fails. When driving with heavy loads or at sus-
tained highway speeds, the tire pressure should
be adjusted to the recommended inflation pres-
sures.
WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
487
After adjusting inflation pressure, repeat steps
1-8.
NOTE
Always remember to calibrate the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System when the wheels
have been changed or the tire inflation pres-
sure has been corrected according to the tire
pressure placard or tire inflation pressure
table.
If correct reference values have not been set,
the system cannot issue low tire pressure
alerts correctly.
The vehicle must be parked with the engine
running to access the calibration button and
to start the calibration process.
WARNING
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
which is invisible and odorless but very poi-
sonous. For this reason, always perform the
calibration procedure outdoors or in a work-
shop with exhaust gas evacuation equipment.
Related information
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(p. 482)
•
Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 484)
•
Reinflating tires equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(p. 485)
Tire sealing system
4
Certain models are equipped with a tire sealing
system that enables you to temporarily seal a
hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire,
or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure.
Models equipped with a spare tire do not have
the tire sealing system.
Location
The tire sealing system is located under the floor
of the cargo compartment.
Introduction
The tire sealing system consists of an air com-
pressor, a container for the sealing compound,
wiring to connect the system to the vehicle’s
electrical system via one of the 12-volt sockets,
4
Certain models only.
||
WHEELS AND TIRES
* Option/accessory.
488
and a hose used to connect the system to the
tire’s inflation valve.
NOTE
The tire sealing system's compressor has
been tested and approved by Volvo.
The 12-volt sockets are located in the front tun-
nel console, on the rear side of the center con-
sole in the rear seat and in the cargo compart-
ment*.
Accessing the tire sealing system
The tire sealing system is stowed under the floor
of the cargo compartment. To access it:
1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo compartment.
2. Lift out the tire sealing system.
NOTE
•
The tire sealing system is only intended
to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not
the sidewall.
•
Tires with large holes or tears cannot be
repaired with the tire sealing system.
•
After use, stow the tire sealing system
properly to help prevent rattling.
WARNING
•
After using the tire sealing system, the
vehicle should not be driven farther than
approximately 120 miles (200 km).
•
Have the tire inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician as soon
as possible to determine if it can be per-
manently repaired or must be replaced.
•
The vehicle should not be driven faster
than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire
that has been temporarily repaired with
the tire sealing system.
•
After using the tire sealing system, drive
carefully and avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers and sudden stops.
Sealing compound container
The sealing compound container must be
replaced if the tire sealing system has been used
to repair a tire or if the container’s expiration date
has passed (see the date on decal).
NOTE
•
After use, the sealing compound bottle,
the hose, and certain other system com-
ponents must be replaced. Please con-
sult your Volvo retailer for replacement
parts.
•
If the sealing compound bottle’s expira-
tion date has passed, please take it to a
Volvo retailer or a recycling station that
can properly dispose of harmful sub-
stances.
WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
489
WARNING
Please keep the following points in mind
when using the tire sealing system:
•
The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in the
illustration) contains 1) rubber latex, natu-
ral and 2) ethanediol. These substances
are harmful if swallowed.
•
The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the respiratory tract,
the skin, the central nervous system, and
the eyes.
Precautions:
•
Keep out of reach of children.
•
Do not ingest the contents.
•
Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with
the skin.
•
Wash thoroughly after handling.
First aid:
•
Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention if
symptoms occur.
•
Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least
15 minutes, occasionally lifting the upper
and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if
symptoms occur.
•
Inhalation: Move the exposed person to
fresh air. If irritation persists, get medical
attention.
•
Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting
unless directed to do so by medical per-
sonnel. Get medical attention.
•
Disposal: Dispose of this material and its
container to a hazardous or special waste
collection point.
Related information
•
Inflating a tire with the tire sealing system
compressor (p. 493)
•
Using the tire sealing system (p. 489)
Using the tire sealing system
Overview
Electrical wire
Hose
Air release valve
Protective hose cover
Speed limit sticker (on the rear side of the
compressor)
Bottle holder (orange cover)
Air pressure gauge
Bottle with sealing compound
On/Off switch
||
WHEELS AND TIRES
490
Connecting
1. Activate the vehicle's hazard warning flashers
if the tire sealing system is to be used in an
area with traffic.
If the flat tire was caused by a nail, etc., do
not remove it from the tire. It will help to seal
the hole.
2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it to
the windshield so that it is clearly visible to
the driver. The vehicle should not be driven
faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a
tire that has been temporarily repaired with
the tire sealing system.
3.
Ensure that the on/off switch is in position 0
and take out the electrical wire and hose.
NOTE
Do not break the seal on the bottle. This
occurs automatically when the bottle is
screwed into the holder.
WARNING
Contact with the sealing compound may
cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash
the affected area immediately with soap and
water.
4. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle
holder on the compressor and unscrew the
cap on the bottle of sealing compound.
5. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder as far
as possible.
WARNING
The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep it
securely in place and help prevent sealing
compound leakage. Once in place, the bottle
cannot be unscrewed. This must be done by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
6. Be sure the air release valve on the com-
pressor's hose is completely closed. Remove
the valve cap from the tire’s inflation valve
and screw the tire sealing system’s hose
connector onto the valve as tightly as possi-
ble by hand.
7. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest
12-volt socket in the vehicle.
NOTE
Be sure that none of the other 12-volt sock-
ets is being used while the compressor is in
operation.
WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
491
8. Start the tire sealing system’s compressor by
pressing the on/off switch to position I.
WARNING
•
Never stand next to the tire being inflated
when the compressor is in operation.
•
If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,
switch off the compressor immediately.
•
If there is visible damage to the sidewall or
the rim, the tire cannot be repaired. The
vehicle should not be driven if this occurs.
Contact a towing service, use the Volvo On
Call feature in your vehicle or contact Volvo
Roadside Assistance if applicable.
NOTE
The air pressure gauge will temporarily show
an increase in pressure to approximately
88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing compound is
being pumped into the tire. The pressure
should return to a normal level after approxi-
mately 30 seconds.
9. Pump the tire for 7 minutes.
CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for more
than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheat-
ing.
10. Switch off the compressor and check the
inflation pressure on the air pressure gauge.
Inflation pressure should be between
22—51 psi (1.8—3.5 bar). Use the air
release valve to release some air from the
tire if necessary.
WARNING
If the pressure remains below 22 psi (1.8 bar)
after approximately seven minutes, turn off
the compressor. In this case, the hole is too
large to be sealed and the vehicle should not
be driven.
11. Switch off the compressor and disconnect
the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.
12. Unscrew the hose from the tire's inflation
valve and put the cover on the hose back into
place to help prevent seepage of residual
sealing compound from the hose.
13. Reinstall the valve cap.
CAUTION
•
After inflating the tires, always reinstall the
valve cap to help avoid damage to the
valve from dirt, gravel, etc.
•
Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.
||
WHEELS AND TIRES
492
14. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi-
mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the seal-
ing compound in the tire. During the tire's
first revolution, some sealing compound may
spray out of the puncture hole.
WARNING
No one should stand closer to the vehicle
than approx. 7 ft (2 m) when it drives away to
help avoid being sprayed with sealing com-
pound.
CAUTION
If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS), the use of
the sealing compound may lead to incorrect
tire pressure readings or in rare cases, dam-
age to the tire pressure sensor. Use the tire
sealing system to check and adjust the dam-
aged tire's inflation pressure.
NOTE
•
Safely stow the tire sealing system in a
convenient place as it will soon be used
again to check the tire’s inflation pressure.
•
The empty bottle of sealing compound
cannot be removed from the bottle holder.
Consult a trained and qualified Volvo serv-
ice technician to have the bottle removed
and properly disposed of.
WARNING
If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering behavior,
or noises should occur while driving, reduce
speed and park the vehicle in a safe place.
Recheck the tire for bumps, cracks, or other
visible damage, and recheck its inflation pres-
sure. If the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar),
do not continue driving. Have the vehicle
towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
15.
Rechecking the pressure
Reconnect the tire sealing system's hose to
the tire's inflation valve.
16. Without starting the compressor, check the
inflation pressure on the air pressure gauge.
•
If the pressure is under 19 psi (1.3 bar),
the puncture has not been sealed suffi-
ciently and the vehicle should not be
driven. Have the vehicle towed to a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
•
If the pressure is more than 19 psi
(1.3 bar), connect the electrical wire to a
12-volt socket, start the compressor and
inflate the tire to the correct pressure
(see the tire pressure decal on the on the
driver's side B-pillar (the structural mem-
ber at the side of the vehicle, at the rear
of the driver's door opening). Use the air
release valve to release some air from the
tire if necessary.
17. Switch off the compressor and disconnect
the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.
Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation
valve and reinstall the valve cap.
Do not attempt to remove the sealing com-
pound bottle from the tire sealing system. It
cannot be turned counterclockwise.
18. Fold the hose into the sealing system box
and return the components to the cargo
compartment.
WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
493
CAUTION
•
After inflating the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to the
valve from dirt, gravel, etc.
•
Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.
NOTE
•
After use, the sealing compound bottle,
the hose, and certain other system com-
ponents must be replaced. Please con-
sult your Volvo retailer for replacement
parts.
•
If the sealing compound bottle’s expira-
tion date has passed, please take it to a
Volvo retailer or a recycling station that
can properly dispose of harmful sub-
stances.
WARNING
Always check tire inflation pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends driving to an authorized Volvo
workshop to have the damaged tire repaired/
replaced. Inform the workshop that the tire con-
tains sealing compound.
WARNING
•
After using the tire sealing system, the
vehicle should not be driven farther than
approximately 120 miles (200 km).
•
Have the tire inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician as soon
as possible to determine if it can be per-
manently repaired or must be replaced.
•
The vehicle should not be driven faster
than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire
that has been temporarily repaired with
the tire sealing system.
•
After using the tire sealing system, drive
carefully and avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers and sudden stops.
Related information
•
Tire sealing system (p. 487)
•
Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 481)
•
Volvo Roadside Assistance (p. 59)
Inflating a tire with the tire sealing
system compressor
The compressor can be used to inflate a tire.
1. The compressor should be switched off.
Ensure that the on/off switch is in position 0.
Take out the electrical wire and hose.
2. Be sure the air release valve on the com-
pressor's hose is completely closed. Remove
the valve cap from the tire’s inflation valve
and screw the hose connector onto the valve
as tightly as possible by hand.
3. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest
12-volt socket in the vehicle and start the
engine.
WARNING
•
The vehicle’s engine should be running
when the tire sealing system is used to
avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure the
vehicle is parked in a well ventilated place,
or outdoors, before using the system. The
parking brake should be securely applied
and the gear selector should be in the P
(park) position.
•
Children should never be left unattended
in the vehicle when the engine is running.
4. Start the compressor by pressing the on/off
switch to position I.
||
WHEELS AND TIRES
494
CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for more
than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheat-
ing.
5. Inflate the tire to the correct pressure (see
the tire pressure decal on the on the driver's
side B-pillar (the structural member at the
side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's
door opening). Use the air release valve to
release some air from the tire if necessary.
6. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off
switch to position 0) when the correct infla-
tion pressure has been reached.
CAUTION
•
After inflating the tires, always reinstall the
valve cap to help avoid damage to the
valve from dirt, gravel, etc.
•
Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.
7. Disconnect the electrical wire from the 12-
volt socket.
Related information
•
Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 481)
•
Tire sealing system (p. 487)
Changing tires
When changing wheels to another dimension,
always follow Volvo's instructions.
When changing to tires of another
dimension
If you mount tires with a dimension other than
the factory-installed tires, contact an authorized
Volvo retailer to update the vehicle's software.
This may also be necessary when changing from
summer to winter tires, or vice versa.
Related information
•
Snow tires and chains (p. 497)
•
Installing a wheel (p. 496)
•
Removing a wheel (p. 495)
WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
495
Removing a wheel
Wheel changes should always be carried out
correctly.
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers if the
wheel change has to be done near passing
traffic.
2. Apply the parking brake and put the gear
selector in P.
CAUTION
Models with suspension and level con-
trol*:
Turn this function off before raising the vehi-
cle.
To do so, go to
Settings Vehicle
Disable Leveling Control in the center dis-
play's Top view.
WARNING
•
The jack must correctly engage the jack
attachment.
•
Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non-
slippery surface.
•
Never allow any part of your body to be
extended under a vehicle supported by a
jack.
•
Use the jack intended for the vehicle when
changing a tire. For any other job, use
stands to support the vehicle.
•
Apply the parking brake and put the gear
selector in the Park (P) position.
•
Block the wheels standing on the ground,
use rigid wooden blocks or large stones.
•
The jack should be kept well-greased and
clean, and should not be damaged.
•
No objects should be placed between the
base of jack and the ground, or between
the jack and the attachment bar on the
vehicle.
NOTE
The jack provided with your vehicle is
intended to be used only in temporary situa-
tions such as changing wheels in the event of
a flat tire. Only the jack that came with your
particular model should be used to lift the
vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be lifted more
frequently or for a prolonged period, using a
garage jack or hoist is recommended. Always
follow this device’s instructions for use.
3.
Take out the jack*, lug wrench*, the tool for
removing the plastic covers on the wheel
bolts and the towing eyelet stowed under the
floor of the cargo compartment.
Tool for removing the plastic covers on the wheel bolts
Remove the plastic covers on the wheel bolts.
4. Block the wheels that are on the ground with
wooden blocks or large stones.
||
WHEELS AND TIRES
496
5.
Lug wrench and towing eyelet
Screw the towing eyelet into the lug wrench
as shown in the illustration.
CAUTION
The towing eyelet must be screwed into the
lug wrench as far as possible.
6. With the vehicle still on the ground, use the
lug wrench/towing eyelet to loosen the
wheel bolts ½ – 1 turn by exerting downward
(counterclockwise) pressure.
7. When hoisting the vehicle, it is essential that
the jack (or garage lift arms) are positioned
correctly on the underside of the vehicle.
There are two jack attachment points on
each side of the vehicle and there is a groove
in the plastic cover at each attachment point.
Position the jack under the attachment point
to be used on a level, firm, non-slippery sur-
face and crank it up until it is correctly
aligned and seated in the attachment point.
The pin on the jack's head must be posi-
tioned in the hole in the attachment point.
8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be
changed is lifted off the ground. Remove the
wheel bolts.
Related information
•
Wheel bolts (p. 497)
•
Installing a wheel (p. 496)
•
Jack (p. 498)
Installing a wheel
It is important to install wheels properly.
1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel and
hub.
2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.
3. Install the wheel bolts and tighten hand-tight.
Using the lug wrench, tighten crosswise until
all bolts are snug.
4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter-
nately tighten the bolts crosswise to
103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm).
5. Press the plastic covers onto the wheel bolts.
WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
497
CAUTION
•
After inflating the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to the
valve from dirt, gravel, etc.
•
Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.
Related information
•
Wheel bolts (p. 497)
•
Jack (p. 498)
Wheel bolts
The wheel bolts hold the wheel in place.
CAUTION
Wheel bolts should be tightened to 103 ft.
lbs. (140 Nm). Over-tightening could damage
the threads.
Only use wheels/rims that have been tested and
approved by Volvo and are included in Volvo's
product range.
Use a torque wrench to check that the wheel
bolts are tightened correctly.
Never lubricate the wheel bolts' threads.
Locking wheel bolts*
A tool for removing locking wheel bolts can be
found in the foam block under the cargo com-
partment floor.
Related information
•
Changing tires (p. 494)
•
Installing a wheel (p. 496)
Snow tires and chains
The use of snow chains and/or winter tires can
help improve traction in winter driving conditions.
Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with the
following restrictions:
•
Snow chains should be installed on front
wheels only. Use only Volvo approved snow
chains.
•
If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires
and wheels are installed and are of a size dif-
ferent than the original tires and wheels,
chains in some cases CANNOT be used.
Sufficient clearances between chains and
brakes, suspension and body components
must be maintained.
•
Some strap-on type chains will interfere with
brake components and therefore CANNOT
be used.
•
All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains
should only be installed on the front wheels.
•
Certain size tires may not allow the assembly
of snow chains/traction devices.
Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow
chain information.
WHEELS AND TIRES
* Option/accessory.
498
CAUTION
•
Snow chains should not be used on
wheels larger than 18".
•
Always follow the chain manufacturer's
installation instructions carefully. Install
chains as tightly as possible and
retighten periodically.
•
Check local regulations regarding the use
of snow chains before installing.
•
Use single-sided snow chains only.
•
Never exceed the chain manufacturer's
specified maximum speed limit. (Under
no circumstances should you exceed
31 mph (50 km/h).
•
Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns when
driving with snow chains.
•
The handling of the vehicle can be
adversely affected when driving with
chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well
as locked wheel braking.
Tools
Tools for e.g., changing wheels, etc., are located
under the cargo compartment floor.
Generic illustration - the appearance and location of the
foam block may vary from model to model
The foam block under the cargo compartment
floor contains the towing eyelet, the tool for
removing plastic wheel bolt covers, the jack* and
the lug wrench*. There is also a storage space for
the tool used to remove locking wheel bolts.
Related information
•
Jack (p. 498)
•
Changing tires (p. 494)
Jack
The jack is used to raise the vehicle, for example
when mounting winter wheels, etc.
WARNING
•
The jack must correctly engage the jack
attachment.
•
Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non-
slippery surface.
•
Never allow any part of your body to be
extended under a vehicle supported by a
jack.
•
Use the jack intended for the vehicle
when changing a tire. For any other job,
use stands to support the vehicle.
•
Apply the parking brake and put the gear
selector in the Park (P) position.
•
Block the wheels standing on the ground,
use rigid wooden blocks or large stones.
•
The jack should be kept well-greased and
clean, and should not be damaged.
•
No objects should be placed between the
base of jack and the ground, or between
the jack and the attachment bar on the
vehicle.
WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
499
CAUTION
•
When not in use, the jack* should be kept
in its storage compartment under the
cargo compartment floor.
•
The jack provided with your vehicle is
intended to be used only in temporary sit-
uations such as changing wheels in the
event of a flat tire. Only the jack that
came with your particular model should
be used to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle
needs to be lifted more frequently or for a
prolonged period, using a garage jack or
hoist is recommended. Always follow this
device’s instructions for use.
Models with leveling control*
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional pneu-
matic suspension, this feature must be turned off
before raising the vehicle with the jack.
To do so, go to
Settings Vehicle Disable
Leveling Control
in the center display's Top
view.
Wheel (rim) designations
Wheel and rim dimensions are shown in the fol-
lowing table.
The vehicle has been certified with certain combi-
nations of wheels and tires.
The following table shows an example of wheel
dimensions: 7.5Jx19x50.5. This particular wheel
may not be available on your vehicle.
7.5 Wheel width in inches
19 Wheel diameter in inches
50.5 Offset in mm (distance from the center
of the wheel to the wheel's contact sur-
face on the hub)
Related information
•
Tire sidewall designations (p. 499)
Tire sidewall designations
The following information can be found on a
tire's sidewall.
Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers
place standardized information on the sidewall of
all tires (see the illustration).
The vehicle has been certified with certain combi-
nations of wheels and tires.
The following information is listed on the tire
sidewall:
The tire designation:
||
WHEELS AND TIRES
500
NOTE
Please be aware that the following tire desig-
nation is an example only and that this par-
ticular tire may not be available on your vehi-
cle.
1.
215: the width of the tire (in millimeters)
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The
larger the number, the wider the tire.
2.
65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width
in percent.
3.
R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the
symbol indicate that the vehicle is
equipped with optional self-supporting run
flat tires
5
.
4.
15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in
inches).
5.
95: The tire's load index. In this example, a
load index of 95 equals a maximum load of
1521 lbs (690 kg).
6.
H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum
speed at which the tire is designed to be
driven for extended periods of time, carrying
a permissible load for the vehicle, and with
correct inflation pressure. For example, H
indicates a speed rating of 130 mph
(210 km/h).
NOTE
The tire's load index and speed rating may
not appear on the sidewall because they are
not required by law.
7.
M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All Ter-
rain, AS = All Season
8.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
(TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or letters
are the plant code where it was manufac-
tured, the next two are the tire size code and
the last four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For example,
1510 means that the tire was manufactured
during week 15 of 2010. The numbers in
between are marketing codes used at the
manufacturer's discretion. This information
helps a tire manufacturer identify a tire for
safety recall purposes.
9.
Tire Ply Composition and Material Used:
Indicates the number of plies indicates or the
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufactur-
ers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
10.
Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum
load in pounds and kilograms that can be
carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire
information placard located on the B-Pillar
for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
11.
Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature
grades.
12.
Maximum permissible inflation pressure:
the greatest amount of air pressure that
should ever be put in the tire. This limit is set
by the tire manufacturer.
Speed Symbol
A tire's Speed Symbol (SS) indicates the maxi-
mum speed for which the tire has been certified
and should be at least equivalent to the vehicle's
top speed.
Winter tires, with our without studs, are excep-
tions and may use a lower SS. When winter tires
are installed, the vehicle may not be driven faster
than the tires' SS.
The vehicle's speed should always be determined
by the posted speed limit and traffic and road
conditions, not the tire's SS.
The following table indicates the maximum per-
missible speed for each SS.
5
Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models
WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
501
Speed Symbol
M 81 mph (130 km/h)
Q 100 mph (160 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
W 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (300 km/h)
WARNING
•
The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo
are specified to meet stringent stability
and handling requirements. Unapproved
wheel/tire size combinations can nega-
tively affect your vehicle's stability and
handling.
•
Any damage caused by installation of
unapproved wheel/tire size combinations
will not be covered by your new vehicle
warranty. Volvo assumes no responsibility
for death, injury, or expenses that may
result from such installations.
Tire terminology
The following is a glossary of tire-related terms.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings,
notes or warnings such as standard load, radial
tubeless, etc.
•
Tire information placard: A placard show-
ing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure, and the
maximum weight the vehicle can carry.
•
Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number
on the sidewall of each tire providing infor-
mation about the tire brand and manufactur-
ing plant, tire size and date of manufacturer.
•
Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.
•
Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a maximum load at
35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this
pressure will not increase the tires load car-
rying capability.
•
Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a heavier maximum
load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric
tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not increase the
tire's load carrying capability.
•
kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
•
PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit
of air pressure.
•
B-pillar: The structural member at the side
of the vehicle behind the front door.
•
Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next
to the rim.
•
Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead
area and the tread.
•
Tread area of the tire: Area of the perime-
ter of the tire that contacts the road when
mounted on the vehicle.
•
Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a
tire and tube assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
•
Maximum load rating: A figure indicating
the maximum load in pounds and kilograms
that can be carried by the tire. This rating is
established by the tire manufacturer.
•
Maximum permissible inflation pressure:
The greatest amount of air pressure that
should ever be put in the tire. This limit is set
by the tire manufacturer.
•
Recommended tire inflation pressure:
Inflation pressure, established by Volvo,
which is based on the type of tires that are
mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This
information can be found on the tire inflation
placard(s) located on the driver's side B-pillar
and in the tire inflation table in this chapter.
•
Cold tires: The tires are considered to be
cold when they have the same temperature
as the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem-
WHEELS AND TIRES
502
perature is normally reached after the vehicle
has been parked for at least 3 hours.
Loading specifications
Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxi-
mum return of vehicle design performance.
Weight designations
Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determining your
vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a trailer,
from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label, and
the vehicle's tire information placard:
Curb weight
The weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.
Capacity weight
All weight added to the curb weight, including
cargo and optional equipment. When towing,
trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo
weight.
Permissible axle weight
The maximum allowable weight that can be car-
ried by a single axle (front or rear). These num-
bers are shown on the Federal/Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label.
The total load on each axle must never exceed its
maximum permissible weight.
Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passengers.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1. Locate the statement "the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's plac-
ard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa-
ble cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs. (1400 – 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
WHEELS AND TIRES
503
WARNING
•
Exceeding the permissible axle weight,
gross vehicle weight, or any other weight
rating limits can cause tire overheating
resulting in permanent deformation or
catastrophic failure.
•
Do not use replacement tires with lower
load carrying capacities than the tires that
were original equipment on the vehicle
because this will lower the vehicle's GVW
rating. Use only tires with the correct load
carrying capacity. Consult your Volvo
retailer for information.
Related information
•
Label information (p. 552)
•
Weights (p. 557)
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST
CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY REQUIRE-
MENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE GRADES.
Quality grades can be found, where applica-
ble, on the tire sidewall between the tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
TREADWEAR
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one half (1 ½) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and many depart significantly from the norm due
to variation in driving habits, maintenance practi-
ces and differences in road characteristics and
climate.
TRACTION
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance. The traction
grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight-ahead) traction tests and is not a meas-
ure of cornering (turning) traction.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on braking (straight-ahead) traction
tests and is not a measure of cornering (turn-
ing) traction.
TEMPERATURE
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a minimum level of
performance that all passenger vehicle tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-infla-
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
tire failure.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
506
Volvo's service program
Periodic maintenance and service performed at
the intervals specified in your Warranty and
Service Records Information booklet will help
keep your vehicle running well.
Introduction
The maintenance services contain several checks
that require special instruments and tools and
therefore must be performed by a qualified tech-
nician. To keep your Volvo in top condition, spec-
ify time-tested and proven Genuine Volvo Parts
and Accessories.
The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S.
The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle manu-
facturers to furnish written instructions to the ulti-
mate purchaser to assure the proper servicing
and function of the components that control
emissions. These services, which are listed in the
"Warranty and Service Records Information"
booklet, are not covered by the warranty. You will
be required to pay for labor and material used.
Maintenance
Your Volvo passed several major inspections
before it was delivered to you, in accordance with
Volvo specifications. The maintenance proce-
dures outlined in the Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet, many of which will
positively affect your vehicle's emissions, should
be performed as indicated. It is recommended
that receipts for vehicle emission maintenance be
retained in case questions arise concerning
maintenance. Inspection and maintenance should
also be performed anytime a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Applicable warranties – U.S./Canada
In accordance with applicable U.S. and Canadian
regulations, the following list of warranties is pro-
vided.
•
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
•
Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
•
Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty
•
Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tems Limited Warranty
•
Emission Design and Defect Warranty
•
Emission Performance Warranty
These are the federal warranties; other warran-
ties are provided as required by state/provincial
law. Refer to your separate Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet for detailed informa-
tion concerning each of the warranties.
Periodic maintenance helps minimize
emissions
NOTE
•
Refer to your Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet for a com-
prehensive service and maintenance
schedule up to 150,000 miles (240,000
km). This program contains inspections
and services necessary for the proper
function of your vehicle and includes
components that affect vehicle emis-
sions.
•
The Warranty and Service Records Infor-
mation booklet also contains detailed
information concerning the warranties
that apply to your vehicle.
On-board Diagnostic System
OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized
engine management system. It stores diagnostic
information about your vehicle's emission con-
trols. It can light the Check Engine light (MIL) if it
detects an emission control "fault." A "fault" is a
component or system that is not performing
within an expected range. A fault may be perma-
nent or temporary. OBD II will store a message
about any fault.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
}}
507
Emission inspection readiness
How do states use OBD II for emission
inspections?
Many states connect a computer directly to a
vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can then
read "faults." In some states, this type of inspec-
tion has replaced the tailpipe emission test.
How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission
inspection?
Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspection
for any of the following reasons:
•
If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your
vehicle may fail inspection.
•
If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit,
but went out without any action on your part,
OBD II will still have a recorded fault. Your
vehicle may pass or fail, depending on the
inspection practices in your area.
•
If you had recent service that required dis-
connecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic
information may be incomplete and "not
ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not
ready may fail inspection.
How can I prepare for my next OBD II
emission inspection?
•
If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or was
lit but went out without service, have your
vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, serviced
by a qualified Volvo technician.
•
If you recently had service for a lit Check
Engine light, or if you had service that
required disconnecting the battery, a period
of driving is necessary to bring the OBD II
system to "ready" for inspection. Two half-
hour trips of mixed stop-and-go/highway
driving are typically needed to allow OBD II to
reach readiness. Your Volvo retailer can pro-
vide you with more information on planning a
trip.
•
Maintain your vehicle in accordance with your
vehicle's maintenance schedule.
Owner maintenance
Periodic maintenance requirements and intervals
are described in your vehicle's Warranty and
Service Records Information booklet.
The following points can be carried out between
the normally scheduled maintenance services.
Each time the car is refueled:
•
Check the engine oil level.
•
Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,
headlights, and taillights.
Monthly:
•
Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect
the tires for wear.
•
Check that engine coolant and other fluid
levels are between the indicated "min" and
"max" markings.
•
Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass
cleaner and soft paper towels.
•
Wipe driver information displays with a soft
cloth.
•
Visually inspect battery terminals for corro-
sion. Corrosion may indicate a loose terminal
connector, or a battery near the end of its
useful service life. Consult your Volvo retailer
for additional information.
As needed:
Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to
reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup of
dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by salt res-
idues.
Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at
the base of the windshield, and from other places
where they may collect.
NOTE
Complete service information for qualified
technicians is available online for purchase or
subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
508
Related information
•
Climate system service (p. 520)
Vehicle status
The vehicle's general status can be displayed in
the center display along with the possibility to
book service
1
The Car status app is started
in the center display's App view
and has three tabs:
•
Messages: stored messages
•
Status: tire pressure and engine oil level
•
Appointments: booking service or repairs
1
Related information
•
Using the center display (p. 34)
•
Booking service and repairs (p. 508)
•
Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 484)
•
Checking and refilling engine oil (p. 518)
Booking service and repairs
Connected Service Booking (CSB) makes it
possible to use the vehicle's Internet connection
to set up a time for service, maintenance and/or
repairs.
The information is handled through the Car
status app, which can be opened from the cen-
ter display's App view.
Information about your vehicle is sent to your
retailer and you can book your workshop appoint-
ment directly in your retailer's workshop planning
system using the Volvo On-Line Service Schedu-
ler with your smart phone. The system will also
send a reminder as the appointment approaches
and the Sensus Navigation system will provide
directions to the workshop if necessary.
This feature makes it convenient to book a work-
shop appointment directly from your vehicle.
Vehicle-related information is sent to your
retailer, who prepares your visit to the workshop.
After you have requested a workshop appoint-
ment, your retailer will send you an email includ-
ing a link enabling you to connect directly to your
retailer's booking system, where you can book
the appointment at a convenient time. Information
about your retailer is also available in the vehicle
so that you can contact the retailer/workshop at
any time using the
Call my retailer menu option.
1
Certain markets only.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
}}
509
Before the service can be used
Volvo ID
•
The owner (primary driver) must create or
have a Volvo ID (see the article "Volvo ID").
•
You must enter your Volvo ID (your email
address) in the vehicle as explained in the
article "Volvo ID". If you have already regis-
tered a Volvo ID, use the same email address
that you used to create the Volvo ID.
Changing a Volvo ID email address
If you would like to register a different email
address, open the Volvo ID app in the center dis-
play's App view and tap
Change Volvo ID. Fol-
low the instructions provided. See also the article
"Volvo ID" for additional information.
Selecting a Volvo retailer
By default, the retailer where you purchased your
vehicle will be your preferred retailer/Volvo
authorized workshop who will perform service
and repairs on your vehicle. To change the pre-
ferred retailer, go to www.volvocars.com and
select the United States or Canada.
Prerequisites for booking service from the
vehicle
In order to request an appointment from the vehi-
cle:
•
The engine must be running
•
The vehicle must be connected to the Inter-
net (see the article "Internet connected vehi-
cle")
Using the service
When it is time for service or in certain cases if
repairs are necessary, a message will appear in
the instrument panel and in the center display.
This message is triggered by:
•
the amount of time that has elapsed since
the last service
•
the number of hours the engine has run
since the last service
•
mileage since the last service.
•
Specific alerts or fault codes in the vehicle
Booking service or repairs
Submit a booking request whenever you need a
workshop appointment or when a message
regarding the need for service or repairs has
been displayed in the instrument panel and in the
center display. This can be done directly from the
vehicle as follows.
Sending an appointment request
1.
Open the
Car status app in the center dis-
play's App view.
2.
Tap
Appointments and then tap Request
appointment.
3.
Check that your
Volvo ID is correct.
4. Check that the correct preferred retailer is
listed. If you prefer, simply tap the button to
initiate a call to the retailer.
5.
Tap
Send appointment request. Your
request and vehicle data will be sent to your
retailer through the vehicle's Internet con-
nection.
> Volvo will send a booking invitation to your
email address with a link to your preferred
workshop's On-Line Service Scheduler.
6. Open the email and click the link to book
your workshop appointment at a convenient
time with your preferred service advisor. Add
any additional preferences and free text to
your booking.
7. When you have submitted your workshop
booking, your appointment will be confirmed
online directly by email. The booking informa-
tion will also appear in the
Car status app in
the center display after a period of time.
8. Several days prior to your appointment, you
will receive a reminder via email from your
retailer. A notification will also appear on the
center display one day prior to the appoint-
ment.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
510
9. On the day of your appointment, a reminder
will appear again on the center display and
the retailer's address can be set in your navi-
gation system if you require directions to the
workshop.
Sending vehicle-related information
Information about the vehicle can be sent at any
time using its Internet connection.
Using this function does not send a workshop
appointment request to your retailer; only
vehicle data will be transmitted to Volvo. This
vehicle data can be accessed by any retailer if
you call the retailer and provide your Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
1.
Open the
Car status app in the center dis-
play's App view.
2.
Tap
Appointments and then tap Send
vehicle data.
> A message confirming that vehicle infor-
mation has been sent via the Internet
connection will appear on the center dis-
play. Transmission of the vehicle informa-
tion can be cancelled at any time by tap-
ping the X in the activity indicator.
Viewing workshop information
1.
Open the
Car status app in the center dis-
play's App view.
2.
Tap
Appointments and then tap Workshop
information.
> A window with retailer information will
appear.
3. If you prefer, call the retailer, or select an
address or GPS coordinates to activate the
navigation system.
Appointments and vehicle information
When you make an appointment or send vehicle
information from your vehicle, this information will
be sent using the Internet connection
2
. Informa-
tion about the vehicle includes:
•
service requirements
•
time since service was last performed
•
function status
•
fluid levels
•
mileage (odometer reading)
•
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number)
•
The vehicle's software version
•
Diagnostic information
Related information
•
Internet connected vehicle (p. 466)
•
Volvo ID (p. 25)
2
There will be a slight charge for sending this information via the vehicle's Internet connection, depending on your service plan.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
}}
511
Remote updates
With the vehicle connected to the Internet,
updates for a number of the vehicle's systems
can be downloaded from the center display.
The Download Center app is
started from the center dis-
play's App view and makes it
possible to:
•
search for and update system software
•
update the Sensus Navigation maps
•
download, update and uninstall apps
Related information
•
Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 471)
•
System updates (p. 511)
System updates
Updates are available for infotainment-related
services and Internet connections. If system soft-
ware updates are available, they can be to be
downloaded all at once or separately.
System (software) updates are
handled through the
Download Center app in the
center display's App view. Tap
once to start a download app in
Home view's lower sub-view. If
no search for updates has
been performed since the last time the infotain-
ment system was started, a search will be initi-
ated.
No search will begin if a software download is
underway.
An icon in the
System updates button indicates
the number of updates that are currently availa-
ble. Tap the button to display a list of updates
that can be installed in the vehicle.
For additional information and answers to com-
monly asked questions pertaining to the function
and downloading system updates, go to sup-
port.volvocars.com.
Background searches for software updates
is activated by default when the vehicle is
delivered from the factory.
NOTE
Downloading data may affect other system
features that share the Internet connection. A
download can be cancelled at any time or the
other features can be temporarily turned off
while the software download is underway.
NOTE
An update may be interrupted when the igni-
tion is switched off.
However, an update does not have to be
completed when the ignition is switched off; it
will resume automatically when the ignition is
switched on again.
Updating all system software
–
Select Install all at the bottom of the list.
To avoid displaying a list, select Install all by the
System updates button.
Updating individual programs
–
Select Install to choose the software to be
downloaded.
Cancelling a download
–
Tap the activity indicator that replaced the
Install button on the screen when the down-
load began.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
512
Keep in mind that a download can be cancelled
but an installation that has already begun cannot
be interrupted.
Allowing background searches or
software updates
This function can be deactivated from the center
display:
1. Go to the Settings in the center display's Top
view and select
Download Center.
2.
Tap
System Download Center.
3.
Tap to deselect
Auto Software Update.
If an update is available, New software updates
available will appear in the center display's sta-
tus bar. Tap the message to start a download app
in Home view's lower sub-view. As soon as the
download app has started, an icon in the
System
updates button will indicate the number of
downloads available.
Related information
•
Center display overview (p. 32)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 38)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
}}
* Option/accessory.
513
Hoisting the vehicle
When the vehicle is hoisted, the jack or garage
lift must be positioned correctly under the vehi-
cle.
For vehicles equipped with leveling control*, if it is
also equipped with the optional pneumatic sus-
pension, this must be deactivated before the
vehicle is hoisted. This is done from the center
display:
1.
Tap
Settings in Top view.
2.
Tap
My Car Suspension .
3.
Select
Disable Leveling Control.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
514
Location of the jack attachment points (triangles)/lifting points (red areas)
NOTE
The jack provided with your vehicle is
intended to be used only in temporary situa-
tions such as changing wheels in the event of
a flat tire. Only the jack that came with your
particular model should be used to lift the
vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be lifted more
frequently or for a prolonged period, using a
garage jack or hoist is recommended. Always
follow this device’s instructions for use.
WARNING
•
Ensure that the jack is positioned so that
the vehicle cannot slide off it.
•
Always use axle stands or similar struc-
tures.
Related information
•
Removing a wheel (p. 495)
•
Installing a wheel (p. 496)
•
Jack (p. 498)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
}}
515
Opening and closing the hood
The hood is opened by releasing it from the pas-
senger compartment and then by using the han-
dle under the front edge of the hood.
Opening
With the hood completely closed, pull the
control (located to the left of the brake
pedal).
Move your hand from left to right in the
opening under the hood, lift the handle up
and to the side to release the hood from the
lock and lift.
Warning–hood not closed
When the hood lock has been com-
pletely released, this symbol and a
graphic will illuminate in the instrument
panel and an audible signal will be
given. If the vehicle begins to roll, the audible sig-
nal will be repeated several times.
For additional information about this symbol, see
also the article "Door and seat belt reminders."
NOTE
If the warning symbol remains on or if the
audible signal is given even if the hood is
completely closed and locked, consult a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Closing
1. Press down the hood until it begins to close
due to its own weight.
2. When the handle under the front edge of the
hood is in the lock, press down on the hood
to close it completely.
WARNING
•
Be sure the hood is completely unob-
structed while it is being closed.
•
Check that the hood locks properly when
closed. It must audibly lock on both sides.
•
Never drive if the hood is not completely
closed and locked.
•
While driving, if there are any indications
that the hood is not locked in the closed
position, stop safely as soon as possible
and close it completely.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
516
Hood completely closed
Related information
•
Engine compartment overview (p. 516)
•
Door and seat belt reminders (p. 70)
Engine compartment overview
The engine compartment overview shows some
maintenance points.
Some of the components in the vehicle's electri-
cal drive system are located in the engine com-
partment.
The layout of the engine compartment may differ slightly
from model to model
Coolant expansion tank
Brake fluid reservoir
Washer fluid reservoir
Relay/fuse box
Air cleaner
Engine oil filler cap
WARNING
•
Orange cables should only be handled by
a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-
nician.
•
A number of the vehicle's components
use high voltage and can be very danger-
ous if handled improperly.
•
Do not touch any components that have
not been clearly described/explained in
this manual.
•
Use caution when checking/refilling flu-
ids in the engine compartment.
•
The cooling fan (located at the front of
the engine compartment, behind the radi-
ator) may start or continue to operate (for
up to 6 minutes) after the engine has
been switched off.
•
Engine cleaning should only be done by a
workshop. If engine cleaning agents are
used when the engine has been running,
there may a fire risk.
•
Before performing any operations in the
engine compartment, the ignition should
always be completely switched off (in
mode 0) and there should be no remote
keys in the passenger compartment. The
gear selector should be in the P (park)
position. If the engine has been running,
wait until it has cooled before touching
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
517
any components in the engine compart-
ment.
•
The distributor ignition system operates
at very high voltages. Special safety pre-
cautions must be followed to prevent
injury. Always turn the ignition off when
replacing distributor ignition components
e.g. plugs, coil, etc.
•
Do not touch any part of the distributor
ignition system while the engine is run-
ning. This may result in unintended move-
ments and body injury.
Related information
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
•
Opening and closing the hood (p. 515)
•
Refilling the windshield washer fluid reservoir
(p. 524)
Engine oil
The correct oil must be used for the stated oil
change (service) intervals for the warranty to
apply.
Volvo recommends:
CAUTION
•
Not checking the oil level regularly can
result in serious engine damage if the oil
level becomes too low.
•
Oil that is lower than the specified quality
can damage the engine.
•
Volvo does not recommend the use of oil
additives.
•
Always add oil of the same type and vis-
cosity as already used.
•
Oil changes should be carried out by a
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian.
•
Using oil of higher than the specified
quality is permitted and may be neces-
sary for demanding driving.
Also, refer to the Warranty and Service Records
information booklet for information on oil change
intervals and oil specifications.
Related information
•
Checking and refilling engine oil (p. 518)
•
Engine oil specifications and volume
(p. 560)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
518
Checking and refilling engine oil
The oil level is checked electronically.
Oil filler cap
3
It may be necessary to top up engine oil between
regularly scheduled services.
No action is necessary until a message is dis-
played in the instrument panel.
WARNING
If this symbol and Engine oil level
Service required are displayed,
have the vehicle checked by a
trained and qualified Volvo service
technician. The oil level may be too high.
Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into con-
tact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.
CAUTION
If this symbol and Engine oil level
low Add "....." (an amount of oil) are
displayed, add the amount of oil
indicated.
Checking the oil level
The oil level can be checked in
the center display when the
engine is not running.
From the center display's
Home view, swipe the screen
from right to left to open App
view. Tap
Car status and then tap Status to
show the oil level.
Oil level graphic in the center display
The oil level should be checked at regular inter-
vals, particularly during the period up to the first
scheduled maintenance service.
If the oil level sensor indicates that the level is
too low, using the correct oil, top up with the
amount of oil indicated as soon as possible.
NOTE
•
The system cannot detect changes in the
oil level immediately. The vehicle must be
driven approximately 20 miles (30 km) or
have been parked on level ground with
the engine off for 5 minutes before the
oil level reading will be correct.
•
If the necessary conditions are not met
for checking the oil level electronically
(time interval after the engine was
switched off, if the vehicle is parked on
an incline, etc.),
No value available will
be displayed. This does not indicate a
problem with the oil level sensor.
Related information
•
Engine oil (p. 517)
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
•
Engine oil specifications and volume
(p. 560)
3
Models with an electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
519
Refilling coolant
Coolant helps keep the gasoline engine at the
proper operating temperature. The heat transfer-
red from the engine to the coolant can be used
to warm the passenger compartment.
When refilling coolant, follow the instructions on
the package and use the recommended amount
of coolant. Never fill the cooling system with
water only; this could lead to freezing, corrosion
and engine damage.
WARNING
If the engine has been running, the coolant
will be very hot. Allow the engine to cool
before opening the coolant expansion tank. If
this is not possible, open the cap very slowly
to allow pressure to dissipate.
Coolant expansion tank
Unscrew the cover in the plastic bulkhead
cover.
Unscrew the expansion tank cap and add
coolant if necessary. The level should not
exceed the yellow MAX marker in the tank.
Put the other components back in place in the
reverse order.
CAUTION
•
High levels of chlorine, chlorides and
other salts may cause corrosion in the
cooling system.
•
Only use coolants with corrosion protec-
tion recommended by Volvo.
•
The ratio of coolant to water is 50/50.
•
Mix the coolant with tap water of drinka-
ble quality.
•
If maintenance is performed on the cool-
ing system or if the coolant is replaced,
flush the cooling system with clean water
before adding new a new coolant/water
mixture.
•
The engine may only be operated with a
properly filled cooling system. Otherwise,
high temperatures and cracks in the cyl-
inders may occur.
Related information
•
Coolant specifications (p. 560)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
520
Climate system service
Service and repairs on the air conditioning sys-
tem should only be done by a trained and quali-
fied Volvo service technician.
Troubleshooting and repairs
The air conditioning system contains a floures-
cent tracer substance. Ultraviolet light is used to
search for leaks in the system.
Refrigerant R134a
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains the
refrigerant R134a under pressure. Service
and repairs on the system should only be
done by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
Related information
•
Climate control system (p. 182)
Replacing bulbs
Models with LED (Light Emitting Diode) head-
lights: these lights must be replaced by a trained
and authorized Volvo service technician.
NOTE
Halogen headlights are not available on all
models or in all markets.
Consult your Volvo retailer if you are uncertain
about the type of headlights in your vehicle.
NOTE
•
For information regarding any bulbs not
mentioned in this section, please contact
your Volvo retailer or a trained and
authorized Volvo service technician.
•
Always switch off the ignition before star-
ting to replace a bulb.
•
If an error message remains in the dis-
play after a faulty bulb has been replaced,
contact an authorized Volvo workshop.
•
Condensation may form temporarily on
the inside of the lenses of exterior lights
such as headlights, fog lights, or taillights.
This is normal and the lights are
designed to withstand moisture. Normally,
condensation will dissipate after the
lights have been on for a short time.
•
The optional Active Bending Light bulbs
contain trace amounts of mercury. These
bulbs should always be disposed of by a
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian.
CAUTION
Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fin-
gers. Grease and oils from your fingers vapor-
ize in the heat and will leave a deposit on the
reflector, which will damage it.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
}}
521
WARNING
•
The ignition should be switched off com-
pletely (be in ignition mode 0) when
replacing bulbs.
•
If the engine has been running just prior
to replacing bulbs in the headlight hous-
ing, please keep in mind that components
in the engine compartment will be hot.
Related information
•
Bulb specifications (p. 521)
•
Ignition modes (p. 368)
Bulb specifications
The following specifications apply to models
equipped with halogen
4
headlights. If other
bulbs need to be replaced, contact a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
Function
[W]
A
Type
Low beam 55 H11
High Beam 65 H9
Front turn signal 24 PY24W
Daytime running light/
parking light
21/5 W21/5W
A
Watt
Related information
•
Replacing bulbs (p. 520)
Windshield wipers in the service
position
The windshield wiper blades must be in the verti-
cal (service) position for replacement, washing
or to lift them away from the windshield when
e.g., removing ice or snow.
Wipers in the service position
CAUTION
Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in
position before attempting to move them to
the service position.
4
Halogen headlights are not available in all models.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
522
Putting the windshield wipers in the
service position
The service position can be activated while the
vehicle is stationary and the wipers are not acti-
vated.
The service position can be activated in two ways
from the center display:
Via Function view
–
From Function view, tap the Wiper Service
Position button. The indicator light in the
button will illuminate when the service posi-
tion is activated.
> The windshield wipers will move to the
vertical position.
Via Settings
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
Tap
My Car Wipers
3.
Tap the
Wiper Service Position box.
> The windshield wipers will move to the
vertical position.
Deactivating service position
The service position can be deactivated in two
ways from the center display:
Via Function view
–
From Function view, tap the Wiper Service
Position button. The indicator light in the
button will go out when the service position
is deactivated.
Via Settings
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2.
My Car Wipers
3.
Tap the
Wiper Service Position to deselect
the box.
The wipers will also leave the service position if:
•
The wipers are activated.
•
The windshield washers are activated.
•
The rain sensor is activated.
CAUTION
If the wiper arms have been folded out from
the windshield while in the service position,
fold them back against the windshield before
returning the wipers to the normal position to
help avoid scratching the paint on the hood.
Related information
•
Replacing wiper blades (p. 523)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 150)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
523
Replacing wiper blades
The wiper blades should be replaced regularly
for best effect.
The windshield wiper blades must be in the verti-
cal (service) position for replacement, washing
or to lift them away from the windshield when
e.g., removing ice or snow.
Replacing the windshield wiper blades
1. With the wipers in the service position, fold
out the wiper arm from the windshield.
2.
Fold out the wiper blade from the wiper
arm until it clicks. The wiper blade is now in
the removal position.
3.
Press the button on the wiper blade
attachment and
pull the wiper blade
straight out, parallel with the wiper arm while
keeping the wiper blade folded out.
4. Slide in the new wiper blade into position,
hold it in the removal position and ensure
that its attachments are correctly positioned.
5. Fold the wiper blade toward the wiper arm
until it clicks into position.
6. Press the wipers back against the wind-
shield.
The windshield wiper blades are different lengths
NOTE
The windshield wiper blades are different
lengths. The blade on the driver’s side is
longer than the one on the passenger side.
Cleaning
Keeping the windshield/rear window and wiper
blades clean helps improve visibility and prolongs
the service life of the wiper blades. Clean the
wiper blades with a stiff-bristle brush and luke-
warm soap solution or car washing detergent.
Replacing the tailgate wiper blade
1. Fold the wiper arm outward.
2. Grasp the inner section of wiper blade (at the
arrow).
3. Use one end of the wiper blade as a lever to
help release it from the wiper arm.
4. Press the new wiper blade until it clicks into
place and check that it seats securely.
5. Fold the wiper arm back toward the tailgate
window.
Related information
•
Windshield wipers in the service position
(p. 521)
•
Refilling the windshield washer fluid reservoir
(p. 524)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
* Option/accessory.
524
Refilling the windshield washer fluid
reservoir
Washer fluid helps keep the windshield, tailgate
window and headlights clean.
The windshield and headlight washers* share a
common reservoir. Open the blue cap to refill
washer fluid (see the illustration for the location
of the reservoir).
During cold weather, the reservoir should be filled
with windshield washer solvent containing anti-
freeze. Use Volvo Original Washer Fluid or the
equivalent with a recommended pH value
between 6 and 8 in a 1:1 solution.
When there is approx. 1 qt (1 liter) of washer
fluid remaining in the reservoir, a text message
and the
symbol will be displayed in the
instrument panel.
Volume:
•
Models with headlight washers: 5.8 qts
(5.5 liters).
•
Models without headlight washers: 3.7 qts
(3.5 liter).
Related information
•
Opening and closing the hood (p. 515)
•
Engine compartment overview (p. 516)
•
Windshield and headlight washers (p. 152)
Start battery
The vehicle's electrical system is single pole and
uses the body and engine block as conductors.
The start (main) battery is used to power electri-
cal components and systems. However, the
hybrid battery is used to start the gasoline
engine.
The start battery should only be replaced by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
The start battery is an Absorbed Glass Mat
(AGM) 12-volt battery that is dimensioned for
use in vehicles to support electrical systems and
functions and regenerative charging.
The service life of a battery is affected by factors
such as driving conditions/style, the number of
starts, climate, etc. Extreme cold may also further
decrease the battery’s starting capacity.
•
Never disconnect the start battery while the
engine is running.
•
Check that the start battery is correctly con-
nected and that the clamps on its terminals
are properly tightened.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
}}
525
WARNING
•
Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark.
•
Do not smoke near the battery.
•
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin,
fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact
occurs, flush the affected area immedi-
ately with water. Obtain medical help
immediately if eyes are affected.
WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds, chemi-
cals known to the state of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.
If an external auxiliary battery is used to start the
vehicle, use the connection points in the
engine compartment. The start battery's termi-
nals should never be used. See the following
illustration for the location of the connection
points.
CAUTION
It is not possible to charge another vehicle's
battery using the connection points in the
engine compartment. If the connection points
are used to charge another vehicle's battery,
this may cause a fuse to blow, which means
that the connection points will not function.
Positive connection point
Negative connection point
Only modern battery chargers should be used to
charge the start battery. Quick charge functions
should not be used and could damage the bat-
tery.
If both the start and hybrid batteries are fully dis-
charged, both will have to be charged. Only
charging the hybrid battery in this situation is not
possible. Before the hybrid battery can be
charged, the start battery must be charged to a
certain level.
CAUTION
•
The infotainment system's energy-saving
feature may not function correctly or at
all, and/or a message may be displayed if
a battery charger or jumper cables are
not connected properly.
•
The negative terminal on the battery must
never be used to connect a jumper cable
or a battery charger. Only the ground
point on the chassis may be used.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
526
NOTE
•
The service life of the start battery is
shortened if it becomes discharged
repeatedly.
•
The service life of the start battery is
affected by factors such as driving condi-
tions and climate. Extreme cold may also
further decrease the battery's start
capacity.
•
Because the battery’s starting capacity
decreases with time, it may be necessary
to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven
for an extended period of time or if the
vehicle is usually only driven short dis-
tances.
•
Driving for at least 15 minutes a week or
connecting the battery to a charger with
automatic maintenance charging will help
keep it in good operating condition.
•
Keeping the start battery fully charged
will help maximize its service life.
The start battery is located in the cargo compartment
The following table provides start battery specifi-
cations.
Battery
H8 AGM
Current (V) 12
Cold start capacity
(Cold Cranking
Amperes - CCA)
(A)
850
Dimensions,
L×W×H in. (mm)
13.9×6.9×7.5
(353×175×190)
Capacity (Ah) 95
WARNING
In certain models, the battery is held in place
by a strap. Ensure that this strap is always
securely fastened and pulled taut.
•
When replacing the start battery an
Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) must be used.
•
When replacing the start battery, a new bat-
tery with the same specifications and dimen-
sions must be used. The battery should only
be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
Related information
•
Jump starting (p. 372)
•
Hybrid battery (p. 527)
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 414)
•
Battery symbols (p. 527)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
}}
527
Battery symbols
There are information and warning symbols on
the battery.
Wear protective goggles.
See the owner's manual for
additional information.
Keep batteries away from
children.
Batteries contain corrosive
acid.
Avoid smoking, open
flames, and/or sparks.
Risk of explosion.
Recycle properly.
NOTE
Used batteries should be disposed of in an
environmentally responsible manner. Consult
your Volvo retailer or take the used batteries
to a recycling station.
Related information
•
Start battery (p. 524)
Hybrid battery
The vehicle's electric motor is powered by a
rechargeable, maintenance-free, lithium-ion
hybrid battery.
The vehicle cannot be started if the hybrid
battery is completely discharged.
WARNING
The vehicle's hybrid battery may only be serv-
iced or replaced by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
Battery coolant
The hybrid battery's cooling system has its own
expansion tank.
Filling the hybrid battery's cooling system should
only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
528
Related information
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 414)
Fuses
The fuses help protect the vehicle's electrical
components from overloading or short circuits.
WARNING
Never use metal objects or fuses with higher
amperage than those stated on the lists of
fuses. Doing so could seriously damage or
overload the vehicle's electrical system.
Orange wires may only be handled by trained
and authorized Volvo service technicians or
licensed electricians.
A number of component in the vehicle used
high voltage electrical current and can be very
dangerous to touch.
Do not touch any components that are not
clearly described in this owner's information.
If an electrical component fails to function, this
may be due to a blown fuse. If the same fuse
blows repeatedly, this indicates a problem with
the component, which should be inspected by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Location of the fuseboxes
Engine compartment
Under the glove compartment
Cargo compartment
Related information
•
Replacing fuses (p. 529)
•
Fuses in the cargo compartment (p. 539)
•
Fuses in the engine compartment (p. 530)
•
Fuses in the passenger compartment
(p. 535)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
529
Replacing fuses
The fuses help protect the vehicle's electrical
components from overloading or short circuits.
Fuse replacement
1. See the list of fuse boxes for their locations.
2. Pull the fuse straight out and examine it from
the side to see if the curved metal wire in the
fuse is intact.
3. If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the
same color and amperage (written on the
fuse).
WARNING
Never use metal objects or fuses with higher
amperage than those stated on the following
pages. Doing so could seriously damage or
overload the vehicle's electrical system.
Related information
•
Fuses (p. 528)
•
Fuses in the cargo compartment (p. 539)
•
Fuses in the engine compartment (p. 530)
•
Fuses in the passenger compartment
(p. 535)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
530
Fuses in the engine compartment
The fuses in the engine compartment help pro-
tect electrical components such as engine and
brake functions.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
}}
531
There is a fuse removal tool on the inside of the
fuse box cover. There are also positions in the
fuse box for several extra fuses.
Positions
There is a decal on the inside of the cover with a
list of fuses.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
* Option/accessory.
532
•
Fuses 1–13, 18–30, 35–37 and 46–54 are
called "Micro".
•
Fuses 14–17, 31–34 and 38–45 are called
"MCase" and should only be replaced by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Function [A]
– –
– –
– –
Control module for actuator for
engaging/changing gears
5
High Voltage Coolant Heater
control module
5
Control module for: A/C, charge
module, heat exchanger cut-off
valve, cut-off valve for coolant
through the climate system
5
Hybrid battery control module;
high-voltage converter for com-
bined high-voltage generator/
starter motor with 500 V–12 V
voltage converter
5
– –
Converter for controlling feed to
the rear axle electric motor
10
Function [A]
Hybrid battery control module
for high-voltage converter for
combined high-voltage genera-
tor/starter motor with 500 V–12
V voltage converter
10
Charging module 5
Cut-off valve for hybrid battery
coolant; coolant pump 1 for
hybrid battery
10
Coolant pump for electric drive
system
10
Hybrid component cooling fan 25
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
Function [A]
12-volt socket in the front tun-
nel console
15
12-volt socket in the rear seat
near the on the rear side of the
tunnel console
15
12-volt socket in the cargo com-
partment
USB sockets for iPad holders*
15
– –
– –
– –
– –
Heated windshield* driver side
Shunt
Heated windshield* driver side
40
Headlight washers*
25
Windshield washer 25
– –
Horn 20
Alarm siren*
5
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
}}
* Option/accessory.
533
Function [A]
Brake system control module
(valves, parking brake)
40
Windshield wipers 30
Tailgate window washer 25
Heated windshield*, passenger
side
40
– –
Brake system control module
(ABS pump)
40
– –
Heated windshield*, passenger
side
Shunt
Feed when ignition is switched
on to: engine control module,
transmission components, elec-
trical power steering, central
electrical module
5
Exterior vehicle sound (certain
markets)
5
Passenger side headlight 7.5
Driver's side headlight, certain
LED models
15
Function [A]
– –
– –
– –
Air bags; Occupant Weight Sen-
sor (OWS)
5
Driver side headlight 7.5
Driver's side headlight, certain
LED models
15
Accelerator pedal sensor 5
Transmission control module;
Gear selector control module
15
Engine control module 5
– –
– –
– –
– –
Engine control module; Actuator;
Turbo-charger valve
20
Solenoids; Valves; Engine cool-
ing system thermostat
10
Function [A]
Vacuum regulators; Valve 7.5
Spoiler shutter control module;
Radiator shutter control module;
Fuel leakage detection
5
– –
Heated oxygen sensors (front
and rear)
15
Oil pump solenoid; A/C mag-
netic coupling; heated oxygen
sensor (center)
15
– –
Engine control module 20
Ignition coils; Spark plugs 15
– –
– –
Transmission oil pump control
module
30
Vacuum pump control module 40
Transmission actuator 25
– –
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
}}
535
Fuses in the passenger
compartment
The fuses in the passenger compartment
(located under the glove compartment) help pro-
tect electrical components such as the 120-volt
socket, displays and door modules.
There is a fuse removal tool on the inside of the
fuse box covers. There are also positions in the
fuse box for several extra fuses.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
536
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
}}
* Option/accessory.
537
Positions
•
Fuses 1, 3–21, 23–36, 39–53 and 55–59
are called "Micro".
•
Fuses 2, 22, 37–38 and 54 are called
"MCase" and should only be replaced by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Function A
– –
– –
– –
Alarm system movement sensor
A
5
Media player 5
Instrument panel 5
Center console buttons 5
Sun sensor 5
– –
– –
Steering wheel module 5
Module for start knob and parking
brake
5
Heated steering wheel* module
15
Function A
– –
– –
– –
– –
Climate system control module 10
– –
On-board diagnostics (OBDII) 10
Center display 5
Climate system blower module
(front)
40
USB hub 5
Instrument lighting; Courtesy light-
ing; Rearview mirror auto-dim func-
tion; Rain and light sensor; Rear
tunnel console keypad*; Power
front seats*; Rear door control pan-
els
7.5
Control module for driver support
functions
5
Panorama roof and sun shade*
20
Function A
Head-up display*
5
Courtesy lighting 5
– –
Ceiling console display (seat belt
reminder, front passenger side air-
bag indicator)
5
– –
Humidity sensor 5
Rear passenger-side door module 20
Fuses in the cargo compartment 10
Internet connection/Volvo On Call
control modules
5
Rear driver-side door module 20
Infotainment control module
(amplifier)
40
– –
Multi-band antenna module 5
Front seat massage function 5
– –
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
* Option/accessory.
538
Function A
Tailgate window wiper 15
Fuel pump control module 15
Relay coils for engine compartment
electrical module; Relay coil for
transmission oil pump
5
– –
Driver side front seat heating*
15
Passenger side front seat heating*
15
Coolant pump 10
– –
Front driver-side front door module 20
Active chassis control module*
20
– –
Sensus control module 10
– –
– –
Front passenger-side front door
module
20
Function A
– –
– –
Circuit breaker for fuses 53 and 58 15
A
Certain markets only
Related information
•
Fuses (p. 528)
•
Replacing fuses (p. 529)
•
Fuses in the engine compartment (p. 530)
•
Fuses in the cargo compartment (p. 539)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
}}
* Option/accessory.
539
Fuses in the cargo compartment
The fuses in the cargo compartment help pro-
tect electrical components such as power
seats*, airbags and seat belt tensioners.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
540
There is a fuse removal tool on the inside of the
fuse box cover. There are also positions in the
fuse box in the engine compartment for several
extra fuses.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
* Option/accessory.
541
Positions
•
Fuses 13–17 and 21–36 are called "Micro".
•
Fuses 1–12, 18–20 and 37 are called
"MCase" and should only be replaced by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Function A
Heated rear window 30
– –
Pneumatic suspension* compressor
40
Lock motor for rear seat backrest,
passenger's side
15
– –
Lock motor for rear seat backrest,
driver's side
15
– –
– –
Power tailgate*
25
Power front seat (passenger side)*
module
20
Trailer hitch* control module
40
Seat belt tensioner module (pas-
senger side)
40
Function A
Internal relay windings 5
– –
Foot movement detection module
for opening the power tailgate*
5
– –
– –
Trailer hitch* control module
25
Power front seat (driver seat* mod-
ule
20
Seat belt tensioner module (driver
side)
40
Parking camera*
5
– –
– –
– –
Feed when ignition is switched on. 10
Airbag and seat belt tensioner
modules
5
– –
Function A
Heated rear seat (driver side)*
15
– –
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*,
Control module for exterior audible
reverse warning (certain markets
only)
5
– –
Seat belt tensioner modules 5
Emission system actuator 5
– –
– –
Heated rear seat (passenger side)*
15
– –
Related information
•
Replacing fuses (p. 529)
•
Fuses (p. 528)
•
Fuses in the passenger compartment
(p. 535)
•
Fuses in the engine compartment (p. 530)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
542
Cleaning the exterior
The vehicle should be washed at regular inter-
vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots
adhere to the paint and may cause damage. To
help prevent corrosion, it is particularly important
to wash the car frequently in the wintertime.
Hand washing
The following points should be kept in mind when
washing and cleaning the vehicle:
CAUTION
Avoid using car washing detergents with a pH
value lower than 3.5 or higher than 11.5.
Doing so could result in discoloring of ano-
dized aluminum surfaces on e.g., roof rails or
the frames around the side windows.
•
Avoid washing your vehicle in direct sunlight.
Doing so may cause detergents and wax to
dry out and become abrasive. To avoid
scratching, use lukewarm water to soften the
dirt before you wash with a soft sponge, and
plenty of sudsy water.
•
Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork as
soon as possible. Otherwise the finish may
be permanently damaged.
•
A car washing detergent can be used to
facilitate the softening of dirt and oil.
•
Dry the vehicle with a clean chamois and
remember to clean the drain holes in the
doors and rocker panels.
•
Tar spots can be removed with tar remover
after the vehicle has been washed.
•
A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy
water can be used to clean the wiper blades.
Frequent cleaning of the windshield and
wiper blades improves visibility considerably
and also helps prolong the service life of the
wiper blades.
•
Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel
housings, fenders, etc).
•
In areas of high industrial fallout, more fre-
quent washing is recommended.
CAUTION
•
During high pressure washing, the spray
mouthpiece must never be closer to the
vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do not spray
into the locks.
•
Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can
reduce lighting capacity considerably.
Clean the headlights regularly, for exam-
ple when refueling.
Special laminated panoramic roof cau-
tions:
•
Always close the laminated panoramic
roof and sun shade before washing your
vehicle.
•
Never use abrasive cleaning agents on
the laminated panoramic roof.
•
Never use wax on the rubber seals
around the laminated panoramic roof.
NOTE
When washing the vehicle, remember to
remove dirt from the drain holes in the doors
and sills.
Automatic car washes
•
We do NOT recommend washing your vehi-
cle in an automatic wash during the first few
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
}}
543
months (because the paint will not have
hardened sufficiently).
•
An automatic wash is a simple and quick way
to clean your vehicle, but it is worth remem-
bering that it may not be as thorough as
when you yourself go over the vehicle with
sponge and water. Keeping the underbody
clean is most important, especially in the win-
ter. Some automatic washers do not have
facilities for washing the underbody.
NOTE
Condensation may form temporarily on the
inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as
headlights or taillights. This is normal and the
lights are designed to withstand moisture.
Normally, condensation will dissipate after the
lights have been on for a short time.
CAUTION
When using an automatic car wash in which
the vehicle has to be able to roll freely, the
auto-hold brake function must be deactivated.
If this is not done, the brakes will automati-
cally be applied when the vehicle is stationary.
To deactivate this function:
1. Drive the vehicle into the car wash
2. Turn off the auto-hold function using the
control on the center console
3. Turn off the parking brake's automatic
function in the center display's Top view
(tap
Settings, tap My Car Parking
Brake and Suspension and deselect
Auto Activate Parking Brake)
4.
Put the gear selector in N
5. Switch off the ignition by turning the start
knob clockwise as far as possible and
holding it in this position for at least
4 seconds
The vehicle will then be able to roll freely.
CAUTION
•
Before driving into an automatic car
wash, turn off the optional rain sensor to
avoid damaging the windshield wipers.
•
Make sure that side view mirrors, auxiliary
lamps, etc, are secure, and that any
antenna(s) are retracted or removed. Oth-
erwise there is risk of the machine dis-
lodging them.
•
Chromed wheels: Clean chrome-plated
wheels using the same detergents used
for the body of the vehicle. Aggressive
wheel-cleaning agents can permanently
stain chrome-plated wheels.
WARNING
•
When the vehicle is driven immediately
after being washed, apply the brakes,
including the parking brake, several times
in order to remove any moisture from the
brake linings.
•
Engine cleaning agents should not be
used when the engine is warm. This con-
stitutes a fire risk.
Exterior components
Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning
products, available at your Volvo retailer, for
cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
* Option/accessory.
544
components such as chromed strips on the exte-
rior of your vehicle. The instructions for using
these products should be followed carefully. Sol-
vents or stain removers should not be used.
The frames around the side windows, roof rails
and door frames near the windows* are made of
anodized aluminum and should only be washed
with a cleaning product with a pH value between
3.5 till 11.5.
Components that should be washed with a cleaning
product with a pH value between 3.5 till 11.5
CAUTION
•
Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub-
ber components
•
Polishing chromed strips can wear away
or damage the surface
•
Polishes containing abrasive substances
should not be used
Related information
•
Paint damage (p. 548)
•
Corrosion protection (p. 545)
•
Polishing and waxing (p. 544)
•
Windshield wipers in the service position
(p. 521)
Polishing and waxing
Normally, polishing is not required during the
first year after delivery, however, waxing may be
beneficial.
•
Before applying polish or wax the vehicle
must be washed and dried. Tar spots can be
removed with kerosene or tar remover. Diffi-
cult spots may require a fine rubbing com-
pound.
•
After polishing use liquid or paste wax.
•
Several commercially available products con-
tain both polish and wax.
•
Waxing alone does not substitute for polish-
ing a dull surface.
•
A wide range of polymer-based waxes can
be purchased today. These waxes are easy to
use and produce a long-lasting, high-gloss
finish that protects the bodywork against oxi-
dation, road dirt and fading.
•
Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct
sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should
not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
}}
545
CAUTION
Volvo does not recommend the use of long-
life or durable paint protection coatings, some
of which may claim to prevent pitting, fading,
oxidation, etc. These coatings have not been
tested by Volvo for compatibility with your
vehicle's clear coat. Some of them may cause
the clear coat to soften, crack, or cloud. Dam-
age caused by application of paint protection
coatings may not be covered under your vehi-
cle's paint warranty.
Do not use metal polishing agents on ano-
dized aluminum surfaces. Doing so could
result in discoloring and damage the surface
finish.
Related information
•
Paint damage (p. 548)
•
Touching up paint damage (p. 549)
Corrosion protection
Your vehicle is constructed with effective protec-
tion against corrosion.
Inspection and maintenance
The corrosion protection does not normally
require maintenance but keeping the vehicle
clean helps prevent the onset of corrosion. The
use of strong alkaline or acidic cleaning fluids
should always be avoided on shiny body compo-
nents. Any stone chips in the paint should be
touched up as soon as possible.
Related information
•
Paint damage (p. 548)
•
Touching up paint damage (p. 549)
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and fol-
low the instructions included with the car care
product.
CAUTION
•
Under no circumstances should gasoline,
naphtha or similar cleaning agents be
used on the plastic or the leather since
these can cause damage.
•
Take extra care when removing stains
such as ink or lipstick since the coloring
can spread.
•
Use solvents sparingly. Too much solvent
can damage the seat padding.
•
Start from the outside of the stain and
work toward the center.
•
Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a
pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing
may damage the textile upholstery.
•
Clothing that is not colorfast, such as
new jeans or suede garments, may stain
the upholstery.
Fabric upholstery and ceiling liner
Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For more
difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream, shoe pol-
ish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric stain
remover. Consult your Volvo retailer.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
* Option/accessory.
546
Leather* care
Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured with a
protectant to repel soiling. Over time, sunlight,
grease and dirt can break down the protection.
Staining, cracking, scuffing, and fading can result.
Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy leather
care kit formulated to clean and beautify your
vehicle's leather, and to renew the protective
qualities of its finish. The cleaner removes dirt
and oil buildup. The light cream protectant
restores a barrier against soil and sunlight.
Volvo also offers a special leather softener that
should be applied after the cleaner and protec-
tant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and
reduces friction between leather and other fin-
ishes in the vehicle.
Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and con-
ditioning your vehicle's leather two to four times a
year. Ask your Volvo retailer about Leather Care
Kit 951 0251 and Leather Softener 943 7429.
Cleaning leather upholstery
1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge and
squeeze it until the cleaner foams.
2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the
sponge with circular movements.
3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the
sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain, do
not rub.
4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a
towel, and allow the leather to dry completely.
Protecting leather upholstery
1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on a
cloth and apply a thin coating of cream to the
upholstery with light circular movements.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.
This will help the leather resist staining and pro-
tect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.
Cleaning a leather-covered steering
wheel
•
Remove soil, dust, etc., with a damp sponge
and a neutral soap solution.
•
Leather should be allowed to breath. Never
cover the steering wheel with a plastic pro-
tector.
•
Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and
conditioning the steering wheel with Volvo's
Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather
Softener 943 7429.
If there are stains on the steering wheel:
Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or blood)
–
Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the wheel
with a solution with 5% ammonia. For blood
stains, mix approx. 1 cup (2 dl) of water and
one ounce (25g) of salt and wipe the stain.
Type 2 (fat, oil, sauces, or chocolate)
1. Same procedure as for type I stains.
2. Finish by rubbing the wheel with absorbent
paper or a towel.
Type 3 (dry soil or dust)
1. Remove the soil/dust with a soft brush.
2. Same procedure as for type I stains.
CAUTION
Sharp objects, such as rings, could damage
the leather on the steering wheel.
Leather panels*
Leather should be allowed to breath. Never cover
the upper side of the dashboard or door panels
with a plastic protector. Ask your Volvo retailer
about Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather
Softener 943 7429.
Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood
surfaces
Cleaning interior plastic components should be
done with a moist microfiber cloth. Consult your
Volvo retailer.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
}}
547
CAUTION
•
Do not use cleaning agents with high
alcohol content such as washer fluid to
clean instrument panel glass.
•
Never spray cleaning agents or water
directly onto components with electrical
buttons or controls. Clean components of
this type by applying the cleaning agent/
water sparingly to a cloth and wiping the
components so that no liquid penetrates
into these components.
Cleaning the seat belts
Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild soap
solution.
Cleaning floor mats
The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed
clean regularly, especially during winter when
they should be taken out for drying. Spots on tex-
tile mats can be removed with a mild detergent.
For best protection in winter, Volvo recommends
the use of Volvo rubber floor mats. Consult your
Volvo retailer.
WARNING
•
Never use more than one floor mat at a
time on the driver's floor. Before driving,
remove the original mat from the driver's
seat floor before using any other type of
floor mat. Any mat used in this position
should be securely and properly anchored
in the attaching pins. An extra mat on the
driver's floor can cause the accelerator
and/or brake pedal to catch. Check that
the movement of these pedals is not
impeded.
•
Volvo's floor mats are specially manufac-
tured for your car. They must be firmly
secured in the clips on the floor so that
they cannot slide and become trapped
under the pedals on the driver's side.
Related information
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 547)
Cleaning the center display
Marks, stains, etc., on the center display may
affect its performance and readability. Clean it
regularly with a microfiber cloth.
Center display's Home button
To clean the center display:
1. Turn off the display by pressing and holding
the Home button.
2. Wipe the screen clean with the microfiber
cloth provided or use a similar one, using a
small, circular motion. If necessary, moisten
the cloth slightly.
3. Reactivate the display by pressing the Home
button briefly.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
548
CAUTION
•
The microfiber cloth used should be free
of sand, dirt or anything abrasive that
might scratch the screen.
•
Do not use rough cloths, paper towels or
tissues that could scratch the screen.
•
When cleaning the center display, apply
only light pressure on the screen. Press-
ing too hard could cause damage.
•
Do not spray any liquid or corrosive
chemicals directly on the screen. Do not
use window cleaning liquid, cleaning
agents (particularly ones containing abra-
sives), sprays, solvents, alcohol or ammo-
nia to clean the screen.
Related information
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 545)
•
Center display overview (p. 32)
Paint damage
Paint damage requires immediate attention to
avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish
regularly, for instance washing the vehicle.
Touch-up if necessary.
Paint repairs require special equipment and skill.
Contact your Volvo retailer for any extensive dam-
age.
Minor scratches can be repaired by using Volvo
touch-up paint.
Color code
Sample color code (1): US models
Sample color code (1): Canadian models
Make sure you have the right color. See also the
article "Label information" for the location of this
label.
Minor stone chips and scratches
Material:
•
Primer – can
•
Paint – touch-up pen
•
Brush
•
Masking tape
•
Emery cloth
If the stone chip has not gone down to the bare
metal and an undamaged color coat remains, you
can add paint immediately after removing dirt.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
549
NOTE
When touching up the vehicle, it should be
clean and dry. The surface temperature
should be above 60 °F (15 °C).
Related information
•
Label information (p. 552)
•
Touching up paint damage (p. 549)
Touching up paint damage
Stone chips or other minor paint damage can be
repaired by the vehicle's owner.
Repairing stone chips
1. Place a strip of masking tape over the dam-
aged surface. Pull the tape off so that any
loose flakes of paint adhere to it.
2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with a
small brush.
3. When the primer surface is dry, the paint can
be applied using a brush. Mix the paint thor-
oughly; apply several thin paint coats and let
dry after each application.
4. If there is a longer scratch, you may want to
protect surrounding paint by masking it off
5. After a few days, polish the touched-up
areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount of
polish.
Related information
•
Paint damage (p. 548)
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 542)
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
552
Label information
The labels in your vehicle provide information
such as the chassis number, paint code, tire
inflation pressure, etc.
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
553
Location of labels
Generic illustration - details may vary slightly depending on model/market
||
SPECIFICATIONS
554
List of labels
Vehicle Emission Control Information. (A)
US models, (B) Canadian models. Your Volvo
is designed to meet all applicable emission
standards, as evidenced by the certification
label on the underside of the hood. For fur-
ther information regarding these regulations,
please consult your Volvo retailer.
Engine oil. This label contains the recom-
mended engine oil specifications.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The
VIN plate is located on the top left surface of
the dashboard. The Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) should always be quoted in all
correspondence concerning your vehicle with
the retailer and when ordering parts.
Tire inflation pressures. This label indicates
the correct inflation pressures for the tires
that were on the vehicle when it left the fac-
tory.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Minis-
try of Transport (CMVSS) standards
(Canada). Your Volvo is designed to meet all
applicable safety standards, as evidenced by
the certification label on the driver's side B-
pillar (the structural member at the side of
the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door
opening). This label also includes codes for
paint color, etc. For further information regar-
ding these regulations, please consult your
Volvo retailer. U.S. models have the upper
decal; Canadian models have the lower one.
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
555
Dimensions
The following table lists your vehicle's most
important dimensions.
Dimension In.
(mm)
A Ground clearance (curb
weight + 2 people)
A
8.2 (207)
B Wheelbase 112.8 (2865)
C Length 184.6 (4688)
D Load length, floor, seat-
back down
68.7 (1746)
Dimension In.
(mm)
E Load length, floor 37.8 (960)
F Height 65.3 (1658)
G Load height 30.6 (776)
Dimension In.
(mm)
H Track, front
65.1 (1653)
B
64.9 (1649)
C
65.2 (1655)
D
65.7 (1668)
E
||
SPECIFICATIONS
556
Dimension In.
(mm)
I Track, rear
65.2 (1657)
B
65.1 (1653)
C
65.3 (1659)
D
65.9 (1673)
E
J Load width, floor 39.8 (1010)
K Width 74.9 (1902)
L Width incl. door mirrors
(folded out)
83.3 (2117)
M Width incl. door mirrors
(folded in)
78.7 (1999)
A
Varies slightly depending on tire size, chassis options, etc.
B
18/19" wheels
C
20" wheels
D
21" wheels
E
22" wheels
Related information
•
Weights (p. 557)
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
557
Weights
The following table lists important weight data
for your vehicle.
Category USA Canada
Gross vehicle weight
T8 AWD
A
(B4204T28)
5,940 lbs 2,700 kg
Capacity weight
All models 950 lbs 430 kg
Permissible axle weights, front
T8 AWD (B4204T28) 2,925 lbs 1,330 kg
Permissible axle weights, rear
T8 AWD (B4204T28) 3,015 lbs 1,370 kg
Curb weight
All models 4,103-4,744 lbs 1,860-2,150 kg
Max. roof load
220 lbs 100 kg
Max. trailer weights (without brakes)
1,650 lbs 750 kg
||
SPECIFICATIONS
558
Category USA Canada
Max. trailer weights (with brakes)
All models 3,500 lbs 1,580 kg
Max. tongue weight
T8 AWD (B4204T28) 350 lbs 150 kg
A
All Wheel Drive
CAUTION
•
When loading the vehicle, the maximum
gross vehicle weight and permissible axle
weights may not be exceeded.
•
The maximum trailer weights listed are
only applicable for altitudes up to 3280 ft
(1,000 m) above sea level. With increas-
ing altitude the engine power and there-
fore the car's climbing ability are impaired
because of the reduced air density, so
the maximum trailer weight has to be
reduced accordingly. The weight of the
car and trailer must be reduced by 10%
for every further 3280 ft (1,000 m) (or
part thereof).
SPECIFICATIONS
559
Engine specifications
The following table provides technical data for
the respective engines. Engine specifications for
Special Edition vehicles may vary.
Not all engines listed here are available in all
markets.
Specification T8
Engine designation B4204T28
Output (kW/rps) 233/100
Output (hp/rpm) 313/6000
Torque (Nm/rps) 400/37–90
Torque (ft. lbs./rpm) 295/2200–5400
No. of cylinders 4
Electric motor
Max. power:87/7000 (65 kW/117).
Torque: 240 Nm/0-50 rpm.
Related information
•
Engine oil specifications and volume
(p. 560)
•
Coolant specifications (p. 560)
SPECIFICATIONS
560
Engine oil specifications and
volume
Full synthetic engine oil meeting the minimum
ACEA A5/B5 must be used. Lower quality oils
may not offer the same fuel economy, engine
performance, or engine protection.
Volvo recommends:
Refer to the warranty and Service Records infor-
mation booklet for information on oil change
intervals and oil type requirements.
NOTE
This vehicle comes from the factory with syn-
thetic oil.
Oil additives must not be used.
Oil viscosity
Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life
under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide good
fuel economy and engine protection. See the vis-
cosity chart.
Viscosity chart
Extreme engine operation
Volvo oil VCC RBS0-2AE/SAE 0W20 is recom-
mended for extreme driving conditions.
Oil volume
The oil volume for the engine is:
5.9 US qts (5.6 liters)
Related information
•
Checking and refilling engine oil (p. 518)
Coolant specifications
Coolant specifications.
Specification: Coolant with corrosion inhibitor
mixed with water (50/50 mix), see packaging.
Consult a Volvo retailer if you are uncertain.
Different types of coolant should not be mixed to
help avoid health risks.
SPECIFICATIONS
561
Transmission fluid specification and
volume
Under normal driving conditions the transmission
fluid does not need to be changed during its
service life. However, it may be necessary under
adverse driving conditions.
Transmission: TG-81SC
Specification: Transmission fluid AW-1
Brake fluid specification and volume
Brake fluid transfers braking force when the
brake pedal is depressed to the master cylinder
and to the slave cylinders on each wheel.
Topping up or replacing brake fluid should only
be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
Specification: Volvo Original Dot 4 class 6 or
equivalent
Related information
•
Engine compartment overview (p. 516)
Fuel tank volume
The fuel tank's volume is shown below.
The fuel tank's refillable volume is approx. 13.2
US gallons (50 liters).
Related information
•
Octane rating (p. 402)
•
Opening/closing the fuel filler door (p. 400)
SPECIFICATIONS
562
Air conditioning refrigerant
The air conditioning system in your car contains
a CFC-free refrigerant.
A/C decal
R134a decal
Refrigerant
Weight Type
1.6 lbs (725 g) R134a
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains R134a
refrigerant under pressure. Service and
repairs may only be carried out by a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
Compressor oil
Volume Type
3.38 fl. oz. (100 ml) PAG SP-A2
Evaporator
The A/C system' s evaporator may never be
repaired or replaced with a previously used evap-
orator. A new evaporator must be certified and
marked according to SAE J2842.
Related information
•
Climate system service (p. 520)
SPECIFICATIONS
563
Tire inflation pressure table
The following tire pressures are recommended
by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire infla-
tion placard for information specific to the tires
installed on your vehicle at the factory.
Tire sizes: XC60 T8 Twin Engine Hybrid Cold tire pressure for up to five persons
Front
psi (kPa)
Rear
psi (kPa)
235/60 R18
235/55 R19
255/45 R20
35 (240) 35 (240)
255/40 R21
265/35 R22
38 (260) 38 (260)
Temporary spare tire N/A N/A
Related information
•
Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 481)
SPECIFICATIONS
564
Hybrid battery specifications
The hybrid battery is used to power the electric
motor for the rear wheels when the gasoline
engine is not being used.
Type: lithium-ion
Power reserve: 9.2 kWh
NOTE
The capacity of the hybrid battery diminishes
somewhat with age and use, which could
result in increased use of the gasoline engine
and consequently, slightly higher fuel con-
sumption.
Related information
•
Hybrid battery (p. 527)
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 414)
INDEX
565
A
A/C (air conditioning) 188
Accessory installation warning 23, 57
Active high beams 143
Active yaw control 255
Adaptive brake lights 390
Adaptive cruise control 272, 275, 276,
277, 278, 280, 281, 284
passing assistance 280
pilot assist 299
Adaptive Cruise Control
limitations 282
Airbags
disconnecting the front passenger’s
side 74
front 71
inflatable curtain 79
side impact 78
Air conditioning 188
Air distribution 194
Air distribution table 197
Air filter 184
Air quality 183
Air quality sensor 183
Air vents 194, 195
Alarm 248
automatically arming/disarming 249
Deactivating 250
foreign component detection 250
All Wheel Drive 387
Ambient temperature sensor 105
Android Auto 456
settings 457
Antennas
passive entry system 230
Anti-freeze 399
Apple CarPlay 453, 455
Applications (apps) 430
App menu 112
Approach lighting 150
Apps
changing settings 52, 178
Apps (applications) 471
Audio system 430
HD digital radio 434, 435, 436, 437
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio 437, 438, 440
sound settings 431, 453
voice control 121
Auto-hold brakes 394
Automatic locking retractor 83
Automatic transmission
gear shift indicator 377
general description 374, 375
oil 561
shifting with steering wheel paddles 378
shiftlock override 378
Axle weight 502
B
Battery
avoiding drain 398
hybrid, charging 414, 416, 418, 419,
420, 422, 424, 426, 428
remote key, replacing 243
warning symbols 527
Battery – replacing 524
Blind Spot Information 322, 323, 324
Bluetooth
connecting devices 461
Bluetooth
®
hands-free 460
media 451
microphone 462
streaming audio 451
Bluetooth cell phone connection 462
Booster cushions 89
INDEX
INDEX
566
Brake assist system 390
Brake lights 146, 390
Brakes
auto-hold 394
Brake system
Brake pad inspection 388
fluid 561
general information 387, 390
Bulbs
replacing 520
specifications 521
C
Camera
driver support systems 305
limitations 306
Camera, Park Assist 350, 352, 354, 355, 357
Capacity weight 502, 557
Cargo compartment
fuses 539
Cargo compartment, steel grid 223
Cargo compartment cover 220
Cargo net 221
Cargo space 216
Car wash 542
Catalytic converter 403
CD, USB, iPod, , Bluetooth, Recents,
Library, Shuffle, Similar, Change device,
Audio Language, Off, Subtitle Language,
Video, DivX® VOD 447
CD player 451
Cell phone
hands-free 459
Pairing 460
Cell phone voice control 123
Center display
changing settings 43
cleaning 547
keyboard 47
navigating in 38
overview 32
screen in the center console 34
symbols in the status bar 43
Chains 497
Changing a wheel 494
Charging cable
hybrid battery 416
Child restraints
recalls and registration 83
Child restraint systems 83
booster cushions 89
convertible seats 87
infant seats 85
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors 90
top tether anchors 92
Child safety 81
booster cushions 89
child restraint systems 83, 91
convertible seats 87
infant seats 85
Child safety locks 247
Child seats
lower attachment points 91
City safety 309, 317
City Safety
crossing traffic 315
detecting objects 313
limitations 317
rear collision warning 321
symbols and messages 320
City Safety, On/Off 311
City Safety™
Multi Target 316, 317
Cleaning
exterior 542
interior 545
Clean Zone Interior Package 185
Climate system 186
air distribution 194, 197
air filter 184
air vents 195
INDEX
567
auto mode 187
blower 190
center display controls 186
Electronic Climate Control 186
introduction 182, 186
passenger compartment filter 185
preconditioning 201, 205
rear controls 186
recirculation 193
refrigerant 562
service 520
setting the temperature 189
voice commands 125
Clock 106
Cold weather driving 399
Collision warning system 310
Compass in rearview mirror 158
calibrate 159
Connected service booking 508
Convertible seats 87
Coolant 560
refilling 519
Corrosion protection 545
Courtesy lighting 147
Crash event data 22
Crash mode 79, 80
Cross Traffic Alert 324, 325, 326, 328
Cruise control 265, 266, 267, 268, 269, 283
adaptive 272, 275, 276, 277, 278,
280, 281, 282, 283, 284, 291
Curb weight 502, 557
Curtain
sun 155
D
Daytime running lights 139, 144
Defroster
rear window and mirrors 191
Detachable key blade 237, 238
Digital owner's manual 15, 16
Dimensions 555
Disconnecting the front passenger’s airbag 74
Display
head-up 118
Distance Alert 270, 271, 272
Dome lighting 147
Door mirrors 156
defroster 191
Drive modes 381
Driver alert 332, 333
Lane Keeping Aid 333, 337
Driver distraction warning 23, 57
Driver profile 174, 177
editing 176
selecting 175
Driver support systems 254
Driving economically 404
Driving in cold weather 399
Driving through water 397
E
Economical driving 404
Electrical sockets 212
Electric parking brake 391, 393
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 186
Electronic stability control 255
Emergency brake
parking brake 391, 393
Emergency brake lights 390
Emergency locking retractor 83
Emergency starting 372
Emergency towing 413
Emission inspection readiness 506
INDEX
568
Engine
overheating 398
starting 369
turning off 372
Engine compartment
fuses 530
Engine compartment overview 516
Engine oil 560
checking 517, 518
Engine specifications 559
Environment 26
Eyelet
towing 412
Eyelets for anchoring loads 218
F
Federal Clean Air Act 506
Flat tires
repairing with tire sealing system 487,
489, 493
Floor mats
placing correctly 369
Fluid specifications 560, 561
Fog lights
rear 145
Front airbags 71
disconnecting passenger’s side airbag 74
Front park assist 345, 347, 349
Front seats
heated 199
multifunctional 129, 130
power 127, 128
Front seats, manual adjustment 127
Fuel
Travel Link service 444
Fuel filler door, opening 400
Fuel gauge 107
Fuel requirements 401, 402
Function view 45
Fuses 528
cargo compartment 539
engine compartment 530
passenger compartment 535
Fuses, replacing 529, 530, 535, 539
G
Garage door opener
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem 163, 164
Gasoline requirements 401, 402
Glossary of tire terminology 501
Glove compartment 215
Grocery bag holder 219
Gross vehicle weight 502
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 557
H
Hand brake (parking brake) 391, 393
Hazard warning flashers 146
HD digital radio 434, 435, 436, 437
Headlights
Active Bending Lights 145
active high beams 143
daytime running lights 139, 144
high/low beams 142
high beam flash 142
Headlight washers 152
Head restraint - center, rear 134
Head restraints, rear seat 134
Head-up display 118
Heated front seats 199
Heated oxygen sensors 403
Heated steering wheel 201
INDEX
569
High beams 142
active 143
Hill Descent Control 396
Hill Start Assist (HSA) 394
Hoisting the vehicle 513
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System 163,
164
Home safe lighting 150
Hood, opening/closing 515
Horn, Keypad, Paddles, Signal 138
hybrid
battery 527
Hybrid
battery charge level 384
battery charge status 422
battery specifications 564
charging cable circuit breaker 418
charging current 416
charging the battery 414, 419, 420, 428
drive systems 379
electric motor in city driving 406
information in the instrument panel 100
messages and symbols 426
vehicle storage 425
Hybrid battery
charging cable 416
stopping the charging procedure 424
I
ID, Volvo 25
Ignition modes 368
Immobilizer (start inhibitor) 246
Indicator lights 104
Infant seats 85
Inflatable Curtain 79
Inflation pressure 481
Inflation pressure table 563
Information lights 104
Infotainment 476
Infotainment (Infotainment system) 430
Infotainment system 434, 435, 436, 437
CD player 451
cell phone 459
general sound settings 431
Gracenote 449
introduction 430
media player 447, 451, 452
media player sound settings 453
media search 450
radio 432
searching for radio stations 432
sound settings 431, 453
type approval 472
video 452
voice control 121
Inspection readiness 506
Instrument lighting 141
Instrument overview 96
Instrument panel 97
hybrid information 100
settings 99
Intellisafe 27
Interior Air Quality System 185
Interior lighting 147
Internet connection 466
applications (apps) 430
bluetooth settings 466
booking service 508
establishing a connection 467
troubleshooting 469
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors 90
J
Jack 498
location of 495, 498
Jump starting 372, 414
INDEX
570
K
Key
remote 176, 226
Key blade 237, 238
Keys 229
L
Labels
list of 554
location of 553
Laminated panoramic roof 160, 161
Lane Keeping Aid 333, 337
settings 335
LATCH anchors 90
Leather care 545
Lighting panel 139
Load anchoring eyelets 218
Loading the vehicle 216, 502
Locking 230, 234
Locks and alarm 226
Low beams 142
Low Speed Control 395
M
Maintenance 506
hoisting the vehicle 513
performed by the owner 506
Malfunction indicator light 102
Manual front seat adjustment 127
Media player 446, 451
compatible file formats 458
Media player (infotainment system) 447
Menus
instrument panel 113, 114, 115, 117
Mirrors
defroster 191
power door 156
retractable 156
Mirrors, rearview mirror 157
Modem 470
Motor oil
checking 517, 518
MP3 files 458
Multifunctional front seats 129, 130
MY CAR 170, 171
N
Navigation system
voice commands 126
Net
cargo 221
O
Occupant safety 64
Occupant weight sensor 74
Octane recommendations 402
Odometer 167
Oil
checking 517, 518
Oil quality 560
On-board diagnostics 506
On-board Diagnostic socket 23
Opening the hood 515
Option/accessory 20
Options 23
Outside temperature sensor 105
Overhead courtesy lighting 147
Overheating, engine 398
INDEX
571
Owner's information
mobile applications 18
Owner's manual 31
Ownership, changing 179
Oxygen sensors, heated 403
P
Paint, touching up 548, 549
Park assist 345, 347, 349
Park Assist Camera 350, 352, 354, 355, 357
settings 350, 354
symbols and messages 357
Park Assist Pilot 359, 360, 363, 365
Parking brake
electric, applying/releasing 391, 393
Passenger compartment
fuses 535
Passive Entry system
location of antennas 230
Permissible axle weight 557
Phone
phone book 464
receiving calls 462
text messages 463, 465
Pilot Assist 280, 286, 289, 292, 294,
296, 297
Plug-in hybrid
general information 53
Polishing 544
Power front seat
memory function 128
Power mirrors 156
defroster 191
Power steering
adjustable 254
Power tailgate 239
Power windows 154
Preconditioning 201, 205
starting/stopping 203
symbols and messages 207
timer 204
Preconditioning,
retaining climate comfort 206
Pregnancy, using seat belts during 62
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING 372
R
Radar
driver support systems 300, 305
Radar sensor
limitations 302
Radio
RBDS 434
settings 446
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio 437, 438, 440
Radio functions
HD digital radio 434, 435, 436, 437
Rain sensor 151
Rear Collision Warning 321
Rear fog lights 145
Rear park assist 345, 347, 349
Rear seat
backrest 135
Rear seat head restraints 134
Rear seats 134
center head restraint 134
Rearview mirror
compass 158, 159
Rear window defroster 191
Recalls 66
Recalls, child restraints 83
INDEX
572
Recirculation (climate system) 193
Refrigerant (A/C system) 562
Refueling 401, 402
fuel filler door 400
Registering child restraints 83
Remote key 226, 229, 232
immobilizer 246
linking to a driver profile 176
range 228
replacing the battery 243
restricted (red) key 229
Remote updates 511
Replacing bulbs 520
Replacing fuses 529, 530, 535, 539
Reporting safety defects 65
Roadside Assistance 59
Road sign information (RSI) 329, 330, 331
Rollover Protection System (ROPS) 255
Roll Stability Control (RSC) 255
Run-off mitigation 341
S
Safety, occupant 64
Safety defects, reporting 65
Safety locks, child 247
Safety mode 79
Seat
adjusting the passenger's seat from the
driver's seat 133
Seat belt
reminder 70
Seat belts
Automatic locking retractor/Emergency
locking retractor 83
buckling 68
pretensioners 66, 67
reminder 70
securing child restraint systems 85, 87, 89
unbuckling 68
use during pregnancy 62
using 66
Seats
rear 134
Sensus 28
Service
connected service booking 508
Settings view
categories 171
resetting 174
system settings 173
Shiftlock
override 378
Side door mirrors 156
Side impact airbags 78
Sirius Satellite radio
Travel link 441
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio
traffic information 437, 438, 440
Ski hatch
center backrest 219
Snow chains 497
Snow tires 497
Sound settings
media 453
ringtones 465
Sound settings, audio system 431, 453
Specifications
bulbs 521
Speed camera alert 330
Speed limiter 259, 260, 262
automatic 262, 264
deactivating/reactivating 261
starting/activating 260
Spin control 255
Stability system 255
sport mode 256
Start and lock system
type designations 250
INDEX
573
Starting and driving 368
Starting the engine 369
Starting the vehicle
after a crash (crash mode) 79, 80
Start inhibitor (immobilizer) 246
Steel grid in cargo compartment 223
Steering assistance 316, 339, 340, 342, 344
Steering wheel 138
adjusting 139
heated 201
horn 138
keypad 138
Steering wheel paddles 138
Stone chips, touching up 548, 549
Storage compartments 210
Studded tires 497
Sunroof
laminated panoramic roof 160, 161
Sun shade 154, 155
Sun visor 216
Suspension 385
System updates 511
T
Tailgate
locking/unlocking 235
operating with the foot movement sen-
sor 242
power operated 239
wiper/washer 153
Tailgate wipers 523
Technician certification 59
Temperature
perceived 183
Temperature sensor
ambient 105
Tethering
wi-fi sharing 468
Three-way catalytic converter 403
Timer
preconditioning 204
Tire inflation pressure 563
Tire Pressure Monitoring System 482, 485
calibrating 486
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 486
Tires 478, 498
changing 494
changing from summer to winter 480
glossary of terms 501
improving economy 478
inflation pressure 481
inflation pressure table 563
installing (mounting) a wheel on the
vehicle 496
rotation 479
snow 497
specifications 499
storing 479
studded 497
tire pressure monitoring system 482, 485
tire sealing system 487, 489, 493
tread wear indicator 480
uniform tire quality grading 503
wheel bolts 497
Tire sealing system 487, 489, 493
Top tether anchors (child restraint sys-
tems) 92
Touching up paint 548, 549
Towbar 408
Towing a trailer 409, 411
trailer hitch 408
Towing eyelet 412
Towing the vehicle 413
Traction control 255
Trailer hitch 408
Trailer towing 409, 411
trailer hitch 408
INDEX
574
Transmission
gear shift indicator 377
general description 374, 375
Hill Start Assist 394
oil 561
shifting with steering wheel paddles 378
shiftlock override 378
Travel Link 441
Alerts 443
Fuel 444
Sports 445
weather 442
Tread wear indicator 480
Trip computer 167, 168, 170
reset 168
Trip odometers 167
Trips, long distance 399
Trip statistics 170
Turn signals 147
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 503
Unlocking the tailgate 235
Unlocking the vehicle 230, 234
USB connection 452
User profile 174
V
Vehicle Event Data 22
Vehicle information 19
Vehicle loading 216, 502
Vehicle maintenance 506
performed by the owner 506
Vehicle status 508
Vehicle weights 557
Voice control
cell phones 123
giving commands 122
introduction 121
multimedia devices 124
radio 124
settings 123
Volvo and the environment 26
Volvo ID 25
Volvo maintenance 506
Volvo programs 59
Volvo Roadside Assistance 59
W
Warning flashers, hazard 146
Warning lights 104
Warning system, collision 310
Warranties 506
Washer fluid 524
Washers
headlight 152
windshield 150
Water, driving through 397
Waxing 544
Weights
trailer 409
Wheels
changing 494, 495
storing 479
Whiplash Protection System 63
Wi-Fi 468, 470
Windows
laminated glass 31
power 154
sun shade 154
Windshield
rain sensor 151
washers 152
wipers/washers 150
INDEX
576
TP 23084 (English - USA & Canada), AT 1717, MY18, Copyright © 2000-2017 Volvo Car Corporation
